DrayTek Vigor2926 Owner Manual

DrayTek Vigor2926 Owner Manual
i
Vigor2926 Series
Dual-WAN Security Router
User’s Guide
Version: 1.4
Firmware Version: V3.9.1.1
(For future update, please visit DrayTek web site)
Date: September 30, 2019
ii
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Copyrights
© All rights reserved. This publication contains information that is protected by copyright. No part may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language without
written permission from the copyright holders.
Trademarks
The following trademarks are used in this document:

Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.

Windows, Windows 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7 and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.

Apple and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

Other products may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
Safety Instructions

Read the installation guide thoroughly before you set up the router.

The router is a complicated electronic unit that may be repaired only be authorized and qualified personnel.
Do not try to open or repair the router yourself.

Do not place the router in a damp or humid place, e.g. a bathroom.

The router should be used in a sheltered area, within a temperature range of +5 to +40 Celsius.

Do not expose the router to direct sunlight or other heat sources. The housing and electronic components
may be damaged by direct sunlight or heat sources.

Do not deploy the cable for LAN connection outdoor to prevent electronic shock hazards.

Keep the package out of reach of children.

When you want to dispose of the router, please follow local regulations on conservation of the environment.
Warranty

We warrant to the original end user (purchaser) that the router will be free from any defects in workmanship
or materials for a period of two (2) years from the date of purchase from the dealer. Please keep your
purchase receipt in a safe place as it serves as proof of date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon
proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials,
we will, at our discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components, without charge for either
parts or labor, to whatever extent we deem necessary tore-store the product to proper operating condition.
Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value, and
will be offered solely at our discretion. This warranty will not apply if the product is modified, misused,
tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. The warranty does
not cover the bundled or licensed software of other vendors. Defects which do not significantly affect the
usability of the product will not be covered by the warranty. We reserve the right to revise the manual and
online documentation and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation to
notify any person of such revision or changes.
Be a Registered Owner

Web registration is preferred. You can register your Vigor router via http://www.DrayTek.com.
Firmware & Tools Updates

Due to the continuous evolution of DrayTek technology, all routers will be regularly upgraded. Please consult
the DrayTek web site for more information on newest firmware, tools and documents.
http://www.DrayTek.com
Contacting DrayTek
If the router still cannot work correctly after trying many efforts, please contact your dealer for
further help right away. For any questions, please feel free to send e-mail to [email protected]
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
iii
iv
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Part I Installation .................................................................................................................i
I-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 1
I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors .................................................................................................. 2
I-1-1-1 For Vigor2926 / Vigor2926L .............................................................. 2
I-1-1-2 For Vigor2926n / Vigor2926ac / Vigor2926Lac / Vigor2926Ln...................... 4
I-1-1-3 For Vigor2926Vac .......................................................................... 8
I-1-2 Notes for Antenna Installation (for “L” model) ................................................................... 10
I-2 Hardware Installation .................................................................................................................. 12
I-2-1 Installing Vigor Router ....................................................................................................... 12
I-2-2 Wall-Mounted Installation .................................................................................................. 13
I-2-3 Installing USB Printer to Vigor Router ............................................................................... 14
I-3 Accessing Web Page .................................................................................................................. 21
I-4 Changing Password.................................................................................................................... 23
I-5 Dashboard................................................................................................................................... 24
I-5-1 Virtual Panel ...................................................................................................................... 25
I-5-2 Name with a Link ............................................................................................................... 25
I-5-3 Status for LTE.................................................................................................................... 26
I-5-4 Quick Access for Common Used Menu ............................................................................ 26
I-5-5 GUI Map ............................................................................................................................ 27
I-5-6 Web Console ..................................................................................................................... 28
I-5-7 Config Backup ................................................................................................................... 29
I-5-8 Manual............................................................................................................................... 29
I-5-9 Logout................................................................................................................................ 29
I-5-10 Online Status ................................................................................................................... 30
I-5-10-1 Physical Connection.....................................................................30
I-5-10-2 Virtual WAN ..............................................................................33
I-6 Quick Start Wizard ...................................................................................................................... 34
I-6-1 For WAN1/WAN2 (Ethernet) ............................................................................................. 35
I-6-2 For WAN3/WAN4 (USB).................................................................................................... 43
I-6-3 For LTE WAN .................................................................................................................... 45
I-7 Service Activation Wizard ........................................................................................................... 47
I-8 MyVigor Services ........................................................................................................................ 50
I-8-1 Registering Vigor Router ................................................................................................... 50
I-8-2 Service Status ................................................................................................................... 54
Part II Connectivity ..........................................................................................................57
II-1 WAN ........................................................................................................................................... 58
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................... 60
II-1-1 General Setup .................................................................................................................. 60
II-1-1-1 WAN1/WAN2 with Ethernet ............................................................63
II-1-1-2 WAN3/WAN4 (USB).......................................................................65
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
v
II-1-2 Internet Access................................................................................................................. 67
II-1-2-1 Details Page for PPPoE in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) .............70
II-1-2-2 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet)
.......................................................................................................73
II-1-2-3 Details Page for PPTP/L2TP in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) .......76
II-1-2-4 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) in WAN3/WAN4................79
II-1-2-5 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) in WAN3/WAN4..............81
II-1-2-6 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) in LTE WAN ..................83
II-1-2-7 Details Page for IPv6 – Offline in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 ....................87
II-1-2-8 Details Page for IPv6 – PPP in WAN1/WAN2 .........................................88
II-1-2-9 Details Page for IPv6 – TSPC in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4.......................89
II-1-2-10 Details Page for IPv6 – AICCU in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4....................91
II-1-2-11 Details Page for IPv6 – DHCPv6 Client in WAN1/WAN2 ...........................93
II-1-2-12 Details Page for IPv6 – Static IPv6 in WAN1/WAN2 ...............................94
II-1-2-13 Details Page for IPv6 – 6in4 Static Tunnel in WAN1/WAN2 ......................96
II-1-2-14 Details Page for IPv6 – 6rd in WAN1/WAN2 ........................................97
II-1-3 Multi-VLAN ....................................................................................................................... 99
II-1-4 WAN Budget................................................................................................................... 104
II-1-4-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 104
II-1-4-2 Status .................................................................................... 107
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 108
A-1 How to set up Multi-VLAN for triple play deployment? .............................. 108
A-2 Load Balancing and Failover for multi-WAN Vigor Routers .......................... 113
II-2 LAN ...........................................................................................................................................115
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 117
II-2-1 General Setup ................................................................................................................ 117
II-2-1-1 Details Page for LAN1 – Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup ...................... 119
II-2-1-2 Details Page for LAN2 ~ LAN8 and DMZ ............................................ 123
II-2-1-3 Details Page for IP Routed Subnet .................................................. 125
II-2-1-4 Details Page for LAN IPv6 Setup ..................................................... 126
II-2-1-5 Advanced DHCP Options .............................................................. 130
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 132
A-1 Multi-subnet Application - How to utilize Vigor router with non-NAT? ........... 132
II-2-2 VLAN .............................................................................................................................. 135
II-2-3 Bind IP to MAC ............................................................................................................... 140
II-2-4 LAN Port Mirror............................................................................................................... 143
II-2-5 Wired 802.1x .................................................................................................................. 144
II-3 Hardware Acceleration............................................................................................................. 145
II-3-1 Setup .............................................................................................................................. 145
II-4 NAT .......................................................................................................................................... 147
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 148
II-4-1 Port Redirection.............................................................................................................. 148
II-4-2 DMZ Host ....................................................................................................................... 152
II-4-3 Open Ports ..................................................................................................................... 155
II-4-4 Port Triggering................................................................................................................ 157
II-4-5 ALG................................................................................................................................. 159
II-5 Applications .............................................................................................................................. 160
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 162
vi
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-5-1 Dynamic DNS ................................................................................................................. 162
II-5-2 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding .......................................................................................... 168
II-5-3 DNS Security .................................................................................................................. 171
II-5-3-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 171
II-5-3-2 Domain Diagnose ....................................................................... 172
II-5-4 Schedule......................................................................................................................... 173
II-5-5 RADIUS/TACACS+ ........................................................................................................ 175
II-5-5-1 External RADIUS ........................................................................ 175
II-5-5-2 Internal RADIUS ........................................................................ 177
II-5-5-3 External TACACS+...................................................................... 180
II-5-6 Active Directory/LDAP .................................................................................................... 181
II-5-6-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 181
II-5-6-2 Active Directory / LDAP Profiles .................................................... 182
II-5-7 UPnP .............................................................................................................................. 183
II-5-8 IGMP............................................................................................................................... 184
II-5-8-1 General Setting ........................................................................ 184
II-5-8-2 Working Status ......................................................................... 185
II-5-9 Wake on LAN ................................................................................................................. 186
II-5-10 SMS / Mail Alert Service............................................................................................... 187
II-5-10-1 SMS Alert............................................................................... 187
II-5-10-2 Mail Alert .............................................................................. 188
II-5-11 Bonjour ......................................................................................................................... 189
II-5-12 High Availability ............................................................................................................ 192
II-5-12-1 General Setup ......................................................................... 193
II-5-12-2 Config Sync ............................................................................ 195
II-5-13 Local 802.1X General Setup ........................................................................................ 197
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 199
A-1 How to use High Availability?............................................................. 199
A-2 How to use DrayDDNS? ..................................................................... 207
A-3 How to Configure Customized DDNS?.................................................... 212
A-4 How to Implement the LDAP/AD Authentication for User Management? ......... 216
II-6 Routing..................................................................................................................................... 219
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 220
II-6-1 Static Route .................................................................................................................... 220
II-6-2 Load-Balance /Route Policy ........................................................................................... 226
II-6-2-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 226
II-6-2-2 Diagnose ................................................................................. 231
II-6-3 BGP ................................................................................................................................ 234
II-6-3-1 Basic Settings ........................................................................... 234
II-6-3-1 Static Network ......................................................................... 235
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 236
A-1 How to set up Address Mapping with Route Policy? .................................. 236
A-2 How to use destination domain name in a route policy?............................. 238
A-3 How to use a Public IP on LAN ............................................................ 240
A-4 Introduction to Load Balance/Route Policy ............................................ 245
II-7 LTE ........................................................................................................................................... 248
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 249
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
vii
II-7-1 General Settings............................................................................................................. 249
II-7-1-1 SMS Quota ............................................................................... 249
II-7-1-2 SMS Inbox/Outbox Policy ............................................................. 250
II-7-2 SMS Inbox ...................................................................................................................... 251
II-7-3 Send SMS ...................................................................................................................... 254
II-7-4 Router Commands ......................................................................................................... 255
II-7-5 Status ............................................................................................................................. 257
Part III Wireless LAN......................................................................................................259
III-1 Wireless LAN (2.4GHz/5GHz) ................................................................................................ 260
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 263
III-1-1 Wireless Wizard............................................................................................................. 263
III-1-2 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 267
III-1-3 Security.......................................................................................................................... 269
III-1-4 Access Control .............................................................................................................. 272
III-1-5 WPS............................................................................................................................... 274
III-1-6 WDS .............................................................................................................................. 277
III-1-7 Advanced Setting .......................................................................................................... 281
III-1-8 Station Control............................................................................................................... 283
III-1-9 Bandwidth Management................................................................................................ 284
III-1-10 AP Discovery ............................................................................................................... 285
III-1-11 Airtime Fairness........................................................................................................... 286
III-1-12 Band Steering.............................................................................................................. 288
III-1-13 Roaming ...................................................................................................................... 292
III-1-14 Station List................................................................................................................... 293
Part IV VoIP.....................................................................................................................295
IV-1 VoIP ........................................................................................................................................ 296
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 298
IV-1-1 VoIP Wizard .................................................................................................................. 298
IV-1-2 General Settings ........................................................................................................... 300
IV-1-3 SIP Accounts................................................................................................................. 303
IV-1-4 DialPlan......................................................................................................................... 308
IV-1-4-1 Phone Book ............................................................................. 308
IV-1-4-2 Digit Map ............................................................................... 310
IV-1-4-3 Call Barring ............................................................................ 312
IV-1-4-4 Regional ................................................................................ 314
IV-1-4-5 PSTN Setup ............................................................................. 315
IV-1-5 Phone Settings.............................................................................................................. 316
IV-1-6 Status ............................................................................................................................ 320
IV-1-7 Diagnostics.................................................................................................................... 322
IV-1-7-1 Caller ID ................................................................................ 322
IV-1-7-2 Tone ..................................................................................... 322
Part V VPN ......................................................................................................................323
viii
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-1 VPN and Remote Access ........................................................................................................ 324
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 325
V-1-1 VPN Client Wizard ......................................................................................................... 325
V-1-2 VPN Server Wizard ........................................................................................................ 332
V-1-3 Remote Access Control ................................................................................................. 336
V-1-4 PPP General Setup........................................................................................................ 337
V-1-5 IPsec General Setup ...................................................................................................... 339
V-1-6 IPsec Peer Identity ......................................................................................................... 340
V-1-7 OpenVPN ....................................................................................................................... 343
V-1-7-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 343
V-1-7-2 Client Config............................................................................ 344
V-1-8 Remote Dial-in User....................................................................................................... 346
V-1-9 LAN to LAN .................................................................................................................... 349
V-1-10 VPN Trunk Management ............................................................................................. 360
V-1-11 Connection Management............................................................................................. 369
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 371
A-1 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Vigor Routers via IPsec Main Mode ... 371
A-2 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Vigor Routers via IKEv2 ................. 376
V-2 SSL VPN .................................................................................................................................. 379
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 380
V-2-1 General Setup ................................................................................................................ 380
V-2-2 User Account.................................................................................................................. 381
V-2-3 User Group..................................................................................................................... 385
V-2-4 Online User Status ......................................................................................................... 387
V-3 Certificate Management........................................................................................................... 388
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 389
V-3-1 Local Certificate ............................................................................................................. 389
V-3-2 Trusted CA Certificate.................................................................................................... 393
V-3-3 Certificate Backup .......................................................................................................... 395
V-3-4 Self-Signed Certificate ................................................................................................... 396
Part VI Security ..............................................................................................................397
VI-1 Firewall ................................................................................................................................... 398
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 400
VI-1-1 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 400
VI-1-2 Filter Setup.................................................................................................................... 405
VI-1-3 Defense Setup .............................................................................................................. 415
VI-1-3-1 DoS Defense ............................................................................ 415
VI-1-3-2 Spoofing Defense...................................................................... 418
VI-1-4 Diagnose ....................................................................................................................... 418
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 421
A-1 How to Configure Certain Computers Accessing to Internet ........................ 421
VI-2 Central Security Management (CSM) .................................................................................... 425
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
ix
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 426
VI-2-1 APP Enforcement Profile .............................................................................................. 426
VI-2-2 APPE Signature Upgrade ............................................................................................. 428
VI-2-3 URL Content Filter Profile ............................................................................................. 430
VI-2-4 Web Content Filter Profile ............................................................................................. 434
VI-2-5 DNS Filter Profile .......................................................................................................... 438
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 440
A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor ................................................. 440
A-2 How to Block Facebook Service Accessed by the Users via Web Content Filter / URL
Content Filter .................................................................................... 445
Part VII Management .....................................................................................................451
VII-1 System Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 452
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 453
VII-1-1 System Status .............................................................................................................. 454
VII-1-2 TR-069 ......................................................................................................................... 456
VII-1-2-1 ACS and CPE Settings ................................................................ 456
VII-1-2-2 Reporting Configuration ............................................................ 458
VII-1-2-3 Export Parameters ................................................................... 459
VII-1-3 Administrator Password ............................................................................................... 460
VII-1-4 User Password............................................................................................................. 463
VII-1-5 Login Page Greeting .................................................................................................... 466
VII-1-6 Configuration Backup................................................................................................... 468
VII-1-7 Syslog/Mail Alert .......................................................................................................... 471
VII-1-8 Time and Date.............................................................................................................. 474
VII-1-9 SNMP........................................................................................................................... 475
VII-1-10 Management .............................................................................................................. 477
VII-1-10-1 IPv4 Management Setup ........................................................... 477
VII-1-10-2 IPv6 Management Setup ........................................................... 479
VII-1-10-3 LAN Management Setup............................................................ 480
VII-1-11 Panel Control ............................................................................................................. 481
VII-1-11-1 LED .................................................................................... 481
VII-1-11-2 Button ................................................................................ 482
VII-1-11-3 USB .................................................................................... 483
VII-1-11-4 LAN Port .............................................................................. 483
VII-1-12 Self-Signed Certificate ............................................................................................... 484
VII-1-13 Reboot System........................................................................................................... 486
VII-1-14 Firmware Upgrade ..................................................................................................... 487
VII-1-15 Firmware Backup ....................................................................................................... 488
VII-1-16 Activation.................................................................................................................... 489
VII-1-17 Internal Service User List........................................................................................... 491
VII-1-18 Dashboard Control ..................................................................................................... 492
VII-2 Bandwidth Management........................................................................................................ 493
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 495
VII-2-1 Sessions Limit .............................................................................................................. 495
x
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-2-2 Bandwidth Limit............................................................................................................ 497
VII-2-3 Quality of Service ......................................................................................................... 499
VII-2-4 APP QoS...................................................................................................................... 505
VII-3 User Management ................................................................................................................. 507
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 508
VII-3-1 General Setup .............................................................................................................. 508
VII-3-2 User Profile .................................................................................................................. 510
VII-3-3 User Group................................................................................................................... 515
VII-3-4 User Online Status ....................................................................................................... 516
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 518
A-1 How to authenticate clients via User Management ................................... 518
A-2 How to use Landing Page Feature ....................................................... 527
VII-4 Hotspot Web Portal................................................................................................................ 532
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 532
VII-4-1 Profile Setup................................................................................................................. 532
VII-4-1-1 Login Method.......................................................................... 533
VII-4-1-2 Steps for Configuring a Web Portal Profile ...................................... 533
VII-4-2 User Information........................................................................................................... 550
VII-4-2-1 User Info ............................................................................... 550
VII-4-2-2 Database Setup ....................................................................... 551
VII-4-3 Quota Management ..................................................................................................... 553
VII-4-4 PIN Generator .............................................................................................................. 556
VII-4-4-1 PIN Status.............................................................................. 556
VII-4-4-2 PIN Generator......................................................................... 557
VII-4-4-3 PIN Voucher ........................................................................... 558
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 560
A-1 How to allow users login to Vigor’s Hotspot with their social media accounts (e.g.,
Facebook & Google) ............................................................................. 560
A-2 How to allow hotspot clients to get login PIN code via SMS?........................ 568
VII-5 Central Management (VPN) .................................................................................................. 575
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 576
VII-5-1 General Setup .............................................................................................................. 576
VII-5-1-1 General Settings...................................................................... 576
VII-5-1-2 IPsec VPN Settings.................................................................... 577
VII-5-2 CPE Management........................................................................................................ 578
VII-5-2-1 Managed Device List ................................................................. 578
VII-5-2-2 CPE Maintenance ..................................................................... 581
VII-5-2-3 Google Map ............................................................................ 584
VII-5-3 VPN Management........................................................................................................ 585
VII-5-4 Log & Alert ................................................................................................................... 586
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 587
A-1 CVM Application - How to manage the CPE (router) through Vigor2926 series? . 587
A-2 CVM Application - How to build the VPN between remote devices and Vigor2926
series? ............................................................................................. 591
A-3 CVM Application - How to upgrade CPE firmware through Vigor2926 series? .... 593
VII-6 Central Management (AP)..................................................................................................... 596
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
xi
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 597
VII-6-1 Dashboard.................................................................................................................... 597
VII-6-2 Status ........................................................................................................................... 598
VII-6-3 WLAN Profile................................................................................................................ 599
VII-6-4 AP Maintenance........................................................................................................... 604
VII-6-5 AP Map ........................................................................................................................ 605
VII-6-6 Traffic Graph ................................................................................................................ 610
VII-6-7 Rogue AP Detection..................................................................................................... 611
VII-6-8 Event Log ..................................................................................................................... 614
VII-6-9 Total Traffic .................................................................................................................. 614
VII-6-10 Station Number .......................................................................................................... 615
VII-6-11 Load Balance ............................................................................................................. 615
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 617
A-1 How to use AP Management function (in Vigor2926) to check AP status and deploy
WLAN profile ..................................................................................... 617
VII-7 Central Management (Switch) ............................................................................................... 620
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 621
VII-7-1 Status ........................................................................................................................... 621
VII-7-1-1 Switch Status.......................................................................... 621
VII-7-1-2 Switch Hierarchy ..................................................................... 624
VII-7-1-3 Detailed Info .......................................................................... 625
VII-7-2 Profile ........................................................................................................................... 626
VII-7-3 Group ........................................................................................................................... 630
VII-7-4 Maintenance................................................................................................................. 632
VII-7-5 Alert and Log................................................................................................................ 633
VII-7-5-1 Alert Setup ............................................................................ 633
VII-7-5-2 Switch and Port Setup ............................................................... 634
VII-7-5-3 Alert Logs.............................................................................. 636
VII-7-6 Database Setup ........................................................................................................... 637
VII-7-7 Support List .................................................................................................................. 638
VII-8 Central Management (External Devices) .............................................................................. 639
Part VIII Others...............................................................................................................641
VIII-1 Objects Settings.................................................................................................................... 642
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 643
VIII-1-1 IP Object ..................................................................................................................... 643
VIII-1-2 IP Group...................................................................................................................... 647
VIII-1-3 IPv6 Object.................................................................................................................. 648
VIII-1-4 IPv6 Group .................................................................................................................. 650
VIII-1-5 Service Type Object.................................................................................................... 651
VIII-1-6 Service Type Group .................................................................................................... 653
VIII-1-7 Keyword Object........................................................................................................... 655
VIII-1-8 Keyword Group ........................................................................................................... 657
xii
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VIII-1-9 File Extension Object .................................................................................................. 658
VIII-1-10 SMS/Mail Service Object .......................................................................................... 660
VIII-1-11 Notification Object ..................................................................................................... 665
VIII-1-12 String Object ............................................................................................................. 667
VIII-1-13 Country Object .......................................................................................................... 668
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 671
A-1 How to Send a Notification to Specified Phone Number via SMS Service in WAN
Disconnection .................................................................................... 671
VIII-2 USB Application .................................................................................................................... 675
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 676
VIII-2-1 USB General Settings................................................................................................. 676
VIII-2-2 USB User Management .............................................................................................. 677
VIII-2-3 File Explorer ................................................................................................................ 679
VIII-2-4 USB Device Status...................................................................................................... 680
VIII-2-5 Temperature Sensor ................................................................................................... 681
VIII-2-6 Modem Support List .................................................................................................... 683
VIII-2-7 SMB Client Support List.............................................................................................. 684
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 685
A-1 How can I get the files from USB storage device connecting to Vigor router? ... 685
Part IX Troubleshooting ................................................................................................689
IX-1 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................. 690
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 691
IX-1-1 Dial-out Triggering......................................................................................................... 691
IX-1-2 Routing Table................................................................................................................ 692
IX-1-3 ARP Cache Table ......................................................................................................... 693
IX-1-4 IPv6 Neighbour Table ................................................................................................... 694
IX-1-5 DHCP Table .................................................................................................................. 695
IX-1-6 NAT Sessions Table ..................................................................................................... 696
IX-1-7 DNS Cache Table ......................................................................................................... 697
IX-1-8 Ping Diagnosis .............................................................................................................. 698
IX-1-9 Data Flow Monitor ......................................................................................................... 699
IX-1-10 Traffic Graph ............................................................................................................... 702
IX-1-11 VPN Graph.................................................................................................................. 703
IX-1-12 Trace Route ................................................................................................................ 704
IX-1-13 Syslog Explorer ........................................................................................................... 705
IX-1-14 IPv6 TSPC Status ....................................................................................................... 706
IX-1-15 High Availability Status ............................................................................................... 707
IX-1-16 Authentication Information .......................................................................................... 709
IX-1-17 DoS Flood Table ......................................................................................................... 710
IX-1-18 Route Policy Diagnosis ............................................................................................... 711
IX-2 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not ....................................................................... 713
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
xiii
IX-3 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your Computer Is OK or Not..................... 714
IX-4 Pinging the Router from Your Computer ................................................................................ 717
IX-5 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not............................................................................ 718
IX-6 Problems for 3G/4G Network Connection .............................................................................. 719
IX-7 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary .................................................................... 720
Part X Telnet Commands...............................................................................................721
Accessing Telnet of Vigor2926 ....................................................................................................... 722
Index ...............................................................................................................................982
xiv
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part I Installation
This part will introduce Vigor router and guide to
install the device in hardware and software.
I-1 Introduction
This is a generic International version of the user guide. Specification,
compatibility and features vary by region. For specific user guides
suitable for your region or product, please contact local distributor.
Vigor2926 series integrates IP layer QoS, NAT session/bandwidth management to help users
control works well with large bandwidth.
By adopting hardware-based VPN platform and hardware encryption of AES/DES/3DES, the
router increases the performance of VPN greatly, and offers several protocols (such as
IPSec/PPTP/L2TP) with VPN tunnels.
The object-based design used in SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection) firewall allows users to set
firewall policy with ease. CSM (Content Security Management) provides users control and
management in IM (Instant Messenger) and P2P (Peer to Peer) more efficiency than before. By
the way, DoS/DDoS prevention and URL/Web content filter strengthen the security outside
and control inside. Object-based firewall is flexible and allows your network be safe.
User Management implemented on your router firmware can allow you to prevent any
computer from accessing your Internet connection without a username or password. You can
also allocate time budgets to your employees within office network.
With the 6-port Gigabit switch on the LAN side provides extremely high speed connectivity for
the highest speed local data transfer of any server or local PCs. The tagged VLANs
(IEEE802.1Q) can mark data with a VLAN identifier. This identifier can be carried through an
onward Ethernet switch to specific ports. The specific VLAN clients can also pick up this
identifier as it is just passed to the LAN. You can set the priorities for LAN-side QoS. You can
assign each of VLANs to each of the different IP subnets that the router may also be operating,
to provide even more isolation. The said functionality is tag-based Multi-subnet
(Multiple-Private LAN Subnets).
On the Wireless-equipped models (Vigor2926n/n-plus/Vn/Vn-plus/ac/Vac) each of the
wireless SSIDs can also be grouped within one of the VLANs.
In addition, Vigor2926 series supports USB interface for connecting USB printer to share
printing function or 3G USB modem for network connection.
Vigor2926 series provides two-level management to simplify the configuration of network
connection. The user mode allows user accessing into WEB interface via simple configuration.
However, if users want to have advanced configurations, they can access into WEB interface
through admin mode.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
1
I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors
Before you use the Vigor router, please get acquainted with the LED indicators and
connectors first.
I-1-1-1 For Vigor2926 / Vigor2926L
LED
ACT (Activity)
WAN1~WAN2
QoS
LTE
Status
Blinking
Off
On
Off
Blinking
On
Explanation
The router is powered on and running normally.
The router is powered off.
Internet connection is ready.
Internet connection is not ready.
The data is transmitting.
The QoS function is active.
On
Off
SIM card is connected and running normally.
LTE device is not detected or encounters troubles
(e.g., No SIM, SIM PIN error, SIM deactivated)
Quickly: The data is transmitting.
Slowly: LTE device is in dialing up procedure.
USB device is connected and ready for use.
The data is transmitting.
The Web Content Filter is active. (It is enabled from
Firewall >> General Setup).
The VPN tunnel is active.
VPN service is disabled.
Traffic is passing through VPN tunnel.
The DMZ function is enabled.
The DMZ function is disabled.
The data is transmitting.
Blinking
USB1~USB2/
USB
WCF
On
Blinking
On
VPN
On
Off
Blinking
On
Off
Blinking
DMZ
LED on Connector
LAN1~LAN4
Left
LED
Right
LED
WAN1~
WAN2
Left
LED
Right
2
On
Off
Blinking
On
Off
On
Off
Blinking
On
The port is connected.
The port is disconnected.
The data is transmitting.
The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
The port is connected with 10/100Mbps.
The port is connected.
The port is disconnected.
The data is transmitting.
The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
LED
Off
Switch on Rear Side
Interface
Factory Reset
LAN1~LAN5
WAN1~WAN2
USB1~USB2
PWR
ON/OFF
SIM Card Slot
The port is connected with 10/100Mbps
(Jack for LTE device)
Description
Restore the default settings. Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED is
blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds. When you
see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual, release the button.
Then the router will restart with the factory default configuration.
Connecters for local network devices.
Connecter for local network devices or modem for accessing Internet.
Connector for a USB device (for 3G/4G USB Modem or printer or
Environmental Thermometer).
Connecter for a power adapter.
Power Switch.
Connector for a SIM card.
The port “P5 / WAN2” is switchable. It can be used for LAN connection or WAN connection
according to the settings configured in WUI.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3
I-1-1-2 For Vigor2926n / Vigor2926ac / Vigor2926Lac / Vigor2926Ln
LED
ACT (Activity)
WAN1~WAN2
QoS
LTE
Status
Blinking
Off
On
Off
Blinking
On
Explanation
The router is powered on and running normally.
The router is powered off.
Internet connection is ready.
Internet connection is not ready.
The data is transmitting.
The QoS function is active.
On
Off
SIM card is connected and running normally.
LTE device is not detected or encounters troubles
(e.g., No SIM, SIM PIN error, SIM deactivated)
Quickly: The data is transmitting.
Slowly: LTE device is in dialing up procedure.
USB device is connected and ready for use.
The data is transmitting.
The Web Content Filter is active. (It is enabled from
Firewall >> General Setup).
2.4G/5G: Wireless access point with bandwidth of
2.4GHz/5GHz is ready.
WLAN: Wireless access point is ready.
It will blink slowly while wireless traffic goes through.
ACT and WLAN LEDs blink quickly and simultaneously
when WPS is working, and will return to normal
condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS
within 2 minutes.)
The DMZ function is enabled.
The DMZ function is disabled.
Blinking
USB
WCF
On
Blinking
On
2.4G/5G/WLAN
On
Blinking
DMZ
4
On
Off
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Blinking
The data is transmitting.
On
Off
Blinking
On
Off
On
Off
Blinking
On
Off
The port is connected.
The port is disconnected.
The data is transmitting.
The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
The port is connected with 10/100Mbps
The port is connected.
The port is disconnected.
The data is transmitting.
The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
The port is connected with 10/100Mbps
LED on Connector
LAN1~
LAN4
Left
LED
Right
LED
WAN1
~
WAN2
Left
LED
Right
LED
The port “P5 / WAN2” is switchable. It can be used for LAN connection or WAN connection
according to the settings configured in WUI.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
5
Switch on Rear Side
Interface
Wireless LAN
ON/OFF/WPS
Factory Reset
6
(Jack for LTE device)
Description
For Vigor2926n:
 Press the button and release it within 2 seconds. When the
wireless function is ready, the green LED will be on.
 Press the button and release it within 2 seconds to turn off the
WLAN function. When the wireless function is not ready, the
LED will be off.
For Vigor2926ac/Vigor2926Lac / Vigor2926Ln:
Wireless band will be switched /changed according to the button
pressed and released. For example,
 2.4G (On) and 5G (On) – in default.
 2.4G (Off) and 5G (On) – pressed and released the button once.
 2.4G (On) and 5G (Off) – pressed and released the button
twice.
 2.4G (Off) and 5G (Off) – pressed and released the button three
times.
When WPS function is enabled by web user interface, press this
button for more than 2 seconds to wait for client’s device making
network connection through WPS.
Restore the default settings. Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED
is blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds.
When you see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual,
release the button. Then the router will restart with the factory
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
LAN1~LAN4
WAN1~WAN2
USB1~2 / USB
PWR
ON/OFF
SIM Card Slot
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
default configuration.
Connecters for local network devices.
Connecter for local network devices or modem for accessing
Internet.
Connecter for a USB device (for 3G/4G USB Modem or printer or
thermometer).
Connecter for a power adapter.
Power Switch.
Connector for a SIM card.
7
I-1-1-3 For Vigor2926Vac
LED
ACT (Activity)
WAN1~
WAN2
Line
USB
Phone1/Phone2
2.4G/5G
Status
Blinking
Off
On
Off
Blinking
On
Off
On
Blinking
On
Off
Blinking
On
Blinking
Explanation
The router is powered on and running normally.
The router is powered off.
Internet connection is ready.
Internet connection is not ready.
The data is transmitting.
A PSTN phone call comes (in and out). However, when
the phone call is disconnected, the LED will be off.
There is no PSTN phone call.
USB device is connected and ready for use.
The data is transmitting.
The phone connected to this port is off-hook.
The phone connected to this port is on-hook.
A phone call comes.
Wireless access point with bandwidth of 2.4GHz/5GHz
is ready.
It will blink slowly while wireless traffic goes through.
ACT and WLAN LEDs blink quickly and simultaneously
when WPS is working, and will return to normal
condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS
within 2 minutes.)
LED on Connector
LAN1~
LAN4
Left
LED
Right
LED
WAN1
~
WAN2
Left
LED
Right
LED
On
Off
Blinking
On
Off
On
Off
Blinking
On
Off
The port is connected.
The port is disconnected.
The data is transmitting.
The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
The port is connected with 10/100Mbps
The port is connected.
The port is disconnected.
The data is transmitting.
The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
The port is connected with 10/100Mbps
The port “P5 / WAN2” is switchable. It can be used for LAN connection or WAN connection
according to the settings configured in WUI.
8
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Interface
Wireless LAN
ON/OFF/WPS
Phone 1/2
Line
PWR
Description
Wireless band will be switched /changed according to the button
pressed and released. For example,
 2.4G (On) and 5G (On) – in default.
 2.4G (Off) and 5G (On) – pressed and released the button
once.
 2.4G (On) and 5G (Off) – pressed and released the button
twice.
 2.4G (Off) and 5G (Off) – pressed and released the button
three times.
When WPS function is enabled by web user interface, press this
button for more than 2 seconds to wait for client’s device making
network connection through WPS.
Restore the default settings. Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED is
blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds. When
you see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual, release the
button. Then the router will restart with the factory default
configuration.
Connecter for a USB device (for 3G/4G USB Modem or printer or
Environmental Thermometer).
Connecters for local network devices.
Connecter for local network devices or modem for accessing
Internet.
Connecter for analog phone(s).
Connector for PSTN life line.
Connecter for a power adapter.
ON/OFF
Power Switch.
Factory Reset
USB1~USB2
LAN1~LAN4
WAN1~WAN2
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
9
I-1-2 Notes for Antenna Installation (for “L” model)
Magnetic antenna must be installed on the extension base before connecting to Vigor router.
Extension Base
There are two mounting holes for installing antennas with extension base on Vigor router.
Please install them as shown below.
Major Signal
Transmitted Hole
SIM Card
Slot
Extension Base
Note, if only one antenna shall be installed, please use the mounting hole (major signal
transmitted hole) near to the SIM card slot.
10
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
While installing the SIM card into the card slot, note that back plate of the SIM card slot must
be removed first and the direction of card notch must be on the left side.
There are two types of antennas provided for Vigor2926Ln/Vigor2926Lac, which must be
installed in different locations carefully and correctly. Wrong installation might cause bad
signal of wireless connection. Therefore, pay attention to the installation of antennas by
referring to the following illustration.
SMA jack for LTE Antenna (with
extension base)
SMA jack for WLAN
Antenna
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
11
I-2 Hardware Installation
I-2-1 Installing Vigor Router
Before starting to configure the router, you have to connect your devices correctly. In this
section, Vigor2926n is taken as an example.
12
1.
Connect the cable Modem/DSL Modem/Media Converter to any WAN port of router with
Ethernet cable (RJ-45).
2.
Connect one end of an Ethernet cable (RJ-45) to one of the LAN ports of the router and
the other end of the cable (RJ-45) into the Ethernet port on your computer.
3.
Connect one end of the power adapter to the router’s power port on the rear panel, and
the other side into a wall outlet.
4.
Power on the device by pressing down the power switch on the rear panel.
5.
The system starts to initiate. After completing the system test, the ACT LED will light up
and start blinking.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
I-2-2 Wall-Mounted Installation
Vigor router has keyhole type mounting slots on the underside.
1.
A template is provided on the Vigor router packaging box to enable you to space the
screws correctly on the wall.
2.
Place the template on the wall and drill the holes according to the recommended
instruction.
3.
Fit screws into the wall using the appropriate type of wall plug.
Note
4.
The recommended drill diameter shall be 6.5mm (1/4”).
When you finished about procedure, the router has been mounted on the wall firmly.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
13
I-2-3 Installing USB Printer to Vigor Router
You can install a printer onto the router for sharing printing. All the PCs connected this router
can print documents via the router. The example provided here is made based on Windows 7.
For other Windows system, please visit www.DrayTek.com.
Before using it, please follow the steps below to configure settings for connected computers
(or wireless clients).
14
1.
Connect the printer with the router through USB/parallel port.
2.
Open All Programs>>Getting Started>>Devices and Printers.
3.
Click Add a printer.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
4.
A dialog will appear. Click Add a local printer and click Next.
5.
In this dialog, choose Create a new port. In the field of Type of port, use the drop down
list to select Standard TCP/IP Port. Then, click Next.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
15
16
6.
In the following dialog, type 192.168.1.1 (router’s LAN IP) in the field of Hostname or
IP Address and type 192.168.1.1 as the Port name. Then, click Next.
7.
Click Standard and choose Generic Network Card.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
8.
Now, your system will ask you to choose right name of the printer that you installed onto
the router. Such step can make correct driver loaded onto your PC. When you finish the
selection, click Next.
9.
Type a name for the chosen printer. Click Next.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
17
10. Choose Do not share this printer and click Next.
11. Then, in the following dialog, click Finish.
18
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
12. The new printer has been added and displayed under Printers and Faxes. Click the new
printer icon and click Printer server properties.
13. Edit the property of the new printer you have added by clicking Configure Port.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
19
14. Select "LPR" on Protocol, type p1 (number 1) as Queue Name. Then click OK. Next
please refer to the red rectangle for choosing the correct protocol and LPR name.
The printer can be used for printing now. Most of the printers with different manufacturers
are compatible with vigor router.
Info
Some printers with the fax/scanning or other additional functions are not
supported.
Vigor router supports printing request from computers via LAN ports but not
WAN port.
20
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
I-3 Accessing Web Page
1.
Make sure your PC connects to the router correctly.
You may either simply set up your computer to get IP dynamically from the router or set
up the IP address of the computer to be the same subnet as the default IP address of
Vigor router 192.168.1.1. For the detailed information, please refer to the later
section - Trouble Shooting of the guide.
2.
Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. The following window
will be open to ask for username and password.
3.
Please type “admin/admin” as the Username/Password and click Login.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
If you fail to access to the web configuration, please go to “Trouble Shooting” for
detecting and solving your problem.
21
4.
Now, the Main Screen will appear. Take Vigor2926Vac as as example.
Info
5.
22
The home page will be different slightly in accordance with the type of the
router you have.
The web page can be logged out according to the chosen condition. The default setting
is Auto Logout, which means the web configuration system will logout after 5 minutes
without any operation. Change the setting for your necessity.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
I-4 Changing Password
Please change the password for the original security of the router.
1.
Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. A pop-up window will
open to ask for username and password.
2.
Please type “admin/admin” as Username/Password for accessing into the web user
interface with admin mode.
3.
Go to System Maintenance page and choose Administrator Password.
4.
Enter the login password (the default is “admin”) on the field of Old Password. Type
New Password and Confirm Password. Then click OK to continue.
Info
5.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 23 characters.
Now, the password has been changed. Next time, use the new password to access the
Web user interface for this router.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Even the password is changed, the Username for logging onto the web user interface
is still “admin”.
23
I-5 Dashboard
Dashboard shows the connection status including System Information, IPv4 Internet Access,
IPv6 Internet Access, Interface (physical connection), Security and Quick Access.
Click Dashboard from the main menu on the left side of the main page.
A web page with default selections will be displayed on the screen. Refer to the following
figure:
24
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
I-5-1 Virtual Panel
On the top of the Dashboard, a virtual panel (simulating the physical panel of the router)
displays the physical interface connection. It will be refreshed every five seconds. When you
move and click the mouse cursor on LEDs (except ACT), USB ports, WAN2, or LAN1 – LAN4,
related web setting page will be open for you to configure if required.
Port
Color
Description
LED (left
side)
Black
It means the router or the function is not working.
Green
It means the router or the function is working.
USB
Black
It means no USB device is connected.
Green
It means a USB device is connected.
Black
It means such port is disconnected.
Green
It means such port is connected (with Giga transmission
rate, 1Gbps) physically.
Orange
It means such port is connected (with 10/100 Mbps)
physically.
Ethernet
Port
(WAN/LAN)
For detailed information about the LED display, refer to I-1-1 LED Indicators and
Connectors.
I-5-2 Name with a Link
A name with a link (e.g., Router Name, Current Time, WAN1~3 and etc.) below means you can
click it to open the configuration page for modification.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
25
I-5-3 Status for LTE
It is a short table which displays current status for Vigor2926L/Vigor2926Ln including acess
mode used, access tech adopted, band usage, operator, strength of signal and notification of
new SMS received.
I-5-4 Quick Access for Common Used Menu
All the menu items can be accessed and arranged orderly on the left side of the main page for
your request. However, some important and common used menu items which can be
accessed in a quick way just for convenience.
Look at the right side of the Dashboard. You will find a group of common used functions
grouped under Quick Access.
The function links of System Status, Dynamic DDNS, TR-069, User Management, IM/P2P Block,
Schedule, Syslog/Mail Alert, LDAP, RADIUS, Firewall Object Setting and Data Flow Monitor are
displayed here. Move your mouse cursor on any one of the links and click on it. The
corresponding setting page will be open immediately.
In addition, quick access for VPN security settings such as Remote Dial-in User and LAN to
LAN are located on the bottom of this page. Scroll down the page to find them and use them
if required.
26
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Note that there is a plus ( ) icon located on the left side of LAN/WLAN/VPN/MyVigor. Click
it to review the LAN/WLAN/VPN/MyVigor connection(s) used presently.
Host connected physically to the router via LAN port(s) will be displayed with green circles in
the field of Connected.
All of the hosts (including wireless clients) displayed with Host ID, IP Address and MAC address
indicates that the traffic would be transmitted through LAN port(s) and then the WAN port.
The purpose is to perform the traffic monitor of the host(s).
I-5-5 GUI Map
All the functions the router supports are listed with table clearly in this page. Users can click
the function link to access into the setting page of the function for detailed configuration.
Click the icon on the top of the main screen to display all the functions.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
27
I-5-6 Web Console
It is not necessary to use the telnet command via DOS prompt. The changes made by using
web console have the same effects as modified through web user interface. The
functions/settings modified under Web Console also can be reviewed on the web user
interface.
Click the Web Console icon on the top of the main screen to open the following screen.
28
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
I-5-7 Config Backup
There is one way to store current used settings quickly by clicking the Config Backup icon. It
allows you to backup current settings as a file. Such configuration file can be restored by
using System Maintenance>>Configuration Backup.
Simply click the icon on the top of the main screen and a pop up dialog will appear.
Click Save to store the setting.
I-5-8 Manual
lick this icon to open online user’s guide of Vigor router. This document offers detailed
information for the settings on web user interface.
I-5-9 Logout
Click this icon to exit the web user interface.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
29
I-5-10 Online Status
I-5-10-1 Physical Connection
Such page displays the physical connection status such as LAN connection status, WAN
connection status, ADSL information, and so on.
Physical Connection for IPv4 Protocol
30
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
LTE WAN
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
31
Physical Connection for IPv6 Protocol
Detailed explanation (for IPv4) is shown below:
32
Item
Description
LAN Status
Primary DNS-Displays the primary DNS server address for
WAN interface.
Secondary DNS -Displays the secondary DNS server address
for WAN interface.
IP Address-Displays the IP address of the LAN interface.
TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the
LAN interface.
RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN
interface.
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3
/WAN4 Status
Enable – Yes in red means such interface is available but
not enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled.
Line – Displays the physical connection (VDSL, ADSL,
Ethernet, or USB) of this interface.
Name – Display the name of the router.
Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., PPPoE).
Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.
IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.
GW IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Item
Description
TX Packets - Displays the total transmitted packets at the
WAN interface.
TX Rate - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the
WAN interface.
RX Packets - Displays the total number of received packets
at the WAN interface.
RX Rate - Displays the speed of received octets at the WAN
interface.
Detailed explanation (for IPv6) is shown below:
Item
Description
LAN Status
IP Address- Displays the IPv6 address of the LAN interface..
TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN
interface.
RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN
interface.
TX Bytes - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the
LAN interface.
RX Bytes - Displays the speed of received octets at the LAN
interface.
WAN IPv6 Status
Enable – No in red means such interface is available but not
enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled. No in
red means such interface is not available.
Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., TSPC).
Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.
IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.
Gateway IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.
Info
The words in green mean that the WAN connection of that interface is ready for
accessing Internet; the words in red mean that the WAN connection of that interface
is not ready for accessing Internet.
I-5-10-2 Virtual WAN
Such page displays the virtual WAN connection information.
Virtual WAN are used by TR-069 management, VoIP service and so on.
The field of Application will list the purpose of such WAN connection.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
33
I-6 Quick Start Wizard
Quick Start Wizard can help you to deploy and use the router easily and quickly. Go to
Wizards>>Quick Start Wizard. The first screen of Quick Start Wizard is entering login
password. After typing the password, please click Next.
On the next page as shown below, please select the WAN interface that you use. If Ethernet
interface is used, please choose WAN1/WAN2; if 3G/4G USB modem is used, please choose
WAN3/WAN4; if LTE SIM card is used, please choose LTE.. Then click Next for next step.
WAN1, WAN2, WAN3/LTE and WAN4 will bring up different configuration page. Refer to the
following for detailed information. In which, WAN3 will be treated as USB WAN or LTE WAN
according to the USB modem or SIM Card used for accessing Internet.
34
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
I-6-1 For WAN1/WAN2 (Ethernet)
WAN1/WAN2 is dedicated to physical mode in Ethernet. If you choose WAN1/WAN2, please
specify physical type. Then, click Next.
On the next page as shown below, please select the appropriate Internet access type
according to the information from your ISP. For example, you should select PPPoE mode if the
ISP provides you PPPoE interface. Then click Next for next step.
PPPoE
1.
Choose WAN1/WAN2 as the WAN Interface and click the Next button. The following
page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
35
2.
Click PPPoE as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue.
Available settings are explained as follows:
36
Item
Description
Service Name
(Optional)
Enter the description of the specific network service.
Username
Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is
63 characters.
Password
Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
characters.
Confirm Password
Retype the password.
Back
Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next
Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel
Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3.
Please manually enter the Username/Password provided by your ISP. Click Next for
viewing summary of such connection.
4.
Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system
status of this protocol will be shown.
5.
Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
37
PPTP/L2TP
1.
Choose WAN1/WAN2 as the WAN Interface and click the Next button. The following
page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type.
2.
Click PPTP/L2TP as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue.
Available settings are explained as follows:
38
Item
Description
Username
Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is
63 characters.
Password
Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.
Note: The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
characters.
Confirm Password
Retype the password.
WAN IP Configuration
Obtain an IP address automatically – the router will get an
IP address automatically from DHCP server.
Specify an IP address – you have to type relational settings
manually.
IP Address - Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask –Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway – Enter the IP address of the gateway.
Primary DNS / Second DNS – Enter the IP address of the DNS
server.
PPTP Server / L2TP
Server
Enter the IP address of the server.
Back
Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next
Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel
Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
3.
Please type in the IP address/mask/gateway information originally provided by your ISP.
Then click Next for viewing summary of such connection.
4.
Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system
status of this protocol will be shown.
5.
Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
39
Static IP
1.
Choose WAN1/WAN2 as the WAN Interface and click the Next button. The following
page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type.
2.
Click Static IP as the Internet Access type. Simply click Next to continue.
Available settings are explained as follows:
40
Item
Description
WAN IP
Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway
Enter the IP address of gateway.
Primary DNS
Type in the primary IP address for the router.
Secondary DNS
Type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.
Back
Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next
Click it to get into the next setting page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Cancel
Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
3.
Please type in the IP address information originally provided by your ISP. Then click Next
for next step.
4.
Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system
status of this protocol will be shown.
5.
Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
DHCP
1.
Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and choose Ethernet as the Physical Mode. Click
the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access
Type.
2.
Click DHCP as the Internet Access type. Simply click Next to continue.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
41
Available settings are explained as follows:
3.
42
Item
Description
Host Name
Enter the name of the host.
Note: The maximum length of the host name you can set is
39 characters.
MAC
Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address
for access authentication. In such cases you need to enter
the MAC address.
Back
Click it to return to previous setting page.
Next
Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel
Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
After finished the settings above, click Next for viewing summary of such connection.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
4.
Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system
status of this protocol will be shown.
5.
Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
I-6-2 For WAN3/WAN4 (USB)
WAN3/WAN4 is dedicated to physical mode in USB.
1.
Choose WAN3/WAN4 as WAN Interface.
2.
Then, click Next for getting the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Internet Access
Choose one of the selections as the protocol of accessing the
internet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
43
44
3G/4G USB Modem
(PPP mode)
SIM Pin code –Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used
to access Internet. The maximum length of the pin code you
can set is 15 characters.
Modem Initial String – Such value is used to initialize USB
modem. Please use the default value. If you have any
question, please contact to your ISP. The maximum length of
the string you can set is 47 characters.
APN Name – APN means Access Point Name which is provided
and required by some ISPs. Enter the name and click Apply.
3G/4G USB Modem
(DHCP mode)
SIM Pin code – Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be
used to access Internet.
Network Mode – Force Vigor router to connect Internet with
the mode specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network
mode, the router will choose a suitable one according to the
actual wireless signal automatically.
APN Name – APN means Access Point Name which is provided
and required by some ISPs.
3.
Then, click Next for viewing summary of such connection.
4.
Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system
status of this protocol will be shown.
5.
Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
I-6-3 For LTE WAN
1.
Choose LTE as WAN Interface.
2.
Then, click Next for getting the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Internet Access
Now, DHCP mode is the only choice for LTE WAN.
3G/4G USB Modem
(DHCP mode)
SIM Pin code – Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be
used to access Internet.
Network Mode – Force Vigor router to connect Internet with
the mode specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network
mode, the router will choose a suitable one according to the
actual wireless signal automatically.
APN Name – APN means Access Point Name which is provided
and required by some ISPs.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
45
46
3.
Please type in required information originally provided by your ISP. Then, click Next for
viewing summary of such connection.
4.
Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system
status of this protocol will be shown.
5.
Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
I-7 Service Activation Wizard
Service Activation Wizard can guide you to activate WCF service (Web Content Filter) with a
quick and easy way. For the Service Activation Wizard is only available for admin
operation, therefore, please type “admin/admin” on Username/Password while Logging
into the web user interface.
Service Activation Wizard is a tool which allows you to use trial version of WCF directly
without accessing into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com. For
using Web Content Filter Profile, please refer to later section Web Content Filter Profile for
detailed information.
Now, follow the steps listed below to activate WCF feature for your router.
Info
Such function is available only for Admin Mode.
1. Open Wizards>>Service Activation Wizard.
2. In the following page, you can activate the Web content filter services and APP
Enforcement service at the same time or individually. When you finish the selection,
please click Next.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
47
Info
BPjM is web content filter (WCF) for German Speaking users. It is ideal for your
family to provide more Internet security for youngsters.
Cryan 30-day trial is WCF which offers 30-day trial period. After trial, you can
purchase DrayTek's prepared Cryan GlobalView WCF package from retailing
outlets.
DT-APPE, developed by DrayTek, offers a mechanism to upgrade APPE
signature automatically.
DT-DDNS, developed by DrayTek, offers one year free charge service of
dynamic DNS service for internal use.
48
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3.
Setting confirmation page will be displayed as follows, please click Activate.
Info
4.
The service will be activated and applied as the default rule configured in
Firewall>>General Setup.
Now, the web page will display the service that you have activated according to your
selection(s). The valid time for the free trial of these services is one month.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
49
I-8 MyVigor Services
I-8-1 Registering Vigor Router
You have finished the configuration of Quick Start Wizard and you can surf the Internet at any
time. Now it is the time to register your Vigor router to MyVigor website for getting more
service. Please follow the steps below to finish the router registration.
50
1.
Please login the web configuration interface of Vigor router by typing “admin/admin” as
User Name / Password.
2.
Click Support Area>>Production Registration from the home page.
3.
A Login page will be shown on the screen. Please type the account and password that
you created previously. And click Login.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Info
If you haven’t an accessing account, please refer to section Creating an
Account for MyVigor to create your own one. Please read the articles on the
Agreement regarding user rights carefully while creating a user account.
4.
The following page will be displayed after you logging in MyVigor. Type a nickname for
the router, then click Add.
5.
When the following page appears, your router information has been added to the
database.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
51
52
6.
After clicking OK, you will see the following page.
7.
There are several services provided for this device. Choose one of the serivces and click
Activate or Trial to use the selected service.
8.
In this case, we choose the WCF service offered by Cyren. Click Trial to get the following
page. Check the box of "I have read and accept the ....." and click Next.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
9.
When the following page appears, click Register.
10. Later, the following page will appear with the valid time for the activated service.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
53
I-8-2 Service Status
This page displays information related to MyVigor service(s) for this device.
If the router has been registered to MyVigor server successfully,
-
-
54
"Login to MyVigor" page will appear after clicking MyVigor Services >> Service Status.
Enter the account and the password. Check the box of "I agree...." and click Login.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
If the router has NOT been registered to MyVigor server, the following status page will
appears instead,
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
55
This page is left blank.
56
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part II Connectivity
It means wide area network. Public IP will be used in
WAN.
It means local area network. Private IP will be used in
LAN. Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets
regulated and ruled by router. The design of network
structure is related to what type of public IP addresses
coming from your ISP.
When the data flow passing through, the Network
Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will
dedicate to translate public/private addresses, and
the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in
the local area network.
DDNS, LAN DNS, IGMP, LDAP, UPnP, WOL, RADIUS, SMS,
Bonjour, HA, Local 802.1X
Static Route, Load-Balance/Route Policy, BGP
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
57
II-1 WAN
It allows users to access Internet.
Basics of Internet Protocol (IP) Network
IP means Internet Protocol. Every device in an IP-based Network including routers, print
server, and host PCs, needs an IP address to identify its location on the network. To avoid
address conflicts, IP addresses are publicly registered with the Network Information Centre
(NIC). Having a unique IP address is mandatory for those devices participated in the public
network but not in the private TCP/IP local area networks (LANs), such as host PCs under the
management of a router since they do not need to be accessed by the public. Hence, the NIC
has reserved certain addresses that will never be registered publicly. These are known as
private IP addresses, and are listed in the following ranges:
From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
What are Public IP Address and Private IP Address
As the router plays a role to manage and further protect its LAN, it interconnects groups of
host PCs. Each of them has a private IP address assigned by the built-in DHCP server of the
Vigor router. The router itself will also use the default private IP address: 192.168.1.1 to
communicate with the local hosts. Meanwhile, Vigor router will communicate with other
network devices through a public IP address. When the data flow passing through, the
Network Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will dedicate to translate
public/private addresses, and the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in the local
area network. Thus, all the host PCs can share a common Internet connection.
Get Your Public IP Address from ISP
In ADSL deployment, the PPP (Point to Point)-style authentication and authorization is
required for bridging customer premises equipment (CPE). Point to Point Protocol over
Ethernet (PPPoE) connects a network of hosts via an access device to a remote access
concentrator or aggregation concentrator. This implementation provides users with
significant ease of use. Meanwhile it provides access control, billing, and type of service
according to user requirement.
When a router begins to connect to your ISP, a serial of discovery process will occur to ask for
a connection. Then a session will be created. Your user ID and password is authenticated via
PAP or CHAP with RADIUS authentication system. And your IP address, DNS server, and other
related information will usually be assigned by your ISP.
Network Connection by 3G/4G USB Modem
For 3G/4G mobile communication through Access Point is popular more and more, Vigor2926
adds the function of 3G/4G network connection for such purpose. By connecting 3G USB
Modem to the USB port of Vigor2926, it can support HSDPA/UMTS/EDGE/GPRS/GSM and the
future 3G/4G standard (HSUPA, etc). Vigor2926n with 3G/4G USB Modem allows you to
receive 3G signals at any place such as your car or certain location holding outdoor activity
and share the bandwidth for using by more people. Users can use four LAN ports on the router
to access Internet. Also, they can access Internet via 802.11n wireless function of Vigor2926n,
and enjoy the powerful firewall, bandwidth management, VPN features of Vigor2926n series.
58
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
After connecting into the router, 3G/4G USB Modem will be regarded as the third WAN port.
However, the original WAN1 and WAN2 still can be used and Load-Balance can be done in the
router. Besides, 3G/4G USB Modem in WAN3 also can be used as backup device. Therefore,
when WAN1 and WAN2 are not available, the router will use 3.5G for supporting automatically.
The supported 3G/4G USB Modem will be listed on DrayTek web site. Please visit
www.draytek.com for more detailed information.
LTE Application
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
59
Web User Interface
II-1-1 General Setup
This section will introduce some general settings of Internet and explain the connection
modes for WAN1, WAN2, WAN3 (or LTE) and WAN4 in details.
This router supports multiple-WAN function. It allows users to access Internet and combine
the bandwidth of the multiple WANs to speed up the transmission through the network. Each
WAN port can connect to different ISPs, Even if the ISPs use different technology to provide
telecommunication service (such as DSL, Cable modem, etc.). If any connection problem
occurred on one of the ISP connections, all the traffic will be guided and switched to the
normal communication port for proper operation. Please configure WAN1, WAN2, WAN3 (or
LTE) and WAN4 settings.
This webpage allows you to set general setup for WAN1, WAN2, WAN3 (or LTE) and WAN4
respectively.
For all of the routers except for Vigor2926L series ---
For Vigor2926L series ----
60
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Load Balance Mode
This option is available for multiple-WAN for getting enough
bandwidth for each WAN port. If you know the practical
bandwidth for your WAN interface, please choose the setting
of According to Line Speed. Otherwise, please choose Auto
Weight to let the router reach the best load balance.

IP Based - The same source / destination IP pair will
select the same WAN interface as policy. It is the
default setting.

Sesseion Based- All of the WAN interfaces will be used
(as out-going WAN) for passing through new sessions to
get better transmission speed. Though good speed test
result for throughput might be reached; however, some
web site may not open smoothly, especially the site
need authentication, e.g., FTP.

Advance - Load Balance for the traffic of STUN, google
STUN, and SIP are disabled in default to prevent from
conflict. The following dialog allows you to define
protocol, port and name for the traffic not to be
applied with load balance. That is, when an item is
enabled (checked), it might not be affected by load
balance.
If you have no strong demand about speed test result, keep
default settings as IP based.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
61
Index
Click the WAN interface link under Index to access into the
WAN configuration page.
Enable
V means such WAN interface is enabled and ready to be used.
Physical Mode / Type
Display the physical mode and physical type of such WAN
interface.
Line Speed(Kbps)
DownLink/UpLink
Display the downstream and upstream rate of such WAN
interface.
Active Mode
Display whether such WAN interface is Active device or
backup device.
Load Balance
V means the function of load balance for such WAN interface
is enabled.
Info
In default, each WAN port is enabled.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
62
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-1-1-1 WAN1/WAN2 with Ethernet
WAN1/WAN2 is fixed with physical mode of Ethernet.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface.
Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface.
Display Name
Enter the description for such WAN interface.
Physical Mode
Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.
Physical Type
You can change the physical type for WAN2 or choose Auto
negotiation for determined by the system.
Line Speed
If your choose According to Line Speed as the Load
Balance Mode, please type the line speed for downloading
and uploading for such WAN interface. The unit is kbps.
Active Mode
Choose Always On to make the WAN connection be
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
63
activated always.
Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance
function for such WAN interface.
When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the
function enabled will balance the data transmission
automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in
connection status.
Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a
backup connection.
Active When

WAN Failure – When the active WAN failed, such WAN
will be activated as the main network connection.

Traffic Threshold – When the data traffic of active
WAN reaches the traffic threshold (specified here),
the failover WAN will be enabled automatically to
share the overloaded data traffic.
If you choose Failover as the Active Mode, Active When
will appear. Please specify which WAN will be the Backup
interface.
Any of the selected WAN disconnect – Such backup WAN
will be activated when any master WAN interface
disconnects.
All of the selected WAN disconnect – Such backup WAN will
be activated only when all master WAN interfaces
disconnect.
VLAN Tag insertion
Such feature is offered to the user with the environment
supporting IEEE_802.1ad. In which, service is used for outer
tag; customer is used for inner tag.
Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.
The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on
the WAN while sending them out.
Please type the tag value and specify the priority for the
packets sending by WAN interface.
Disable – Disable the function of VLAN with tag.
Tag value – Enter the value as the VLAN ID number. The
range is from 0 to 4095.
Priority – Enter the packet priority number for such VLAN.
The range is from 0 to 7.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
64
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-1-1-2 WAN3/WAN4 (USB)
To use 3G/4G network connection through 3G/4G USB Modem, please configure WAN3 or
WAN4 interface.
Or (LTE model)
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface.
Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface.
Display Name
Enter the description for such WAN interface.
Physical Mode
Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.
Line Speed
If your choose According to Line Speed as the Load Balance
Mode, please type the line speed for downloading and
uploading for such WAN interface. The unit is kbps.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
65
Active Mode
Choose Always On to make the WAN2 connection being
activated always.
Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance
function for such WAN interface.
When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the
function enabled will balance the data transmission
automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in connection
status.
Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a backup
connection.
Active When

WAN Failure – When the active WAN failed, such WAN
will be activated as the main network connection.

Traffic Threshold – When the data traffic of active
WAN reaches the traffic threshold (specified here), the
failover WAN will be enabled automatically to share the
overloaded data traffic.
If you choose Failover as the Active Mode, Active When will
appear. Please specify which WAN will be the Backup
interface.
Any of the selected WAN disconnect – Such backup WAN will
be activated when any master WAN interface disconnects.
All of the selected WAN disconnect – Such backup WAN will
be activated only when all master WAN interfaces
disconnect.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
66
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-1-2 Internet Access
For the router supports multi-WAN function, the users can set different WAN settings (for
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4) for Internet Access. Due to different Physical Mode for
WAN interface, the Access Mode for these connections also varies. Refer to the following
figures for examples.
Access Mode for Etherenet,
Access Mode for USB,
Access Mode for LTE (for L model only),
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
67
Available settings are explained as follows:
68
Item
Description
Index
Display the WAN interface.
Display Name
It shows the name of the WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4
that entered in general setup.
Physical Mode
It shows the physical connection for WAN1/WAN2
(Ethernet) /WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 (USB) according to the
real network connection.
Access Mode
Use the drop down list to choose a proper access mode. The
details page of that mode will be popped up. If not, click
Details Page for accessing the page to configure the
settings.
Details Page
This button will open different web page (based on IPv4)
according to the access mode that you choose in WAN
interface.
IPv6
This button will open different web page (based on Physical
Mode) to setup IPv6 Internet Access Mode for WAN
interface.
If IPv6 service is active on this WAN interface, the color of
“IPv6” will become green.
DHCP Client Option
This button allows you to configure DHCP client options.
DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number
and data information when such function is enabled and
configured.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Enable/Disable – Enable/Disable the function of DHCP
Option. Each DHCP option is composed by an option number
with data. For example,
Option number:100
Data: abcd
When such function is enabled, the specified values for
DHCP option will be seen in DHCP reply packets.
Interface – Specify the WAN interface(s) that will be
overwritten by such function. WAN5 ~ WAN7 can be located
under WAN>>Multi-PVC/VLAN.
Option Number – Type a number for such function.
Note: If you choose to configure option 61 here, the
detailed settings in WAN>>Interface Access will be
overwritten.
DataType – Choose the type (ASCII or Hex) for the data to
be stored.
Data – Enter the content of the data to be processed by the
function of DHCP option.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
69
II-1-2-1 Details Page for PPPoE in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet)
To use PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the PPPoE tab. The
following web page will be shown.
Available settings are explained as follows:
70
Item
Description
Enable/Disable
Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
ISP Access Setup
Enter your allocated username, password and authentication
parameters according to the information provided by your
ISP.
Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this
field.
The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63
characters.
Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
characters.
More Options – It shows optional settings for configuration.

Service Name (Optional) - Enter the description of the
specific network service.
PPPoE Pass-through
The router offers PPPoE dial-up connection. Besides, you
also can establish the PPPoE connection directly from local
clients to your ISP via the Vigor router. When PPPoA protocol
is selected, the PPPoE package transmitted by PC will be
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
transformed into PPPoA package and sent to WAN server.
Thus, the PC can access Internet through such direction.
For Wired LAN – If you check this box, PCs on the same
network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with
the Host PC) to access into Internet.
For Wireless LAN – It is available for n model. If you check
this box, PCs on the same wireless network can use another
set of PPPoE session (different with the Host PC) to access
into Internet.
Note: To have PPPoA Pass-through, please choose PPPoA
protocol and check the box(es) here. The router will behave
like a modem which only serves the PPPoE client on the LAN.
That’s, the router will offer PPPoA dial-up connection.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through PPP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose PPP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the
detection mode, you have to type required settings for the
following items.
 Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
 Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
 TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
 Ping Interval – Enter the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
 Ping Retry – Enter the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU
It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.


Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Path MTU to – Enter the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
71


Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
PPP/MP Setup
PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for
PPP.
Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down the
Internet after passing through the time without any action.
IP Assignment (IPCP) - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP
address to you each time you connect to it and request. In
some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the
same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can
fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your
ISP before you want to use this function.
Fixed IP Address– Enter a fixed IP address in the box of
Fixed IP Address.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 32 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using. Enter the additional WAN
IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit
the dialog.
Dial-Out Schedule
Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of
time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set
previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can
use the number that you have set in that web page.
TTL
Change the TTL value – Enable or disable the TTL (Time to
Live) for a packet transmitted through Vigor router.

If enabled - TTL value will be reduced (-1) when it
passess through Vigor router. It will cause the client,
accessing Internet through Vigor router, be blocked by
certain ISP when TTL value becomes “0”.

If disabled – TTL value will not be reduced. Then, when
a packet passes through Vigor router, it will not be
cancelled. That is, the client who sends out the packet
will not be blocked by ISP.
Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or
specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC
Address for the router.
Specify a MAC Address – Enter the MAC address for the
router manually.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
72
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-1-2-2 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode:
Ethernet)
For static IP mode, you usually receive a fixed public IP address or a public subnet, namely
multiple public IP addresses from your DSL or Cable ISP service providers. In most cases, a
Cable service provider will offer a fixed public IP, while a DSL service provider will offer a
public subnet. If you have a public subnet, you could assign an IP address or many IP address
to the WAN interface.
To use Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the Static
or Dynamic IP tab. The following web page will be shown.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable / Disable
Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
IP Network Settings
This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically
and allows you type in IP address manually.
Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to
obtain the IP address automatically if you want to use
Dynamic IP mode.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
73
More Options - It shows optional settings for configuration.

Router Name: Type in the router name provided
by ISP.

Domain Name: Type in the domain name that you
have assigned.

Enable DHCP Client Identifier: Check the box to
specify username and password as the DHCP client
identifier for some ISP.

Username: Type a name as username. The
maximum length of the user name you can set is
63 characters.

Password: Type a password. The maximum length
of the password you can set is 62 characters.
Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify
some data if you want to use Static IP mode.



IP Address: Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask.
Gateway IP Address: Enter the gateway IP
address.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 32 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using.
DNS Server IP Address
Type in the primary IP address for the router if you want to
use Static IP mode. If necessary, type in secondary IP
address for necessity in the future.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose ARP Detect, Ping Detect or Always On for
the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping
Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required
settings for the following items.
 Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
 Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
 TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
 Ping Interval – Enter the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
 Ping Retry – Enter the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU
74
It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide




Path MTU to – Enter the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
Keep WAN Connection
Normally, this function is designed for Dynamic IP
environments because some ISPs will drop connections if
there is no traffic within certain periods of time. Check
Enable PING to keep alive box to activate this function.

PING to the IP - If you enable the PING function, please
specify the IP address for the system to PING it for
keeping alive.

PING Interval - Enter the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
TTL
Change the TTL value – Enable or disable the TTL (Time to
Live) for a packet transmitted through Vigor router.

If enabled - TTL value will be reduced (-1) when it
passess through Vigor router. It will cause the client,
accessing Internet through Vigor router, be blocked by
certain ISP when TTL value becomes “0”.

If disabled – TTL value will not be reduced. Then, when
a packet passes through Vigor router, it will not be
cancelled. That is, the client who sends out the packet
will not be blocked by ISP.
RIP Protocol
Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIP(RFC1058)
specifying how routers exchange routing tables information.
Click Enable RIP for activating this function.
Bridge Mode
Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router
will work as a bridge modem.
Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is
enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes
are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under
User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules
defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.
Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected LAN
subnet and such WAN interface.
MAC Address
Default MAC Address: Click this radio button to use default
MAC address for the router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
75
Specify a MAC Address: Some Cable service providers
specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In
such cases you need to click the Specify a MAC Address and
enter the MAC address in the MAC Address field.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
II-1-2-3 Details Page for PPTP/L2TP in WAN1/WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet)
To use PPTP/L2TP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the PPTP/L2TP tab.
The following web page will be shown.
Available settings are explained as follows:
76
Item
Description
PPTP/L2TP
Enable PPTP- Click this radio button to enable a PPTP client
to establish a tunnel to a DSL modem on the WAN interface.
Enable L2TP - Click this radio button to enable a L2TP client
to establish a tunnel to a DSL modem on the WAN interface.
Disable – Click this radio button to close the connection
through PPTP or L2TP.
Server Address - Specify the IP address of the PPTP/L2TP
server if you enable PPTP/L2TP client mode.
Specify Gateway IP Address – Specify the gateway IP address
for DHCP server.
ISP Access Setup
Username -Type in the username provided by ISP in this
field. The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63
characters.
Password -Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
characters.
Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule
for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in
Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the
number that you have set in that web page.
Schedule Profile
Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only.
You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules
pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default
setting of this field is blank and the function will always
work.
MTU
It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.




Path MTU to – Enter the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
PPP Setup
PPP Authentication - Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for
PPP.
Idle Timeout - Set the timeout for breaking down the
Internet after passing through the time without any action.
IP Address Assignment
Method(IPCP)
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 32 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using.
Fixed IP - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you
each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your
ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address
whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP
address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before
you want to use this function. Click Yes to use this function
and type in a fixed IP address in the box.
Fixed IP Address -Type a fixed IP address.
WAN IP Network Settings
Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to
obtain the IP address automatically.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
77
Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify
some data.


IP Address – Enter the IP address.
Subnet Mask – Enter the subnet mask.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
78
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-1-2-4 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) in WAN3/WAN4
To use 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) as the accessing protocol of the internet, please
choose Internet Access from WAN menu. Then, select 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) for
WAN3. The following web page will be shown.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Modem Support List
It lists all of the modems supported by such router.
3G /4G USB Modem (PPP
mode)
Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
SIM PIN code
Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access
Internet.
The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 15
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
79
characters.
Modem Initial String
Such value is used to initialize USB modem. Please use the
default value. If you have any question, please contact to
your ISP.
The maximum length of the string you can set is 47
characters.
APN Name
APN means Access Point Name which is provided and
required by some ISPs. Enter the name and click Apply.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 43
characters.
Modem Initial String2
The initial string 1 is shared with APN.
In some cases, user may need another initial AT command to
restrict 3G band or do any special settings.
The maximum length of the string you can set is 47
characters.
Modem Dial String
Such value is used to dial through USB mode. Please use the
default value. If you have any question, please contact to
your ISP.
The maximum length of the string you can set is 31
characters.
Service Name
Enter the description of the specific network service.
PPP Username
Enter the PPP username (optional). The maximum length of
the name you can set is 63 characters.
PPP Password
Enter the PPP password (optional). The maximum length of
the password you can set is 62 characters.
PPP Authentication
Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP.
Schedule Profile
You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request.
All the schedules can be set previously in Application >>
Schedule web page and you can use the number that you
have set in that web page
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through PPP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose PPP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the
detection mode, you have to type required settings for the
following items.
 Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
 Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
 TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
 Ping Interval – Enter the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
 Ping Retry – Enter the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
80
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
II-1-2-5 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) in WAN3/WAN4
To use 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) as the accessing protocol of the internet, please
choose Internet Access from WAN menu. Then, select 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) for
WAN3/WAN4. The following web page will be shown.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Modem Support List
It lists all of the modems supported by such router.
Enable / Disable
Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
81
SIM PIN code
Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access
Internet.
The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 19
characters.
Network Mode
Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode
specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode,
the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual
wireless signal automatically.
APN Name
APN means Access Point Name which is provided and
required by some ISPs. Enter the name and click Apply.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 47
characters.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the
detection mode, you have to type required settings for the
following items.
 Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
 Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
 TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
 Ping Interval – Enter the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
 Ping Retry – Enter the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
Schedule Profile
You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request.
All the schedules can be set previously in Application >>
Schedule web page and you can use the number that you
have set in that web page
MTU
It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Choose IP to open the following dialog.

82
Path MTU to – Enter the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide



MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
Authentication
Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP authentication.
Username – Enter the username for authentication
(optional).
Password – Enter the password for authentication (optional).
Enable Bridge Mode
If the function is enabled, the router will work as a bridge
modem. Yet, the incoming packets with VLAN tags will be
discarded.
Bridge Specific MAC Address - Some Cable service providers
specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In
such cases you need to check the box and enter the MAC
address in the MAC Address field.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
II-1-2-6 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) in LTE WAN
It is available for “L” model only. LTE WAN uses the embedded LTE module to access internet.
To use 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) as the accessing protocol of the internet, please
choose Internet Access from WAN menu. Then, select 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) for
LTE. The following web page will be shown.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
83
Available settings are explained as follows:
84
Item
Description
Enable
Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
SIM PIN code
Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access
Internet.
The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 19
characters.
Network Mode
Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode
specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode,
the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual
wireless signal automatically.
APN Name
APN means Access Point Name which is provided and
required by some ISPs. Enter the name and click Apply.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 47
characters.
LTE hardware version
The hardware version of the embedded LTE module.
Keep WAN Connection
Normally, this function is designed for Dynamic IP
environments because some ISPs will drop connections if
there is no traffic within certain periods of time. Check
Enable PING to keep alive box to activate this function.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Enable PING to Keep alive – If you enable the PING function,
please specify an IP address for the system to PING it for
keeping alive. Vigor system will send a packet per second to
the specified IP address. If the system does not receive any
reply from that IP within 10 seconds, Vigor system will reboot
LTE module until successfully set LTE connection.

PING to the IP – Enter an IP address.
Connection Latency Check - Enable the latency time setting
for packet reply. If it is enabled (checked), Vigor system will
wait for the packet reply from the specified IP address.
When the time of waiting packet reply reaches the time
threshold (defined in Latency) and continues for a period of
time (defined in Latency Duration), Vigor system will reboot
LTE module until successfully set LTE connection.

Latency – Set a time threshold for packet reply. Default
value is 800 (unit: micro-second).

Latency Duration – Set a time period. Default value is
60 (unit: second).
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the
detection mode, you have to type required settings for the
following items.
 Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
 Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
 TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
 Ping Interval – Enter the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
 Ping Retry – Enter the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
Schedule Profile
Set the LTE WAN to work at certain time interval only. You
may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules
pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default
setting of this field is blank and the function will always
work.
MTU
It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Choose IP to open the following dialog.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
85




86
Path MTU to – Enter the IP address as the specific
transmit path.
MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value.
Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
Authentication
Select None or PAP or CHAP.
UserName
Enter the username (optional). The maximum length of the
name you can set is 47 characters.
Password
Enter the password (optional). The maximum length of the
password you can set is 62 characters.
Preferred LTE Band
Click the link to specify the preferred LTE band. A dialog will
be open and list available LTE bands supported by the LTE
module for the user to choose for establishing the network
connection.
Network Scan
Click it to search the nearby ISP for LTE connection.
The following dialog lists available ISP services detected by
Vigor router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Enable Bridge Mode
If the function is enabled, the router will work as a LTE
bridge modem.
Bridge Specific MAC Address - Enter the MAC address of the
device (e.g., a computer, router or a WiFi router) which
needs to be connected to the Internet through the LTE
modem.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
II-1-2-7 Details Page for IPv6 – Offline in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4
When Offline is selected, the IPv6 connection will be disabled.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
87
II-1-2-8 Details Page for IPv6 – PPP in WAN1/WAN2
During the procedure of IPv4 PPPoE connection, we can get the IPv6 Link Local Address
between the gateway and Vigor router through IPv6CP. Later, use DHCPv6 or accept RA to
acquire the IPv6 prefix address (such as: 2001:B010:7300:200::/64) offered by the ISP. In
addition, PCs under LAN also can have the public IPv6 address for Internet access by means of
the generated prefix.
No need to type any other information for PPP mode.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection
will be executed. The network connection will be on always.
 Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
 TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
RIPng Protocol
RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and
benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on PPP mode.
88
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Info
At present, the IPv6 prefix can be acquired via the PPPoE mode connection which is
available for the areas such as Taiwan (hinet), the Netherlands, Australia and UK.
II-1-2-9 Details Page for IPv6 – TSPC in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4
Tunnel setup protocol client (TSPC) is an application which could help you to connect to IPv6
network easily.
Please make sure your IPv4 WAN connection is OK and apply one free account from hexago
(http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account ) before you try to use TSPC for network
connection. TSPC would connect to tunnel broker and requests a tunnel according to the
specifications inside the configuration file. It gets a public IPv6 IP address and an IPv6 prefix
from the tunnel broker and then monitors the state of the tunnel in background.
After getting the IPv6 prefix and starting router advertisement daemon (RADVD), the PC
behind this router can directly connect to IPv6 the Internet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
89
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Username
Enter the name obtained from the broker. It is suggested for
you to apply another username and password for
http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 63
characters.
Password
Enter the password assigned with the user name.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 19
characters.
Tunnel Broker
Enter the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an
optional port number.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection
will be executed. The network connection will be on always.
 Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
 TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
90
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-1-2-10 Details Page for IPv6 – AICCU in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Always On
Check this box to keep the network connection always.
Username
Enter the name obtained from the broker. Please apply new
account at http://www.sixxs.net/. It is suggested for you to
apply another username and password.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 19
characters.
Password
Enter the password assigned with the user name.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 19
characters.
Tunnel Broker
It means a server of AICCU. The server can provide IPv6
tunnels to sites or end users over IPv4.
Enter the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an
optional port number.
Tunnel ID
One user account may have several tunnels. And, each
tunnel shall have one specified tunnel ID (e.g., T115394).
Enter the ID offered by Tunnel Broker.
Subnet Prefix
Enter the subnet prefix address obtained from service
provider.
The maximum length of the prefix you can set is 128
characters.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
91
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection.
 Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
 TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
92
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-1-2-11 Details Page for IPv6 – DHCPv6 Client in WAN1/WAN2
DHCPv6 client mode would use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
IAID
Type a number as IAID.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through NS Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On, Ping Detect or NS Detect for
the system to execute for WAN detection. With NS Detect
mode, the system will check if network connection is
established or not, like IPv4 ARP Detect. Always On means
no detection will be executed. The network connection will
be on always.
 Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
 TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
RIPng Protocol
RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and
benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
Bridge Mode
Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router
will work as a bridge modem.
Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is
enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes
are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under
User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules
defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.
Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected LAN
subnet and such WAN interface.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
93
II-1-2-12 Details Page for IPv6 – Static IPv6 in WAN1/WAN2
This type allows you to setup static IPv6 address for WAN interface.
Available settings are explained as follows:
94
Item
Description
Static IPv6 Address
configuration
IPv6 Address – Enter the IPv6 Static IP Address.
Prefix Length – Enter the fixed value for prefix length.
Add – Click it to add a new entry.
Update – Click it to modify an existed entry.
Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.
Current IPv6 Address
Table
Display current interface IPv6 address.
Static IPv6 Gateway
Configuration
IPv6 Gateway Address - Type your IPv6 gateway address
here.
WAN Connection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Detection
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection
will be executed. The network connection will be on always.
 Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
 TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
Bridge Mode
Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router
will work as a bridge modem.
Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is
enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes
are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under
User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules
defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.
Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected LAN
subnet and such WAN interface.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
95
II-1-2-13 Details Page for IPv6 – 6in4 Static Tunnel in WAN1/WAN2
This type allows you to setup 6in4 Static Tunnel for WAN interface.
Such mode allows the router to access IPv6 network through IPv4 network.
However, 6in4 offers a prefix outside of 2002::0/16. So, you can use a fixed endpoint rather
than anycast endpoint. The mode has more reliability.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Remote Endpoint IPv4
Address
Enter the static IPv4 address for the remote server.
6in4 IPv6 Address
Enter the static IPv6 address for IPv4 tunnel with the value
for prefix length.
LAN Routed Prefix
Enter the static IPv6 address for LAN routing with the value
for prefix length.
Tunnel TTL
Enter the number for the data lifetime in tunnel.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection
will be executed. The network connection will be on
always.
 Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
 TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
96
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6in4 Static Tunnel mode.
II-1-2-14 Details Page for IPv6 – 6rd in WAN1/WAN2
This type allows you to setup 6rd for WAN interface.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
6rd Mode
Auto 6rd – Retrieve 6rd prefix automatically from 6rd
service provider. The IPv4 WAN must be set as "DHCP".
Static 6rd - Set 6rd options manually.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
97
IPv4 Border Relay
Enter the IPv4 addresses of the 6rd Border Relay for a given
6rd domain.
IPv4 Mask Length
Type a number of high-order bits that are identical across
all CE IPv4 addresses within a given 6rd domain.
It may be any value between 0 and 32.
6rd Prefix
Enter the 6rd IPv6 address.
6rd Prefix Length
Enter the IPv6 prefix length for the 6rd IPv6 prefix in
number of bits.
WAN Connection
Detection
Such function allows you to verify whether network
connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection
will be executed. The network connection will be on
always.
 Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.
 TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6rd mode.
98
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-1-3 Multi-VLAN
Multi-VLAN allows users to create profiles for specific WAN interface and bridge connections
for user applications that require very high network throughput. Simply go to WAN and select
Multi-VLAN.
Channel 1 to 4 have the following fixed assignments and cannot be altered.

Channel 1: Ethernet on WAN1.

Channel 2: Fiber on WAN2 / Ethernet on WAN2 (based on the model)

Channel 3/4: USB1 (WAN3) and USB2 (WAN4), respectively.
Channels 5 through 10 can be bridged to one or more of the 3 LAN ports P2 through P4. In
addition, Channels 5 through 7 can be configured as virtual WANs (WAN5 through WAN7).
General
This page shows the basic configurations used by every channel.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Channel
Display the number of each channel.
Channels 1 and 2 are used by the Internet Access web user
interface and can not be configured here.
Channels 5 ~ 10 are configurable.
Enable
Display whether the settings in this channel are enabled
(Yes) or not (No).
WAN Type
Displays the physical medium that the channel will use.
VLAN Tag
Displays the VLAN tag value that will be used for the packets
traveling on this channel.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
99
Port-based Bridge
The network traffic flowing on each channel will be
identified by the system via their VLAN Tags. Channels using
the same WAN type may not configure the same VLAN tag
value.
Enable - Check this box to enable the port-based bridge
function on this channel.
P1 ~ P4 – Check the box(es) to build bridge connection on
LAN.
To configure a PVC channel, click its channel number.
WAN links for Channel 5, 6 and 7 are provided for router-borne application such as TR-069.
The settings must be applied and obtained from your ISP. For your special request, please
contact with your ISP and then click WAN link of Channel 5, 6 or 7 to configure your router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
100
Description
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Enable Channel 5/6/7
Check it to enable this channel.
WAN Type
Specify a WAN type of the PVC Channel/VLAN.
General Settings
VLAN Tag – Enter the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid
settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic
flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via
their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not
configure the same VLAN tag value.
Priority – Choose the number to determine the packet
priority for such VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7.
Service Tag Value – Such value varies depending on the
setting configured in WAN>>General Setup. If required,
click Modify to open WAN>>General Setup. Then, enable
VLAN Tag insertion for service (outer tag) and specify the
value as the VLAN ID number. Or, disable it.
Open Port-based Bridge
Connection for this
Channel
The settings here will create a bridge between the LAN ports
selected and the WAN. The WAN interface of the bridge
connection will be built upon the WAN type selected using
the VLAN tag configured.
Physical Members – Group the physical ports by checking the
corresponding check box(es) for applying the port-based
bridge connection.
Note: LAN port P1 is reserved for NAT use and cannot be
selected for bridging.
Open WAN Interface for
this Channel
Check the box to enable relating function.
WAN Application - Management can be specified for general
management (Web configuration/telnet/TR069). If you
choose Management, the configuration for this VLAN will be
effective for Web configuration/telnet/TR069.
IPTV - The IPTV configuration will allow the WAN interface to
send IGMP packets to IPTV servers.
WAN Setup – Choose PPPoE/PPPoA or Static or Dynamic IP
to determine what WAN settings must be configured.
ISP Access Setup
Enter your allocated username, password and authentication
parameters according to the information provided by your
ISP.
ISP Name – PPP Service Name. Enter if your ISP requires this
setting; otherwise leave blank.
Username – Name provided by the ISP for PPPoE/PPPoA
authentication. Maximum length is 62 characters.
Password – Password provided by the ISP for PPPoE/PPPoA
authentication. Maximum length is 62 characters.
PPP Authentication –The protocol used for PPP
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
101
authentication.

PAP only- Only PAP (Password Authentication Protocol)
is used.

PAP or CHAP- Both PAP and CHAP
(Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol) can be
used for PPP authentication. Router negotiates with the
PPTP or L2TP server to determine which protocol to
use.
Always On – If selected, the router will maintain the
PPPoE/PPPoA connection.
Idle Timeout – Maximum length of time, in seconds, of idling
allowed (no traffic) before the connection is dropped.
IP Address From ISP - Specifies how the WAN IP address of
the channel configured.

WAN IP Network Settings
Fixed IP
Yes - IP address entered in the Fixed IP Address field
will be used as the IP address of the virtual WAN.
No - Virtual WAN IP address will be assigned by the ISP’s
PPPoE/PPPoA server.
Obtain an IP address automatically – Select this option if the
router is to receive IP configuration information from a DHCP
server.

Router Name – Sets the value of DHCP Option 12, which
is used by some ISPs.

Domain Name – Sets the value of DHCP Option 15,
which is used by some ISPs.
Specify an IP address – Select this option to manually enter
the IP address.



IP Address – Type in the IP address.
Subnet Mask – Type in the subnet mask.
Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address.
DNS Server IP Address - Type in the primary IP address for
the router if you want to use Static IP mode. If necessary,
type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings and return to previous page.
Click any index (8, 9 and 10) to get the following web page:
102
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable Channel 8/9/10
Click it to enable the configuration of this channel.
WAN Type
The connections and interfaces created in every channel may
select a specific WAN type to be built upon. In the
Multi-VLAN application, only the Ethernet WAN type is
available. The user will be able to select the physical WAN
interface the channel shall use here.
General Settings
VLAN Tag – Enter the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid
settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic
flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via
their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not
configure the same VLAN tag value.
Priority – Choose the number to determine the packet
priority for such VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7.
Bridge mode
Enable – Click it to enable Bridge mode for such channel.
Physical Members – Group the physical ports by checking the
corresponding check box(es) for applying the bridge
connection.
Note: LAN port P1 is reserved for NAT use and cannot be
selected for bridging.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
103
II-1-4 WAN Budget
This function is used to determine the data traffic volume for each WAN interface
respectively to prevent from overcharges for data transmission by the ISP. Please note that
the Quota Limit and Billing cycle day of month settings will need to be configured correctly
first in order for some period calculations to be performed correctly.
II-1-4-1 General Setup
Or,
104
Item
Description
Index
The WAN port.
Click to configure WAN Budget for a particular WAN.
Enable
v - WAN Budget is enabled on this WAN.
x - WAN Budget is disabled on this WAN.
Quota
The current cycle’s Internet usage is expressed as x/y where
x is the cumulative usage and y is the upper limit. For
example, 100MB/200MB means the usage thus far in this
cycle is 100MB, and the upper limit is 200MB.
When quota exceeded
Actions to be taken once the quota is reached.
Shutdown – WAN will be disabled.
Mail Alert – Email will be sent to the administrator.
Time cycle
Reset frequency of the usage data.
Monthly – The Monthly option in the Criterion and Action
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
tab was used to set up the usage quota.
User Defined: The User Defined option in the Criterion and
Action tab was used to set up the usage qota.
Duration
Start and end timestamps of the current cycle.
Click WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 link to open the following web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check the box to enable such function.
Quota Limit
Enter the data traffic quota allowed for such WAN interface.
There are two unit (MB and GB) offered for you to specify.
When quota exceeded
Check the box(es) as the condition(s) for the system to
perform when the traffic has exceeded the budget limit.
Shutdown WAN interface – All the outgoing traffic through
such WAN interface will be terminated.
Monthly

Using Notification Object – The system will send out a
notification based on the content of the notification
object.

Set Mail Alert – The system will send out a warning
message to the administrator when the quota is running
out. However, the connection charges will be
calculated continuously.

Set SMS message - The system will send out SMS
message to the administrator when the quota is running
out.
Some ISP might apply for the network limitation based on the
traffic limit per month. This setting is to offer a mechanism
of resetting the traffic record every month.
Data quota resets on day … – You can determine the starting
day in one month.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
105
Custom
This setting allows the user to define the billing cycle
according to his request. The WAN budget will be reset with
an interval of billing cycle.
Monthly is default setting. If long period or a short period is
required, use Custom. The period of cycle duration is
between 1 day and 60 days. You can determine the cycle
duration by specifying the days and the hours. In addition,
you can specify which day of today is in a cycle.
Use Cycle in hours –
 Cycle duration: Specify the days and hours to reset the
traffic record. For example, 7 means the whole cycle is 7
days; 20 means the whole cycle is 20 days. When the time
is up, the router will reset the traffic record
automatically.
 Today is day – Specify the day in the cycle as the starting
point which Vigor router will reset the traffic record. For
example, “3” means the third day of the cycle duration.
Use Cycle in days -
 Cycle duration: Specify the days to reset the traffic
record. For example, 7 means the whole cycle is 7 days;
20 means the whole cycle is 20 days. When the time is up,
the router will reset the traffic record automatically.
 Today is day – Specify the day and time for data quota
rest in the cycle as the starting point which Vigor router
will reset the traffic record. For example, “3” means the
third day of the cycle duration.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
106
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-1-4-2 Status
The status page displays the status WAN budget, including the duration and the usage.
If the WAN budget is exhausted, a lock will be displayed on the page if Shutdown WAN
interface is selected. Which means no data transmission will be carried out. Moreover, the
system will send out a warning message to the administrator if Mail Alert is selected. Or, the
system will send out SMS message to the administrator if SMS message is selected.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
107
Application Notes
A-1 How to set up Multi-VLAN for triple play deployment?
By adding VLAN tags to differentiate the traffic, the service provider is able to deliver video,
voice, and data to the subscribers over a single connection, which is also known as the triple
play service. This document is going to demonstrate how to configure the Multi-PVC feature
for triple play deployment. There are two types of setup, one is doing port-based bridge that
will connect the media, such as the set-top box (STB), directly to the service provider via a
specific LAN port; the other is opening a virtual WAN interface and doing NAT for the
application.
Bridge the Virtual WAN to a LAN port
1.
108
Go to WAN >> Multi-VLAN, click on a channel to configure.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2.
3.
Configure the channel as follows,
(a)
enable this channel
(b)
set WAN Type to the WAN interface that the service provider is on.
(c)
enter the VLAN Tag and Priority as the service provider requires.
(d)
check Enable for Bridge Mode, and select the physical port member to which you're
going to connect the STB.
Click OK to save the configuration, the configuration will be displayed on the main page.
And now you may connect the STB to the Bridged port to use the IPTV service.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
109
Open a Virtual WAN Interface
1.
110
Go to WAN >> Multi-VLAN, click on channel 5, 6 or 7 to configure.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2.
3.
Configure the channel as follows,
(a)
enable this channel.
(b)
set WAN Type to the WAN interface that the service provider is on.
(c)
enter the VLAN Tag and Priority as the service provider requires.
(d)
enable "Open WAN Interface for this Channel", and select the kind of Application
will be used on this channel. (Note: this option is only available on channel 5-7)
(e)
set up the Internet Access type as the ISP requires.
Click OK to save the profile and reboot the router to apply the settings. After the router
restart, go to Online Status >> Virtual WAN to make sure the WAN interface is up and
has obtained an IP address.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
111
4.
112
Now, you may use the virtual WAN interface for applications such as IGMP Proxy, this
can be done by selecting the WAN interface as "PVC/VLAN".
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
A-2 Load Balancing and Failover for multi-WAN Vigor Routers
Network Administrator may set up multiple Internet connection to share the traffic load, or
add a redundant Internet connection to the router and gives a higher reliability to the
network connection.
Load Balancing
By default, all the active WAN interfaces will join the load balance pool when they are
connected, and the outgoing traffic will take either of the active WAN as their path,
therefore the traffic load is shared across the WAN interfaces. For newer models which
support "Session-based" Load Balance, the router can also do WAN aggregation, which means
the speed that LAN clients could experience will be the combination of all the active WAN's
bandwidth (click here to learn more).
To ensure that a WAN interface is in the load balance pool, go to WAN >> General Setup,
click on the index, set Active Mode to "Always On" and make sure Load Balance is enabled.
The default load balance weight is determined based on the peak bandwidth detected on
each WAN interface, but Network Administrator may also use "According to Line Speed Mode"
to define the maximum bandwidth which will affect the weight (click here to learn more).
Furthermore, Network Administrator would like to specify an outgoing path for some traffic
while there are multiple WAN interfaces, Route Policy will be the solution, click here for an
instruction of how to designate a WAN interface for LAN clients by Route Policy.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
113
Fai l ov er
When configured in Failover mode, the WAN interface will only be active when the primary
WAN disconnects, and will be down again when the primary WAN resume its service.
To configure a WAN interface in Failover mode, go to WAN >> General Setup, click on the
index which you would like to configure to Failover Mode, set Active Mode to "Failover", and
for Active When, choose the conditions about when should this interface be activated.
Info
114
Router determines if a WAN is disconnected or not according to "WAN
Connection Detection" settings in WAN >> Internet Access.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-2 LAN
Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of
network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.
The most generic function of Vigor router is NAT. It creates a private subnet of your own. As
mentioned previously, the router will talk to other public hosts on the Internet by using public
IP address and talking to local hosts by using its private IP address. What NAT does is to
translate the packets from public IP address to private IP address to forward the right packets
to the right host and vice versa. Besides, Vigor router has a built-in DHCP server that assigns
private IP address to each local host. See the following diagram for a briefly understanding.
In some special case, you may have a public IP subnet from your ISP such as 220.135.240.0/24.
This means that you can set up a public subnet or call second subnet that each host is
equipped with a public IP address. As a part of the public subnet, the Vigor router will serve
for IP routing to help hosts in the public subnet to communicate with other public hosts or
servers outside. Therefore, the router should be set as the gateway for public hosts.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
115
What is Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Vigor router will exchange routing information with neighboring routers using the RIP to
accomplish IP routing. This allows users to change the information of the router such as IP
address and the routers will automatically inform for each other.
What is Static Route
When you have several subnets in your LAN, sometimes a more effective and quicker way for
connection is the Static routes function rather than other method. You may simply set rules
to forward data from one specified subnet to another specified subnet without the presence
of RIP.
What are Virtual LANs and Rate Control
You can group local hosts by physical ports and create up to 8 virtual LANs. To manage the
communication between different groups, please set up rules in Virtual LAN (VLAN) function
and the rate of each.
116
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
A LAN comprises a collection of LAN clients, which are networked devices on your premises. A
LAN client can be a computer, a printer, a Voice-over-IP (VoIP) phone, a mobile phone, a
gaming console, an Internet Protocol Television (IPTV), etc, and can have either a wired
(using Ethernet cabling) or wireless (using Wi-Fi) network connection.
LAN clients within the same LAN are normally able to communicate with one another directly,
as they are peers to one another, unless measures, such as firewalls or VLANs, have been put
in place to restrict such access. Nowadays the most common LAN firewalls are implemented
on the LAN client itself. For example, Microsoft Windows since Windows XP and Apple OS X
have built-in firewalls that can be configured to restrict traffic coming in and going out of the
computer. VLANs, on the other hand, are usually set up using network switches or routers,
such as the Vigor2926.
To communicate with the hosts outside of the LAN, LAN clients have to go through a network
gateway, which in most cases is a router (such as the Vigor 2926) that sits between the LAN
and the ISP network, which is the WAN. The router acts as a director to ensure traffic
between the LAN and the WAN reach their intended destinations.
II-2-1 General Setup
This page provides you the general settings for LAN. Click LAN to open the LAN settings page
and choose General Setup.
There are four subnets provided by the router which allow users to divide groups into
different subnets (LAN1 – LAN5). In addition, different subnets can link for each other by
configuring Inter-LAN Routing. At present, LAN1 setting is fixed with NAT mode only. LAN2 –
LAN8 can be operated under NAT or Route mode. IP Routed Subnet can be operated under
Route mode.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
117
Available settings are explained as follows:
118
Item
Description
General Setup
Allow to configure settings for each subnet respectively.
Index - Display all of the LAN items.
Status- Basically, LAN1 status is enabled in default.
LAN2 –LAN5 and IP Routed Subnet can be observed by
checking the box of Status.
DHCP- LAN1 is configured with DHCP in default. If required,
please check the DHCP box for each LAN.
IP Address - Display the IP address for each LAN item. Such
information is set in default and you can not modify it.
Details Page - Click it to access into the setting page. Each
LAN will have different LAN configuration page. Each LAN
must be configured in different subnet.
IPv6 – Click it to access into the settings page of IPv6.
DHCP Server Option
DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number and
data information when such function is enabled.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
For detailed information, refer to later section.
Force router to use “DNS
server IP address …..”
Force Vigor router to use DNS servers configured in
LAN1/LAN2/LAN3/LAN4/LAN5/LAN6/LAN7/LAN8/DMZ Port
instead of DNS servers given by the Internet Access server
(PPPoE, PPTP, L2TP or DHCP server).
Inter-LAN Routing
Check the box to link two or more different subnets (LAN and
LAN).
Inter-LAN Routing allows different LAN subnets to be
interconnected or isolated.
It is only available when the VLAN functionality is enabled.
Refer to section II-2-2 VLAN on how to set up VLANs.
In the Inter-LAN Routing matrix, a selected checkbox means
that the 2 intersecting LANs can communicate with each
other.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save.
Info
To configure a subnet, select its Detials Page button to bring up the LAN
Details Page.
II-2-1-1 Details Page for LAN1 – Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup
There are two configuration pages for LAN1, Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4)
and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type and refer to the following explanations for
detailed information.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Network Configuration
For NAT Usage,
IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default:
192.168.1.1).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
119
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address
field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on
the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
LAN IP Alias –Such feature allows specifying multiple
gateways (under a switch) with different WAN interfaces for
accessing the Internet via the Vigor router.
RIP Protocol Control,
Enable – When Enabled, the router will attempt to exchange
routing information with neighbouring routers using the
Routing Information Protocol.
DHCP Server
Configuration
120
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The
router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network
so it automatically dispatches related IP settings to any local
user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended
that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do
not have a DHCP server for your network.
If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other
than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to
redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.
Disable Server – Let you manually assign IP address to every
host in the LAN.
Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host
in the LAN.

Start IP Address - The beginning LAN IP address that is
given out to LAN DHCP clients.

IP Pool Counts - The maximum number of IP addresses
to be handed out by DHCP. The default value is 200.
Valid range is between 1 and 1021. The actual number
of IP addresses available for assignment is the IP Pool
Counts, or 1021 minus the last octet of the Start IP
Address, whichever is smaller.

Gateway IP Address - The IP address of the gateway,
which is the host on the LAN that relays all traffic
coming into and going out of the LAN. The gateway is
normally the router, and therefore the Gateway IP
Address should be identical to the IP Address in the
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Network Configuration section above.

Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP
addresses can be used before they have to be renewed.

Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - If
selected, the router sends ARP requests recycles IP
addresses previously assigned to inactive DHCP clients
to prevent exhaustion of the IP address pool.
Note: When Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients
periodically is enabled, router will do the following:

Check activities of DHCP clients by ARP requests
every minute when the available DHCP IP
addresses are less than 30

Clear DHCP lease when the client is not
responding ARP replies.
Enable Relay Agent – When selected, all DHCP requests are
forwarded to a DHCP server outside of the LAN subnet, and
whose address is specified in the DHCP Server IP Address
field.

DHCP Server IP Address – It is available when Enable
Relay Agent is checked. Set the IP address of the DHCP
server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help
to forward the DHCP request to the DHCP server.
DNS Server IP Address
DNS stands for Domain Name System. Every Internet host
must have a unique IP address, also they may have a
human-friendly, easy to remember name such as
www.yahoo.com. The DNS server converts the user-friendly
name into its equivalent IP address.
Primary IP Address -You must specify a DNS server IP address
here because your ISP should provide you with usually more
than one DNS Server.
Secondary IP Address - You can specify secondary DNS server
IP address here because your ISP often provides you more
than one DNS Server.
The default DNS Server IP address can be found via Online
Status:
If both the Primary IP and Secondary IP Address fields are left
empty, the router will assign DNS servers obtained from WAN
interface to local users as a DNS proxy server and maintain a
DNS cache. If there is no DNS servers available, router will
use its own IP address instead.
If the IP address of a domain name is already in the DNS
cache, the router will resolve the domain name immediately.
Otherwise, the router forwards the DNS query packet to the
external DNS server by establishing a WAN (e.g. DSL/Cable)
connection.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Private IP addresses can be assigned automatically to LAN clients using Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), or manually assigned. The DHCP server can either be the
router (the most common case), or a separate server, that hands out IP addresses to DHCP
clients.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
121
Alternatively, static IP addresses can be manually configured on LAN clients as part of their
network settings. No matter how IP addresses are configured, it is important that no two
devices get the same IP address. If both DHCP and static assignment are used on a network, it
is important to exclude the static IP addresses from the DHCP IP pool. For example, if your
LAN uses the 192.168.1.x subnet and you have 20 DHCP clients and 20 static IP clients, you
could configure 192.168.1.10 as the Start IP Address, 50 as the IP Pool Counts (enough for the
current number of DHCP clients, plus room for future expansion), and use addresses greater
than 192.168.1.100 for static assignment.
122
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-2-1-2 Details Page for LAN2 ~ LAN8 and DMZ
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Network Configuration
Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration;
click Disable to disable such configuration.
For NAT Usage - Click this radio button to invoke NAT
function.
For Routing Usage - Click this radio button to invoke this
function.
IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default:
192.168.1.1).
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address
field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on
the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
DHCP Server
Configuration
Disable Server – Let you manually assign IP address to every
host in the LAN.
Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host
in the LAN.

Start IP Address - The beginning LAN IP address that is
given out to LAN DHCP clients.

IP Pool Counts - The maximum number of IP addresses
to be handed out by DHCP. The default value is 100.
Valid range is between 1 and 1021. The actual number
of IP addresses available for assignment is the IP Pool
Counts, or 1021 minus the last octet of the Start IP
Address, whichever is smaller.

Gateway IP Address - The IP address of the gateway,
which is the host on the LAN that relays all traffic
coming into and going out of the LAN. The gateway is
normally the router, and therefore the Gateway IP
Address should be identical to the IP Address in the
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
123
Network Configuration section above.

Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP
addresses can be used before they have to be renewed.

Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - If
selected, the router sends ARP requests recycles IP
addresses previously assigned to inactive DHCP clients
to prevent exhaustion of the IP address pool.
Note: When Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients
periodically is enabled, router will do the following:

Check activities of DHCP clients by ARP requests
every minute when the available DHCP IP
addresses are less than 30

Clear DHCP lease when the client is not
responding ARP replies.
Enable Relay Agent – When selected, all DHCP requests are
forwarded to a DHCP server outside of the LAN subnet, and
whose address is specified in the DHCP Server IP Address
field.

DHCP Server IP Address – It is available when Enable
Relay Agent is checked. Set the IP address of the DHCP
server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help
to forward the DHCP request to the DHCP server.
DNS Server IP Address
DNS stands for Domain Name System. Every Internet host
must have a unique IP address, also they may have a
human-friendly, easy to remember name such as
www.yahoo.com. The DNS server converts the user-friendly
name into its equivalent IP address.
Primary IP Address -You must specify a DNS server IP address
here because your ISP should provide you with usually more
than one DNS Server.
Secondary IP Address - You can specify secondary DNS server
IP address here because your ISP often provides you more
than one DNS Server.
The default DNS Server IP address can be found via Online
Status:
If both the Primary IP and Secondary IP Address fields are left
empty, the router will assign its own IP address to local users
as a DNS proxy server and maintain a DNS cache.
If the IP address of a domain name is already in the DNS
cache, the router will resolve the domain name immediately.
Otherwise, the router forwards the DNS query packet to the
external DNS server by establishing a WAN (e.g. DSL/Cable)
connection.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
124
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-2-1-3 Details Page for IP Routed Subnet
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Network Configuration
Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration;
click Disable to disable such configuration.
For Routing Usage,
IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default:
192.168.1.1).
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address
field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on
the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
RIP Protocol Control,
Enable – When Enabled, the router will attempt to exchange
routing information with neighbouring routers using the
Routing Information Protocol.
DHCP Server
Configuration
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The
router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network
so it automatically dispatch related IP settings to any local
user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended
that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do
not have a DHCP server for your network.
If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other
than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to
redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.
Start IP Address - Enter a value of the IP address pool for the
DHCP server to start with when issuing IP addresses. If the
1st IP address of your router is 192.168.1.1, the starting IP
address must be 192.168.1.2 or greater, but smaller than
192.168.1.254.
IP Pool Counts - Enter the maximum number of PCs that you
want the DHCP server to assign IP addresses to. The default is
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
125
50 and the maximum is 253.
Lease Time - Enter the time to determine how long the IP
address assigned by DHCP server can be used.
Use LAN Port – Specify an IP for IP Route Subnet. If it is
enabled, DHCP server will assign IP address automatically for
the clients coming from P1 and/or P2. Please check the box
of P1 and P2.
Use MAC Address - Check such box to specify MAC address.

MAC Address: Enter the MAC Address of the host one by
one and click Add to create a list of hosts which can be
assigned, deleted or edited from above pool. Set a list
of MAC Address for 2nd DHCP server will help router to
assign the correct IP address of the correct subnet to
the correct host. So those hosts in 2nd subnet won’t get
an IP address belonging to 1st subnet.
Add – Enter the MAC address in the boxes and click this
button to add.
Delete – Click it to delete the selected MAC address.
Edit – Click it to edit the selected MAC address.
Cancel – Click it to cancel the job of adding, deleting and
editing.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
II-2-1-4 Details Page for LAN IPv6 Setup
There are two configuration pages for LAN1/LAN2/LAN3/LAN4/LAN5/LAN6/DMZ Port,
Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4) and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type
and refer to the following explanations for detailed information. Below shows the settings
page for IPv6.
126
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
It provides 2 daemons for LAN side IPv6 address configuration. One is SLAAC(stateless) and
the other is DHCPv6 (Stateful) server.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable IPv6
Check the box to enable the configuration of LAN 1 IPv6
Setup.
WAN Primary Interface
Use the drop down list to specify a WAN interface for IPv6.
Static IPv6 Address
configuration
IPv6 Address –Type static IPv6 address for LAN.
Prefix Length – Enter the fixed value for prefix length.
Add – Click it to add a new entry.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
127
Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.
Unique Local Address
(ULA) configuration
Unique Local Addresses (ULAs) are private IPv6 addresses
assigned to LAN clients.
Off - ULA is disabled.
Manually ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs
generated based on the prefix manually entered.
Auto ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs using an
automatically-determined prefix.
Current IPv6 Address
Table
Display current used IPv6 addresses.
DNS Server IPv6 Address
Deploy when WAN is up – The RA (router advertisement)
packets will be sent to LAN PC with DNS server information
only when network connection by any one of WAN interfaces
is up.
Enable – The RA (router advertisement) packets will be sent
to LAN PC with DNS server information no matter WAN
connection is up or not.
 Primary DNS Sever – Enter the IPv6 address for Primary
DNS server.
 Secondary DNS Server –Type another IPv6 address for
DNS server if required.
Disable – DNS server will not be used.
Management
Configures the Managed Address Configuration flag (M-bit) in
Route Advertisements.

Off - No configuration information is sent using Route
Advertisements.

SLAAC(stateless) - M-bit is unset.

DHCPv6(stateful) - M-bit is set, which indicates to LAN
clients that they should acquire all IPv6 configuration
information from a DHCPv6 server. The DHCPv6 server
can either be the one built into the Vigor router, or a
separate DHCPv6 server.
Other Option (O-bit) - Check this box to enable the O-bit for
obtaining additional information (e.g., DNS) from DHCPv6.
When selected, the Other Configuration flag is set, which
indicates to LAN clients that IPv6 configuration information
besides LAN IPv6 addresses is available from a DHCPv6
server.
Setting the M-bit (see Management above) has the same
effect as implicitly setting the O-bit, as DHCPv6 supplies all
IPv6 configuration information, including what is indicated as
available when the O-bit is set.
DHCPv6 Server
128
Enable Server –Click it to enable DHCPv6 server. DHCPv6
Server could assign IPv6 address to PC according to the
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Start/End IPv6 address configuration.
Disable Server –Click it to disable DHCPv6 server.
Auto IPv6 range – After check the box, Vigor router will
assign the IPv6 range automatically.
Start IPv6 Address / End IPv6 Address –Enter the start and
end address for IPv6 server.
Advance setting – Click the Edit button to configure
advanced IPv6 settings for DHCPv6 server.
Advance setting
The Advanced Settings page has additional settings for
Router Advertisement and enabling multiple WANs for IPv6
traffic.
Router Advertisement Configuration – Click Enable to
enable router advertisement server. The router
advertisement daemon sends Router Advertisement
messages, specified by RFC 2461, to a local Ethernet LAN
periodically and when requested by a node sending a Router
Solicitation message. These messages are required for IPv6
stateless auto-configuration.
Disable – Click it to disable router advertisement server.
Hop Limit – The value is required for the device behind the
router when IPv6 is in use.
Min/Max Interval Time (sec) – It defines the interval
(between minimum time and maximum time) for sending RA
(Router Advertisement) packets.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
129
Default Lifetime (sec) –Within such period of time,
Vigor2926 can be treated as the default gateway.
Default Preference – It determines the priority of the host
behind the router when RA (Router Advertisement) packets
are transmitted.
MTU – It means Max Transmit Unit for packet. If Auto is
selected, the router will determine the MTU value for LAN.
RIPng Protocol –RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same
functions and benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
Extension WAN – In addition to the default WAN used for
IPv6 traffic specified in the WAN Primary Interface in the LAN
IPv6 Setup page, additional WANs can be selected to carry
IPv6 traffic by enabling them in the Extension WAN section.
Available WAN – Additional WANs available but not currently
selected to carry IPv6 traffic.
Selected WAN – Additional WANs selected to carry IPv6
traffic.
After making changes on the Advance setting page, click the OK button to retain the changes
and return to the LAN IPv6 Setup page. Be sure to click OK on the LAN IPv6 Setup page or else
changes made on the Advance setting page will not be saved.
II-2-1-5 Advanced DHCP Options
DHCP Options can be configured by clicking the DHCP Server Option button on the LAN
General Setup screen.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
130
Description
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Customized List
Shows all the DHCP options that have been configured in the
system.
Enable
If selected, DHCP option entry is enabled.
If unselected, DHCP option entry is disabled.
Interface
LAN interface(s) to which this entry is applicable.
Next Server IP
Address/SIAddr
Overrides the DHCP Next Server IP address (DHCP Option 66)
supplied by the DHCP server.
Option Number
DHCP option number (e.g., 100).
DataType
Type of data in the Data field:
ASCII Character - A text string. Example: /path.
Hexadecimal Digit - A hexadecimal string. Valid characters
are from 0 to 9 and from a to f. Example: 2f70617468.
Address List - One or more IPv4 addresses, delimited by
commas.
Data
Data of this DHCP option.
To add a DHCP option entry from scratch, clear the data entry fields (Enable, Interface,
Option Number, DataType and Data) by clicking Reset. After filling in the values, click Add
to create the new entry.
To add a DHCP option entry modeled after an existing entry, click the model entry in
Customized List. The data entry fields will be populated with values from the model entry.
After making all necessary changes for the new entry, click Add to create it.
To modify an existing DHCP option entry, click on it in Customized List. The data entry fields
will be populated with the current values from the entry. After making all necessary changes,
click Update to save the changes.
To delete a DHCP option entry, click on it in Customized List, and then click Delete.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
131
Application Notes
A-1 Multi-subnet Application - How to utilize Vigor router with non-NAT?
1. Open LAN>>General Setup. Click the Details Page button of LAN1.
2. In the setting page, type the settings as follows and click OK to save the settings. Note
that LAN1 is always for NAT usage.
132
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3. In the setting page, type the settings as follows and click OK to save the settings. Note
that LAN1 is always for NAT usage.
4. Return to LAN>>General Setup. Now, LAN2 is available for configuration. Click the
Details Page button of LAN2. Choose For Routing Usage. Enter the settings as follows and
click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
133
5. Open WAN>>Internet Access. Choose Static or Dynamic IP as Access Mode. Then click
Details Page.
6. In the configuration web page, type the settings as follows and click OK to save the
settings.
7. Now, a network connection via MPLS (Multiprotocol Label Switching) between LAN2 user
and the Branch user is established successfully. Internet is not required for them.
134
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-2-2 VLAN
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) allow you to subdivide your LAN to facilitate
management or to improve network security.
Select LAN>>VLAN from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the VLAN Configuration page.
Tagged VLAN
The tagged VLANs (802.1q) can mark data with a VLAN identifier. This identifier can be
carried through an onward Ethernet switch to specific ports. The specific VLAN clients can
also pick up this identifier as it is just passed to the LAN. You can set the priorities for
LAN-side QoS. You can assign each of VLANs to each of the different IP subnets that the router
may also be operating, to provide even more isolation. The said functionality is tag-based
multi-subnet.
Port-Based VLAN
Relative to tag-based VLAN which groups clients with an identifier, port-based VLAN uses
physical ports (P1 ~ P4) to separate the clients into different VLAN group.
Virtual LAN function provides you a very convenient way to manage hosts by grouping them
based on the physical port. The multi-subnet can let a small businesses have much better
isolation for multi-occupancy applications. Go to LAN page and select VLAN. The following
page will appear. Click Enable to invoke VLAN function.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
135
For Vigor router with 2.4GHz and 5GHz features, the web page will be shown as follow:
Info
Settings in this page only applied to LAN port but not WAN port.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Click it to enable VLAN configuration.
LAN
P1 – P4– Check the LAN port(s) to group them under the
selected VLAN.
Note: P5 is supported only for Non-Fiber series.
Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)
SSID1 – SSID4 – Check the SSID boxes to group them under the
selected VLAN.
Wireless LAN (5GHz)
SSID1 – SSID4 – Check the SSID boxes to group them under the
selected VLAN.
This option is only available for Vigor2926ac / Vigor2926Vac /
Vigor2926Lac.
Subnet
136
Choose one of them to make the selected VLAN mapping to
the specified subnet only. For example, LAN1 is specified for
VLAN0. It means that PCs grouped under VLAN0 can get the
IP address(es) that specified by the subnet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VLAN Tag
Enable – Check the box to enable the function of VLAN with
tag.
The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on
the LAN while sending them out.
Please type the tag value and specify the priority for the
packets sending by LAN.
VID – Enter the value as the VLAN ID number. The range is
form 0 to 4095. VIDs must be unique.
Priority – Valid values are from 0 to 7, where 1 has the
lowest priority, followed by 0, and finally from 2 to 7 in
increasing order of priority.
Permit untagged device in
P1 to access router
Info
Select to allow untagged hosts connected to LAN port P1 to
access the router. In case you have incorrectly configured
VLAN functionality, you will still be able to access the router
via the Web UI, and telnet and SSH shells to adjust the
configuration.
Leave one VLAN untagged at least to prevent from not connecting to Vigor
router due to unexpected error.
Inter-LAN Routing
The Vigor router supports up to 16 VLANs. Each VLAN can be set up to use one or more of the
Ethernet ports and wireless LAN Service Set Identifiers (SSIDs). Within the grid of VLANs
(horizontal rows) and LAN interfaces (vertical columns),

all hosts within the same VLAN (horizontal row) are visible to one another

all hosts connected to the same LAN or WLAN interface (vertical column) are visible to
one another if
- they belong to the same VLAN, or
- they belong to different VLANs, and inter-LAN routing (LAN>>General Setup) between
them is enabled (see below).
Inter-LAN Routing allows different LAN subnets to be interconnected or isolated. It is
only available when the VLAN functionality is enabled. In the Inter-LAN Routing matrix,
a selected checkbox means that the 2 intersecting LANs can communicate with each
other.
Vigor2926 series features a hugely flexible VLAN system. In its simplest form, each of the
Gigabit LAN ports can be isolated from each other, for example to feed different companies
or departments but keeping their local traffic completely separated.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
137
Configuring port-based VLAN for wireless and non-wireless clients
138
1.
All the wire network clients are categorized to group VLAN0 in subnet 192.168.1.0/24
(LAN1).
2.
All the wireless network clients are categorized to group VLAN1 in subnet
192.168.2.0/24 (LAN2).
3.
Open LAN>>VLAN Configuration. Check the boxes according to the statement in step 1
and Step 2.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Open LAN>>General Setup. If you want to let the clients in both groups communicate
with each other, simply activate Inter-LAN Routing by checking the box between LAN1
and LAN2.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Vigor router supports up to six private IP subnets on LAN. Each can be independent
(isolated) or common (able to communicate with each other). This is ideal for
departmental or multi-occupancy applications.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
As for the VLAN applications, refer to “Appendix I: VLAN Application on
Vigor Router” for more detailed information.
139
II-2-3 Bind IP to MAC
This function is used to bind the IP and MAC address in LAN to have a strengthening control in
network. With the Bind IP to MAC feature you can reserve LAN IP addresses for LAN clients.
Each reserved IP address is associated with a Media Access Control (MAC) address.
Click LAN and click Bind IP to MAC to open the setup page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
140
Item
Description
Enable
Click this radio button to invoke this function. However,
IP/MAC which is not listed in IP Bind List also can connect to
Internet.
Disable
Click this radio button to disable this function. All the
settings on this page will be invalid.
Strict Bind
Check the box to block the connection of the IP/MAC which is
not listed in IP Bind List.
LAN clients will be assigned IP addresses according to the
MAC-to-IP address associations on this page. LAN client
whose MAC address has not been bound to an IP address will
be denied network access.
Note: Before selecting Strict Bind, make sure at least one
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
valid MAC address has been bound to an IP address.
Otherwise no LAN clients will have network access, and it
will not be possible to connect to the router to make changes
to its configuration.
Apply Strict Bind to Subnet – Choose the subnet(s) for
applying the rules of Bind IP to MAC.
ARP Table
This table is the LAN ARP table of this router. The
information for IP and MAC will be displayed in this field.
Each pair of IP and MAC address listed in ARP table can be
selected and added to IP Bind List by clicking Add below.
Select All
Select all entries in the ARP Table for manipulation.
Sort
Reorder the entry based on the IP address.
Refresh
Refresh the ARP table listed below to obtain the newest ARP
table information.
Add/Update to IP Bind List
IP Address – Enter the IP address to be associated with a
MAC address.
Mac Address – Enter the MAC address of the LAN client’s
network interface.
Comment – Type a brief description for the entry.
Add
It allows you to add the one you choose from the ARP table or
the IP/MAC address typed in Add and Edit to the table of IP
Bind List.
Update
It allows you to edit and modify the selected IP address and
MAC address that you create before.
Delete
You can remove any item listed in IP Bind List. Simply click
and select the one, and click Delete. The selected item will
be removed from the IP Bind List.
IP Bind List
It displays a list for the IP bind to MAC information.
Backup IP Bind List
Click Backup and enter a filename to back up IP Bind List to a
file.
Upload From File
Click Browse… to select an IP Bind List backup file. Click
Restore to restore the backup and overwrite the existing
list.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
141
Info
Before you select Strict Bind, you have to bind one set of IP/MAC address for
one PC. If not, no one of the PCs can access into Internet. And the web user
interface of the router might not be accessed.
When you finish the configuration, click OK to save the settings.
142
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-2-4 LAN Port Mirror
The LAN Port Mirror function allows network traffic of select LAN ports to be forwarded to
another LAN port for analysis. This is useful for enforcing policies, detecting unauthorized
access, monitoring network performance, etc.
Select LAN>>LAN Port Mirror from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the LAN Port
Mirror configuration page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Port Mirror
Enables or disables LAN Port Mirroring.
Mirror Port
One and only one port is selected as the mirror port, to
which traffic is to be forwarded.
Mirrored Tx Port
Port(s) whose outbound traffic will be forwarded to the
mirror port.
Mirrored Rx Port
Port(s) whose inbound traffic will be forwarded to the mirror
port.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
143
II-2-5 Wired 802.1x
Wired 802.1X provides authentication for clients wishing to connect to the LAN by Ethernet.
Only one client can be authenticated on each LAN port.
Select LAN>>Wired 802.1X from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the Wired 802.1X
configuration page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check the box to enable LAN 802.1x function.
Authentication Type
External RADIUS - An external RADIUS server is to be used
for 802.1X authentication. Go to Applications >> RADIUS /
TACACS+>>External RADIUS to specify the RADIUS server.
Local 802.1X - Use the user database on the router to
authenticate clients. Go to User Management >> User
Profile to set up users by entering user names, passwords
and ensure that Local 802.1X service is enabled for the
profiles.
802.1x ports
802.1X authentication will be available for the selected LAN
ports.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
144
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-3 Hardware Acceleration
Hardware Acceleration is also called PPA in DrayTek for it is based on Protocol Processing
Engine (PPE) of Infineon. It can only support 128 sessions for network traffic (IN & OUT) with
implementing three kinds of modes - Disable, Auto and Manual.
II-3-1 Setup
When the data traffic is heavy and data transmission is getting slowly and slowly, you can
configure this page to accelerate the data streaming by hardware itself. Open Hardware
Acceleration to access into the following page:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Mode
Disable – The default setting.
Auto - When the hardware acceleration is configured with
the Auto mode, the sessions with the heaviest loading and
the lower latency traffic will be added into PPA. However,
the Auto mode does not support UDP protocol by designed.
Manual - The Manual mode implements three sub-items-Accelerate most heavy traffic sessions, Apply the Class Rule
in Quality of Service, and Specific Hosts. Each of these
sub-items can support TCP and UDP protocol.
Protocol
There are two types supported by this function, TCP and
UDP.
Option
Accelerate heaviest traffic sessions – Such option is
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
145
available in Auto Mode, too. But the UDP protocol is only
supported in this sub-item.
Specific Hosts – This sub-item provides 5 hosts for adding
NAT sessions into the PPA. For the PPA only supports 128
sessions, these hosts will share these sessions. Therefore,
the performance will be lower than only one host.
Choose this option to specify certain PCs on LAN to apply the
hardware acceleration.

Enable – Check the box to make PC(s) specified in the
selected index entry to be applied.

Dest Port Start – Enter the starting port for the PC(s) in
LAN.

Dest Port End – Enter the ending port for the PC(s) in
LAN.

Private IP/Choose PC – Enter the IP address as the
selected host. Or click the Choose PC button to specify
one IP address from the pop-up window.
Checking the PPA status
For checking whether the rule of PPA is working or not, a user can login to Vigor2926 series by
using telnet. User can view how many sessions are transferring in each direction of PPA table
after entering “ppa –v”.
146
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-4 NAT
Usually, the router serves as an NAT (Network Address Translation) router. NAT is a
mechanism that one or more private IP addresses can be mapped into a single public one.
Public IP address is usually assigned by your ISP, for which you may get charged. Private IP
addresses are recognized only among internal hosts.
When the outgoing packets destined to some public server on the Internet reach the NAT
router, the router will change its source address into the public IP address of the router,
select the available public port, and then forward it. At the same time, the router shall list an
entry in a table to memorize this address/port-mapping relationship. When the public server
response, the incoming traffic, of course, is destined to the router’s public IP address and the
router will do the inversion based on its table. Therefore, the internal host can communicate
with external host smoothly.
The benefit of the NAT includes:

Save cost on applying public IP address and apply efficient usage of IP address. NAT
allows the internal IP addresses of local hosts to be translated into one public IP address,
thus you can have only one IP address on behalf of the entire internal hosts.

Enhance security of the internal network by obscuring the IP address. There are
many attacks aiming victims based on the IP address. Since the attacker cannot be
aware of any private IP addresses, the NAT function can protect the internal network.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
On NAT page, you will see the private IP address defined in RFC-1918.
Usually we use the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet for the router. As stated before,
the NAT facility can map one or more IP addresses and/or service ports into
different specified services. In other words, the NAT function can be
achieved by using port mapping methods.
147
Web User Interface
II-4-1 Port Redirection
Port Redirection is usually set up for server related service inside the local network (LAN),
such as web servers, FTP servers, E-mail servers etc. Most of the case, you need a public IP
address for each server and this public IP address/domain name are recognized by all users.
Since the server is actually located inside the LAN, the network well protected by NAT of the
router, and identified by its private IP address/port, the goal of Port Redirection function is
to forward all access request with public IP address from external users to the mapping
private IP address/port of the server.
The port redirection can only apply to incoming traffic.
To use this function, please go to NAT page and choose Port Redirection web page. The Port
Redirection Table provides 40 port-mapping entries for the internal hosts.
148
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Each item is explained as follows:
Item
Description
Index
Display the number of the profile.
Enable
Check the box to enable the port redirection profile.
Service Name
Display the description of the specific network service.
WAN Interface
Display the WAN IP address used by the profile.
Protocol
Display the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
Public Port
Display the port number which will be redirected to the
specified Private IP and Port of the internal host.
Source IP
Display the IP object of the source IP.
Private IP
Display the IP address of the internal host providing the
service.
Press any number under Index to access into next page for configuring port redirection.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
149
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check this box to enable such port redirection setting.
Mode
Two options (Single and Range) are provided here for you to
choose. To set a range for the specific service, select Range.
In Range mode, if the public port (start port and end port)
and the starting IP of private IP had been entered, the
system will calculate and display the ending IP of private IP
automatically.
Service Name
Enter the description of the specific network service.
Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
WAN Interface
Select the WAN IP used for port redirection. There are eight
WAN IP alias that can be selected and used for port
redirection.
The default setting is All which means all the incoming data
from any port will be redirected to all intefaces.
Public Port
Specify which port can be redirected to the specified Private
IP and Port of the internal host. If you choose Range as the
port redirection mode, you will see two boxes on this field.
Enter the required number on the first box (as the starting
port) and the second box (as the ending port).
Source IP
Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP
Object link to create a new one for applying.
Private IP
Specify the private IP address of the internal host providing
the service. If you choose Range as the port redirection
mode, you will see two boxes on this field. Type a complete
IP address in the first box (as the starting point). The second
one will be assigned automatically later.
Private Port
Specify the private port number of the service offered by the
internal host.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
150
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Note that the router has its own built-in services (servers) such as Telnet, HTTP and FTP etc.
Since the common port numbers of these services (servers) are all the same, you may need to
reset the router in order to avoid confliction.
For example, the built-in web user interface in the router is with default port 80, which may
conflict with the web server in the local network, http://192.168.1.13:80. Therefore, you
need to change the router’s http port to any one other than the default port 80 to avoid
conflict, such as 8080. This can be set in the System Maintenance >>Management Setup. You
then will access the admin screen of by suffixing the IP address with 8080, e.g.,
http://192.168.1.1:8080 instead of port 80.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
151
II-4-2 DMZ Host
As mentioned above, Port Redirection can redirect incoming TCP/UDP or other traffic on
particular ports to the specific private IP address/port of host in the LAN. However, other IP
protocols, for example Protocols 50 (ESP) and 51 (AH), do not travel on a fixed port. Vigor
router provides a facility DMZ Host that maps ALL unsolicited data on any protocol to a single
host in the LAN. Regular web surfing and other such Internet activities from other clients will
continue to work without inappropriate interruption. DMZ Host allows a defined internal user
to be totally exposed to the Internet, which usually helps some special applications such as
Netmeeting or Internet Games etc.
The security properties of NAT are somewhat bypassed if you set up DMZ host. We suggest
you to add additional filter rules or a secondary firewall.
Click DMZ Host to open the following page. You can set different DMZ host for each WAN
interface. Click the WAN tab to switch into the configuration page for that WAN.
152
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
WAN1
Choose Private IP or None first.
Private IP
Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose
IP to select one.
Choose IP
Click this button and then a window will automatically pop
up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private
IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one
private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
When you have selected one private IP from the above dialog,
the IP address will be shown on the following screen. Click OK
to save the setting.
DMZ Host for WAN2, WAN3, LTE or WAN4 is slightly different with WAN1.
See the following figure.
If you previously have set up WAN Alias for PPPoE or Static or Dynamic IP mode in WAN2
interface, you will find them in Aux. WAN IP for your selection.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
153
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check to enable the DMZ Host function.
Private IP
Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose
IP to select one.
Choose IP
Click this button and then a window will automatically pop
up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of
private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select
one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
When you have selected one private IP from the above
dialog, the IP address will be shown on the screen. Click OK
to save the setting.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
154
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-4-3 Open Ports
Open Ports allows you to open a range of ports for the traffic of special applications.
Common application of Open Ports includes P2P application (e.g., BT, KaZaA, Gnutella,
WinMX, eMule and others), Internet Camera etc. Ensure that you keep the application
involved up-to-date to avoid falling victim to any security exploits.
Click Open Ports to open the following page:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Index
Indicate the relative number for the particular entry that you
want to offer service in a local host. You should click the
appropriate index number to edit or clear the corresponding
entry.
Enable
Check the box to enable the open port profile.
Comment
Specify the name for the defined network service.
WAN Interface
Display the WAN interface used by such index.
Aux. WAN IP
Display the IP alias setting used by such index. If no IP alias
setting exists, such field will not appear.
Source IP
Display the IP object of the source IP.
Local IP Address
Display the private IP address of the local host offering the
service.
Status
Display the state for the corresponding entry. X or V is to
represent the Inactive or Active state.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
155
To add or edit port settings, click one index number on the page. The index entry setup page
will pop up. In each index entry, you can specify 10 port ranges for diverse services.
Available settings are explained as follows:
156
Item
Description
Enable Open Ports
Check to enable this entry.
Comment
Make a name for the defined network application/service.
WAN Interface
Specify the WAN interface that will be used for this entry.
Source IP
Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP
Object link to create a new one for applying.
WAN IP
Specify the WAN IP address that will be used for this entry.
This setting is available when WAN IP Alias is configured.
Private IP
Enter the private IP address of the local host or click Choose
IP to select one.
Choose IP - Click this button and, subsequently, a window
having a list of private IP addresses of local hosts will
automatically pop up. Select the appropriate IP address of
the local host in the list.
Protocol
Specify the transport layer protocol. It could be TCP, UDP,
or ----- (none) for selection.
Start Port
Specify the starting port number of the service offered by
the local host.
End Port
Specify the ending port number of the service offered by the
local host.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
II-4-4 Port Triggering
Port Triggering is a variation of open ports function.
The key difference between "open port" and "port triggering" is:

Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "open port" keeps
the ports opened forever.

Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "port triggering"
will only attempt to open the ports once the triggering conditions are met.

The duration that these ports are opened depends on the type of protocol used. The
"default" durations are shown below and these duration values can be modified via
telnet commands.
TCP: 86400 sec.
UDP: 180 sec.
IGMP: 10 sec.
TCP WWW: 60 sec.
TCP SYN: 60 sec.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
157
Item
Description
Index
Indicate the relative number for the port triggering profile.
You should click the appropriate index number to edit or
clear the corresponding entry.
Enable
Check the box to enable the Port Triggering profile.
Comment
Display the text which memorizes the application of this
rule.
Triggering Protocol
Display the protocol of the triggering packets.
Source IP
Display the name of the IP object.
Triggering Port
Display the port of the triggering packets.
Incoming Protocol
Display the protocol for the incoming data of such triggering
profile.
Incoming Port
Display the port for the incoming data of such triggering
profile.
Click the index number link to open the configuration page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
158
Item
Description
Enable
Check to enable this entry.
Service
Choose the predefined service to apply for such trigger
profile.
Comment
Enter the text to memorize the application of this rule.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Source IP
Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP
Object link to create a new one for applying.
Triggering Protocol
Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for such
triggering profile.
Triggering Port
Enter the port or port range for such triggering profile.
Incoming Protocol
When the triggering packets received, it is expected the
incoming packets will use the selected protocol. Select the
protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for the incoming data of
such triggering profile.
Incoming Port
Enter the port or port range for the incoming packets.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
II-4-5 ALG
ALG means Application Layer Gateway. There are two methods provided by Vigor router,
RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) ALG and SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) ALG, for
processing the packets of voice and video.
RTSP ALG makes RTSP message, RTCP message, and RTP packets of voice and video be
transmitted and received correctly via NAT by Vigor router.
However, SIP ALG makes SIP message and RTP packets of voice be transmitted and received
correctly via NAT by Vigor router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable ALG
Check to enable such function.
Listen Port
Type a port number for SIP or RTSP protocol.
TCP
Check the box to make correspond protocol message packet
from TCP transmit and receive via NAT.
UDP
Check the box to make correspond protocol message packet
from UDP transmit and receive via NAT.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
159
II-5 Applications
Dynamic DNS
The ISP often provides you with a dynamic IP address when you connect to the Internet via
your ISP. It means that the public IP address assigned to your router changes each time you
access the Internet. The Dynamic DNS feature lets you assign a domain name to a dynamic
WAN IP address. It allows the router to update its online WAN IP address mappings on the
specified Dynamic DNS server. Once the router is online, you will be able to use the registered
domain name to access the router or internal virtual servers from the Internet. It is
particularly helpful if you host a web server, FTP server, or other server behind the router.
Before you use the Dynamic DNS feature, you have to apply for free DDNS service to the DDNS
service providers. The router provides up to three accounts from three different DDNS service
providers. Basically, Vigor routers are compatible with the DDNS services supplied by most
popular DDNS service providers such as www.dyndns.org, www.no-ip.com, www.dtdns.com,
www.changeip.com, www.dynamic- nameserver.com. You should visit their websites to
register your own domain name for the router.
LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding
The LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the
network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can
specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is
adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor2926 series will
respond the specified private IP address.
Schedule
The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by
means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to
dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so
that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The
schedule is also applicable to other functions.
RADIUS/TACACS+
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication
client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is
widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating
and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.
The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a
wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables
centralized remote access authentication for network management.
LDAP /Active Directory Setup
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a communication protocol for using in TCP/IP
network. It defines the methods to access distributing directory server by clients, work on
directory and share the information in the directory by clients. The LDAP standard is
established by the work team of Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
As the name described, LDAP is designed as an effect way to access directory service without
the complexity of other directory service protocols. For LDAP is defined to perform, inquire
and modify the information within the directory, and acquire the data in the directory
securely, therefore users can apply LDAP to search or list the directory object, inquire or
manage the active directory.
160
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
UPnP
The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected
devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly
connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers,
the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside
the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.
Wake on LAN
A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up
a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC
on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router.
In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way,
WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
161
Web User Interface
II-5-1 Dynamic DNS
Enable the Function and Add a Dynamic DNS Account
1.
Assume you have a registered domain name from the DDNS provider, say
hostname.dyndns.org, and an account with username: test and password: test.
2.
Open Applications>>Dynamic DNS.
3.
In the DDNS setup menu, check Enable Dynamic DNS Setup.
Available settings are explained as follows:
162
Item
Description
Enable Dynamic DNS
Setup
Check this box to enable DDNS function.
Set to Factory
Default
Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
4.
View Log
Display DDNS log status.
Force Update
Force the router updates its information to DDNS server.
Auto-Update
interval
Set the time for the router to perform auto update for DDNS
service.
Index
Click the number below Index to access into the setting page
of DDNS setup to set account(s).
Enable
Check the box to enable such account.
WAN Interface
Display the WAN interface used.
Domain Name
Display the domain name that you set on the setting page of
DDNS setup.
Select Index number 1 to add an account for the router. Check Enable Dynamic DNS
Account, and choose correct Service Provider: dyndns.org, type the registered
hostname: hostname and domain name suffix: dyndns.org in the Domain Name block.
The following two blocks should be typed your account Login Name: test and Password:
test.
If User-Defined is specified as the service provider, the web page will be changed
slightly as follows:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
163
Available settings are explained as follows:
164
Item
Description
Enable Dynamic DNS
Account
Check this box to enable the current account. If you did
check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the
Active column of the previous web page in step 2).
WAN Interface
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 First - While connecting,
the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 as the
first channel for such account. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE
/WAN4 fails, the router will use another WAN interface
instead.
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 Only - While connecting,
the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 as the
only channel for such account.
Service Provider
Select the service provider for the DDNS account.
Service Type
Select a service type (Dynamic, Custom or Static). If you
choose Custom, you can modify the domain that is chosen in
the Domain Name field.
Note that such option is not available when User-Defined is
selected as Service Provider.
Domain Name
Type in one domain name that you applied previously. Use
the drop down list to choose the desired domain.
Note that such option is not available when User-Defined is
selected as Service Provider.
Provider Host
Enter the IP address or the domain name of the host which
provides related service.
Note that such option is available when User-Defined is
selected as Service Provider.
Service API
Enter the API information obtained from DDNS server.
Note that such option is available when User-Defined is
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
selected as Service Provider.
(e.g:
/dynamic/dns/update.asp?u=jo***&p=jo********&hostname=j*
***.changeip.org&ip=###IP### &cmd=update&offline=0)
5.
Auth Type
Two types can be used for authentication.
Basic – Username and password defined later can be shown
from the packets captured.
URL - Username and password defined later can be shown in
URL.
(e.g., http://ns1.vigorddns.com/ddns.php?username=xxxx&
password=xxxx&domain=xxxx.vigorddns.com)
Note that such option is available when User-Defined is
selected as Service Provider.
Connection Type
There are two connection types (HTTP and HTTPs) to be
specified. Note that such option is available when
Customized is selected as Service Provider.
Server Response
Type any text that you want to receive from the DDNS
server.
Note that such option is available when User-Defined is
selected as Service Provider.
Login Name
Type in the login name that you set for applying domain.
Password
Type in the password that you set for applying domain.
Wildcard and
Backup MX
The Wildcard and Backup MX (Mail Exchange) features are
not supported for all Dynamic DNS providers. You could get
more detailed information from their websites.
Mail Extender
If the mail server is defined with another name, please type
the name in this area. Such mail server will be used as
backup mail exchange.
Determine Real
WAN IP
If a Vigor router is installed behind any NAT router, you can
enable such function to locate the real WAN IP.
When the WAN IP used by Vigor router is private IP, this
function can detect the public IP used by the NAT router and
use the detected IP address for DDNS update.
There are two methods offered for you to choose:

WAN IP - If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router
is private, DDNS update will take place right away.

Internet IP – If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor
router is private, it will be converted to public IP
before DDNS update takes place.
Click OK button to activate the settings. You will see your setting has been saved.
DrayDDNS Settings
DrayDDNS, a new DDNS service developed by DrayTek, can record multiple WAN IP (IPv4) on
single domain name. It is convenient for users to use and easily to set up. Each Vigor Router is
available to register one domain name.
Choose DrayTek Global as the service provider, the web page will be displayed as follows:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
165
Available settings are explained as follows:
166
Item
Description
Enable Dynamic DNS
Account
Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the
box, you will see a check mark appeared on the Active column of
the previous web page in step 2).
Service Provider
Choose DrayTek Global as the service provider.
Wizard – This button is available when DrayTek Global is selected as
Service Provider. To activate the DrayTek’s DDNS service, click it to
enable license issued by DrayTek through Wizards>>Service
Activation Wizard.
Refer to secion A-1 How to use DrayDDNS? for detailed
information.
Status
Display if the license is actvtaed or not.
Determine WAN IP
If a Vigor router is installed behind any NAT router, you can enable
such function to locate the real WAN IP.
When the WAN IP used by Vigor router is private IP, this function
can detect the public IP used by the NAT router and use the
detected IP address for DDNS update.
There are two methods offered for you to choose:

WAN IP - If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router is
private, DDNS update will take place right away.

Internet IP – If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router is
private, it will be converted to public IP before DDNS update
takes place.
WAN Interfaces
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 First - While connecting, the
router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 as the first
channel for such account. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4
fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 Only - While connecting, the
router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 as the only
channel for such account.
Let’s Encrypt
certificate
Create – Click it to generate a certificate issued by Let’s Encrypt for
applying to such DDNS account.
Auto Update – Check the box to make the system update the
certificate automatically.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Disable the Function and Clear all Dynamic DNS Accounts
Uncheck Enable Dynamic DNS Setup, and click Clear All button to disable the function and
clear all accounts from the router.
Delete a Dynamic DNS Account
Click the Index number you want to delete and then click Clear All button to delete the
account.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
167
II-5-2 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding
The LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the
network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can
specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is
adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor2926 series will
respond the specified private IP address.
Simply click Application>>LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding to open the following page.
Each item is explained as follows:
168
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.
Index
Click the number below Index to access into the setting
page.
Enable
Check the box to enable the selected profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Profile
Display the name of the LAN DNS profile.
Domain Name
Display the domain name of the LAN DNS profile.
Forwarding
Display that such profile is conditional DNS forwarding or
not.
DNS Server
Display the IP addres of the DNS Server.
To create a LAN DNS profile:
1.
Click any index, say Index No. 1.
2.
The detailed settings with index 1 are shown below.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check this box to enable such profile.
Profile
Type a name for such profile.
Note: If you type a name here for LAN DNS and click OK to
save the configuration, the name also will be applied to
conditional DNS forwarding automatically.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name for such profile.
IP Address List
The IP address listed here will be used for mapping with the
domain name specified above. In general, one domain name
maps with one IP address. If required, you can configure two
IP addresses mapping with the same domain name.
Add – Click it to open a dialog to type the host’s IP address.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
169

Only use this record…. – Different LAN PCs can share
the same domain name. However, you have to check
this box to make the router identify & respond the IP
address for the DNS query coming from different LAN
PC.
Delete – Click it to remove an existed IP address on the list.
3.
Click OK button to save the settings.
4.
If you need to configure LAN DNS settings, click index 1 to edit the LAN DNS profile just
created. Or, you can click index 2 to use this profile as conditional DNS forwarding.
Available settings are explained as follows:
170
Item
Description
Enable
Check this box to enable such profile.
Profile
Type a name for such profile.
Note: If you type a name here for conditional DNS forwarding
and click OK to save the configuration, the name also will be
applied to LAN DNS automatically.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name for such profile.
DNS Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the DNS server you want to use for
DNS forwarding.
5.
Click OK button to save the settings.
6.
A new LAN DNS profile has been created.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-5-3 DNS Security
DNS security is able to ensure that the incoming data is not falsified and the source of the
data is secure and correct to prevent from DNS attack by someone.
II-5-3-1 General Setup
All of WAN interfaces of Vigor router can be configured with DNS Security enabled
respectively.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Interface
There are four WAN interfaces allowed to be set with DNS
security enabled.
Enable
Check the box to enable the DNS security management.
Primary DNS
Display the IP address of primary DNS obtained from DHCP
server or specified by Static WAN.
Secondary DNS
Display the IP address of secondary DNS obtained from DHCP
server or specified by Static WAN.
Bogus DNS Reply
Sometime, Vigor router might encounter packets from bogus
DNS inquiry. There are two ways to reply such DNS inquiry.
Drop – Discard the packets.
Pass – Accept the packets and let them pass through Vigor
router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
171
II-5-3-2 Domain Diagnose
This page is used to configure settings for manually detecting if the domain is secure not.
Available settings are explained as follows:
172
Item
Description
Domain
Enter the domain name or IP address (IPv4/IPv6) that you
want to query.
Interface
Specify the interface required for executing diagnose.
DNS Server
Enter the IP address of the DNS Server which will diagnose
the domain specified above.
Diagnose
Click it to perform the diagnosis for the domain.
Result
The diagnosed information will be displayed on such field.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-5-4 Schedule
The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by
means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to
dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so
that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The
schedule is also applicable to other functions.
You have to set your time before set schedule. In System Maintenance>> Time and Date
menu, press Inquire Time button to set the Vigor router’s clock to current time of your PC.
The clock will reset once if you power down or reset the router. There is another way to set
up time. You can inquiry an NTP server (a time server) on the Internet to synchronize the
router’s clock. This method can only be applied when the WAN connection has been built up.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Current System Time
Display the time Vigor router used.
System time set
Click it to acess into the time setup page (System
Maintenance>>Time and Date).
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.
Index
Click the index number link to access into the setting page of
schedule.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
173
Enable
Click the box to enable such schedule profile.
Comment
Display the name of the time schedule.
Time
Display the valid time period by time bar.
Frequency
Display which day(s) will be always on and which day(s) will
be always off of the schedule profile by color boxes.
- If it lights in green, it means such schedule is active.
You can set up to 15 schedules. Then you can apply them to your Internet Access or VPN and
Remote Access >> LAN-to-LAN settings.
To add a schedule:
1.
Click any index, say Index No. 1.
2.
The detailed settings of the schedule with index 1 will be shown below.
Available settings are explained as follows:
174
Item
Description
Enable Schedule
Setup
Check to enable the schedule.
Comment
Type a short description for such schedule.
Start Date
(yyyy-mm-dd)
Specify the starting date of the schedule.
Start Time (hh:mm)
Specify the starting time of the schedule.
Duration Time
(hh:mm)
Specify the duration (or period) for the schedule.
End Time (hh:mm)
It will be calculated automatically when Start Time and
Duration Time are configured well.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Action
Specify which action should be applied during the period of
the schedule.
Force On -Force the connection to be always on.
Force Down -Force the connection to be always down.
How Often
Specify how often the schedule will be applied.


Cycle duration
3.
Once -The schedule will be applied just once
Weekdays -Specify which days in one week should
perform the schedule.
Specify the days to reset the traffic record. For example, 7
means the whole cycle is 7 days; 20 means the whole cycle is
20 days. When the time is up, the router will reset the traffic
record automatically.
Click OK button to save the settings.
Example
Suppose you want to control the PPPoE Internet access connection to be always on (Force On)
from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week. Other time the Internet access connection should be
disconnected (Force Down).
Office
Hour:
(Force On)
Mon - Sun
9:00 am
to
6:00 pm
1.
Make sure the PPPoE connection and Time Setup is working properly.
2.
Configure the PPPoE always on from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week.
3.
Configure the Force Down from 18:00 to next day 9:00 for whole week.
4.
Assign these two profiles to the PPPoE Internet access profile. Now, the PPPoE Internet
connection will follow the schedule order to perform Force On or Force Down action
according to the time plan that has been pre-defined in the schedule profiles.
II-5-5 RADIUS/TACACS+
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication
client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is
widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating
and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.
II-5-5-1 External RADIUS
The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a
wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables
centralized remote access authentication for network management.
Vigor router can be operated as a RADIUS client. This web page is used to configure settings
for external RADIUS server. Then LAN users of Vigor router will be authenticated and
accounted by such server for network application.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
175
Available settings are explained as follows:
176
Item
Description
Enable
Check to enable RADIUS client feature.
Comments
Enter a brief description.
Primary Server
Primary Server - Enter the IP address of RADIUS server.
Secret - The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is
used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both
sides must be configured to use the same shared secret. The
maximum length of the shared secret you can set is 36
characters.
Authentication Port - The UDP port number that the RADIUS
server is using. The default value is 1812, based on RFC 2138.
Retry - Enter a times number for sending the access request
to the RADIUS server. When reaching the threshold of retry
number, Vigor system will switch and send the request to the
other RADIUS server (e.g., secondary server).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Secondary Server
Secondary Server - Enter the IP address of RADIUS server.
Secret - The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is
used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both
sides must be configured to use the same shared secret. The
maximum length of the shared secret you can set is 36
characters.
Authentication Port - The UDP port number that the RADIUS
server is using. The default value is 1812, based on RFC 2138.
Retry - Enter a times number for sending the access request
to the RADIUS server. When reaching the threshold of retry
number, Vigor system will switch and send the request to the
primary RADIUS server.
RADIUS Server Status Log
Display the record of current status of RADIUS server.
After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings.
II-5-5-2 Internal RADIUS
Except for being a built-in RADIUS client, Vigor router also can be operated as a RADIUS server
which performs security authentication by itself. This page is used to configure settings for
internal RADIUS server. Then LAN user of Vigor router will be authenticated by Vigor router
directly.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
177
Available settings are explained as follows:
178
Item
Description
Enable
Check to enable internal RADIUS client feature.
Authentication Port
Set a port number for internal RADIUS server.
RADIUS Client Access List
Allow to configure that clients under specified domain (IPv4
and IPv6) must be authenticated with the specified shared
secret.
Enable - Check to enable RADIUS client feature.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Shared Secret - The RADIUS server and client share a secret
that is used to authenticate the messages sent between
them. Both sides must be configured to use the same shared
secret. The maximum length of the shared secret you can set
is 36 characters.
IP Address – Enter the IP addres of the wired/wireless
client.
IP Mask – Enter the subnet mask required for the IP address.
IPv6 Address – Enter the IPv6 address of the wired/wireless
client.
IPv6 Length - Enter the prefix length required for the IPv6
address.
Authentication
Specify the way to authenticate the wireless client.
PAP Only / PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 – Choose PAP
Only. Or choose the one which supports PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP
and MS-CHAPv2.
Support 802.1X Method – The built in RADIUS server offered
by Vigor router can act as the AAA server. Check the box to
enable the function of authentication mechanism.
User Profile
During the process of security authentication, user account
and user password will be required for identity
authentication. Before configuring such page, create at least
one user profile in User Management>>User Profile first.
Select All – Click it to select all of the user profiles in
Available List.
Clear All- Click to remove all of the user profiles in Available
List.
Available List – User profiles that have not been added to the
authentication list.
Authentication List – User profiles that have not been added
to the authentication list.
Synchronize Internal
RADIUS user list to Local
802.1X user list
Users can be authenticated by RADIUS server and local
802.1X to get certain network service. It is not necessary to
create new user profiles (containing user accounts and user
passwords) for RADIUS and local 802.1X respectively.
Simply check this box; all of the user profiles (prepared for
RADIUS server authentication) listed in Authentication List
will be synchronized for local 802.1X user authentication.
After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
179
II-5-5-3 External TACACS+
It means Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Plus. It works like RADIUS does.
Click the External TACACS+ tab to open the following page:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check to enable TACACS+ feature.
Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of TACACS+ server.
Destination Port
The UDP port number that the TACACS+ server is using.
Shared Secret
The TACACS+ server and client share a secret that is used to
authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides
must be configured to use the same shared secret.
Confirm Shared Secret
Re-type the Shared Secret for confirmation.
After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings.
180
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-5-6 Active Directory/LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a communication protocol for using in TCP/IP
network. It defines the methods to access distributing directory server by clients, work on
directory and share the information in the directory by clients. The LDAP standard is
established by the work team of Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
As the name described, LDAP is designed as an effect way to access directory service without
the complexity of other directory service protocols. For LDAP is defined to perform, inquire
and modify the information within the directory, and acquire the data in the directory
securely, therefore users can apply LDAP to search or list the directory object, inquire or
manage the active directory.
II-5-6-1 General Setup
This page allows you to enable the function and specify general settings for LDAP server.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check to enable such function.
Bind Type
There are three types of bind type supported.

Simple Mode – Just simply do the bind authentication
without any search action.

Anonymous – Perform a search action first with
Anonymous account then do the bind authentication.

Regular Mode– Mostly it is the same with anonymous
mode. The different is that, the server will firstly check
if you have the search authority.
For the regular mode, you’ll need to type in the Regular DN
and Regular Password.
Server Address
Enter the IP address of LDAP server.
Destination Port
Type a port number as the destination port for LDAP server.
Regular DN
Type this setting if Regular Mode is selected as Bind Type.
Regular Password
Specify a password if Regular Mode is selected as Bind Type.
After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
181
II-5-6-2 Active Directory / LDAP Profiles
You can configure eight AD/LDAP profiles. These profiles would be used with User
Management for different purposes in management.
Click any index number link to open the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for such profile. The length of the user name is
limited to 19 characters.
Common Name Identifier
Type or edit the common name identifier for the LDAP server.
The common name identifier for most LDAP server is “cn”.
Additional Filter
Enter the condition for additional filter.
Base Distinguished Name
/ Group Distinguished
Name
Type or edit the distinguished name used to look up entries on
the LDAP server.
Sometimes, you may forget the Distinguished Name since it’s
button to list all the
too long. Then you may click the
account information on the AD/LDAP Server to assist you finish
the setup.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save and exit this page. A new profile has been
created.
182
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-5-7 UPnP
The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected
devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly
connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers,
the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside
the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.
Info
UPnP is required for some applications such as PPS, Skype, eMule...and etc.
If you are not familiar with UPnP, it is suggested to turn off this function for
security.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable UPNP Service
Accordingly, you can enable either the Connection Control
Service or Connection Status Service.
Default WAN
It is used to specify the WAN interface for applying such
function.
The reminder as regards concern about Firewall and UPnP:
Can't work with Firewall Software
Enabling firewall applications on your PC may cause the UPnP function not working properly.
This is because these applications will block the accessing ability of some network ports.
Security Considerations
Activating the UPnP function on your network may incur some security threats. You should
consider carefully these risks before activating the UPnP function.

Some Microsoft operating systems have found out the UPnP weaknesses and hence you
need to ensure that you have applied the latest service packs and patches.

Non-privileged users can control some router functions, including removing and adding
port mappings.
The UPnP function dynamically adds port mappings on behalf of some UPnP-aware
applications. When the applications terminate abnormally, these mappings may not be
removed.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
183
II-5-8 IGMP
IGMP is the abbreviation of Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communication
protocol which is mainly used for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
groups.
II-5-8-1 General Setting
Available settings are explained as follows:
184
Item
Description
IGMP Proxy
Check this box to enable this function. The application of
multicast will be executed through WAN /PVC/VLAN port.
In addition, such function is available in NAT mode.
Interface – Specify an interface for packets passing
through.
IGMP version – At present, two versions (v2 and v3) are
supported by Vigor router. Choose the correct version
based on the IPTV service you subscribe.
General Query Interval – Vigor router will periodically
check which IP obtaining IPTV service by sending query. It
might cause inconvenience for client. Therefore, set a
suitable time (unit: second) as the query interval to limit
the frequency of query sent by Vigor router.
Add PPP header – Check this box if the interface type for
IGMP is PPPoE. It depends on the specifications regulated
by each ISP. If you have no idea to enable or disable, simply
contact your ISP providers.
Enable IGMP syslog - Check the box to send the record
related to the IGMP server to Syslog.
IGMP Snooping
Check this box to enable this function. Multicast traffic will
be forwarded to ports that have members of that group.
Disabling IGMP snooping will make multicast traffic treated
in the same manner as broadcast traffic.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IGMP Fast Leave
Check this box to make the router stop forwarding
multicast traffic to a LAN port as soon as it receives a leave
message from that port. Each LAN port should have one
IGMP host connected.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
II-5-8-2 Working Status
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Refresh
Click this link to renew the working multicast group status.
Group ID
This field displays the ID port for the multicast group. The
available range for IGMP starts from 224.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.254.
P1 to P4
It indicates the LAN port used for the multicast group.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
185
II-5-9 Wake on LAN
A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up
a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC
on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router.
In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way,
WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.
Available settings are explained as follows:
186
Item
Description
Wake by
Two types provide for you to wake up the binded IP.

If you choose Wake by MAC Address, you have to type
the correct MAC address of the host in MAC Address
boxes.

If you choose Wake by IP Address, you have to choose
the correct IP address.
IP Address
The IP addresses that have been configured in
Firewall>>Bind IP to MAC will be shown in this drop down
list. Choose the IP address from the drop down list that you
want to wake up.
MAC Address
Type any one of the MAC address of the bound PCs.
Wake Up
Click this button to wake up the selected IP. See the
following figure. The result will be shown on the box.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-5-10 SMS / Mail Alert Service
The function of SMS (Short Message Service)/Mail Alert is that Vigor router sends a message to
user’s mobile or e-mail box through specified service provider to assist the user knowing the
real-time abnormal situations.
Vigor router allows you to set up to 10 SMS profiles which will be sent out according to
different conditions.
II-5-10-1 SMS Alert
This page allows you to specify SMS provider, who will get the SMS, what the content is and
when the SMS will be sent.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check the box to enable such profile.
SMS Provider
Use the drop down list to choose SMS service provider.
You can click SMS Provider link to define the SMS server.
Recipient Number
Enter the phone number of the one who will receive the
SMS.
Notify Profile
Use the drop down list to choose a message profile. The
recipient will get the content stated in the message profile.
You can click the Notify Profile link to define the content
of the SMS.
Schedule (1-15)
Enter the schedule number that the SMS will be sent out.
You can click the Schedule(1-15) link to define the
schedule.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
187
II-5-10-2 Mail Alert
This page allows you to specify Mail Server profile, who will get the notification e-mail, what
the content is and when the message will be sent.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check the box to enable such profile.
Mail Service
Use the drop down list to choose mail service object. All of
the available objects are created in Object
Settings>>SMS/Mail Service Object. If there is no object
listed, click Mail Service link to define a new one with
specified service provider.
Mail Address
Enter the e-mail address of the one who will receive the
notification message.
Notify Profile
Use the drop down list to choose a message profile. The
recipient will get the content stated in the message profile.
You can click the Notify Profile link to define the content
of the mail message.
Schedule (1-15)
Enter the schedule number that the notification will be
sent out.
You can click the Schedule(1-15) link to define the
schedule.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
188
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-5-11 Bonjour
Bonjour is a service discovery protocol which is a built-in service in Mac OS X; for Windows or
Linux platform, there is correspondent software to enable this function for free.
Usually, users have to configure the router or personal computers to use above services.
Sometimes, the configuration (e.g., IP settings, port number) is complicated and not easy to
complete. The purpose of Bonjour is to decrease the settings configuration (e.g., IP setting).
If the host and user’s computer have the plug-in bonjour driver install, they can utilize the
service offered by the router by clicking the router name icon. In short, what the
Clients/users need to know is the name of the router only.
To enable the Bonjour service, click Application>>Bonjour to open the following page. Check
the box(es) of the server service(s) that you want to share to the LAN clients.
Below shows an example for applying the bonjour feature that Vigor router can be used as the
FTP server.
1. Here, we use Firefox and DNSSD to discover the service in such case. Therefore, just
ensure the Bonjour client program and DNSSD for Firefox have been installed on the
computer.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
189
2. Open the web browse, Firefox. If Bonjour and DNSSD have been installed, you can open
the web page (DNSSD) and see the following results.
3. Open System Maintenance>>Management. Type a name as the Router Name and click
OK.
4. Next, open Applications>>Bonjour. Check the service that you want to use via Bonjour.
5. Open the DNSSD page again. The available items will be changed as the follows. It means
the Vigor router (based on Bonjour protocol) is ready to be used as a printer server, FTP
server, SSH Server, Telnet Server, and HTTP Server.
190
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
6. Now, any page or document can be printed out through Vigor router (installed with a
printer).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
191
II-5-12 High Availability
The High Availability (HA) feature of the router provides redundancy of network resources,
and reduces downtime in case of component failure. The level of sophistication of HA is
determined by availability requirements and tolerance of system interruptions. Systems that
provide near full-time availability typically have redundant hardware and software.
The HA of the Vigor2926 Series is designed to avoid single points-of-failure. When failures
occur, the failover process transfers the network load handled by the failed component (the
primary router) to the backup component (the secondary router), and the availability of
network resources are preserved and partially failed transactions are recovered. In a matter
of seconds the system returns to normal operation.
In order to set up High Availability, at least 2 DrayTek routers have to be configured in the
following manner:
192

Enable High Availability on both the primary and secondary routers.

Set a high priority ID on the primary router, and a lower priority ID on the secondary
router.

Configure identical redundancy methods, group IDs, and authentication keys on both
routers.

Set the management interface of both routers to the same subnet.

Enable virtual IP on both routers for each subnet in use. Make sure the virtual IPs are
identical on both routers.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-5-12-1 General Setup
Open Applications>>High Availability to bring up the configuration page to configure High
Availability.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable High Abailablity
Check this box to enable HA function.
Redundancy Method
Select the redundancy method for high availability.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
193
Hot-Standby Such method is suitable when there is only one ISP account.
When this method is selected,

During normal operation the secondary router will be
idling. When the primary router fails to operate
normally, the secondary router(s) will take over.

WAN settings of the primary and secondary routers are
identical.
Note: When Hot-Standby is used, the wireless LAN
function on secondary router will be “disabled”
directlly. Clients can not connect to the secondary
router any more.
Active-Standby This method is suitable when there are multiple
simultaneously active ISP connections. When this method is
selected,

All WANs on the secondary routers can be up at the
same time. LANs that are not configured under high
availability can be routed to secondary routers.

WAN settings of primary and secondary routers are
independently configured.

Config Sync may be enabled to synchronize most
configuration settings between the primary and
secondary routers.

All routers must be set to the same redundancy
method.
194
Group ID
Type a value (1~255).
In LAN environment, multiple routers can be devided into
several groups. Each router must be specified with one group
ID. Different routers with the same ID value will be
categoried into the same group.
Only one of the routers in the same group will be selected as
the primary router.
Priority ID
Type a value (1~30).
Different routers must be configured with different IDs.
All routers within a group must be assigned a priority ID.
Within a group, the router with the largest priority ID (i.e.,
the highest priority) will be the primary router. When
multiple routers in a group are assigned the same priority ID,
routers with lower LAN IP addresses (configured on the LAN
>> General Setup page) have higher priority.
Authentication Key
Enter an authentication key up to 31 characters long. This is
used to encrypt the DARP (DrayTek Address Redundancy
Protocol) traffic to guard against malicious attacks.
Protocol
Select the IP protocol to be used for DARP.
Management Interface
Select the interface to be used for DARP negotiation
between routers. Only interfaces which are enabled in
LAN>>General Setup are available for selection.
However, LAN1 is always enabled.
Update DDNS
Enable – Check the box to update the DDNS server for the
secondary device when the primary router fails.
If the primary device fails, and the secondary device must
take over the job of data transmitting and receiving. Then
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
the system will update the DDNS server to make the user
connect to the specified domain name.
Syslog
Enable – Check the box to record required information on
Syslog.
LAN1 ~ LAN6, DMZ
Enable – Check the box to enable the interface.
Virtual IP - Enter the IP address of the router plays the role
of Primary device.
II-5-12-2 Config Sync
This page is used to specify the synchronization time for such Vigor router and only available
when Hot-Standby method is specified and High Availability is enabled.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable Config Sync (Max.
Sync to 10 routers)
Check this box to enable configuration synchronization.
To sync configuration from primary to secondary router,
both primary and seconday routers need to enable “config
sync”. Note that config sync can be enabled by Hot-Standby
redundancy method only.
Config Sync Interval
Day / Hour / Minute - The primary router will synchronize its
configuration with secondary routers at every specified time
interval.
Exclude the following
settings from config sync
Settings selected in this field will be excluded when
executing configuration synchronization. This setting is
available when the Redundancy Method is set to “Hot
Standby”.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
195
When the configuration method is set to “Hot Standby”, the following settings will not be
synchronized:

WAN (user selectable)

LAN

LAN IPv6

router name

admin and user passwords.
Example:
Take the following picture as an example. The upper Vigor2926 is regarded as primary device,
the lower Vigor2926 is regarded as secondary device. When primary Vigor2926 Series is
broken down, the secondary device could replace the primary role to take over all jobs as
soon as possible. However, once the primary device is working again, the secondary device
would be changed to original role to stand by.
196
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-5-13 Local 802.1X General Setup
Such page allows you to configure general settings for Local 802.1X server built in Vigor router.
The local 802.X server can be used to authenticate wired and wireless LAN clients.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Click it to enable the built-in 802.1X server.
At present, such feature can be used for wireless and wired
802.1x authentication.
User Profile
Select All – Click to add all User Profiles to the 802.1X server.
All profiles will appear under the Authentication List.
Clear All – Remove all user profiles from the 802.1X server.
All profiles will appear under Available List.
Sync User Profile ….
Make the enabling/disabling setting for both Internal RADIUS
and Local 802.1X synchronize for all of the user profiles
(User Management>>User Profile).
For example, if Local 802.1x is configured as Enabled
(checked), the Internal RADIUS will be configured as Enabled
too.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
197
If Local 802.1X is configured as Disabled (unchecked), the
Internal RADIUS will be changed as Disabled too, even if it is
enabled previously.
OK
Click it to save the settings.
Clear
Click it to remove previous setting configuration.
Cancel
Click it to give up all settings configuration.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
198
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Application Notes
A-1 How to use High Availability?
High Availability provides hardware redundancy to the LAN clients. DrayTek Router has two
modes for High Availability feature: Hot-Standby and Active-Standby.
In Hot-Standby Mode, Primary and Secondary router share the same WAN source. Usually, only
the Primary is online. When Primary goes down, Secondary comes up and use the same WAN
line to dial up, and continue to provide Internet service to LAN clients.
Active-Standby mode is almost same as Hot-Standby mode, only that in the Active-Standby
mode, the Primary and Secondary connect to the different WAN sources; also, the Secondary
will always be online.
1.
On the primary router, choose Redundancy Method you would like to use, then set the
following configurations:
(a)
Group ID is used to identify who are the group members, enter the same ID on all
the members. The default value is 1, we may leave it as default here.
(b)
Priority ID is used to decide which router should be the primary one, and 30 is the
highest. If 2 or more routers are having the same Priority ID, their LAN IP addresses
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
199
(for management Interface) will be considered, e.g., 192.168.1.2 has higher
priority than 192.168.1.3…, etc.
(c)
Authentication Key: enter the same authentication key on all the members.
(d)
Management Interface: the packets for communication (including deciding the
primary, configuration sync, and some maintenance…,etc) between members will
be sent in the management interface, in other word, clients in other LAN subnet
won't be able to see these packets. In order to have best communication and for
security purpose, we recommend to choose an interface that is less possible to
have interruption for the communication (loop/broadcast storm from other LAN
clients…). In our scenario, we reserve LAN 1 for High Availability only, and put all
other LAN clients in LAN2~LAN5.
(e)
Update DDNS: for dynamic WAN IP users, enable this function so once the
secondary router becomes primary and dials up the WAN, it will also update its
new WAN IP address to the same DDNS profile, so your network will be accessible
with the same DDNS domain.
(f)
Syslog: enable to show all the High Availability related logs in syslog.
(g)
Enable the LAN Subnet to join High Availability. Any existing LAN without joining
High Availability will not be served with hardware redundancy.
Virtual IP: name the virtual IP here, please note that the virtual IP can NOT be the
same with any member LAN IP.
200
2.
Enable Configuration Sync and set the Sync Interval. Default is every 15 minutes.
3.
Configure High Availability on the secondary router. Mind that the Priority should be
lower than the primary router. Besides priority, all other settings should be the same.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
4.
Configuring LAN on the primary router.
(a)
Set up the LAN IP address, it has to be different from the Virtual IP and the LAN IP
of secondary router. Again, for any routers with the same Priority ID, their IP
addresses will be compared, so we suggest to use a IP with lower number on the
Primary one.
(b)
Gateway IP is the same with LAN IP, and the note in parentheses indicates that the
gateway IP provided to LAN clients will be replaced by the Virtual IP.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
201
5.
Info
6.
202
Configure LAN on the secondary router. Mind that the IP should be different and larger
than it on the primary router.
If you have more than one LAN, you should set all the LAN IP of each LAN on
Primary and Secondary routers to different IP addresses to avoid IP conflict.
Here is the example, there are several LAN and all of them are under the
protection of hardware redundancy:
We have setup High Availability on both routers, and before we link up both routers, it's
time to setup all other functions on the primary router so later we can see the
configuration sync taking place. If your primary router is already settled please proceed
to the next step. Here we configure the WAN as the representative example.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Then confirm the WAN setup by seeing WAN online.
7.
After all the functions are set properly on the primary router, we link up the
management interface LAN so both routers can start detecting each other, deciding
which one should be the primary and syncing the configuration. Since the routers will
communicate via the Management Interface, it's required to use the ports that belong to
the Management Interface LAN (LAN1 in this scenario). We can check for this
information in LAN >> VLAN. In this scenario we can use the port 5 on both routers, so we
use an Ethernet cable to wire up LAN port 5 on both routers.
8.
We may check the High Availability status by visiting the Status page.
For the first time the two routers link up, we can see they are syncing the configuration
from the primary to the secondary (showing "Progressing" on the secondary router):
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
203
Note: The "Cached Time" indicates the time that router has got the information from
the other router ago. Click "Renew" to update the information of remote router, click
"Refresh" to update the information of local router.
When a sync is finished or the routers are already having the same configuration, it will
show the "Equal" result:
Note that the router will check if there's any un-synced modification when it reaches
the time interval we set in step 2. We may force to sync by clicking the "Sync" button.
The secondary router will reboot after the config sync.
9.
Now we may inspect if the secondary router received the configuration from the primary
router. In this scenario we check the secondary router online status.
Before syncing we didn't configure the WAN, now seeing WAN1 and WAN2 having "Static
IP" indicates it did receive the corresponding configurations. And the "Disconnected-HA"
means this router is not dialing up the WAN due to the primary router in the High
Availability group is working, so as a secondary router it doesn't need to be online now.
You may also check other configurations on your secondary router.
204
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
10. We may also check the Details page.
Sharing the WCF License
11. Now the routers are set, if you have WCF license, you may create a group on MyVigor so
these routers can share the same license.
(a)
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
First, login to myvigor.draytek.com, find High Availability Settings on left hand
side and click Add New
205
(b)
Give a Group Name, select an HA unused Group ID, and select the member routers
in the HA Device drop-down menu:
Note that the drop-down menu only lists out the devices that are registered under
this MyVigor account. If you don't find the router you are using, please find out
which account this device is registered under.
(c)
Save the profile, and we can see the group entry:
Send the Notification to Network Administrator
We can set Vigor Router to notify the network administrator by sending email or SMS when the
following events occur:
206
1.
Failover Occurred: the WAN of the primary router goes down and the secondary router
takes over,
2.
Configuration Sync Failed: the configuration sync between primary and secondary router
fails,
3.
Router Unstable: one of the routers becomes unstable.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
A-2 How to use DrayDDNS?
Vigor router supports various DDNS service providers, user can set up user-defined profile to
update the DDNS even the service provider is not on the list. Now, DrayTek starts to support
our own DDNS service - DrayDDNS. We will provide a domain name for each Vigor Router, this
single domain name can record IP addresses of all WAN.
Activate DrayDDNS License
1.
Go to Wizards >> Service Activation Wizard, wait for the router to connect to MyVigor
server, then tick DT-DDNS and I have read and accept the above Agreement, click
Next.
2.
Confirm the information, then click Activate.
3.
MyVigor server will reply with the service activation information.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
207
Configure DDNS Profile
1.
Go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup,
a. Tick Enable Dynamic DNS Setup
b. Click an available profile index
c. Tick Enable Dynamic DNS Account
d. Select DrayTek Global (www.drayddns.com) as Service Provider
e. Select the WAN you would like to upload the IP to DDNS server
f. Click Get domain
g. Click OK on the pop up notification window
208
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2.
Wait few seconds for router to get the domain name, then, we can click the profile to
check the information of license and domain name.
Modify Domain Name
Currently, only the domain name is allowed to be modified MyVigor website. We will need to
register the router to MyVigor server, and log in to MyVigor website to modify it.
1.
2.
Please visit https://myvigor.draytek.com/ or go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup
>> DrayDDNS profile and click Edit domain.
Log in to MyVigor Website, choose the profile, then click Edit DDNS settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
209
3.
Input the desired Domain name (e.g., XXXX25) and click Update.
4.
Vigor router will get the modified domain name when the it performs next DDNS
updating. We can click Sync domain to accelerate this process.
After few seconds, the router will get the new domain name and print it on the profiles
list.
210
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
211
A-3 How to Configure Customized DDNS?
This article describes how to configure customized DDNS on Vigor routers to update your IP to
the DDNS server. We will take “Changeip.org” and “3322.net” as example. Before setting,
please make sure that the WAN connection is up.
Part A : Changeip.org
Note that,
Username: jo***
Password: jo********
Host name: j*****.changeip.org
WAN IP address: 1.169.185.242
Following is the screenshot of editing the HTML script on the browser to update your IP to the
DDNS server.
212
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically.
1.
Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for Customized DDNS
client.
2.
Set the Service Provider as Customized.
3.
Set the Service API as:
/dynamic/dns/update.asp?u=jo***&p=jo********&hostname=j****.changeip.org&ip=###IP
### &cmd=update&offline=0
In which, ###IP### is a value which will be replaced with the current interface IP
address automatically when DDNS service is running. In this case the IP will be
1.169.185.242.
4.
After setting, the Customized DDNS service will be up, and our IP will be updated to the
DDNS server.
Part B : 3322.net
Username: bi*******
Password: 88********
Host name: bi*******.3322.org
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
213
WAN IP address: 111.243.178.53
To update the IP to the DDNS server via editing the HTML script, we can type the following
script on the browser:
“good 111.243.178.53” means our IP has been updated to the server successfully.
Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically.
214
1.
Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for Customized DDNS
client.
2.
Set the Service Provider as Customized.
3.
Set the Provider Host as member.3322.net.
4.
Set the Service API as:
/dyndns/update?hostname=yourhost.3322.org&myip=###IP###&wildcard=OFF&mx=mail
.exchanger.ext&backmx=NO&offline=NO
5.
Enter your account and password.
6.
After the setting, the Customized DDNS service will be up, and our IP will be updated to
the DDNS server automatically.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part C : Extend Note
The customized Service Provider is also eligible with the ClouDNS.net.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
215
A-4 How to Implement the LDAP/AD Authentication for User Management?
For simplifying the configuration of LDAP authentication for User Access Management, we
implement “Group” feature.
There is no need to pre-configure user profile for each user on Vigor router anymore. We only
need to configure the Groups DN, then the Vigor router (e.g., Vigor 2926 series) can pass the
authentication to LDAP server with the pre-defined Group path.
Below shows the configuration steps:
1.
Access into the web user interface of the Vigor router.
2.
Open Applications>>Active Directory /LDAP to get the following page for configuring
LDAP related settings.
There are three types of bind type supported:
3.

Simple Mode – Just simply do the bind authentication without any search action.

Anonymous – Perform a search action first with Anonymous account then do the
bind authentication.

Regular Mode– Mostly it is the same with anonymous mode. The different is that,
the server will firstly check if you have the search authority.
For the regular mode, you’ll need to type in the Regular DN and Regular Password.
Create LDAP server profiles. Click the Active Directory /LDAP tab to open the profile
web page and click any one of the index number link.
If we have two groups “RD1” and “SHRD” on LDAP server, we can configure two LDAP
server profiles with different Group Distinguished Name.
and
216
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
4.
Click OK to save the settings above.
5.
Open User Management>>General Setup. Select User-Based as the Mode option.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
217
6.
Then open VPN and Remote Access>>PPP General Setup to check the profile(s) that
will be authenticated with LDAP server.
After above configurations, users belong to either “rd1” or “shrd” group can access Internet
after inputting their credentials on LDAP server.
218
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-6 Routing
Route Policy (also well known as PBR, policy-based routing) is a feature where you may need
to get a strategy for routing. The packets will be directed to the specified interface if they
match one of the policies. You can setup route policies in various reasons such as load balance,
security, routing decision, and etc.
Through protocol, IP address, port number and interface configuration, Route Policy can be
used to configure any routing rules to fit actual request. In general, Route Policy can easily
reach the following purposes:
Load Balance
You may manually create policies to balance the traffic across network interface.
Specify Interface
Through dedicated interface (WAN/LAN/VPN), the data can be sent from the source IP to the
destination IP.
Address Mapping
Allows you specify the outgoing WAN IP address (es) for an internal private IP address or a
range of internal private IP addresses.
Priority
The router will determine which policy will be adopted for transmitting the packet according
to the priority of Static Route and Route Policy.
Failover to/Failback
Packets will be sent through another Interface or follow another Policy when the original
interface goes down (Failover to). Once the original interface resumes service (Failback),
the packets will be returned to it immediately.
Other routing
Specify routing policy to determine the direction of the data transmission.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
For more detailed information about using policy route, refer to Support
>>FAQ/Application Notes on www.draytek.com.
219
Web User Interface
II-6-1 Static Route
Static routing is an alternative to dynamic routing. It is a process that the system network
administrator can configure network routers with all the required information for packet
forwarding.
Go to Routing >> Static Route. The router offers IPv4 and IPv6 for you to configure the static
route. Both protocols bring different web pages.
Static Route for IPv4
Available settings are explained as follows:
220
Item
Description
Index
The number (1 to 40) under Index allows you to open next
page to set up static route.
Enable
Check the box to enable the static route profile.
Destination Address
Displays the destination address of the static route.
Set to Factory Default
Clear all of the settings and return to factory default
settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Viewing Routing Table
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Displays the routing table for your reference.
221
Add Static Routes to Private and Public Networks
Here is an example (based on IPv4) of setting Static Route in Main Router so that user A and B
locating in different subnet can talk to each other via the router. Assuming the Internet
access has been configured and the router works properly:

use the Main Router to surf the Internet.

create a private subnet 192.168.10.0 using an internal Router A (192.168.1.2)

create a public subnet 211.100.88.0 via an internal Router B (192.168.1.3).

have set Main Router 192.168.1.1 as the default gateway for the Router A 192.168.1.2.
Before setting Static Route, user A cannot talk to user B for Router A can only forward
recognized packets to its default gateway Main Router.
1.
Go to LAN page and click General Setup, select 1st Subnet as the RIP Protocol Control.
Then click the OK button.
Info
222
There are two reasons that we have to apply RIP Protocol Control on
1st Subnet. The first is that the LAN interface can exchange RIP
packets with the neighboring routers via the 1st subnet
(192.168.1.0/24). The second is that those hosts on the internal
private subnets (ex. 192.168.10.0/24) can access the Internet via the
router, and continuously exchange of IP routing information with
different subnets.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2.
Click the Routing >> Static Route and click on the Index Number 1. Check the Enable
box. Please add a static route as shown below, which regulates all packets destined to
192.168.10.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.2. Click OK.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Click it to enable this profile.
Destination IP
Address
Type an IP address as the destination of such static route.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask for such static route.
Network Interface
Use the drop down list to specify an interface for such
static route.
3.
Return to Static Route Setup page. Click on another Index Number to add another
static route as show below, which regulates all packets destined to 211.100.88.0 will be
forwarded to 192.168.1.3. Click OK.
4.
Go to Diagnostics and choose Routing Table to verify current routing table.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
223
Static Route for IPv6
You can set up to 40 profiles for IPv6 static route. Click the IPv6 tab to open the following
page:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Index
The number (1 to 40) under Index allows you to open next
page to set up static route.
Destination Address
Displays the destination address of the static route.
Status
Displays the status of the static route.
Set to Factory Default
Clear all of the settings and return to factory default
settings.
Viewing IPv6 Routing
Table
Displays the routing table for your reference.
Click any underline of index number to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
224
Item
Description
Enable
Click it to enable this profile.
Destination IPv6 Address /
Prefix Len
Enter the IP address with the prefix length for this entry.
Gateway IPv6 Address
Enter the gateway address for this entry.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Network Interface
Use the drop down list to specify an interface for this static
route.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
225
II-6-2 Load-Balance /Route Policy
II-6-2-1 General Setup
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Index
Click the number of index to access into the configuration
web page.
Enable
Check this box to enable this policy.
Protocol
Display the protocol used for this policy.
Interface
Display the interface to send packets to once the policy is
matched.
Priority
Display the priority value for such route policy profile.
Src IP Start
Display the IP address for the start of the source IP.
Src IP End
Display the IP address for the end of the source IP.
Dest IP Start
Display the IP address for the start of the destination IP.
Dest IP End
Display the IP address for the end of the destination IP.
Dest Port Start
Display the IP address for the start of the destination port.
Dest Port End
Display the IP address for the end of the destination port.
Move UP/Move Down
Use Up or Down link to move the order of the policy.
Wizard Mode
Allow to configure frequently used settings of route policy
via three setting pages
Advance Mode
Allow to configure detailed settings of route policy.
To use Wizard Mode, simple do the following steps:
1. Click the Wizard Mode radio button.
226
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2. Click Index 1. The setting page will appear as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Source IP
Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP.
Src IP Start - Enter the source IP start for the specified
WAN interface.
Src IP End - Enter the source IP end for the specified WAN
interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the source
IPs inside the LAN will be passed through the WAN
interface.
Destination IP
Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP.
Dest IP Start- Enter the destination IP start for the
specified WAN interface.
Dest IP End - Enter the destination IP end for the specified
WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the
destination IPs will be passed through the WAN interface.
Country Object - Specify a country object. All the IPs
coming from the country (countries) specified in the object
will be passed through the WAN interface.
3. Click Next to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Interface
Use the drop down list to choose a WAN or LAN interface or
VPN profile. Packets match with the above criteria will be
transferred to the interface chosen here.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
227
4. After specifying the interface, click Next to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Force NAT /Force
Routing
It determines which mechanism that the router will use to
forward the packet to WAN.
5. After choosing the mechanism, click Next to get the summary page for reference.
6. If there is no error, click Finish to complete wizard setting.
228
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
To use Advance Mode, do the following steps:
1. Click the Advance Mode radio button.
2. Click any Index number link (e.g., 1 in this case) to access into the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check this box to enable this policy.
Comment
Type a brief explanation for such profile.
Protocol
Use the drop-down menu to choose a proper protocol for
the WAN interface.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
229
Source
Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP.
IP Range – Define a range of IP address as source IP
addresses.
 Start - Type an address as the starting IP for such
profile.
 End - Type an address as the ending IP for such profile.
IP Subnet – Define a subnet containing IP address and mask
address.
 Network – Type an IP address here.
 Mask – Use the drop down list to choose a suitable mask
for the network.
IP Object / IP Group– Use the drop down list to choose a
preconfigured IP object/group.
Destination
Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP.
IP Range – Define a range of IP address as destination IP
addresses.
 Start - Type an address as the starting IP for such
profile.
 End - Type an address as the ending IP for such profile.
IP Subnet – Define a subnet containing IP address and mask
address.
 Network – Type an IP address here.
 Mask – Use the drop down list to choose a suitable mask
for the network.
Domain Name – Specify a domain name as the destination.

Select – Click it to choose an existing domain name
defined in Objects Setting>>String Object.


Delete – Remove current used domain name.
Add – Create a new domain name as the destination.
IP Object / IP Group– Use the drop down list to choose a
preconfigured IP object/group.
Country Object – Use the drop dwon list to choose a
preconfigured object. Then all IPs within that country will
be treated as the destination IP.
Destination Port
Any – Any port number can be treated as the destination
port.
Dest Port Range –
 Start - Enter the destination port start for the
destination IP.
 End - Enter the destination port end for the destination
IP. If this field is blank, it means that all the destination
ports will be passed through the WAN interface.
Send to if criteria
matched
230
Interface – Use the drop down list to choose a WAN or LAN
interface or VPN profile. Packets match with the above
criteria will be transferred to the interface chosen here.
Gateway IP – Specific gateway is used only when you want
to forward the packets to the desired gateway. Usually,
Default Gateway is selected in default.
Packet Forwarding to WAN/LAN via – When you choose
WAN (e.g., WAN1) as the Interface for packet transmission,
you have to specify the way the packet forwarded to.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Choose Force NAT or Force Routing.
Failover to – Check this button to lead the data passing
through specific interface (WAN/LAN/VPN/Route Policy)
automatically when the selected interface (defined in Send
via if criteria matched) is down.
Priority
3.

WAN/LAN – Use the drop down list to choose an
interface as an auto failover interface.

VPN – Use the drop down list to choose a VPN tunnel as
a failover tunnel.

Route Policy – Use the drop down list to choose an
existed route policy profile.

Gateway IP – Specific gateway is used only when you
want to forward the packets to the desired gateway.
Usually, Default Gateway is selected in default.
Packets will be transmitted based on all routes or Route
Policy. Vigor router will determine which rule will be
adopted for transmitting the packet according to the
priority of Static Route and Route Policy.
The greater the value is, the lower the priority is. Default
value for route policy is “200” which means it has higher
priority than the default route.
Failback- When Failover to option is enabled,
Administrator could also enable Failback to clear the
existing session on Failover interface and return to the
original interface immediately once the original interface
resume its service. When Failback is not enabled, the
router will only stop sending packets via the Failover
interface when the existing sessions are cleared, and this
might take a long time because some application will keep
sending packet once a while. Therefore, Failback option is
recommended if Administrator wants the traffic to go via
the primary interface as soon as possible.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
II-6-2-2 Diagnose
With the analysis done by such page, possible path (static route, routing table or policy
route) of the packets sent out of the router can be traced.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
231
or
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Mode
Analyze a single packet – Choose such mode to make Vigor
router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route
policy.
Analyze multiple packets… - Choose such mode to make
Vigor router analyze how multiple packets in a specified
file will be sent by a route policy.
Packet Information
Specify the nature of the packets to be analyzed by Vigor
router.
ICMP/UDP/TCP/ANY- Specify a protocol for diagnosis.
Src IP – Type an IP address as the source IP.
Dst IP – Type an IP address as the destination IP.
Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination
port.
Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The
analyzed result will be shown on the page. If required, click
export analysis to export the result as a file.
Input File
Select – Click the download link to get a blank example
file. Then, click such button to select that blank “.csv” file
for saving the result of analysis.
Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The
analyzed result will be shown on the page. If required, click
export analysis to export the result as a file.
232
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Note that the analysis was based on the current
"load-balance/route policy" settings, we do not guarantee
it will be 100% the same as the real case.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
233
II-6-3 BGP
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is a standardized protocol designed to exchange routing and
reachability information among autonomous systems (AS) on the Internet.
II-6-3-1 Basic Settings
Set general settings for for local router and neighboring routers.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Local
Enable BGP
Check the box to enable basic BGP function for local
router.
Local AS Number
Set the AS number for local router.
Hold Time
Set the time interval (in seconds) to determine the peer is
dead when the router is unable to receive any keepalive
message from the peer within the time.
Connect Retry Time
If the router fails to connect to neighboring router, it
requires a period of time to reconnect.
Set the time interval to do reconnection.
Router ID
Enter the LAN subnet for the router.
Neighbor
234
Index
Click the index number link to configure neighbor profile.
Enable
Check the box to enable the basic BGP function for
neighboring router.
AS Number
Display the AS Number for neighboring router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Profile Name
Display the name of the neighboring profile.
IP Address
Display the IP address specified for the neighboring profile.
MD5 Auth
Display the status (enabled or disabled) of MD5
authentication.
Status
Display the connection status for local router and
neighboring router.
II-6-3-1 Static Network
This page allows you to configure up to eight neighboring routers for exchanging the routing
information with the local router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Select
Check the box to enable the configuration for the selected
index entry.
IP Address
Enter the IP address for a router.
Subnet Mask
Use the drop down list to specify a subnet mask for the IP
address.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
235
Application Notes
A-1 How to set up Address Mapping with Route Policy?
Address Mapping is used to map a specified private IP or a range of private IPs of NAT subnet
into a specified WAN IP (or WAN IP alias IP). Refer to the following figure.
This document introduces how to set up address mapping with Route Policy. When a WAN
interface has multiple public IP addresses, Administrator may specify the outgoing IP for
certain internal IP address by a Route Policy.
1.
Set up WAN IP Alias. Go to WAN >> Internet Access >> Details Page, and click on WAN
IP Alias button.
a. Check Enable.
b. Enter the WAN IP address.
c. Click OK to save.
After setting up the WAN IP Alias, the IP addresses will be shown in the drop-down list of
Interface in Route Policy setting.
236
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2.
Go to Routing>>Load Balance/Route policy. Create a Route Policy for specific IP
address to send from specific WAN IP Address.
a. Enable this policy.
b. Enter Source IP as the range of private IP address.
c. Leave the Destination IP and Port as Any.
d. Select Interface as WAN, and then select Interface address from the drop-down list.
(The List can be edited in WAN IP Alias setting.)
e. Enable Failover to other WAN so the traffic will be sent via other Interface when the
path fails. But do not enable this option if you want the traffic only to use a
designated IP address.
f.
3.
Click OK to save.
After the above configuration, packet source from the range between 192.168.1.20 and
192.168.1.30 sent to the Internet will use the public IP 172.17.1.1.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
237
A-2 How to use destination domain name in a route policy?
Route Policy supports using a domain name as destination criteria. It provides a more direct
way to set up route polices if the network administrator is trying to specify the gateway for
the traffic that destined for a certain website.
To use a destination domain name as criteria, just select Domain Name as Destination in
Criteria, and enter the domain name in the empty field.
Or you may click Select, and use a string that is pre-defined in Objects Settings >> String
Object as the domain name.
Click Add too add more domain names, we can set up to 5 domain names in one route policy.
238
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Auto-create String Objects
If you manually enter the domain name in a route policy, after clicking OK to apply the route
policy, those domain names will be given a number.
That means the router has automatically created string objects for those domain names, so
that they can be used in other route policies or other functions.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
239
A-3 How to use a Public IP on LAN
We cannot disable NAT on Vigor Router, but still, we may can use a public IP address on a host
behind Vigor Router. If our ISP allocates a block public IP addresses for us, then we may use
the public IP address with IP Routed Subnet or Routing Usage LAN.
Suppose ISP provides a public IP subnet 211.100.200.152/255.255.255.248 for us, and the
gateway IP is 211.100.200.158. The public IP addresses we can use are between
211.100.200.153 to 211.100.200.157. The following shows how to set up a non-NAT subnet so
that the server behind Vigor Router can use the public IP address 211.100.200.154.
WAN Setup
Go to WAN >> Internet Access and configure the WAN connection according to what ISP
provides. (Note: If it is necessary to specify an IP address manually, remember that subnet
mask for WAN interface should be larger than that of LAN interface.)
Now we have two methods to configure it

240
IP Routed LAN
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide

Routing Usage LAN
IP Routed LAN Setup
1.
Go to LAN >> General Setup, click on Details Page for IP Routed Subnet.
2.
Set up TCP/IP details for IP Routed Subnet.
a. Enable IP Routed Subnet.
b. Enter the IP Address for the router. Note that this could be the same as router's WAN
IP.
c. Enter the Subnet Mask according to ISP.
3.
For the host behind Vigor Router to obtain the public IP address, we may:
a. Configure a fixed IP/Subnet Mask on the host
b. Set up DHCP IP Pool, enable Use LAN Port, and connect the host to the router on the
specified LAN port (which is port 1 and 2 in this example)
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
241
c. Set up DHCP IP pool, enable Use MAC Address, add the host's MAC address to the
table, and connect the host to the router from any of the LAN ports.
After finishing above configurations, host with a public IP 211.100.200.154/ mask
255.255.255.248/ Gateway IP 211.100.200.153 will be able to access Internet through Vigor
Router.
Routing Usage LAN
We may also create a LAN subnet for routing usage. Here we take LAN 2 for example.
1.
Go to LAN >> VLAN,
a. Enable VLAN Configuration.
b. Set up a VLAN for LAN2 Subnet.
c. Specify the LAN ports that belongs to LAN2 subnet (which is port 5 and 6 in this
example), note that these are the ports to which the host should connect.
242
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2.
Go to LAN >> General Setup, click on Details Page for LAN 2.
3.
Set up TCP/IP details for LAN 2,
a. Enable LAN2.
b. Select For Routing Usage.
c. Enter the IP Address for the router. Note that this could be the same as router's WAN
IP.
d. Enter the Subnet Mask according to ISP.
4.
For DHCP Server Configuration, we may either:

Disable DHCP Server, and manually set a fixed IP/Subnet Mask on the host.

Enable DHCP Server, and set up the DHCP IP pool according to IP range which the
ISP provides.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
243
After finishing the above configurations, PC or Server that connects to Port 5 or Port 6 with IP
settings as IP 211.100.200.154/ mask 255.255.255.252/ Gateway IP 211.100.200.153 will be
able to access Internet through Vigor Router.
Trouble-shooting
If PC with public IP address setting cannot access Internet after above configuration, please
check:

If the public IP address has been used by another device.

If the router's WAN Access Mode is "Static or Dynamic IP", make sure the subnet
mask of WAN interface is larger than that of LAN interface.
If none of the above helps, please change the host's Gateway IP from Vigor Router's IP
(211.100.200.153) to the IP Gateway IP (211.100.200.158), and connect the PC to the ISP
Modem directly and see if it can work.
244
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
A-4 Introduction to Load Balance/Route Policy
This document introduces the Load-Balance/Route Policy. This feature allows network
administrator to manage the outbound traffic more specifically.
The Policy set in Load-Balance/Route Policy always has higher priority than Default Route and
Auto Load Balance set in WAN >> General Setup, and always has lower priority than the
Firewall Rules. Administrator may also define a priority to this policy.
To configure Route Policy, go to Routing>>Load-Balance/Route Policy. The following image
is a screen-shot of Load-Balance/Route policy page. It lists all the policies and shows whether
the policy is enabled, what are the criteria to match, and through which the interface should
the traffic to go if the criteria are matched, and also its priority.
To set up a Route Policy, just click on an Index number. At the bottom of the page, there are
two configuration modes could be choose: the Wizard Mode provides a simple and basic
configuration; while Advance Mode allows more options.
1.
First, set the criteria of the packets to apply this policy.
a. Select a Protocol.
b. Enter the Source IP address range, the Source IP could be a single address if the
Start and End are the same.
c. Enter the Destination IP address range.
d. Select the Destination Port.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
245
The above configuration is an example that if a packet is sent
from192.168.1.10~192.168.1.100 to 8.8.8.8, no matter what the protocol or destination
port is, it will follow this route policy.
2.
Next, we select an interface and gateway through which should the packet be sent if it
matches the criteria.
a. Select an Interface.
b. Select a Gateway IP. Note that if Interface is chosen to be a LAN, it is necessary to
designate a specific gateway.
The above configuration is an example that if a packet matches the criteria of this Route
Policy, it will be sent to the default gateway then the destination through VPN1.
3.
246
In Advance Mode, if the Interface is selected as WAN or VPN, there are some more
options:

Failover to: Enables packet to be sent through other Interface or follow another
Policy when detects a path failure in the original interface. The above
configuration indicates that the packets will be sent through WAN2 when the
original route is disconnected.

Failback: When "Failover to" option is enabled, Administrator could also enable
"Failback" to clear the existing session on Failover interface and return to the
original interface immediately once the original interface resume its service. When
Failback is not enabled, the router will only stop sending packet via the Failover
interface when the existing sessions are cleared, and this might take a long time
because some application will keep sending packet once a while. Therefore,
Failback option is recommended if Administrator want the traffic go via the
primary interface as soon as possible.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide

Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Priority: Administrator may set priority between 1 and 249 for this Route policy,
where smaller number indicates higher priority. When two policies are having the
same priority, the first (according to the policy index order) matched policy will be
implemented.
247
II-7 LTE
LTE WAN with SIM card can provide convinent Internet access for Vigor router. However, we
can't stop thinking about what can Vigor router utilize this SIM card to provide more useful
functions for user? Now, we have developed some useful functions for user, such as sending
SMS from a router to report router status, rebooting router remotely via SMS with taking
security into consideration, and so on.
This section can guide you to use the SIM card in LTE WAN to perform SMS related operations.
Info
248
This function is used for “L” models only.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
II-7-1 General Settings
II-7-1-1 SMS Quota
This page allows you to configure general settings for LTE. When SMS Quota Limit is enabled,
you can specify the number of SMS quota, actions to perform when quota exceeded, and the
period of resetting SMS quota used.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable SMS Quota Limit
Check the box to enable such feature.
Quota Limit
Specify the maximum number of sending SMS for LTE.
When quota exceeded
There are two actions to be performed when the quota limit
is expired.
Stop sending SMS – If it is checked, no SMS for LTE will be
sent after the quota limit is expired.
Send Mail Alert to Administrator – If it is checkd, a mail
alert will be sent to the administrator when the quota limit is
expired.
Monthly
This setting is to offer a mechanism of resetting the number
of SMS sent record every month.
SMS quota resets on day XX at XX … –You can determine the
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
249
starting day in one month. The number of SMS sent will be
reset.
Custom
This setting allows the user to define the billing cycle
according to his request.
The number of SMS sent will be reset with an interval of
cycle duration.
Custom – Monthly is default setting. If long period or a short
period is required, use Custom. The period of reset is
between 1 day and 60 days. You can determine the cycle
duration by specifying the days and the hours.
 Cycle duration: Specify the days to reset the number of
SMS sent. For example, 7 means the whole cycle is 7
days; 20 means the whole cycle is 20 days. When the time
is up, the router will reset the number of SMS sent
automatically.
 Today is day XX in the cycle –Specify the day in the cycle
duration as the starting point which Vigor router will
reset the number of SMS sent. For example, 3 means the
third day of the duration cycle.
II-7-1-2 SMS Inbox/Outbox Policy
This page lists policies for SMS inbox and outbox. Simple choose the one(s) you want.
250
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-7-2 SMS Inbox
This page will list the received SMS messages in the LTE SIM card. The SMS Inbox table shows
the received date, the phone number or sendor ID where this message was from, and the
begining of the message content.
Since the data size of one SMS is limited, a long message will be sent by multiple SMS. For the
convenience of users, we provide two modes. Simple Mode lists SMS messages in order for
received time. Advanced Mode lists SMS in order for real index in the SIM card. Different SIM
cards have different capacities. In general, it's around 30 to 40 SMS. Please note that the SIM
card can not receive new SMS when all SMS indexes are occupied.
Click the Simple Mode link or the Advanced Mode link below to switch between these two
modes.
II-7-2-1 Simple Mode
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Mark as Read
Those messages in "unread" state are showed in bold text. If
you want to change messages into "read" state, select them
and click the OK button. Checking the checkbox in title will
select all "unread" messages in this page.
Delete
If you want to delete messages, select them and click the OK
button. Checking the checkbox in title will select all
messages in this page.
Details
If you want to read the full content of the message, click the
View link of that message to open the following page. It will
change the message into "read" state.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
251




Message Content - Display the full content of the
message.
OK - Return to previous page.
Delete - Click it to delete this message and return to
previous page.
Next - Click it to see the content of next message.
II-7-2-1 Advanced Mode
Available settings are explained as follows:
252
Item
Description
Mark as Read
Those SMS in "unread" state are shown in bold text. If you
want to change SMS into "read" state, select them and click
the OK button. Checking the checkbox in title will select all
"unread" SMS in this page.
Delete
If you want to delete SMS, select them and click the OK
button. Checking the checkbox in title will select all SMS in
this page.
Index
If you want to read the full content of the message of the
SMS, click the index link of that SMS to open the following
page. It will change all SMS of the message into "read" state.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Message Content - Display the full content of the message.
OK - Return to previous page.
Delete - Click it to delete all SMS of this message and return
to previous page.
Next - Click it to see the content of next SMS index.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
253
II-7-3 Send SMS
This page is used to send SMS messages by the LTE SIM card. It also displays the number of SMS
required to send the message.
Available settings are explained as follows:
254
Item
Description
Recipient Number
Enter the phone number of the recipient.
The format can be an international phone number
( +8869123455678) or a general phone number(0912345678).
Data Coding Scheme
The router will automatically select a suitable Data Coding
Scheme according to the current content in Message. GSM
7-bit and UCS-2 are supported.
Message
Type in the message content to send.
The total number of characters that you can type in this field
is 1024.
Send Message
Click it to send this SMS message to the recipient
immediately.
View SMS Outbox Cache
Display the record of SMS messages sent from the Router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-7-4 Router Commands
This page allows the user to set function to reboot Vigor router remotely and get the router
status via SMS.
Go to LTE>>Router Commands to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Reboot on SMS Message
Enable with Password /
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
To reboot Vigor router remotely via SMS, please check such
box and type the password/PIN number (treated as
255
PIN
authentication for any mobile phone).
The password shall be composed by letters, numbers and
baseline.
Access Control List
Check the box to type or modify (up to 3) phone numbers.
The phone number specified here is capable of sending SMS
to reboot such Vigor router remotely.
Note: If such option is enabled, only mobile phones specified
here are allowed to send SMS to reboot Vigor router if
correct password is given. That is, if it is disabled
(unchecked), any mobile phone can send SMS to reboot such
Vigor router if correct password is given.
Reply with Router Status Message
256
Enable with Password /
PIN
Users can get the WAN data usage and basic information
about Vigor router (e.g., IP address, MAC address) through
the mobile phone by entering the password/PIN specified in
this field.
The password shall be composed by letters, numbers and
baseline.
Access Control List
Check the box to type or modify (up to 3) phone numbers.
The phone number specified here is capable of getting
related information about Vigor router remotely.
Note: If such option is enabled, only mobile phones specified
here are allowed to obtaine related information about Vigor
router if correct password is given. That is, if it is disabled
(unchecked), any mobile phone can get the data of Vigor
router if correct password is given.
Message Contents
There are several types of message contents for you to
select. Choose and check the required item, then Vigor
router will offer the status response about that item via SMS.
SMS messages per status
response
Display the total number of the type for status response.
Display the total number of SMS required to send the status
message which contains the current selected Message
Contents.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
II-7-5 Status
Vigor router with LTE function is capable of accessing into Internet and able to send SMS to
specified mobile phone. In addition, it can be treated as a LTE modem.
This page will display basic information about the embedded LTE module and the current LTE
connection.
Each item is explained as follows:
Item
Description
LTE Modem
Status
LTE WAN status.
IMEI
International Mobile Equipment Identity of the embedded
LTE module.
IMSI
International Mobile Subscripber Identity of the LTE SIM card.
Access Tech
Type of LTE connection
(CDMA/GSM/WCDMA/LTE/TD-SCDMA).
Band
Band of LTE connection.
Operator
ISP name of LTE connection.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
257
Mobile Country Code /
Mobile Network Code /
Location Area Code / Cell
ID :
Base station information.
Signal
Signal strength of LTE connection.
Active Channel
Frequency of LTE connection.
Interference with 2.4GHz
WLAN
Whether the current LTE frequency causes interference with
2.4G wireless. If Yes, the interfered 2.4G wireless channels
will be indicated.
Max Channel TX Rate /
Max Channel RX Rate
Maximum TX/RX link rate of LTE connection.
LTE SMS
258
SMS Centre Number
The phone number for SMS service of the LTE SIM card.
SMS Service status
Whether the SMS service of the LTE SIM card is ready.
SMS Loading
Whether the received SMS messages in the LTE SIM card have
been loaded to the Router.
New SMS
The number of unread SMS in SMS Inbox.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part III Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users
can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just
like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
259
III-1 Wireless LAN (2.4GHz/5GHz)
This function is used for “n”and “ac” models only.
Over recent years, the market for wireless communications has enjoyed tremendous growth.
Wireless technology now reaches or is capable of reaching virtually every location on the
surface of the earth. Hundreds of millions of people exchange information every day via
wireless communication products. The Vigor2926 wireless series router (with “n”, “n-plus” or
“ac” in model name) is designed for maximum flexibility and efficiency of a small
office/home. Any authorized staff can bring a built-in WLAN client PDA or notebook into a
meeting room for conference without laying a clot of LAN cable or drilling holes everywhere.
Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users can simultaneously access all LAN facilities
just like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.
The Vigor wireless routers are equipped with a wireless LAN interface compliant with the
standard IEEE 802.11n draft 2 protocol. To boost its performance further, the Vigor Router is
also loaded with advanced wireless technology to lift up data rate up to 300 Mbps*. Hence,
you can finally smoothly enjoy stream music and video.
Vigor2926 wireless router is a highly integrated wireless local area network (WLAN) for 5 GHz
802.11ac or 2.4/5 GHz 802.11n WLAN applications. It supports channel operations of 20/40
MHz at 2.4 GHz and 20/40/80 MHz at 5 GHz. Vigor2926 “ac” series router can support data
rates up to 1.3 Gbps in 802.11ac 80 MHz channels. Vigor2926 “n” series router supports
802.11n up to 300 Mbps for 40 MHz channel operations.
Info
The actual data throughput will vary according to the network conditions
and environmental factors, including volume of network traffic, network
overhead and building materials.
In an Infrastructure Mode of wireless network, Vigor wireless router plays a role as an Access
Point (AP) connecting to lots of wireless clients or Stations (STA). All the STAs will share the
same Internet connection via Vigor wireless router. The General Settings will set up the
information of this wireless network, including its SSID as identification, located channel etc.
Multiple SSIDs
260
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Vigor router supports four SSID settings for wireless connections. Each SSID can be defined
with different name and download/upload rate for selecting by stations connected to the
router wirelessly.
Real-time Hardware Encryption
Vigor Router is equipped with a hardware AES encryption engine so it can apply the highest
protection to your data without influencing user experience.
Complete Security Standard Selection
To ensure the security and privacy of your wireless communication, we provide several
prevailing standards on market.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a legacy method to encrypt each frame transmitted via
radio using either a 64-bit or 128-bit key. Usually access point will preset a set of four keys
and it will communicate with each station using only one out of the four keys.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), the most dominating security mechanism in industry, is
separated into two categories: WPA-personal or called WPA Pre-Share Key (WPA/PSK), and
WPA-Enterprise or called WPA/802.1x.
In WPA-Personal, a pre-defined key is used for encryption during data transmission. WPA
applies Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for data encryption while WPA2 applies AES.
The WPA-Enterprise combines not only encryption but also authentication.
Since WEP has been proved vulnerable, you may consider using WPA for the most secure
connection. You should select the appropriate security mechanism according to your needs.
No matter which security suite you select, they all will enhance the over-the-air data
protection and /or privacy on your wireless network. The Vigor wireless router is very flexible
and can support multiple secure connections with both WEP and WPA at the same time.
Info
The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the
label pasted on the bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants
to access into Internet through such router, please input the default PSK
value for connection.
Separate the Wireless and the Wired LAN- WLAN Isolation
It enables you to isolate your wireless LAN from wired LAN for either quarantine or limit
access reasons. To isolate means neither of the parties can access each other. To elaborate
an example for business use, you may set up a wireless LAN for visitors only so they can
connect to Internet without hassle of the confidential information leakage. For a more
flexible deployment, you may add filters of MAC addresses to isolate users’ access from wired
LAN.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
261
Manage Wireless Stations - Station List
It will display all the stations in your wireless network and the status of their connection.
DFS Restrictions
Some of 5GHz channels are DFS channels which are governed radars. Without passing DFS
certificate test, we can not open those DFS channels in Vigor router. We are working on DFS
certification in Europe and open those channels by releasing new firmware once we receive
DFS certification. According to DFS certificate in Europe, we will open channels 52, 56, 60, 64,
100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, and 136.
At present, we will not open DFS channels in the USA because we do not have plan for DFS
certification in the USA. Channels 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132,
and 136 will be restricted in the USA.
In some countries, there are restrictions on DFS channels as well. We will implement country
code to restrict uncertified channels.
Below shows the menu items for Wireless LAN (2.4Ghz) and Wireless LAN(5GHz).
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) provides easy procedure to make network connection between
wireless station and wireless access point (vigor router) with the encryption of WPA and
WPA2.
262
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
III-1-1 Wireless Wizard
The wireless wizard allows you to configure settings specified for a host AP (for home use or
internal use for a company) and specified for a guest AP (for any wireless clients accessing
into Internet).
Follow the steps listed below:
1. Open Wizards>>Wireless Wizard.
2. The screen of wireless wizard will be shown as follows. This page will be used for internal
users in a company or your home. Besides, the settings will change based on different
model of Vigor2926 series. In this case, Vigor2926ac is used as an example.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
263
Item
Description
Wireless 2.4GHz Settings
Name
Enter the SSID name of this router for wireless 2.4GHz. The
default name is defined with DrayTek. Change the name if
required.
Mode
At present, the router can connect to 11n Only, 11g Only,
Mixed (11b+11g), Mixed (11a+11n), Mixed (11g+11n), and
Mixed (11b+11g+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose
Mix (11b+11g+11n) mode.
Channel
Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The
default channel is 6. You may switch channel if the selected
channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of
choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system
determine for you.
Security Key
The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.
The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio
using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered
manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via
802.1x authentication.
Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64
Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
“0x321253abcde…”).
Wireless 5GHz Settings – Such part is available when your Vigor router supports
wireless 5GHz.
264
Use the same SSID
and Security Key as
above
Check the box to use the same settings configured above.
Name
Enter the SSID name of this router for wireless 5GHz.
Mode
At present, the router can connect to 11a Only, 11n Only
(5GHz), Mixed (11a+11n) and Mixed (11a+11n+11ac) stations
simultaneously.
Channel
Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The
default channel is 36. You may switch channel if the selected
channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of
choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system
determine for you.
Security Key
The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.
The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio
using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered
manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via
802.1x authentication.
Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64
Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
"0x321253abcde...").
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Next
Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel
Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes.
3. After typing the required information, click Next. The settings in the page limit the
wireless station (guest) accessing into Internet but not being allowed to share the LAN
network and VPN connection.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Wireless 2.4GHz Settings
Enable/Disable
Click it to enable or disable settings in this page.
SSID
Enter the SSID name of this router. (SSID1)
Security Key
The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.
The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio
using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered
manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via
802.1x authentication.
Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64
Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
"0x321253abcde...").
Bandwidth Limit
Enable – Check the box to set the bandwidth limit for data
transmission in upload and download.
It controls the data transmission rate through wireless
connection.
Total Upload – Check Enable and type the transmitting rate
for data upload. Default value is 30,000 kbps.
Total Download – Enter the transmitting rate for data
download. Default value is 30,000 kbps.
Wireless 5GHz Settings
Enable/Disable
Click it to enable or disable settings in this page.
Use the same SSID
and Security Key as
Check the box to use the same settings configured above.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
265
above
SSID
Enter the SSID name of this router. (SSID2)
Security Key
The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.
The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio
using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered
manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via
802.1x authentication.
Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64
Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
"0x321253abcde...").
Next
Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel
Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes.
4. After typing the required information, click Next.
5. The following page will display the configuration summary for wireless setting.
6. Click Finish to complete the wireless settings configuration.
266
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
III-1-2 General Setup
By clicking the Wireless LAN>>General Setup, a new web page will appear so that you could
configure the SSID and the wireless channel. Please refer to the following figure for more
information.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable Wireless LAN
Check the box to enable wireless function.
Mode
2.4GHz in “n” and “ac” model:
At present, the router can connect to 11g Only, 11n Only(2.4
GHz), Mixed (11b+11g), Mixed (11g+11n), and Mixed
(11b+11g+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose Mixed
(11b+11g+11n) mode.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
267
5 GHz in “n” model:
At present, the router can connect to 11a Only, 11n Only (5
GHz), Mixed (11a+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply
choose Mixed (11a+11n) mode.
5 GHz in “ac” model:
At present, the router can connect to 11a Only, 11n Only (5
GHz), Mixed (11a+11n) and Mixed (11a+11n+11ac) stations
simultaneously. Simply choose Mixed (11a+11n+11ac) mode.
Note: 802.11b/g operates on 2.4G band, 802.11a operates
on 5G band, 802.11n operates on either 2.4G or 5G band, and
802.11ac operates on 5G band only.
Channel
Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The
default channel is 6. You may switch channel if the selected
channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of
choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system
determine for you.
2.4GHz in “n” and “ac” model:
For 5 GHz in “n” model:
268
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
5 GHz in “ac” model:
Note: For the restricted channels on DFS, please refer to
4.18.1 Basic Concepts for more detailed information.
Hide SSID
Check it to prevent from wireless sniffing and make it harder
for unauthorized clients or STAs to join your wireless LAN.
Depending on the wireless utility, the user may only see the
information except SSID or just cannot see any thing about
Vigor wireless router while site surveying. The system allows
you to set four sets of SSID for different usage. In default,
the first set of SSID will be enabled. You can hide it for your
necessity.
SSID
Means the identification of the wireless LAN. SSID can be any
text numbers or various special characters.
Isolate
Member –Check this box to make the wireless clients
(stations) with the same SSID not accessing for each other.
VPN – Check this box to make the wireless clients (stations)
with different VPN not accessing for each other.
Schedule Profiles
Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only.
You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules
pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default
setting of this field is blank and the function will always
work.
Schedule 1 ~ 4
Selected SSID (All, 2 /3 /4) will be forced up /down based on
the schedule profile used.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
III-1-3 Security
This page allows you to set security with different modes for SSID 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
After configuring the correct settings, please click OK to save and invoke it.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
269
The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the label pasted on the
bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants to access into Internet through such
router, please input the default PSK value for connection.
By clicking the Wireless LAN>>Security Settings, a new web page will appear so that you
could configure the settings of WPA and WEP.
Available settings are explained as follows:
270
Item
Description
Mode
There are several modes provided for you to choose.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Info
You should also set Wireless LAN(2.4GHz)
802.1X Setting simultaneously if 802.1x mode
is selected.
Disable - Turn off the encryption mechanism.
WEP-Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key should
be entered in WEP Key.
WEP/802.1x Only - Accepts only WEP clients and the
encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server
with 802.1X protocol.
WPA/802.1x Only- Accepts only WPA clients and the
encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server
with 802.1X protocol.
WPA2/802.1x Only- Accepts only WPA2 clients and the
encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server
with 802.1X protocol.
Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only) - Accepts WPA and WPA2
clients simultaneously and the encryption key is obtained
dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.
WPA/PSK-Accepts only WPA clients and the encryption key
should be entered in PSK.
WPA2/PSK-Accepts only WPA2 clients and the encryption key
should be entered in PSK.
Mixed (WPA+ WPA2)/PSK - Accepts WPA and WPA2 clients
simultaneously and the encryption key should be entered in
PSK.
WPA
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio
using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered
manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via
802.1x authentication. Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as
012345678(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
"0x321253abcde...").
Pre-Shared Key (PSK) - Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as
012345678..(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as
"0x321253abcde...").
Password Strength – The system will display the password
strength (represented with the word of weak, medium or
strong) of the PSK specified above.
EAPOL Key Retry - The default setting is "Enable". It can
make sure that the key will be installed and used once in
order to prevent key reinstallation attack.
271
WEP
64-Bit - For 64 bits WEP key, either 5 ASCII characters, such
as 12345 (or 10 hexadecimal digitals leading by 0x, such as
0x4142434445.)
128-Bit - For 128 bits WEP key, either 13 ASCII characters,
such as ABCDEFGHIJKLM (or 26 hexadecimal digits leading by
0x, such as 0x4142434445464748494A4B4C4D).
All wireless devices must support the same WEP encryption
bit size and have the same key. Four keys can be entered
here, but only one key can be selected at a time. The keys
can be entered in ASCII or Hexadecimal. Check the key you
wish to use.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
III-1-4 Access Control
In the Access Control, the router may restrict wireless access to certain wireless clients only
by locking their MAC address into a black or white list. The user may block wireless clients by
inserting their MAC addresses into a black list, or only let them be able to connect by inserting
their MAC addresses into a white list.
In the Access Control web page, users may configure the white/black list modes used by each
SSID and the MAC addresses applied to their lists.
Available settings are explained as follows:
272
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Item
Description
Enable Mac Address Filter
Select to enable the MAC Address filter for wireless LAN
identified with SSID 1 to 4 respectively. All the clients
(expressed by MAC addresses) listed in the box can be
grouped under different wireless LAN. For example, they can
be grouped under SSID 1 and SSID 2 at the same time if you
check SSID 1 and SSID 2.
MAC Address Filter
Display all MAC addresses that are edited before.
Client’s MAC Address
Manually enter the MAC address of wireless client.
Apply SSID
After entering the client’s MAC address, check the box of the
SSIDs desired to insert this MAC address into their access
control list.
Attribute
s: Isolate the station from LAN - select to isolate the
wireless connection of the wireless client of the MAC address
from LAN.
Comment
Type a brief description for the specified client’s MAC
address.
Add
Add a new MAC address into the list.
Delete
Delete the selected MAC address in the list.
Edit
Edit the selected MAC address in the list.
Cancel
Give up the access control set up.
OK
Click it to save the access control list.
Clear All
Clean all entries in the MAC address list.
Backup Access Control
Settings on this web page can be saved as a file which can be
restored in the future by this device or other device.
Upload From File
Restore wireless access control settings and applied onto this
device.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
273
III-1-5 WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) provides easy procedure to make network connection between
wireless station and wireless access point (vigor router) with the encryption of WPA and
WPA2.
Info
WPS is available for the wireless station with WPS supported.
It is the simplest way to build connection between wireless network clients and vigor router.
Users do not need to select any encryption mode and type any long encryption passphrase to
setup a wireless client every time. He/she only needs to press a button on wireless client, and
WPS will connect for client and router automatically.
There are two methods to do network connection through WPS between AP and Stations:
pressing the Start PBC button or using PIN Code.
274
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide

On the side of Vigor2926 series which served as an AP, press WPS button once on the
front panel of the router or click Start PBC on web configuration interface. On the side
of a station with network card installed, press Start PBC button of network card.

If you want to use PIN code, you have to know the PIN code specified in wireless client.
Then provide the PIN code of the wireless client you wish to connect to the vigor router.
For WPS is supported in WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode, if you do not choose such mode in
Wireless LAN>>Security, you will see the following message box.
Please click OK and go back Wireless LAN>>Security to choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode
and access WPS again.
Below shows Wireless LAN>>WPS web page:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
275
Available settings are explained as follows:
276
Item
Description
Enable WPS
Check this box to enable WPS setting.
WPS Status
Display related system information for WPS. If the wireless
security (encryption) function of the router is properly
configured, you can see ‘Configured’ message here.
SSID
Display the SSID1 of the router. WPS is supported by SSID1
only.
Authentication Mode
Display current authentication mode of the router. Only
WPA2/PSK and WPA/PSK support WPS.
Configure via Push Button
Click Start PBC to invoke Push-Button style WPS setup
procedure. The router will wait for WPS requests from
wireless clients about two minutes. The WPS LED on the
router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will return to
normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS
within two minutes)
Configure via Client
PinCode
Please input the PIN code specified in wireless client you
wish to connect, and click Start PIN button. The WPS LED on
the router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will
return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to
setup WPS within two minutes)
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
III-1-6 WDS
WDS means Wireless Distribution System. It is a protocol for connecting two access points (AP)
wirelessly. Usually, it can be used for the following application:


Provide bridge traffic between two LANs through the air.
Extend the coverage range of a WLAN.
Refer to the following table:
WDS Mode
Wireless
Signal
Comparisons
 Wireless stations (clients) within the effective range of
wireless signal can access into Internet through the router
/AP.
Bridge
Limited
 Wireless stations (clients) out of the effective range of
wireless signal cannot access into Internet through the
router /AP with Bridge mode configured.
 The packets received from a WDS link will only be forwarded
to local wired or wireless hosts.
 Wireless stations (clients) within the effective range of
wireless signal can access into Internet through the router
/AP.
Repeater
Extended
 Wireless stations (clients) out of the effective range of
wireless signal can access into Internet through the router
/AP with Repeater mode configured.
 The packets received from one Vigor router can be repeated
to another AP (remotely) through WDS links.
 Only Repeater mode can do WDS-to-WDS packet forwarding.
To meet the above requirement, two WDS modes are implemented in Vigor router. One is
Bridge, the other is Repeater. Below shows the function of WDS-bridge interface:
The application for the WDS-Repeater mode is depicted as below:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
277
The major difference between these two modes is that: while in Repeater mode, the packets
received from one peer AP can be repeated to another peer AP through WDS links. Yet in
Bridge mode, packets received from a WDS link will only be forwarded to local wired or
wireless hosts. In other words, only Repeater mode can do WDS-to-WDS packet forwarding.
In the following examples, hosts connected to Bridge 1 or 3 can communicate with hosts
connected to Bridge 2 through WDS links. However, hosts connected to Bridge 1 CANNOT
communicate with hosts connected to Bridge 3 through Bridge 2.
Click WDS from Wireless LAN menu. The following page will be shown.
278
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Mode
Choose the mode for WDS setting. Disable mode will not
invoke any WDS setting. Bridge mode is designed to fulfill
the first type of application. Repeater mode is for the
second one.
Security
There are three types for security, Disable and Pre-shared
key. The setting you choose here will make the following
Pre-shared key field be valid or not. Choose one of the types
for the router.
Pre-shared Key
When Pre-Shared Key is selected as Security above,
configure the following settings if required.
Type – There are some types for you to choose. WPA and
WPA2 are used for WDS devices (e.g.2925n wireless router,
you can set the encryption mode as WPA or WPA2 to establish
your WDS system between AP and the router.
Key – Set the encryption key in this field. Type 8 ~ 63 ASCII
characters or 64 hexadecimal digits leading by “0x”.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
279
Bridge
If you choose Bridge as the connecting mode, please type in
the peer MAC address (of VigorAP/Vigor router required to
make connection with such Vigor router) in these fields.
Four peer MAC addresses are allowed to be entered in this
page at one time. Yet please disable the unused link to get
better performance. If you want to invoke the peer MAC
address, remember to check Enable box in the front of the
MAC address after typing.
Repeater
If you choose Repeater as the connecting mode, please type
in the peer MAC address (of VigorAP/Vigor router required to
make connection with such Vigor router and used to extend
the wireless signal) in these fields.
Four peer MAC addresses are allowed to be entered in this
page at one time. Similarly, if you want to invoke the peer
MAC address, remember to check Enable box in the front of
the MAC address after typing.
Access Point Function
Click Enable to make this router serve as an access point.
When Repeater is set as WDS Mode, click Enable to use such
function.
Click Disable if Bridge is set as WDS Mode.
Status
It allows user to send “hello” message to peers. Yet, it is
valid only when the peer also supports this function.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
280
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
III-1-7 Advanced Setting
This page allows users to set advanced settings such as operation mode, channel bandwidth,
guard interval, and aggregation MSDU for wireless data transmission.
For “n, ac” model ---
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Operation Mode
Mixed Mode – the router can transmit data with the ways
supported in both 802.11a/b/g and 802.11n standards.
However, the entire wireless transmission will be slowed
down if 802.11g or 802.11b wireless client is connected.
Green Field – to get the highest throughput, please choose
such mode. Such mode can make the data transmission
happen between 11n systems only. In addition, it does not
have protection mechanism to avoid the conflict with
neighboring devices of 802.11a/b/g.
Channel Bandwidth
20- the router will use 20Mhz for data transmission and
receiving between the AP and the stations.
40- the router will use 40Mhz for data transmission and
receiving between the AP and the stations.
20/40 – Vigor Router will scan for nearby wireless AP, and
then use 20MHz if the number of AP is more than 10, or use
40MHz if it's not.
Guard Interval
It is to assure the safety of propagation delays and
reflections for the sensitive digital data. If you choose auto
as guard interval, the AP router will choose short guard
interval (increasing the wireless performance) or long guard
interval for data transmit based on the station capability.
Aggregation MSDU
Aggregation MSDU can combine frames with different sizes.
It is used for improving MAC layer’s performance for some
brand’s clients. The default setting is Enable.
Long Preamble
This option is to define the length of the sync field in an
802.11 packet. Most modern wireless network uses short
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
281
preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with
128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless
network devices only support long preamble. Click Enable to
use Long Preamble if needed to communicate with this kind
of devices.
TX Power
Set the power percentage for transmission signal of access
point. The greater the value is, the higher intensity of the
signal will be.
WMM Capable
WMM is an abbreviation of Wi-Fi Multimedia. It defines the
priority levels for four access categories derived from 802.1d
(prioritization tabs). The categories are designed with
specific types of traffic, voice, video, best effort and low
priority data. There are four accessing categories - AC_BE ,
AC_BK, AC_VI and AC_VO for WMM.
To apply WMM parameters for wireless data transmission,
please click the Enable radio button.
APSD Capable
APSD (automatic power-save delivery) is an enhancement
over the power-save mechanisms supported by Wi-Fi
networks. It allows devices to take more time in sleeping
state and consume less power to improve the performance
by minimizing transmission latency.
The default setting is Disable.
Fragment Length
(256 – 2346)
Set the Fragment threshold. Do not modify default value if
you don’t know what it is, default value is 2346.
RTS Threshold (1 – 2347)
Minimize the collision (unit is bytes) between hidden stations
to improve wireless performance.
Set the RTS threshold. Do not modify default value if you
don’t know what it is, default value is 2347.
Country Code
Vigor router broadcasts country codes by following the
802.11d standard. However, some wireless stations will
detect / scan the country code to prevent conflict occurred.
If conflict is detected, wireless station will be warned and is
unable to make network connection. Therefore, changing
the country code to ensure successful network connection
will be necessary for some clients.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
282
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
III-1-8 Station Control
Station Control is used to specify the duration for the wireless client to connect and
reconnect Vigor router. If such function is not enabled, the wireless client can connect Vigor
router until the router shuts down.
Such feature is especially useful for free Wi-Fi service. For example, a coffee shop offers free
Wi-Fi service for its guests for one hour every day. Then, the connection time can be set as “1
hour” and reconnection time can be set as “1 day”. Thus, the guest can finish his job within
one hour and will not occupy the wireless network for a long time.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
SSID
Display the SSID that the wireless station will use it to
connect with Vigor router.
Enable
Check the box to enable the station control function.
Connection Time /
Reconnection Time
Use the drop down list to choose the duration for the
wireless client connecting /reconnecting to Vigor router. Or,
type the duration manually when you choose User defined.
Display All Station Control
List
All the wireless stations connecting to Vigor router by using
such SSID will be listed on Station Control List.
Hotspot Web Portal
Click it to access in to Hotspot Web Portal page for
modifying the settings if required.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
283
III-1-9 Bandwidth Management
The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of
bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Bandwidth Management
to make the bandwidth usage more efficient.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
SSID
Display the specific SSID name.
Enable
Check this box to enable the bandwidth management for
clients.
Bandwidth Limit Type
Auto Adjustment - Bandwidth limit is determined by the
system automatically.
Per Station Limit – Bandwidth limit is determined according
to the limitation of the wireless client.
Total Upload Limit
It is available when Auto Adjustment is selected.
Type a value to define the maximum data traffic (uploading)
for all of the wireless clients connecting to Vigor2926.
Total Download Limit
It is available when Auto Adjustment is selected.
Type a value to define the maximum data clientstations
connecting to Vigor2926.
Upload Limit
It is available when Per Station Limit is selected.
Type a value to define the maximum data traffic (uploading)
for each wireless client connecting to Vigor2926.
Download Limit
It is available when Per Station Limit is selected
Type a value to define the maximum data traffic
(downloading) for each wireless client connecting to
Vigor2926.
After finishing this web page configuration, please click OK to save the settings.
284
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
III-1-10 AP Discovery
Vigor router can scan all regulatory channels and find working APs in the neighborhood. Based
on the scanning result, users will know which channel is clean for usage. Also, it can be used
to facilitate finding an AP for a WDS link. Notice that during the scanning process (about 5
seconds), no client is allowed to connect to Vigor.
This page is used to scan the existence of the APs on the wireless LAN. Yet, only the AP which
is in the same channel of this router can be found. Please click Scan to discover all the
connected APs.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Scan
It is used to discover all the connected AP. The results will be
shown on the box above this button.
Statistics
It displays the statistics for the channels used by APs.
Add to
If you want the found AP applying the WDS settings, please
type in the AP’s MAC address on the bottom of the page and
click Bridge or Repeater. Next, click Add to. Later, the MAC
address of the AP will be added to Bridge or Repeater field of
WDS settings page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
285
III-1-11 Airtime Fairness
Airtime fairness is essential in wireless networks that must support critical enterprise
applications.
Most of the applications are either symmetric or require more downlink than uplink capacity;
telephony and email send the same amount of data in each direction, while video streaming
and web surfing involve more traffic sent from access points to clients than the other way
around. This is essential for ensuring predictable performance and quality-of-service, as well
as allowing 802.11n and legacy clients to coexist on the same network. Without airtime
fairness, offices using mixed mode networks risk having legacy clients slow down the entire
network or letting the fastest client(s) crowd out other users.
With airtime fairness, every client at a given quality-of-service level has equal access to the
network's airtime.
The wireless channel can be accessed by only one wireless station at the same time.
The principle behind the IEEE802.11 channel access mechanisms is that each station has
equal probability to access the channel. When wireless stations have similar data rate, this
principle leads to a fair result. In this case, stations get similar channel access time which is
called airtime.
However, when stations have various data rate (e.g., 11g, 11n), the result is not fair. The
slow stations (11g) work in their slow data rate and occupy too much airtime, whereas the
fast stations (11n) become much slower.
Take the following figure as an example, both Station A(11g) and Station B(11n) transmit data
packets through Vigor router. Although they have equal probability to access the wireless
channel, Station B(11n) gets only a little airtime and waits too much because Station A(11g)
spends longer time to send one packet. In other words, Station B(fast rate) is obstructed by
Station A(slow rate).
To improve this problem, Airtime Fairness is added for Vigor router. Airtime Fairness function
tries to assign similar airtime to each station (A/B) by controlling TX traffic. In the following
figure, Station B(11n) has higher probability to send data packets than Station A(11g). By this
way, Station B(fast rate) gets fair airtime and it's speed is not limited by Station A(slow rate).
286
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
It is similar to automatic Bandwidth Limit. The dynamic bandwidth limit of each station
depends on instant active station number and airtime assignment. Please note that Airtime
Fairness of 2.4GHz and 5GHz are independent. But stations of different SSIDs function
together, because they all use the same wireless channel. IN SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENTS, this
function can reduce the bad influence of slow wireless devices and improve the overall
wireless performance.
Suitable environment:
(1) Many wireless stations.
(2) All stations mainly use download traffic.
(3) The performance bottleneck is wireless connection.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable Airtime Fairness
Try to assign similar airtime to each wireless station by
controlling TX traffic.
Airtime Fairness – Click the link to display the following
screen of airtime fairness note.
Triggering Client Number –Airtime Fairness function is
applied only when active station number achieves this
number.
After finishing this web page configuration, please click OK to save the settings.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Airtime Fairness function and Bandwidth Limit function should be mutually
exclusive. So their webs have extra actions to ensure these two functions
are not enabled simultaneously.
287
III-1-12 Band Steering
Band Steering detects if the wireless clients are capable of 5GHz operation, and steers them
to that frequency. It helps to leave 2.4GHz band available for legacy clients, and improves
users experience by reducing channel utilization.
If dual-band is detected, the AP will let the wireless client connect to less congested wireless
LAN, such as 5GHz to prevent from network congestion.
Info
288
To make Band Steering work successfully, SSID and security on 2.4GHz also
MUST be broadcasted on 5GHz.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>Band Steering to get the following web page:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable Band Steering
If it is enabled, Vigor router will detect if the wireless client
is capable of dual-band or not within the time limit.
Check Time…. – If the wireless station does not have the
capability of 5GHz network connection, the system shall wait
and check for several seconds (15 seconds, in default) to
make the 2.4GHz network connection. Specify the time limit
for Vigor router to detect the wireless client.
After finishing this web page configuration, please click OK to save the settings.
Below shows how Band Steering works.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
289
How to Use Band Steering?
1. Open Wireless LAN(2.4GHz)>>Band Steering.
2. Check the box of Enable Band Steering and use the default value (15) for check time
setting.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
4. Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>General Setup and Wireless LAN (5GHz)>> General
Setup. Configure SSID as DrayTek2926_BandSteering for both pages. Click OK to save the
settings.
Same value
for 2.4GHz
and 5GHz
290
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
5. Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>Security and Wireless LAN (5GHz)>>Security. Configure
Security as 12345678 for both pages. Click OK to save the settings.
Same value
for 2.4GHz
and 5GHz
6. Now, Vigor router will let the wireless clients connect to less congested wireless LAN,
such as 5GHz to prevent from network congestion.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
291
III-1-13 Roaming
The network signal for a single wireless access point might be limited by its coverage range.
Therefore, if you want to expand the wireless network in a large exhibition with a quick
method, you can install multiple access points with enabling the Roaming feature for each AP
to reach the purpose of expanding wireless signals seamlessly.
These access points connecting for each other shall be verified by pre-authentication. This
page allows you to enable the roaming feature and the pre-authentication.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Disable RSSI Requirement
When the link rate of wireless station is too low or the signal
received by the wireless station is too worse, Vigor router
will automatically detect (based on the link rate and RSSI
requirement) and cut off the network connection for that
wireless station to assist it to connect another Wireless AP to
get better signal.
This option is to disable the roaming mechanism.
Strictly Minimum RSSI
Vigor router uses RSSI (received signal strength indicator) to
decide to terminate the network connection of wireless
station. When the signal strength is below the value (dBm)
set here, Vigor router will terminate the network connection
for that wireless station.
Minimum RSSI
Minimum RSSI - When the signal strength of the wireless
station is below the value (dBm) set here and adjacent AP
(must be DrayTek AP and support such feature too) with
higher signal strength value (defined in the field of With
Adjacent AP RSSI over) is detected by Vigor router, Vigor
router will terminate the network connection for that
wireless station. Later, the wireless station can connect to
the adjacent AP (with better RSSI).

With Adjacent AP RSSI over – Specify a value as a
threshold.
After finishing this web page configuration, please click OK to save the settings.
292
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
III-1-14 Station List
Station List provides the knowledge of connecting wireless clients now along with its status
code. There is a code summary below for explanation. For convenient Access Control, you
can select a WLAN station and click Add to Access Control below.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Refresh
Click this button to refresh the status of station list.
Add
Click this button to add current typed MAC address into
Access Control.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
293
This page is left blank.
294
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part IV VoIP
Voice over IP network (VoIP) enables you to use
your broadband Internet connection to make toll
quality voice calls over the Internet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
295
IV-1 VoIP
Voice over IP network (VoIP) enables you to use your broadband Internet connection to make
toll quality voice calls over the Internet.
Info
This function is used for “V” models.
There are many different call signaling protocols, methods by which VoIP devices can talk to
each other. The most popular protocols are SIP, MGCP, Megaco and H.323. These protocols
are not all compatible with each other (except via a soft-switch server).
The Vigor V models support the SIP protocol as this is an ideal and convenient deployment for
the ITSP (Internet Telephony Service Provider) and softphone and is widely supported. SIP is
an end-to-end, signaling protocol that establishes user presence and mobility in VoIP
structure. Every one who wants to talk using his/her SIP Uniform Resource Identifier, “SIP
Address”. The standard format of SIP URI is
sip: user:password @ host: port
Some fields may be optional in different use. In general, "host” refers to a domain. The
“userinfo” includes the user field, the password field and the @ sign following them. This is
very similar to a URL so some may call it “SIP URL”. SIP supports peer-to-peer direct calling
and also calling via a SIP proxy server (a role similar to the gatekeeper in H.323 networks),
while the MGCP protocol uses client-server architecture, the calling scenario being very
similar to the current PSTN network.
After a call is setup, the voice streams transmit via RTP (Real-Time Transport Protocol).
Different codecs (methods to compress and encode the voice) can be embedded into RTP
packets. Vigor V models provide various codecs, including G.711 A/μ-law, G.723, G.726 and
G.729 A & B. Each codec uses a different bandwidth and hence provides different levels of
voice quality. The more bandwidth a codec uses the better the voice quality, however the
codec used must be appropriate for your Internet bandwidth.
Calling via SIP Servers
First, the Vigor V models of yours will have to register to a SIP Registrar by sending
registration messages to validate. Then, both parties’ SIP proxies will forward the sequence
of messages to caller to establish the session.
If you both register to the same SIP Registrar, then it will be illustrated as below:
296
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
The major benefit of this mode is that you don’t have to memorize your friend’s IP address,
which might change very frequently if it’s dynamic. Instead of that, you will only have to
using dial plan or directly dial your friend’s account name if you are with the same SIP
Registrar.
Peer-to-Peer
Before calling, you have to know your friend’s IP Address. The Vigor VoIP Routers will build
connection between each other.
Vigor V models firstly apply efficient codecs designed to make the best use of available
bandwidth, but Vigor V models also equip with automatic QoS assurance. QoS Assurance
assists to assign high priority to voice traffic via Internet. You will always have the required
inbound and outbound bandwidth that is prioritized exclusively for Voice traffic over Internet
but you just get your data a little slower and it is tolerable for data traffic.
Our Vigor V models firstly apply efficient codecs designed to make the best use of available
bandwidth, but Vigor V models also equip with automatic QoS assurance. QoS Assurance
assists to assign high priority to voice traffic via Internet. You will always have the required
inbound and outbound bandwidth that is prioritized exclusively for Voice traffic over Internet
but you just get your data a little slower and it is tolerable for data traffic.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
297
Web User Interface
IV-1-1 VoIP Wizard
Vigor router offers a quick method to configure settings for VoIP application. Follow the steps
listed below.
Info
This wizard is available for “V” model only.
1. Open Wizards>>VoIP Wizard.
2. The screen of VoIP Wizard will be shown as follows.
Available settings are explained as follows:
298
Item
Description
Set VoIP service
provider domain
VoIP service provider - Use the drop down list to choose
the ISP which offers the VoIP service for your router.
SIP Port – Use the default setting (5060).
Set Account quickly
Account Number/Name – Enter the account number/name
registered to your ISP.
Password – Enter the password for the account registered
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
to your ISP.
Use the same Account as phone 1 – If you don’t need to
configure Phone 2 settings, simply check this box.
Next
Click it to get into the next setting page.
Cancel
Click it to give up the VoIP wizard.
3. After finished the settings above, click Next for viewing summary of such connection.
4. Click Finish. A page of VoIP Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
299
IV-1-2 General Settings
Open VoIP>>General Settings. The following page will appear. Check the box of Enable VoIP
and click OK to open the configuration page. If not, no settings will be displayed.
After checking the box and click OK, the following page appears for you to configure secure
phone, IP call; and set NAT Traversal Setting, RTP for the VoIP function.
Available settings are explained as follows:
300
Item
Description
Secure Phone
Enable Secure Phone - It allows users to have encrypted RTP
stream with the peer side using the same protocol
(ZRTP+SRTP). Check this box to have secure call.
Enable SAS Voice Prompt - If it is enabled, SAS prompt will
be heard for both ends every time. If it is disabled, no SAS
prompt will be heard any more.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
NAT Traversal Setting
STUN Server - Type in the IP address or domain of the STUN
server.
External IP - Type in the gateway IP address.
SIP PING interval - The default value is 150 (sec). It is useful
for a Nortel server NAT Traversal Support.
RTP
Symmetric RTP – Check this box to invoke the function. To
make the data transmission going through on both ends of
local router and remote router not misleading due to IP lost
(for example, sending data from the public IP of remote
router to the private IP of local router), you can check this
box to solve this problem.
Dynamic RTP Port Start - Specifies the start port for RTP
stream. The default value is 10050.
Dynamic RTP Port End - Specifies the end port for RTP
stream. The default value is 15000.
RTP TOS – It decides the level of VoIP package. Use the drop
down list to choose any one of them.
IP Call
Enable IP Call – It allows that a user could dial outgoing IP
Calls; and Vigor router could receive the incoming IP Calls.
Application for Secure Phone
Enable SAS Voice Prompt, for ex: if vigor router A calls vigor router B with checking Enable
Secure Phone and Enable SAS Voice Prompt, then:
1.
After the connection established, vigor router A will send SAS voice prompt to A and
vigor router B will send the SAS voice prompt to B.
2.
Then the RTP traffic is secured until the call ends.
3.
If vigor router A wants to call vigor router B again next time, both A and B will not hear
any voice prompt again even checking Enable SAS Voice Prompt on web UI. It means
only the first call between them will have voice prompt.
Enable SAS Voice Prompt, for ex: if vigor router A calls vigor router B with checking Enable
Secure Phone but not Enable SAS Voice Prompt, then:
1.
After the connection established, vigor router A will NOT send SAS voice prompt to vigor
router A and vigor router B will NOT send the SAS voice prompt to vigor router B.
2.
Even no voice prompt, but the RTP traffic is still secured until the call ends.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
301
Info
302
If the incoming or outgoing calls do not match any entry on the phonebook,
the router will try to make the call "being protected". But, if the call ends
up "unprotected"(e.g. peer side does not support ZRTP+SRTP), the router
will not play out a warning message.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IV-1-3 SIP Accounts
In this section, you set up your own SIP settings. When you apply for an account, your SIP
service provider will give you an Account Name or user name, SIP Registrar, Proxy, and
Domain name. (The last three might be the same in some case). Then you can tell your folks
your SIP Address as in Account [email protected] Domain name
As Vigor VoIP Router is turned on, it will first register with Registrar using
[email protected]/Realm. After that, your call will be bypassed by SIP Proxy to the
destination using [email protected]/Realm as identity.
Info
Selection items for Ring Port will differ according to the router you have.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Index
Click this link to access into next page for setting SIP
account.
Profile
Display the profile name of the account.
Domain/Realm
Display the domain name or IP address of the SIP registrar
server.
Proxy
Display the domain name or IP address of the SIP proxy
server.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
303
Account Name
Display the account name of SIP address before @.
Codec
Display the codec type for the account.
Ring Port
Specify which port will ring when receiving a phone call.
Status
Show the status for the corresponding SIP account. R means
such account is registered on SIP server successfully. – means
the account is failed to register on SIP server.
Click any index link to access into the following page for configuring SIP account.
Available settings are explained as follows:
304
Item
Description
Profile Name
Assign a name for this profile for identifying. You can type
similar name with the domain. For example, if the domain
name is draytel.org, then you might set draytel-1 in this
field.
Register via
If you want to make VoIP call without register personal
information, please choose None and check the box to
achieve the goal. Some SIP server allows user to use VoIP
function without registering. For such server, please check
the box of Call without Registration. Choosing Auto is
recommended. The system will select a proper way for your
VoIP call.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
SIP Port
Set the port number for sending/receiving SIP message for
building a session. The default value is 5060. Your peer must
set the same value in his/her Registrar.
Domain/Realm
Set the domain name or IP address of the SIP Registrar
server.
Proxy
Set domain name or IP address of SIP proxy server. By the
time you can type :port number after the domain name to
specify that port as the destination of data transmission
(e.g., nat.draytel.org:5065)
Act as Outbound Proxy
Check this box to make the proxy acting as outbound proxy.
Display Name
The caller-ID that you want to be displayed on your friend’s
screen.
Account Number/Name
Enter your account name of SIP Address, e.g. every text
before @.
Authentication ID
Check the box to invoke this function and enter the name or
number used for SIP Authorization with SIP Registrar. If this
setting value is the same as Account Name, it is not
necessary for you to check the box and set any value in this
field.
Password
The password provided to you when you registered with a SIP
service.
Expiry Time
The time duration that your SIP Registrar server keeps your
registration record. Before the time expires, the router will
send another register request to SIP Registrar again.
NAT Traversal Support
If the router (e.g., broadband router) you use connects to
internet by other device, you have to set this function for
your necessity.
None – Disable this function.
Stun – Choose this option if there is Stun server provided for
your router.
Manual – Choose this option if you want to specify an
external IP address as the NAT transversal support.
Nortel – If the soft-switch that you use supports Nortel
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
305
solution, you can choose this option.
Call Forwarding
There are four options for you to choose. Disable is to close
call forwarding function. Always means all the incoming calls
will be forwarded into SIP URL without any reason. Busy
means the incoming calls will be forwarded into SIP URL only
when the local system is busy. No Answer means if the
incoming calls do not receive any response, they will be
forwarded to the SIP URL by the time out.
SIP URL – Type in the SIP URL (e.g., [email protected] or
[email protected]) as the site for call forwarded.
Time Out – Set the time out for the call forwarding. The
default setting is 30 sec.
Ring Port
Set Phone 1 and/or Phone 2 as the default ring port(s) for
this SIP account.
Ring Pattern
Choose a ring tone type for the VoIP phone call.
Prefer Codec
Select one of five codecs as the default for your VoIP calls.
The codec used for each call will be negotiated with the peer
party before each session, and so may not be your default
choice. The default codec is G.729A/B; it occupies little
bandwidth while maintaining good voice quality.
If your upstream speed is only 64Kbps, do not use G.711
codec. It is better for you to have at least 256Kbps upstream
if you would like to use G.711.
Single Codec – If the box is checked, only the selected Codec
will be applied.
Packet Size
306
The amount of data contained in a single packet. The default
value is 20 ms, which means the data packet will contain 20
ms voice information.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Voice Active Detector
This function can detect if the voice on both sides is active or
not. If not, the router will do something to save the
bandwidth for other using. Click On to invoke this function;
click off to close the function.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
307
IV-1-4 DialPlan
This page allows you to set phone book, digit map, call barring, regional settings and PSTN
setup for the VoIP function. Click the links on this page to access into next pages for detailed
settings.
IV-1-4-1 Phone Book
In this section, you can set your VoIP contacts in the “phonebook”. It can help you to make
calls quickly and easily by using “speed-dial” Phone Number. There are total 60 index entries
in the phonebook for you to store all your friends and family members’ SIP addresses. Loop
through and Backup Phone Number will be displayed if you are using Vigor2926 series for
setting the phone book.
Click any index number to display the dial plan setup page.
308
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Click this to enable this entry.
Phone Number
The speed-dial number of this index. This can be any number
you choose, using digits 0-9 and * .
Display Name
The Caller-ID that you want to be displayed on your friend’s
screen. This let your friend can easily know who’s calling
without memorizing lots of SIP URL Address.
SIP URL
Enter your friend’s SIP Address.
Dial Out Account
Choose one of the SIP accounts for this profile to dial out. It
is useful for both sides (caller and callee) that registered to
different SIP Registrar servers. If caller and callee do not use
the same SIP server, sometimes, the VoIP phone call
connection may not succeed. By using the specified dial out
account, the successful connection can be assured.
Loop through
Choose PSTN to enable loop through function.
Backup Phone Number
When the VoIP phone obstructs or the Internet breaks down
for some reasons, the backup phone will be dialed out to
replace the VoIP phone number. At this time, the phone call
will be changed from VoIP phone into PSTN call according to
the loop through direction chosen. Note that, during the
phone switch, the blare of phone will appear for a short
time. And when the VoIP phone is switched into the PSTN
phone, the telecom co. might charge you for the connection
fee. Please type in backup phone number for this VoIP phone
setting.
Secure Phone
ZRTP+SRTP - It allows users to have encrypted RTP stream
with the peer side using the same protocol (ZRTP+SRTP).
Check this box to have secure call.
Cancel
Return to previous web page.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
If the incoming or outgoing calls do not match any entry on the phonebook,
the router will try to make the call "being protected". But, if the call ends
up "unprotected"(e.g. peer side does not support ZRTP+SRTP), the router
will not play out a warning message.
309
IV-1-4-2 Digit Map
For the convenience of user, this page allows users to edit prefix number for the SIP account
with adding number, stripping number or replacing number. It is used to help user have a quick
and easy way to dial out through VoIP interface.
Available settings are explained as follows:
310
Item
Description
Enable
Check this box to invoke this setting.
Match Prefix
It is used to match with the number you dialed and may be
modified by the action (add, strip or replace) with the OP
Number.
Mode
None - No action.
Add - When you choose this mode, the OP number will be
added before the match prefix number for calling out
through the specific route.
Strip - When you choose this mode, the partial or whole
match prefix number will be deleted according to the OP
number. Take the above picture (Prefix Table Setup web
page) as an example, the OP number of 886 will be deleted
completely for the match prefix number is set with 886.
Replace - When you choose this mode, the OP number will
be replaced by the prefix number for calling out through
the specific VoIP interface. Take the above picture (Prefix
Table Setup web page) as an example, the prefix number of
03 will be replaced by 8863. For example: dial number of
“031111111” will be changed to “88631111111” and sent to
SIP server.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
OP Number
The front number you type here is the first part of the
account number that you want to execute special function
(according to the chosen mode) by using the prefix number.
Min Len
Set the minimal length of the dial number for applying the
prefix number settings. Take the above picture (Prefix
Table Setup web page) as an example, if the dial number is
between 7 and 9, that number can apply the prefix number
settings here.
Max Len
Set the maximum length of the dial number for applying
the prefix number settings.
Route
Choose the one that you want to enable the prefix number
settings from the saved SIP accounts. Please set up one SIP
account first to make this interface available. This item
will be changed according to the port settings configured in
VoIP>> Phone Settings.
Move UP /Move Down
Click the link to move the selected entry up or down.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
311
IV-1-4-3 Call Barring
Call barring is used to block phone calls coming from the one that is not welcomed.
Additionally, you can set advanced settings for call barring such as Block Anonymous, Block
Unknown Domain or Block IP Address.
For Block Anonymous – this function can block the incoming calls without caller ID on the
interface (Phone port) specified in the following window. Such control also can be done based
on preconfigured schedules.
For Block Unknown Domain – this function can block incoming calls (through Phone port) from
unrecognized domain that is not specified in SIP accounts. Such control also can be done based
on preconfigured schedules.
For Block IP Address – this function can block incoming calls (through Phone port) coming from
IP address. Such control also can be done based on preconfigured schedules.
312
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Click any index number to display the call barring setup page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check it to enable this entry.
Call Direction
Determine the direction for the phone call, IN – incoming
call, OUT-outgoing call, IN & OUT – both incoming and
outgoing calls.
Barring Type
Determine the type of the VoIP phone call, URI/URL or
number.
Specific URI/URL or
Specific Number
This field will be changed based on the type you selected
for barring Type.
Route
All means all the phone calls will be blocked with such
mechanism.
Index (1-15) in Schedule
Enter the index of schedule profiles to control the call
barring according to the preconfigured schedules. Refer to
section Applications>>Schedule for detailed
configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
313
IV-1-4-4 Regional
This page allows you to process incoming or outgoing phone calls by regional. Default values
(common used in most areas) will be shown on this web page. You can change the number
based on the region that the router is placed.
Available settings are explained as follows:
314
Item
Description
Enable Regional
Check this box to enable this function.
Last Call Return [Miss]
Sometimes, people might miss some phone calls. Please
dial number typed in this field to know where the last
phone call comes from and call back to that one.
Last Call Return [In]
You have finished an incoming phone call, however you
want to call back again for some reason. Please dial
number typed in this field to call back to that one.
Last Call Return [Out]
Dial the number typed in this field to call the previous
outgoing phone call again.
Call Forward [All][Act]
Dial the number typed in this field to forward all the
incoming calls to the specified place.
Call Forward [Deact]
Dial the number typed in this field to release the call
forward function.
Call Forward [Busy][Act]
Dial the number typed in this field to forward all the
incoming calls to the specified place while the phone is
busy.
Call Forward [No
Ans][Act]
Dial the number typed in this field to forward all the
incoming calls to the specified place while there is no
answer of the connected phone.
Do Not Disturb [Act]
Dial the number typed in this field to invoke the function of
DND.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Do Not Distrub [Deact]
Dial the number typed in this field to release the DND
function.
Hide caller ID [Act]
Dial the number typed in this field to make your phone
number (ID) not displayed on the display panel of remote
end.
Hide caller ID [Deact]
Dial the number typed in this field to release this function.
Call Waiting [Act]
Dial the number typed in this field to make all the incoming
calls waiting for your answer.
Call Waiting [Deact]
Dial the number typed in this field to release this function.
Block Anonymous[Act]
Dial the number typed in this field to block all the incoming
calls with unknown ID.
Block Anonymous[Deact]
Dial the number typed in this field to release this function.
Block Unknown Domain
[Act]
Dial the number typed in this field to block all the incoming
calls from unknown domain.
Block Unknown Domain
[Deact]
Dial the number typed in this field to release this function.
Block IP Calls [Act]
Dial the number typed in this filed to block all the incoming
calls from IP address.
Block IP Calls [Deact]
Dial the number typed in this field to release this function.
Block Last Calls [Act]
Dial the number typed in this field to block the last
incoming phone call.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
IV-1-4-5 PSTN Setup
Some emergency phone (e.g., 911) or special phone cannot be dialed out by using VoIP and
can be called out through PSTN line only. To solve this problem, this page allows you to set
five sets of PSTN number for dialing without passing through Internet. Check the Enable box
to make the PSTN number available for dial whenever you need and type the number in the
field of Phone number for PSTN relay.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
315
IV-1-5 Phone Settings
This page allows user to set phone settings for Phone 1 and Phone 2 respectively. However, it
changes slightly according to different model you have.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Phone Setting
Port – there are two phone ports provided here for you to
configure. Phone1/Phone2 allows you to set general settings
for PSTN phones.
Call Feature – A brief description for call feature will be
shown in this field for your reference.
Tone - Display the tone settings that configured in the
advanced settings page of Phone Index.
Gain - Display the volume gain settings for Mic/Speaker that
configured in the advanced settings page of Phone Index.
Default SIP Account – “draytel_1” is the default SIP account.
You can click the number below the Index field to change SIP
account for each phone port.
DTMF Relay – Display DTMF mode that configured in the
advanced settings page of Phone Index.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
316
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Detailed Settings for Phone Port
Click the number link for Phone port, you can access into the following page for configuring
Phone settings.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Hotline
Check the box to enable it. Type in the SIP URL in the field
for dialing automatically when you pick up the phone set.
Session Timer
Check the box to enable the function. In the limited time
that you set in this field, if there is no response, the
connecting call will be closed automatically.
T.38 Fax Function
Check the box to enable T.38 fax function.
Error Correction Mode – choose a mode for error correction.
DND (Do Not Disturb)
mode
Set a period of peace time without disturbing by VoIP phone
call. During the period, the one who dial in will listen busy
tone, yet the local user will not listen any ring tone.
Index (1-15) in Schedule - Enter the index of schedule
profiles to control when the phone will ring and when will
not according to the preconfigured schedules. Refer to
section Application >>Schedule for detailed configuration.
Index (1-60) in Phone Book - Enter the index of phone book
profiles. Refer to section DialPlan – Phone Book for detailed
configuration.
CLIR (hide caller ID)
Check this box to hide the caller ID on the display panel of
the phone set.
Call Waiting
Check this box to invoke this function. A notice sound will
appear to tell the user new phone call is waiting for your
response. Click hook flash to pick up the waiting phone call.
Call Transfer
Check this box to invoke this function. Click hook flash to
initiate another phone call. When the phone call connection
succeeds, hang up the phone. The other two sides can
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
317
communicate, then.
Default SIP Account
You can set SIP accounts (up to six groups) on SIP Account
page. Use the drop down list to choose one of the profile
names for the accounts as the default one for this phone
setting.
Play dial tone only when account registered - Check this
box to invoke the function.
In addition, you can press the Advanced button to configure tone settings, volume gain, MISC
and DTMF mode. Advanced setting is provided for fitting the telecommunication custom for
the local area of the router installed. Wrong tone settings might cause inconvenience for
users. To set the sound pattern of the phone set, simply choose a proper region to let the
system find out the preset tone settings and caller ID type automatically. Or you can adjust
tone settings manually if you choose User Defined. TOn1, TOff1, TOn2 and TOff2 mean the
cadence of the tone pattern. TOn1 and TOn2 represent sound-on; TOff1 and TOff2 represent
the sound-off.
Available settings are explained as follows:
318
Item
Description
Region
Select the proper region which you are located. The common
settings of Caller ID Type, Dial tone, Ringing tone, Busy
tone and Congestion tone will be shown automatically on
the page. If you cannot find out a suitable one, please choose
User Defined and fill out the corresponding values for dial
tone, ringing tone, busy tone, congestion tone by yourself for
VoIP phone.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Also, you can specify each field for your necessity. It is
recommended for you to use the default settings for VoIP
communication.
Volume Gain
Mic Gain (1-10)/Speaker Gain (1-10) - Adjust the volume of
microphone and speaker by entering number from 1- 10. The
larger of the number, the louder the volume is.
MISC
Dial Tone Power Level - This setting is used to adjust the
loudness of the dial tone. The smaller the number is, the
louder the dial tone is. It is recommended for you to use the
default setting.
Ring Frequency Call Waiting Tone Power Level - This setting is used to
adjust the loudness of the call waiting tone. The smaller the
number is, the louder the tone is. It is recommended for you
to use the default setting.
Interdigit Timeout –Type a value in this field to specify time
limit for interdigit.
DTMF
DTMF Mode – There are four DTMF modes for you to choose.


Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
InBand - Choose this one then the Vigor will send the
DTMF tone as audio directly when you press the keypad
on the phone.
OutBand - Choose this one then the Vigor will capture
the keypad number you pressed and transform it to
digital form then send to the other side; the receiver
will generate the tone according to the digital form it
receive. This function is very useful when the network
traffic congestion occurs and it still can remain the
accuracy of DTMF tone.
319
SIP INFO- Choose this one then the Vigor will capture
the DTMF tone and transfer it into SIP form. Then it will
be sent to the remote end with SIP message.
Payload Type (rfc2833) - Type a number from 96 to 127, the
default value was 101. This setting is available for the
OutBand (RFC2833) mode.
Replace + digit in caller ID to - For international phone call,
the phone number could add a '+' sign, for example,
+8865972727. However, the caller ID (DTMF type especially)
can not display '+' at all.
Therefore, this function can be enabled to give another
number to replace the plus sign, for example, “+” can be
replaced by “00”. Then the above phone number will
become 008865972727. When the callee receives such
number, he can use re-dial function to dial back to the
caller.

IV-1-6 Status
From this page, you can find codec, connection and other important call status for each port.
Available settings are explained as follows:
320
Item
Description
Refresh Seconds
Specify the interval of refresh time to obtain the latest VoIP
calling information. The information will update
immediately when the Refresh button is clicked.
Port
It shows current connection status for Phone(s) ports.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Status
It shows the VoIP connection status.
IDLE - Indicates that the VoIP function is idle.
HANG_UP - Indicates that the connection is not established
(busy tone).
CONNECTING - Indicates that the user is calling out.
WAIT_ANS - Indicates that a connection is launched and
waiting for remote user’s answer.
ALERTING - Indicates that a call is coming.
ACTIVE-Indicates that the VoIP connection is launched.
Codec
Indicates the voice codec employed by present channel.
PeerID
The present in-call or out-call peer ID (the format may be IP
or Domain).
Elapse(hh:mm:ss)
The format is represented as hours:minutes:seconds.
Tx Pkts
Total number of transmitted voice packets during this
connection session.
Rx Pkts
Total number of received voice packets during this
connection session.
Rx Losts
Total number of lost packets during this connection session.
Rx Jitter
The jitter of received voice packets.
In Calls
Accumulation for the times of in call.
Out Calls
Accumulation for the times of out call.
Miss Calls
Accumulation for the times of missing call.
Speaker Gain
The volume of present call.
Log
Display logs of VoIP calls.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
321
IV-1-7 Diagnostics
VoIP Diagnostics is used for diagnosing if VoIP phone failure is caused by different tone or
caller ID.
IV-1-7-1 Caller ID
IV-1-7-2 Tone
322
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part V VPN
A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a
private network that encompasses links across shared
or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN
technology, you can send data between two
computers across a shared or public network in a
manner that emulates the properties of a
point-to-point private link.
It is a form of VPN that can be used with a standard
Web browser.
A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is
issued by a certification authority (CA). It contains
information such as your name, a serial number,
expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the
certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can
verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router
support digital certificates conforming to standard
X.509.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
323
V-1 VPN and Remote Access
A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links
across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send
data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the
properties of a point-to-point private link.
The VPN built is suitable for:

Communication between home office and customer

Secure connection between Teleworker, staff on business trip and main office

Exchange data between remote office and main office

POS between chain store and headquarters
Site-to-Site (LAN-to-LAN)

A connection between two router's LAN networks.

Allows employees in branch offices and head office to share the same network resources.
Remote Access (Remote Dial-in)
324

A connection between the remote host and router's LAN network. The host will use an IP
address in the local subnet.

Allows employees to access the company's internal resources when they are traveling.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
V-1-1 VPN Client Wizard
Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN client. Such wizard will guide to set the
LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial out connection (from server to client) step by step.
1.
Open Wizards>>VPN Client Wizard. The following page will appear.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
LAN-to-LAN Client
Mode Selection
Choose the client mode.
Route Mode/NAT Mode – If the remote network only allows
you to dial in with single IP, please choose NAT mode,
otherwise please choose Route Mode.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
325
Please choose a
LAN-to-LAN Profile
2.
There are 32 VPN profiles for users to set.
When you finish the mode and profile selection, please click Next to open the following
page.
In this page, you have to select suitable VPN type for the VPN client profile. There are six
types provided here. Different type will lead to different configuration page. After
making the choices for the client profile, please click Next. You will see different
configurations based on the selection(s) you made.
Info
The following descriptions for VPN Type are based on the Route Mode
specified in LAN-to-LAN Client Mode Selection.
When you choose PPTP (None Encryption) or PPTP (Encryption), you will see the
following graphic:
326
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
When you choose IPsec, you will see the following graphic:
When you choose SSL, you will see the following graphic:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
327
When you choose L2TP over IPsec (Nice to Have) or L2TP over IPsec (Must), you will see
the following graphic:
Available settings are explained as follows:
328
Item
Description
Profile Name
Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited
to 10 characters.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VPN Dial-Out Through
Use the drop down menu to choose a proper WAN interface
for this profile. This setting is useful for dial-out only.
Or,
WAN1 First/ WAN2 First /WAN3 First (or LTE First) /WAN4
First- While connecting, the router will use
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3(or LTE) /WAN4 as the first channel for
VPN connection. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 (or LTE) /WAN4 fails,
the router will use another WAN interface instead.
WAN1 Only /WAN2 Only/WAN3 Only(or LTE Only) /WAN4
Only - While connecting, the router will use
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3(or LTE)/WAN4 as the only channel for
VPN connection.
WAN1 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN2 down - If WAN2
failed, the router will use WAN1 for VPN connection.
WAN2 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN1 down - If WAN1
failed, the router will use WAN2 for VPN connection.
Always On
Check to enable router always keep VPN connection.
Server IP/Host Name
for VPN
Enter the IP address of the server or type the host name for
such VPN profile.
IKE Authentication
Method
IKE Authentication Method usually applies to those are
remote dial-in user or node (LAN to LAN) which uses dynamic
IP address and IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP
over IPsec and IPsec tunnel.
Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication.
Confirm Pre-Shared Key-Confirm the pre-shared key.
Digital Signature
(X.509)
Click Digital Signature to invoke this function.
Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down
list.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
329
Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject
Name First.
Local Certificate – Use the drop down list to choose one of
the certificates for using. You have to configure one
certificate at least previously in Certificate Management >>
Local Certificate. Otherwise, the setting you choose here
will not be effective.
3.
IPsec Security Method
Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option
is active.
High - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload
(data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select
encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES),
Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
User Name
This field is used to authenticate for connection when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
The length of the user name is limited to 11 characters.
Password
This field is used to authenticate for connection when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
The length of the password is limited to 11 characters.
Remote Network IP
Please type one LAN IP address (according to the real
location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.
Remote Network
Mask
Please type the network mask (according to the real location
of the remote host) for building VPN connection.
Local Network IP
Enter the local network IP for TCP / IP configuration.
Local Network Mask
Enter the local network mask for TCP / IP configuration.
After finishing the configuration, please click Next. The confirmation page will be
shown as follows. If there is no problem, you can click one of the radio buttons listed on
the page and click Finish to execute the next action.
Available settings are explained as follows:
330
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Item
Description
Go to the VPN
Connection
Management
Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote
Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN
Connection status.
Do another VPN
Server Wizard Setup
Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server
through VPN Server Wizard.
View more detailed
configuration
Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote
Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
331
V-1-2 VPN Server Wizard
Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN server. Such wizard will guide to set the
LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial in connection (from client to server) step by step.
1.
Open Wizards>>VPN Server Wizard. The following page will appear.
Available settings are explained as follows:
332
Item
Description
VPN Server Mode
Selection
Choose the direction for the VPN server.
Site to Site VPN – To set a LAN-to-LAN profile automatically,
please choose Site to Site VPN.
Remote Dial-in User –You can manage remote access by
maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users can
be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection.
Please choose a
LAN-to-LAN Profile
This item is available when you choose Site to Site VPN
(LAN-to-LAN) as VPN server mode. There are 32 VPN profiles
for users to set.
Please choose a
Dial-in User Accounts
This item is available when you choose Remote Dial-in User
(Teleworker) as VPN server mode. There are 32 VPN tunnels
for users to set.
Allowed Dial-in Type
This item is available after you choose any one of dial-in user
account profiles. Next, you have to select suitable dial-in
type for the VPN server profile. There are several types
provided here (similar to VPN Client Wizard).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Different Dial-in Type will lead to different configuration
page. In addition, adjustable items for each dial-in type will
be changed according to the VPN Server Mode (Site to Site
VPN and Remote Dial-in User) selected.
2.
After making the choices for the server profile, please click Next. You will see different
configurations based on the selection you made. Here we take the examples of choosing
Site-to-Site VPN as the VPN Server Mode.
When you check PPTP/SSL, you will see the following graphic:
When you check PPTP & IPsec & L2TP (three types) or PPTP & IPsec (two types) or L2TP
with Policy (Nice to Have/Must), you will see the following graphic:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
333
When you check IPsec, you will see the following graphic:
Available settings are explained as follows:
334
Item
Description
Profile Name
Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited
to 10 characters.
User Name
This field is used to authenticate for connection when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.
Password
This field is used to authenticate for connection when you
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.
3.
Pre-Shared Key
For IPsec/L2TP IPsec authentication, you have to type a
pre-shared key.
The length of the name is limited to 64 characters.
Confirm Pre-Shared
Key
Enter the pre-shared key again for confirmation.
Digital Signature
(X.509)
Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function.
Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down
list.
Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject
Name First.
Peer IP/VPN Client IP
Enter the WAN IP address or VPN client IP address for the
remote client.
Peer ID
Enter the ID name for the remote client.
The length of the name is limited to 47 characters.
Remote Network IP
Please type one LAN IP address (according to the real
location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.
Remote Network
Mask
Please type the network mask (according to the real location
of the remote host) for building VPN connection.
Local Network IP
Enter the local network IP for TCP / IP configuration.
Local Network Mask
Enter the local network mask for TCP / IP configuration.
After finishing the configuration, please click Next. The confirmation page will be
shown as follows. If there is no problem, you can click one of the radio buttons listed on
the page and click Finish to execute the next action.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Go to the VPN
Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
335
Connection
Management
Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN
Connection status.
Do another VPN
Server Wizard Setup
Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server
through VPN Server Wizard.
View more detailed
configuration
Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote
Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.
V-1-3 Remote Access Control
Enable the necessary VPN service as you need. If you intend to run a VPN server inside your
LAN, you should disable the VPN service of Vigor Router to allow VPN tunnel pass through, as
well as the appropriate NAT settings, such as DMZ or open port.
Open VPN and Remote Access>>Remote Access Control.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
336
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-1-4 PPP General Setup
This submenu only applies to PPP-related VPN connections, such as PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over
IPsec.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Dial-In PPP Authentication
PAP Only - elect this option to force the router to
authenticate dial-in users with the PAP protocol.
PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 - Selecting this option
means the router will attempt to authenticate dial-in users
with the CHAP protocol first. If the dial-in user does not
support this protocol, it will fall back to use the PAP protocol
for authentication.
Dial-In PPP Encryption
(MPPE)
Optional MPPE - This option represents that the MPPE
encryption method will be optionally employed in the router
for the remote dial-in user. If the remote dial-in user does
not support the MPPE encryption algorithm, the router will
transmit “no MPPE encrypted packets”. Otherwise, the MPPE
encryption scheme will be used to encrypt the data.

Require MPPE (40/128bits) - Selecting this option will
force the router to encrypt packets by using the MPPE
encryption algorithm. In addition, the remote dial-in
user will use 40-bit to perform encryption prior to using
128-bit for encryption. In other words, if 128-bit MPPE
encryption method is not available, then 40-bit
encryption scheme will be applied to encrypt the data.

Maximum MPPE - This option indicates that the router
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
337
will use the MPPE encryption scheme with maximum
bits (128-bit) to encrypt the data.
338
Mutual Authentication
(PAP)
The Mutual Authentication function is mainly used to
communicate with other routers or clients who need
bi-directional authentication in order to provide stronger
security, for example, Cisco routers. So you should enable
this function when your peer router requires mutual
authentication. You should further specify the User Name
and Password of the mutual authentication peer.
The length of the name/password is limited to 23/19
characters.
IP Address Assignment for
Dial-In Users (when DHCP
Disable set)
Enter a start IP address for the dial-in PPP connection for
LAN1.
LAN2 ~ LAN6 will be available if it is enabled. Refer to
LAN>>General Setup for enabling the LAN interface.
PPP Authentication
Methods
Select the method(s) to be used for authentication in PPP
connection.
PPTP LDAP Profile
Configured LDAP profiles will be listed under such item.
Simply check the one you want to enable the PPP
authentication by LDAP server profiles.
However, if there is no profile listed, simply click the link of
PPTP LDAP Profile to create/add some new LDAP profiles
you want.
While using Radius or
LDAP Authentication
If PPP connection will be authenticated via RADIUS server or
LDAP profiles, it is necessary to specify the LAN profile for
the dial-in user to get IP from.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-1-5 IPsec General Setup
In IPsec General Setup, there are two major parts of configuration.
There are two phases of IPsec.

Phase 1: negotiation of IKE parameters including encryption, hash, Diffie-Hellman
parameter values, and lifetime to protect the following IKE exchange, authentication of
both peers using either a Pre-Shared Key or Digital Signature (x.509). The peer that
starts the negotiation proposes all its policies to the remote peer and then remote peer
tries to find a highest-priority match with its policies. Eventually to set up a secure
tunnel for IKE Phase 2.

Phase 2: negotiation IPsec security methods including Authentication Header (AH) or
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) for the following IKE exchange and mutual
examination of the secure tunnel establishment.
There are two encapsulation methods used in IPsec, Transport and Tunnel. The Transport
mode will add the AH/ESP payload and use original IP header to encapsulate the data payload
only. It can just apply to local packet, e.g., L2TP over IPsec. The Tunnel mode will not only
add the AH/ESP payload but also use a new IP header (Tunneled IP header) to encapsulate the
whole original IP packet.
Authentication Header (AH) provides data authentication and integrity for IP packets passed
between VPN peers. This is achieved by a keyed one-way hash function to the packet to
create a message digest. This digest will be put in the AH and transmitted along with packets.
On the receiving side, the peer will perform the same one-way hash on the packet and
compare the value with the one in the AH it receives.
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) is a security protocol that provides data confidentiality
and protection with optional authentication and replay detection service.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
IKE Authentication
Method
This usually applies to those are remote dial-in user or node
(LAN-to-LAN) which uses dynamic IP address and
IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP over IPsec and
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
339
IPsec tunnel. There are two methods offered by Vigor router
for you to authenticate the incoming data coming from
remote dial-in user, Certificate (X.509) and Pre-Shared
Key.
Certificate for Dial-in –Choose one of the local certificates
from the drop down list.
General Pre-Shared Key - Define the PSK key for general
authentication.

Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication.

Confirm Pre-Shared Key- Retype the characters to
confirm the pre-shared key.
Pre-Shared Key for XAuth User - Define the PSK key for
IPsec XAuth authentication.

Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication.

Confirm Pre-Shared Key- Retype the characters to
confirm the pre-shared key.
Note: Any packets from the remote dial-in user which does
not match the rule defined in VPN and Remote
Access>>Remote Dial-In User will be applied with the
method specified here.
IPsec Security Method
Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option
is active.
High (ESP) - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means
payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You
may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption
Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
V-1-6 IPsec Peer Identity
To use digital certificate for peer authentication in either LAN-to-LAN connection or Remote
User Dial-In connection, here you may edit a table of peer certificate for selection. As shown
below, the router provides 64 entries of digital certificates for peer dial-in users.
340
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Click it to clear all indexes.
Index
Click the number below Index to access into the setting page
of IPsec Peer Identity.
Name
Display the profile name of that index.
Click each index to edit one peer digital certificate. There are three security levels of digital
signature authentication: Fill each necessary field to authenticate the remote peer. The
following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
341
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable this account
Check it to enable such account profile.
Profile Name
Enter the name of the profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 32 characters.
Accept Any Peer ID
Click to accept any peer regardless of its identity.
Accept Subject
Alternative Name
Click to check one specific field of digital signature to accept
the peer with matching value. The field can be IP Address,
Domain, or E-mail Address. The box under the Type will
appear according to the type you select and ask you to fill in
corresponding setting.
Accept Subject Name
Click to check the specific fields of digital signature to
accept the peer with matching value. The field includes
Country (C), State (ST), Location (L), Organization (O),
Organization Unit (OU), Common Name (CN), and Email
(E).
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
342
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-1-7 OpenVPN
OpenVPN offers a convenient way for users to build VPN between local end and remote end.
With integrating of OpenVPN, Vigor router can help users to achieve more robust, reliable and
secure private connections for business needs.
There are two advantages of OpenVPN:

It can be operated on different systems such as Windows, Linux, and MacOS.

Based on the standard protocol of SSL encryption, OpenVPN can provide you with a
scalable client/server mode, permitting multi-client to connect to a single OpenVPN
Server process over a single TCP or UDP port.
V-1-7-1 General Setup
Before establishing OpenVPN connection, general settings for OpenVPN service shall be
configured first.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable UDP
Check the box to enable UDP port setting for OpenVPN.
UDP Port – Enter a number.
Enable TCP
Check the box to enable TCP port setting for OpenVPN.
TCP Port – Enter a number.
Cipher Algorithm
Two encryptions are supported, AES128 and AES256.
HMAC Algorithm
The HMAC algorithm only supports SHA1/SHA256.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
343
Certificate Authentication
If certificate authentication is required for OpenVPN, simply
check the box to apply the trusted CA certificate and local
certificate for OpenVPN tunnel.
Certificate authentication can offer more secure VPN tunnel
between the client and the router.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
V-1-7-2 Client Config
The settings on this page can be downloaded as a file. Later, such file can be imported and
applied to remote end’s CPE (as VPN client). Then, a private connection via OpenVPN tunnel
between the server and the client can be connected successfully.
Available settings are explained as follows:
344
Item
Description
Remote Server
Click IP and use the drop down list to specify an IP address of
WAN for VPN connection. Or click Domain to enter a domain
name for the remote server.
Transport Protocol
Simply choose UDP or TCP as protocol for building OpenVPN
connection between the server and the remote client.
Config Finename
Enter a name for the configuration file.
CA cert
Enter the certificate authority (CA) file name obtained from
3rd party provider
Client cert
Each client in an OpenVPN connection must have its
certificate and private key.
Enter the certificate file name obtained from 3rd party
provider
Client key
Enter the private key file name obtained from 3rd party
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
provider
Export
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
The settings in this page can be saved as a file after clicking
such button. Later, the downloaded file can be imported to
the VPN client for building OpenVPN connection.
345
V-1-8 Remote Dial-in User
You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users
can be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection. You may set parameters including
specified connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel,
and L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.
The router provides 64 access accounts for dial-in users. Besides, you can extend the user
accounts to the RADIUS server through the built-in RADIUS client function. The following
figure shows the summary table.
Available settings are explained as follows:
346
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Click to clear all indexes.
View
All – Click it to display the all of the user accounts.
Online – Click it to display the online user accounts.
Offline – Click it to display the offline user accounts.
Index
Click the number below Index to access into the setting page
of Remote Dial-in User.
Enable
Check it to enable such account profile.
User
Display the username for the specific dial-in user of the
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the
profile is empty.
Status
Display the access state of the specific dial-in user. The
symbol V and X represent the specific dial-in user to be
active and inactive, respectively.
Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Each Dial-In Type requires you to fill the
different corresponding fields on the right. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it
untouched. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
User account and
Authentication
Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function.
Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of
the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default,
the Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.
Allowed Dial-In Type
PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN
connection through the Internet. You should set the User
Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.
IPsec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to make an
IPsec VPN connection through Internet.

IPsec XAuth – Allow the remote dial-in user to make an
IPsec VPN connection through XAuth server in Internet.
L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
347
make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can
select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below:

None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the
VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec
policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in
VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.

Must -Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied
on the L2TP connection.
SSL Tunnel – Allow the remote dial-in user to make an SSL
VPN connection through Internet.
OpenVPN Tunnel – Allow the remote dial-in user to set a VPN
connection through OpenVPN.
Specify Remote Node -You can specify the IP address of the
remote dial-in user, ISDN number or peer ID (used in IKE
aggressive mode).
Uncheck the checkbox means the connection type you select
above will apply the authentication methods and security
methods in the general settings.
Netbios Naming Packet 
Pass – Click it to have an inquiry for data transmission
between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel
while connecting.

Block – When there is conflict occurred between the
hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such
function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming
Packet inside the tunnel.
Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast
packets via VPN connection.

Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass
through the router.

Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let
multicast packets be blocked by the router.
User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name is limited to 23 characters.
Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
password is limited to 19 characters.
Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Check this
box to make the authentication with mOTP function.

PIN Code – Enter the code for authentication (e.g,
1234).

Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by
mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g.,
e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).
348
Subnet
Chose one of the subnet selections for such VPN profile.
Assign Static IP Address – Please type a static IP address for
the subnet you specified.
IKE Authentication
Method
This group of fields is applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP
with IPsec Policy when you specify the IP address of the
remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509)
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
can be set when you select IPsec tunnel either with or
without specifying the IP address of the remote node.
Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke
this function and type in the required characters (1-63) as
the pre-shared key.
Digital Signature (X.509) – Check the box of Digital Signature
to invoke this function and Select one predefined Profiles set
in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.
IPsec Security Method
This group of fields is a must for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with
IPsec Policy when you specify the remote node. Check the
Medium, DES, 3DES or AES box as the security method.
Medium-Authentication Header (AH) means data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option
is invoked. You can uncheck it to disable it.
High-Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload
(data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select
encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES),
Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
Local ID (Optional)- Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in
setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional
and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
V-1-9 LAN to LAN
Here you can manage LAN-to-LAN connections by maintaining a table of connection profiles.
You may set parameters including specified connection direction (dial-in or dial-out),
connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and
L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.
The router supports up to 50 VPN tunnels simultaneously. The following figure shows the
summary table.
The following figure shows the summary table according to the item (All/Trunk) selected for
View.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
349
The following shows profiles joined into VPN Load Balance and VPN Backup mechanism.
Available settings are explained as follows:
350
Item
Description
View
All – Click it to display the LAN to LAN profiles.
Online – Click it to display the online profiles.
Offline – Click it to display the offline profiles.
Trunk – Click it to display the Trunk profiles.
Set to Factory Default
Click to clear all indexes.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Name
Indicate the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ???
represents that the profile is empty.
Remote Network
Display the IP address/subnet mask of the remote network.
Status
Online – means such LAN to LAN profile is in use.
Offline – means such LAN to LAN profile isn’t in use even if
the profile has been enabled.
To edit each profile:
1.
Click each index to edit each profile and you will get the following page. Each
LAN-to-LAN profile includes 4 subgroups. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it
untouched. The following explanations will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Common Settings
Profile Name – Specify a name for the profile of the
LAN-to-LAN connection.
Enable this profile - Check here to activate this profile.
VPN Dial-Out Through - Use the drop down menu to choose a
proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful
for dial-out only.

WAN1 First/ WAN2 First/ WAN3 First or LTE
First/WAN4 First- While connecting, the router will use
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 as the first channel
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
351
for VPN connection. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE
/WAN4 fails, the router will use another WAN interface
instead.

WAN1 Only /WAN2 Only/WAN 3 Only or LTE Only
/WAN 4 Only- While connecting, the router will use
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 as the only channel
for VPN connection.

WAN1 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN2 down - If
WAN2 failed, the router will use WAN1 for VPN
connection.

WAN2 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN1 down - If
WAN1 failed, the router will use WAN2 for VPN
connection.
Netbios Naming Packet

Pass – click it to have an inquiry for data transmission
between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel
while connecting.

Block – When there is conflict occurred between the
hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such
function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming
Packet inside the tunnel.
Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast
packets via VPN connection.

Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass
through the router.

Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let
multicast packets be blocked by the router.
Call Direction - Specify the allowed call direction of this
LAN-to-LAN profile.

Both:-initiator/responder

Dial-Out- initiator only

Dial-In- responder only.
Always On-Check to enable router always keep VPN
connection.
Idle Timeout: The default value is 300 seconds. If the
connection has been idled over the value, the router will
drop the connection.
Enable PING to keep alive - This function is to help the
router to determine the status of IPsec VPN connection,
especially useful in the case of abnormal VPN IPsec tunnel
disruption. For details, please refer to the note below. Check
to enable the transmission of PING packets to a specified IP
address.
Enable PING to keep alive is used to handle abnormal IPsec
VPN connection disruption. It will help to provide the state
of a VPN connection for router’s judgment of redial.
Normally, if any one of VPN peers wants to disconnect the
connection, it should follow a serial of packet exchange
procedure to inform each other. However, if the remote
peer disconnects without notice, Vigor router will by no
where to know this situation. To resolve this dilemma, by
continuously sending PING packets to the remote host, the
Vigor router can know the true existence of this VPN
connection and react accordingly. This is independent of DPD
(dead peer detection).
PING to the IP - Enter the IP address of the remote host that
352
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
located at the other-end of the VPN tunnel.
Dial-Out Settings
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Type of Server I am calling - PPTP - Build a PPTP VPN
connection to the server through the Internet. You should set
the identity like User Name and Password below for the
authentication of remote server.
IPsec Tunnel - Build an IPsec VPN connection to the server
through Internet.
L2TP with IPsec Policy - Build a L2TP VPN connection
through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or
with IPsec. Select from below:

None: Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the
VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec
policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

Nice to Have: Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-out
VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.

Must: Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied
on the L2TP connection.
SSL Tunnel - Build an SSL VPN connection to the server
through Internet.
User Name - This field is applicable when you select, PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name is limited to 49 characters.
Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
password is limited to 15 characters.
PPP Authentication - This field is applicable when you
select, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 is the most common
selection due to compatibility.
VJ compression - This field is applicable when you select
PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. VJ
Compression is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression.
Normally set to On to improve bandwidth utilization.
IKE Authentication Method - This group of fields is
applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy.

Pre-Shared Key - Input 1-63 characters as pre-shared
key.

Digital Signature (X.509) - Select one predefined
Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec
Peer Identity.
Peer ID - Select one of the predefined Profiles set in
VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.
Local ID – Specify a local ID (Alternative Subject Name
First or Subject Name First) to be used for Dial-in
setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is
optional and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.

Local Certificate – Select one of the profiles set in
Certificate Management>>Local Certificate.
IPsec Security Method - This group of fields is a must for
IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy.
Medium AH (Authentication Header) means data will

be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default,
this option is active.

High (ESP-Encapsulating Security Payload)- means
353
payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated.
Select from below:

DES without Authentication -Use DES encryption
algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.

DES with Authentication-Use DES encryption algorithm
and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.

3DES without Authentication-Use triple DES
encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication
scheme.

3DES with Authentication-Use triple DES encryption
algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication
algorithm.

AES without Authentication-Use AES encryption
algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.

AES with Authentication-Use AES encryption algorithm
and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.
Advanced - Specify mode, proposal and key life of each IKE
phase, Gateway, etc.
The window of advance setup is shown as below:
IKE phase 1 mode -Select from Main mode and Aggressive
mode. The ultimate outcome is to exchange security
proposals to create a protected secure channel. Main mode
is more secure than Aggressive mode since more exchanges
are done in a secure channel to set up the IPsec session.
However, the Aggressive mode is faster. The default value in
Vigor router is Main mode.

IKE phase 1 proposal-To propose the local available
authentication schemes and encryption algorithms to
the VPN peers, and get its feedback to find a match.
Two combinations are available for Aggressive mode
and nine for Main mode. We suggest you select the
combination that covers the most schemes.

IKE phase 2 proposal-To propose the local available
algorithms to the VPN peers, and get its feedback to
find a match. Three combinations are available for both
modes. We suggest you select the combination that
covers the most algorithms.

IKE phase 1 key lifetime-For security reason, the
lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is
28800 seconds. You may specify a value in between 900
and 86400 seconds.

IKE phase 2 key lifetime-For security reason, the
lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is
3600 seconds. You may specify a value in between 600
and 86400 seconds.

Perfect Forward Secret (PFS)-The IKE Phase 1 key will
be reused to avoid the computation complexity in
phase 2. The default value is inactive this function.
354
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Local ID-In Aggressive mode, Local ID is on behalf of the
IP address while identity authenticating with remote
VPN server. The length of the ID is limited to 47
characters.
Index(1-15) - Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time
interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15
schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup.
The default setting of this field is blank and the function will
always work.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Dial-In Settings
Allowed Dial-In Type - Determine the dial-in connection
with different types.

PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP
VPN connection through the Internet. You should set
the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user
below.

IPsec Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger
an IPsec VPN connection through Internet.

L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user
to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet.
You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select
from below:

None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly,
the VPN connection employed the L2TP without
IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP
connection.

Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
355
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the
dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP
connection.

Must - Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely
applied on the L2TP connection.

SSL Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an
SSL VPN connection through Internet.
Specify Remote VPN Gateway - You can specify the IP
address of the remote dial-in user or peer ID (should be the
same with the ID setting in dial-in type) by checking the box.
Also, you should further specify the corresponding security
methods on the right side.
If you uncheck the checkbox, the connection type you select
above will apply the authentication methods and security
methods in the general settings.
Username - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name is limited to 11 characters.
Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
password is limited to 11 characters.
VJ Compression - VJ Compression is used for TCP/IP
protocol header compression. This field is applicable when
you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
IKE Authentication Method - This group of fields is
applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when
you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only
exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you
select IPsec tunnel either with or without specify the IP
address of the remote node.

Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to
invoke this function and type in the required characters
(1-63) as the pre-shared key.

Digital Signature (X.509) –Check the box of Digital
Signature to invoke this function and select one
predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access
>>IPsec Peer Identity.

Local ID – Specify which one will be inspected
first.

Alternative Subject Name First – The alternative
subject name (configured in Certificate
Management>>Local Certificate) will be
inspected first.

Subject Name First – The subject name
(configured in Certificate Management>>Local
Certificate) will be inspected first.
IPsec Security Method - This group of fields is a must for
IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify
the remote node.

Medium- Authentication Header (AH) means data will
be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default,
this option is active.

High- Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means
payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated.
You may select encryption algorithm from Data
Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
356
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
GRE Settings
Enable IPsec Dial-Out function GRE over IPsec: Check this
box to verify data and transmit data in encryption with GRE
over IPsec packet after configuring IPsec Dial-Out setting.
Both ends must match for each other by setting same virtual
IP address for communication.
Logical Traffic: Such technique comes from RFC2890. Define
logical traffic for data transmission between both sides of
VPN tunnel by using the characteristic of GRE. Even hacker
can decipher IPsec encryption, he/she still cannot ask LAN
site to do data transmission with any information. Such
function can ensure the data transmitted on VPN tunnel is
really sent out from both sides. This is an optional function.
However, if one side wants to use it, the peer must enable it,
too.
My GRE IP: Enter the virtual IP for router itself for verified by
peer.
Peer GRE IP: Enter the virtual IP of peer host for verified by
router.
TCP/IP Network
Settings
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
My WAN IP –This field is only applicable when you select
PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The default
value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will get a PPP
IP address from the remote router during the IPCP
negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is fixed by remote
side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do not change the
default value if you do not select PPTP or L2TP.
Remote Gateway IP - This field is only applicable when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The
default value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will
get a remote Gateway PPP IP address from the remote router
during the IPCP negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is
fixed by remote side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do
not change the default value if you do not select PPTP or
L2TP.
Remote Network IP/ Remote Network Mask - Add a static
route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP
Address/Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection.
For IPsec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick
mode.
Local Network IP / Local Network Mask - Display the local
network IP and mask for TCP / IP configuration. You can
modify the settings if required.
More - Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to
more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Masks
through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you
find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.
357
RIP Direction - The option specifies the direction of RIP
(Routing Information Protocol) packets. You can
enable/disable one of direction here. Herein, we provide
four options: TX/RX Both, TX Only, RX Only, and Disable.
From first subnet to remote network, you have to do - If
the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP,
please choose NAT, otherwise choose Route.
Change default route to this VPN tunnel - Check this box to
change the default route with this VPN tunnel.
IPSec VPN with the
Same Subnets
For both ends (e.g., different sections in a company) are
within the same subnet, there is a function which allows you
to build Virtual IP mapping between two ends. Thus, when
VPN connection established, the router will change the IP
address according to the settings configured here and block
sessions which are not coming from the IP address defined in
the Virtual IP Mapping list.
After checking the box of IPSec VPN with the Same subnet,
the options under TCP/IP Network Settings will be changed
as shown below:
Remote Network IP/ Remote Network Mask - Add a static
route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP
Address/Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection.
For IPSec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick
mode.
Translated Local Network – This function is enabled in
default. Use the drop down list to specify a LAN port as the
transferred direction. Then specify an IP address. Click
Advanced to configure detailed settings if required.
Advanced – Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to
more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Mask
through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you
find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.
358
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Translated Type – There are two types for you to choose.

Whole Subnet

Specific IP Address
Virtual IP Mapping – A pop up dialog will appear for you to
specify the local IP address and the mapping virtual IP
address.
2.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
359
V-1-10 VPN Trunk Management
VPN trunk includes four features - VPN Backup, VPN load balance, GRE over IPsec, and Binding
tunnel policy.
Features of VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup Mechanism
VPN TRUNK Management is a backup mechanism which can set multiple VPN tunnels as
backup tunnel. It can assure the network connection not to be cut off due to network
environment blocked by any reason.
 VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism can judge abnormal situation for the environment of
VPN server and correct it to complete the backup of VPN Tunnel in real-time.
 VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism is compliant with all WAN modes (single/multi)
 Dial-out connection types contain IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec and ISDN (depends
on hardware specification)
 The web page is simple to understand and easy to configure
 Fully compliant with VPN Server LAN Site Single/Multi Network
 Mail Alert support, please refer to System Maintenance >> SysLog / Mail Alert for
detailed configuration
 Syslog support, please refer to System Maintenance >> SysLog / Mail Alert for detailed
configuration
 Specific ERD (Environment Recovery Detection) mechanism which can be operated by
using Telnet command
VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile will be activated when initial connection of single
VPN tunnel is off-line. Before setting VPN TRUNK -VPN Backup mechanism backup profile,
please configure at least two sets of LAN-to-LAN profiles (with fully configured dial-out
settings) first, otherwise you will not have selections for grouping Member1 and Member2.
Features of VPN TRUNK – VPN Load Balance Mechanism
VPN Load Balance Mechanism can set multiple VPN tunnels for using as traffic load balance
tunnel. It can assist users to do effective load sharing for multiple VPN tunnels according to
real line bandwidth. Moreover, it offers three types of algorithms for load balancing and
binding tunnel policy mechanism to let the administrator manage the network more flexibly.
 Three types of load sharing algorithm offered, Round Robin, Weighted Round Robin and
Fastest
 Binding Tunnel Policy mechanism allows users to encrypt the data in transmission or
specified service function in transmission and define specified VPN Tunnel for having
effective bandwidth management
 Dial-out connection types contain IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec and GRE over IPsec
 The web page is simple to understand and easy to configure
 The TCP Session transmitted by using VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism will not be
lost due to one of VPN Tunnels disconnected. Users do not need to reconnect with setting
TCP/UDP Service Port again. The VPN Load Balance function can keep the transmission for
internal data on tunnel stably
360
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Backup Profile List
Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN
Backup mechanism profile.
No – The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism
profile.
Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such
profile is disabled.
Name - Display the name of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup
mechanism profile.
Member1 - Display the dial-out profile selected from the
Member1 drop down list below.
Active - “Yes” means normal condition. “No” means the
state might be disabled or that profile currently is set with
Dial-in mode (for call direction) in LAN-to-LAN.
Type - Display the connection type for that profile, such as
IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec (NICE), L2TP over
IPsec(MUST) and so on.
Member2 - Display the dial-out profile selected from the
Member2 drop down list below.
Advanced – This button is available only when LAN to LAN
profile (or more) is created.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
361
Detailed information for this dialog, see later section Advanced Load Balance and Backup.
Load Balance Profile List
Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN
Load Balance mechanism profile.
No - The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance
mechanism profile.
Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such
profile is disabled.
Name - Display the name of VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance
mechanism profile.
Member1 - Display the dial-out profile selected from the
Member1 drop down list below.
Active - “Yes” means normal condition. “No” means the
state might be disabled or that profile currently is set with
Dial-in mode (for call direction) in LAN-to-LAN.
Type - Display the connection type for that profile, such as
IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec (NICE), L2TP over
IPsec(MUST) and so on.
Member2 - Display the dial-out profile selected from the
Member2 drop down list below.
Advanced – This button is only available when there is one or
more profiles created in this page.
Detailed information for this dialog, see later section Advanced Load Balance and Backup.
362
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
General Setup
Status- After choosing one of the profile listed above, please
click Enable to activate this profile. If you click Disable, the
selected or current used VPN TRUNK-Backup/Load Balance
mechanism profile will not have any effect for VPN tunnel.
Profile Name- Type a name for VPN TRUNK profile. Each
profile can group two VPN connections set in LAN-to-LAN.
The saved VPN profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be shown on
Member1 and Member2 fields. The length of the name is
limited to 11 characters.
Member 1/Member2 - Display the selection for LAN-to-LAN
dial-out profiles (configured in VPN and Remote Access >>
LAN-to-LAN) for you to choose for grouping under certain
VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile.

No - Index number of LAN-to-LAN dial-out profile.

Name - Profile name of LAN-to-LAN dial-out profile.

Connection Type - Connection type of LAN-to-LAN
dial-out profile.

VPN ServerIP (Private Network) - VPN Server IP of
LAN-to-LAN dial-out profiles.
Active Mode - Display available mode for you to choose.
Choose Backup or Load Balance for your router.
Add - Add and save new profile to the backup profile list.
The corresponding members (LAN-to-LAN profiles) grouped
in such new VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism profile will
be locked. The profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be displayed in
red. VPN TRUNK – VPN Load Balance mechanism profile will
be locked. The profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be displayed in
blue.
Update - Click this button to save the changes to the Status
(Enable or Disable), profile name, member1 or member2.
Delete - Click this button to delete the selected VPN TRUNK
profile. The corresponding members (LAN-to-LAN profiles)
grouped in the deleted VPN TRUNK profile will be released
and that profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be displayed in black.
Time for activating VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism profile
VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism will be activated automatically after the initial
connection of single VPN Tunnel off-line. The content in Member1/2 within VPN TRUNK – VPN
Backup mechanism backup profile is similar to dial-out profile configured in LAN-to-LAN web
page. VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism backup profile will process and handle everything
unless it is off-line once it is activated.
Time for activating VPN TRUNK – VPN Load Balance mechanism profile
After finishing the connection for one tunnel, the other tunnel will dial out automatically
within two seconds. Therefore, you can choose any one of members under VPN Load Balance
for dialing out.
Time for activating VPN TRUNK –Dial-out when VPN Load Balance Disconnected
For there is one Tunnel created and connected successfully, to keep the load balance effect
between two tunnels, auto-dial will be executed within two seconds.
To close two tunnels of load balance after connecting, please click Disable for Status in
General Setup field.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
363
How can you set a VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile?
1.
First of all, go to VPN and Remote Access>>LAN-to-LAN. Set two or more LAN-to-LAN
profiles first that will be used for Member1 and Member2. If you do not set enough
LAN-to-LAN profiles, you cannot operate VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup /Load Balance
mechanism profile management well.
2.
Access into VPN and Remote Access>>VPN TRUNK Management.
3.
Set one group of VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism backup profile by
choosing Enable radio button; type a name for such profile (e.g., 071023); choose one of
the LAN-to-LAN profiles from Member1 drop down list; choose one of the LAN-to-LAN
profiles from Member2 drop down list; and click Add at last.
4.
Take a look for LAN-to-LAN profiles. Index 1 is chosen as Member1; index 2 is chosen as
Member2. For such reason, LAN-to-LAN profiles of 1 and 2 will be expressed in red to
indicate that they are fixed. If you delete the VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup/Load Balance
mechanism profile, the selected LAN-to-LAN profiles will be released and expressed in
black.
How can you set a GRE over IPsec profile?
364
1.
Please go to LAN to LAN to set a profile with IPsec.
2.
If the router will be used as the VPN Server (i.e., with virtual address 192.168.50.200).
Please type 192.168.50.200 in the field of My GRE IP. Type IP address (192.168.50.100) of
the client in the field of Peer GRE IP. See the following graphic for an example.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3.
Later, on peer side (as VPN Client): please type 192.168.50.100 in the field of My GRE IP
and type IP address of the server (192.168.50.200) in the field of Peer GRE IP.
Advanced Load Balance and Backup
After setting profiles for load balance, you can choose any one of them and click Advance for
more detailed configuration. The windows for advanced load balance and backup are
different. Refer to the following explanation:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
365
Advanced Load Balance
Available settings are explained as follows:
366
Item
Description
Profile Name
List the load balance profile name.
Load Balance Algorithm
Round Robin – Based on packet base, both tunnels will send
the packet alternatively. Such method can reach the balance
of packet transmission with fixed rate.
Weighted Round Robin –Such method can reach the balance
of packet transmission with flexible rate. It can be divided
into Auto Weighted and According to Speed Ratio. Auto
Weighted can detect the device speed (10Mbps/100Mbps)
and switch with fixed value ratio (3:7) for packet
transmission. If the transmission rate for packets on both
sides of the tunnels is the same, the value of Auto Weighted
should be 5.5. According to Speed Ratio allows user to
adjust suitable rate manually. There are 100 groups of rate
ratio for Member1:Member2 (range from 1:99 to 99:1).
VPN Load Balance Policy
Below shows the algorithm for Load Balance.
Edit – Click this radio button for assign a blank table for
configuring Binding Tunnel.
Insert after – Click this radio button to adding a new binding
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
tunnel table.
Tunnel Bind Table Index- 128 Binding tunnel tables are
provided by this device. Specify the number of the tunnel for
such Load Balance profile.
Active – In-active/Delete can delete this binding tunnel
table. Active can activate this binding tunnel table.
Binding Dial Out Index – Specify connection type for
transmission by choosing the index (LAN to LAN Profile Index)
for such binding tunnel table.
Scr IP Start /End– Specify source IP addresses as starting
point and ending point.
Dest IP Start/End – Specify destination IP addresses as
starting point and ending point.
Dest Port Start /End– Specify destination service port as
starting point and ending point.
Protocol – Any means when the source IP, destination IP,
destination port and fragment conditions match with the
settings specified here, such binding tunnel table can be
established for TCP Service Port/UDP Service
Port/ICMP/IGMP specified here.
TCP means when the source IP, destination IP, destination
port and fragment conditions match with the settings
specified here and TCP Service Port also fits the number
here, such binding tunnel table can be established. UDP
means when the source IP, destination IP, destination port
and fragment conditions match with the settings specified
here and UDP Service Port also fits the number here, such
binding tunnel table can be established. TCP/UPD means
when the source IP, destination IP, destination port and
fragment conditions match with the settings specified here
and TCP/UDP Service Port also fits the number here, such
binding tunnel table can be established. ICMP means when
the source IP, destination IP, destination port and fragment
conditions match with the settings specified here and ICMP
Service Port also fits the number here, such binding tunnel
table can be established. IGMP means when the source IP,
destination IP, destination port and fragment conditions
match with the settings specified here and IGMP Service Port
also fits the number here, such binding tunnel table can be
established. Other means when the source IP, destination IP,
destination port and fragment conditions match with the
settings specified here with different TCP Service Port/UDP
Service Port/ICMP/IGMP, such binding tunnel table can be
established.
Detail Information
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
This field will display detailed information for Binding Tunnel
Policy. Below shows a successful binding tunnel policy for
load balance:
367
To configure a successful binding tunnel, you have to:
Type Binding Src IP range (Start and End) and Binding Des IP
range (Start and End). Choose TCP/UDP, IGMP/ICMP or Other
as Binding Protocol.
Advanced Backup
Available settings are explained as follows:
368
Item
Description
Profile Name
List the backup profile name.
ERD Mode
ERD means “Environment Recovers Detection”.
Normal – choose this mode to make all dial-out VPN TRUNK
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
backup profiles being activated alternatively.
Resume – when VPN connection breaks down or disconnects,
Member 1 will be the top priority for the system to do VPN
connection.
Detail Information
This field will display detailed information for Environment
Recovers Detection.
V-1-11 Connection Management
You can find the summary table of all VPN connections. You may disconnect any VPN
connection by clicking Drop button. You may also aggressively Dial-out by using Dial-out Tool
and clicking Dial button.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Dial-out Tool
General Mode - This filed displays the profile configured in
LAN-to-LAN (with Index number and VPN Server IP address).
The VPN connection built by General Mode does not support
VPN backup function.
Backup Mode - This filed displays the profile name saved in
VPN TRUNK Management (with Index number and VPN Server
IP address). The VPN connection built by Backup Mode
supports VPN backup function.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
369
Dial - Click this button to execute dial out function.
Refresh Seconds - Choose the time for refresh the dial
information among 5, 10, and 30.
Refresh - Click this button to refresh the whole connection
status.
370
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Application Notes
A-1 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Vigor Routers via IPsec Main
Mode
This document introduces how to set up Main mode IPsec Tunnel between two Vigor
Routers.IPsec VPN with Main mode use the IP address of VPN client as identifier, and the IP
address must be set on VPN server; therefore, if the VPN client doesn't have a static IP, please
use Aggressive mode instead.
VPN Server (Dial-In Site) Setup
1.
Create a Dial-In profile for VPN user, go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN,
click on an available index to add a new profile.
2.
Set up the dial-in profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
371
In Common Settings,
(a)
Enter the Profile Name.
(b)
Enable this profile.
(c)
Set Call Direction to Dial-in.
In Dial-In Setting,
3.
372
(d)
Make sure Allowed Dial-in Type has IPsec Tunnel enabled.
(e)
Enable Specify Remote VPN Gateway and enter Peer VPN Server IP as the public
IP of VPN client router.
(f)
Click on IKE Pre-Shared Key and enter the Pre-shared Key.
(g)
Select the IPsec Security Method that are allowed to use.
In TCP/IP Network Settings, enter VPN Client's LAN network in Remote Network IP and
Remote Network Mask. Click OK to save the profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VPN Client (Dial-out Site) Setup
1.
Create a Dial-out profile to VPN server: Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN,
click on an available index to add a new profile.
2.
Setup the dial-out profile.
In Common Settings,
(a)
Enter a Profile Name.
(b)
Enable this profile.
(c)
Set Call Direction to Dial-Out.
In Dial-out Setting,
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
373
(d)
Select IPsec Tunnel for Type of Sever I am Calling.
(e)
Enter VPN Server's WAN IP or domain name in Sever IP/Host Name for VPN.
(f)
Click IKE Pre-Shared Key and enter the same Pre-Shared key as VPN Server.
(g)
Click on Advanced in IPsec Security Method.
In IKE advanced settings,
3.
374
(h)
Select Main Mode for IKE phase 1 mode.
(i)
Make sure phase 1 and phase 2 proposal are using the security methods which are
accepted by VPN server.
(j)
Click OK to save.
In TCP/IP Network Settings, enter VPN Server's LAN Network in Remote Network IP and
Remote Network Mask. Click OK to save the profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VPN Tunnel Establishment
To initiate the VPN connection, go to VPN and Remote Access >> Connection Management
on VPN Client. Select the profile to VPN Sever and click Dial.
If all the settings are matched, the VPN will be established, and the statistics will be
displayed on the same page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
375
A-2 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Vigor Routers via IKEv2
Modified from the previous version IKEv1, IKEv2 is a new VPN protocol and has lots of
improvements then the former. It is more stable, more secure and faster connection
establishing speed. Support newer and more complicated secure ciphers to make the
connection more secure. Using new connection progress and discard the PPP, IKEv2 provides
the faster establishing speed.
This application note demonstrates how to establish IKEv2 VPN connection between two Vigor
Routers by the following topology.
VPN Server Settings
1.
2.
376
Go to VPN and Remote Access >> IPsec General Setup.
(a)
Input Pre-shared Key and Confirm Pre-Shared Key.
(b)
Click OK.
Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN and click an available index.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
(a) Check Enable this profile.
(b) Select Dial-in as Call Direction.
(c) Allow IPsec Tunnel in Dial-In Settings.
(d) Input the IP address of LAN_C as Remote Network IP and Remote Network Mask.
(e) Click OK.
VPN Client Settings
1.
Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN and click an available index.
(a) Give a Profile Name.
(b) Check Enable this profile.
(c) Select Dial-Out as Call Direction.
(d) Select IPsec Tunnel with IKEv2 in Dial-Out Settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
377
(e) Input VPN server's WAN IP or domain name at Server IP/Host Name for VPN.
(f) Input Pre-Shard Key of VPN server.
2.
378
In TCP/IP Network Settings, input the IP address of LAN_S as Remote Network IP and
Remote Network Mask. Click OK to save the profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-2 SSL VPN
SSL VPN (Secure Sockets Layer virtual private network) is a form of VPN that encrypts traffic
using SSL, which is the same technology used on secured websites. Because of SSL’s
prominence as an encryption protocol on the Internet, most networks have few restrictions on
SSL traffic, and as a result SSL VPN is more likely to work when other VPN technologies
experience difficulties due to obstacles such as firewalls and Network Address Translation
(NAT).
In short,
 It is not necessary for users to preinstall VPN client software for executing SSL VPN
connection.
 There are less restrictions for the data encrypted through SSL VPN in comparing with
traditional VPN.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
379
Web User Interface
V-2-1 General Setup
The general settings of the SSL VPN Server and SSL Tunnel are entered on this page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Bind to WAN
Select the WAN interfaces to accept inbound SSL VPN
connections.
Port
The port to be used for SSL VPN server. This is separate from
the management port which is configured in System
Maintenance>>Management. The default setting is 443.
Server Certificate
When the client does not set any certificate, default
certificate will be used for HTTPS and SSL VPN server.
Specify the certificate to be used for SSL connections. Select a
certificate from imported or generated certificates on the
router, or choose Self-signed to use the router’s built-in
default certificate. The selected certificate can be used in SSL
VPN server and HTTPS Web Proxy.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
380
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-2-2 User Account
With SSL VPN, Vigor2926 series let teleworkers have convenient and simple remote access to
central site VPN. The teleworkers do not need to install any VPN software manually. From
regular web browser, you can establish VPN connection back to your main office even in a
guest network or web cafe. The SSL technology is the same as the encryption that you use for
secure web sites such as your online bank. The SSL VPN can be operated in either full tunnel
mode or proxy mode. Now, Vigor2926 series allows up to 16 simultaneous incoming users.
SSL VPN authentication and permissions management are implemented through user accounts.
SSL VPN user accounts are shared with the remote dial-in user accounts used by other VPN
protocols such as PPTP and L2TP, and hence SSL VPN’s User Account setup page SSL VPN >>
User Account is identical to VPN and Remote Access >> Remote Dial-in user.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
SSL VPN can work only with Smart VPN Client developed by DrayTek. After
configuring SSL VPN profile, download the utility of Smart VPN Client to
build SSL VPN connection.
381
Click each index to edit one remote user profile.
Available settings are explained as follows:
382
Item
Description
User account and
Authentication
Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function.
Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of
the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the
Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.
User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name/password is limited to 23 characters.
Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name/password is limited to 19 characters.
Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Check this box
to make the authentication with mOTP function.
PIN Code – Enter the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).
Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in
the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).
Allowed Dial-In Type
Select the VPN protocols that this user is allowed to use.
PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish VPN
connections with the PPTP protocol. You should set the User
Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.
IPSec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish IPsec
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Item
Description
tunnels.
IKEv2 EAP– Select to allow the remote dial-in user to
initiate IKEv2 tunnels.

IPsec XAuth - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish
an IPSec VPN connection through XAuth server in
Internet.
L2TP with IPSec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to
establish L2TP VPN connections. You can select to use L2TP
alone or with IPSec. Select one of the following options:

None - Do not apply the IPSec policy. L2TP connections
are not encrypted.

Nice to Have - Attempt to establish an IPsec secure
channel first, before starting an L2TP session. If an IPsec
secure channel cannot be established with the remote
client, fall back to an L2TP connection without
encryption.

Must - Require that an IPsec secure channel be
established before starting an L2TP connection.
Disconnect if an IPsec secure channel cannot be
established.
SSL Tunnel - Select to allow the remote dial-in user to initiate
SSL VPN tunnels.
OpenVPN Tunnel - Select to allow the remote dial-in user to
initiate OpenVPN tunnels.
Specify Remote Node - Select this option to specify the
remote IP address, ISDN number or peer ID (used in IKE
aggressive mode) used to authenticate the remote dial-in
user. If this option is not selected, the authentication and
security methods specified in the general settings will be used
instead.
Netbios Naming Packet

Pass – Select this to allow Netbios name inquiries
between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel.

Block – Select this to block Netbios name inquiries
between remote and local hosts.
Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast
packets via VPN connection.

Pass –Select this to allow multicast packets to pass
through VPN connections.

Block –Select this to block multicast packets from passing
through the VPN connections. This is the default setting.

Subnet
Select a subnet for this VPN profile.
Assign Static IP Address –If you would like to assign a static IP
address to this user, enter it here.
IKE Authentication
Method
All fields in this section, except for Digital Signature (X.509),
are applicable to IPsec Tunnels and L2TP connections with
IPsec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote
node (Remote Client IP in Specify Remote Node above).
Digital Signature (X.509) can be used with IPSec tunnels
regardless of the IP address of the remote node is specified or
not.
Pre-Shared Key - Select this checkbox to enable Pre-shared
Key function and enter a string of up to 63 characters as the
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
383
Item
Description
pre-shared key.
Digital Signature (X.509) – Select this checkbox to enable
X.509 Digital Signature and choose a predefined profile that
has been set in VPN and Remote Access >> IPSec Peer
Identity.
IPSec Security Method
When the remote node is specified, all fields in this section are
required for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP connections with IPsec
Policy. Select any combination of Medium, DES, 3DES and AES
security methods as desired.
Medium-Authentication Header (AH) - Data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is
enabled. You can uncheck it to disable it.
High-Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) - Payload (data)
will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select
encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES),
Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
Local ID - Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in setting in the
LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional and can be
used only in IKE aggressive mode.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
384
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-2-3 User Group
Up to 10 user group profiles can be created for authentication by LDAP server. These profiles
will be used by applications such as User Management, VPN and etc.
Each item is explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Click to clear all profiles.
Index
Click the profile index to display its detail setting page.
Enable
Check the box to enable such profile.
Name
Display the name of the group profile.
Click any index number link to open the following page for detailed configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
385
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check this box to enable such profile.
Group Name
Type a name for such profile. The length of the name is
limited to 23 characters.
Authentication Methods
Select the authentication methods to be used for SSL VPN.
Local User DataBase – The system will perform the
authentication using the user defined account profiles
(configured in VPN and Remote Access>>Remote Dial-In
User). User profiles that are configured and enabled will be
listed in the Available User Account in the left box. To add a
user profile to a group, select it from the left box and click the
>> button, and it will be moved to the right box Selected User
Account. For detailed information about configuring the
profile setting, refer to Objects Setting>>IP Group.
RADIUS – The RADIUS server will will perform the
authentication.
TACACS+ - The TACACS+ will will perform the authentication.
LDAP / Active Directory - The LDAP / AD server will perform
the authentication.
If more than one authentication method is selected, the
system will perform user authentication by applying selected
authentication methods in the order listed.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
386
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-2-4 Online User Status
If you have finished the configuration of SSL Web Proxy (server), users can find out
corresponding settings when they access into DrayTek SSL VPN portal interface.
Next, users can open SSL VPN>> SSL Portal Online Status to view logging status of SSL VPN.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Active User
Display the name of the user who is connected to the SSL VPN
server.
Host IP
Display the IP address the user is connected from.
Time out
Display the remaining time before the session will be
disconnected.
Action
You can click Drop to disconnect the user from the router's SSL
VPN Portal.
Refresh Seconds
Sets the time interval at which this screen will be refreshed.
Click Refresh to force the screen to refresh immediately.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
387
V-3 Certificate Management
A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA).
It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the
digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the
certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard
X.509.
Any entity wants to utilize digital certificates should first request a certificate issued by a CA
server. It should also retrieve certificates of other trusted CA servers so it can authenticate
the peer with certificates issued by those trusted CA servers.
Here you can manage generate and manage the local digital certificates, and set trusted CA
certificates. Remember to adjust the time of Vigor router before using the certificate so that
you can get the correct valid period of certificate.
Below shows the menu items for Certificate Management.
388
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
V-3-1 Local Certificate
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Generate
Click this button to open Generate Certificate Request
window.
Type in all the information that the window requests. Then
click Generate again.
Import
Click this button to import a saved file as the certification
information.
Refresh
Click this button to refresh the information listed below.
View
Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate
request.
Delete
Click this button to delete selected name with certification
information.
GENERATE
Click this button to open Generate Certificate Signing Request window. Type in all the
information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different
certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then
click GENERATE again.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
389
Info
Please be noted that “Common Name” must be configured with router’s
WAN IP or domain name.
After clicking GENERATE, the generated information will be displayed on the window below:
IMPORT
Vigor router allows you to generate a certificate request and submit it the CA server, then
import it as “Local Certificate”. If you have already gotten a certificate from a third party,
you may import it directly. The supported types are PKCS12 Certificate and Certificate with a
private key.
Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information. There are three types
of local certificate supported by Vigor router.
390
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Upload Local Certificate
It allows users to import the certificate which is generated by
Vigor router and signed by CA server.
If you have done well in certificate generation, the Status of
the certificate will be shown as “OK”.
Upload PKCS12
Certificate
It allows users to import the certificate whose extensions are
usually .pfx or .p12. And these certificates usually
need passwords.
Note that PKCS12 is a standard for storing private keys and
certificates securely. It is used in (among other things)
Netscape and Microsoft Internet Explorer with their import
and export options.
Upload Certificate and
Private Key
It is useful when users have separated certificates and private
keys. And the password is needed if the private key is
encrypted.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
391
REFRESH
Click this button to refresh the information listed below.
View
Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.
Info
You have to copy the certificate request information from above window.
Next, access your CA server and enter the page of certificate request, copy
the information into it and submit a request. A new certificate will be
issued to you by the CA server. You can save it.
Delete
Click this button to remove the selected certificate.
392
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-3-2 Trusted CA Certificate
Trusted CA certificate lists three sets of trusted CA certificate. In addition, you can build a
RootCA certificate if required.
When the local client and remote client are required to make certificate authentication (e.g.,
IPsec X.509) for data passing through SSL tunnel and avoiding the attack of MITM, a trusted
root certificate authority (Root CA) will be used to authenticate the digital certificates
offered by both ends.
However, the procedure of applying digital certificate from a trusted root certificate
authority is complicated and time-consuming. Therefore, Vigor router offers a mechanism
which allows you to generate root CA to save time and provide convenience for general user.
Later, such root CA generated by DrayTek server can perform the issuing of local certificate.
Info
Root CA can be deleted but not edited. If you want to modify the settings
for a Root CA, please delete the one and create another one by clicking
Create Root CA.
Creating a Root CA
Click Create to open the following page. Type in all the information that the window request
such as certifcate name (used for identifying different certificate), subject alternative name
type and relational settings for subject name. Then click Generate again.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
393
Importing a Trusted CA
To import a pre-saved trusted CA certificate, please click IMPORT to open the following
window. Use Browse… to find out the saved text file. Then click Import. The one you
imported will be listed on the Trusted CA Certificate window.
For viewing each trusted CA certificate, click View to open the certificate detail information
window. If you want to delete a CA certificate, choose the one and click Delete to remove all
the certificate information.
394
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V-3-3 Certificate Backup
Local certificate and Trusted CA certificate for this router can be saved within one file.
Please click Backup on the following screen to save them. If you want to set encryption
password for these certificates, please type characters in both fields of Encrypt password
and Confirm password.
Also, you can use Restore to retrieve these two settings to the router whenever you want.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
395
V-3-4 Self-Signed Certificate
A self-signed certificate is a unique identification for the device (e.g., Vigor router) which
generates the certificate by itself to ensure the router security. Such self-signed certificate is
signed with its own private key.
The self-signed certificate will be applied in SSL VPN, HTTPS, and so on. In addition, it can be
created for free by using a wide variety of tools.
Click Regeneration to open Regenerate Self-Signed Certificate window. Type in all the
information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different
certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then
click GENERATE.
396
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part VI Security
While the broadband users demand more bandwidth
for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance
learning, security has been always the most
concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to
protect your local network against attack from
unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the
local network from accessing the Internet.
CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management
which is used to control IM/P2P usage, filter the web
content and URL content to reach a goal of security
management.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
397
VI-1 Firewall
While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications,
or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor
router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also
restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet. Furthermore, it can filter out
specific packets that trigger the router to build an unwanted outgoing connection.
Firewall Facilities
The users on the LAN are provided with secured protection by the following firewall facilities:

User-configurable IP filter (Call Filter/ Data Filter).

Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI): tracks packets and denies unsolicited incoming data

Selectable Denial of Service (DoS) /Distributed DoS (DDoS) attacks protection
IP Filters
Depending on whether there is an existing Internet connection, or in other words “the WAN
link status is up or down”, the IP filter architecture categorizes traffic into two: Call Filter
and Data Filter.

Call Filter - When there is no existing Internet connection, Call Filter is applied to all
traffic, all of which should be outgoing. It will check packets according to the filter rules.
If legal, the packet will pass. Then the router shall “initiate a call” to build the Internet
connection and send the packet to Internet.

Data Filter - When there is an existing Internet connection, Data Filter is applied to
incoming and outgoing traffic. It will check packets according to the filter rules. If legal,
the packet will pass the router.
The following illustrations are flow charts explaining how router will treat incoming traffic
and outgoing traffic respectively.
398
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI)
Stateful inspection is a firewall architecture that works at the network layer. Unlike legacy
static packet filtering, which examines a packet based on the information in its header,
stateful inspection builds up a state machine to track each connection traversing all
interfaces of the firewall and makes sure they are valid. The stateful firewall of Vigor router
not only examines the header information also monitors the state of the connection.
Denial of Service (DoS) Defense
The DoS Defense functionality helps you to detect and mitigate the DoS attack. The attacks
are usually categorized into two types, the flooding-type attacks and the vulnerability attacks.
The flooding-type attacks will attempt to exhaust all your system's resource while the
vulnerability attacks will try to paralyze the system by offending the vulnerabilities of the
protocol or operation system.
The DoS Defense function enables the Vigor router to inspect every incoming packet based on
the attack signature database. Any malicious packet that might duplicate itself to paralyze
the host in the secure LAN will be strictly blocked and a Syslog message will be sent as warning,
if you set up Syslog server.
Also the Vigor router monitors the traffic. Any abnormal traffic flow violating the pre-defined
parameter, such as the number of thresholds, is identified as an attack and the Vigor router
will activate its defense mechanism to mitigate in a real-time manner.
The below shows the attack types that DoS/DDoS defense function can detect:
1. SYN flood attack
2. UDP flood attack
3. ICMP flood attack
4. Port Scan attack
5. IP options
6. Land attack
7. Smurf attack
8. Trace route
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
9. SYN fragment
10. Fraggle attack
11. TCP flag scan
12. Tear drop attack
13. Ping of Death attack
14. ICMP fragment
15. Unassigned Numbers
399
Web User Interface
Below shows the menu items for Firewall.
VI-1-1 General Setup
General Setup allows you to adjust settings of IP Filter and common options. Here you can
enable or disable the Call Filter or Data Filter. Under some circumstance, your filter set can
be linked to work in a serial manner. So here you assign the Start Filter Set only. Also you can
configure the Log Flag settings, Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets, and Accept
incoming fragmented UDP packets.
Click Firewall and click General Setup to open the general setup page.
General Setup Page
Such page allows you to enable / disable Call Filter and Data Filter, determine general rule
for filtering the incoming and outgoing data.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
400
Description
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Call Filter
Check Enable to activate the Call Filter function. Assign a
start filter set for the Call Filter.
Data Filter
Check Enable to activate the Data Filter function. Assign a
start filter set for the Data Filter.
Always pass inbound
fragmented large
packets…
Some on-line games (for example: Half Life) will use lots of
fragmented UDP packets to transfer game data. Instinctively
as a secure firewall, Vigor router will reject these
fragmented packets to prevent attack unless you enable
“Always pass inbound fragmented large packets…”. By
checking this box, you can play these kinds of on-line games.
If security concern is in higher priority, you cannot enable
“Always pass inbound fragmented large packets…”.
Enable Strict Security
Firewall
For the sake of security, the router will execute strict
security checking for data transmission.
Such feature is enabled in default. All the packets, while
transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by
firewall. If the firewall system (e.g., content filter server)
does not make any response (pass or block) for these
packets, then the router’s firewall will block the packets
directly.
Block connections
initiated from WAN
Usually, IPv6 network sessions/traffic from WAN to LAN will
be accepted by IPv6 firewall in default.
IPv6 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on
LAN, check the box to make the packets (routed from WAN to
LAN) via IPv6 being blocked by such router. It is effective
only for the packets routed but not for packets translated by
NAT.
IPv4 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on
LAN, check the box to make the incoming packets via IPv4
being blocked by such router. It is effective only for the
packets routed but not for packets translated by NAT.
Backup Firewall
Click Backup to save the firewall configuration.
Restore Firewall
Click Select to choose a firewall configuration file. Then
click Restore to apply the file.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
401
Default Rule Page
Such page allows you to choose filtering profiles including QoS, Load-Balance policy, WCF,
APP Enforcement, URL Content Filter, for data transmission via Vigor router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
402
Item
Description
Filter
Select Pass or Block for the packets that do not match with
the filter rules.
Sessions Control
The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets
that do not match the filter rule configured in this page. The
default setting is 50000.
Quality of Service
Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule.
For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the
related section later.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
User Management
Such item is available only when Rule-Based is selected in
User Management>>General Setup. The general firewall
rule will be applied to the user/user group/all users
specified here.
When there is no user profile or group profile existed, Create
New User or Create New Group item will appear for you to
click to create a new one.
APP Enforcement
Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P
application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select,
please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this
page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must follow
the standard configured in the APP Enforcement profile
selected here. For detailed information, refer to the section
of APP Enforcement profile setup. For troubleshooting
needs, you can specify to record information for IM/P2P by
checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please
refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed
information.
URL Content Filter
Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with this
router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>>
URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New]
from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile.
For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record
information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box.
It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section
Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
Web Content Filter
Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with
this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in
CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose
[Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create
a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
record information for Web Content Filter by checking the
Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to
section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
DNS Filter
Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings (created in
CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at
least one profile in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page
first. Or click the DNS Filter link in this page to create a new
profile.
Advance Setting
Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
403
strongly recommended to use the default settings here.
Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters
among different languages. Choose correct codepage can
help the system obtain correct ASCII after decoding data
from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter.
The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you
do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be
processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a
codepage.
If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage,
please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup
dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on the
dialog box.
Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol
(0~65535). The more the value is, the better the
performance will be. However, if the network is not stable,
small value will be proper.
Session timeout – Setting timeout for sessions can make the
best utilization of network resources.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
404
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VI-1-2 Filter Setup
Click Firewall and click Filter Setup to open the setup page.
To edit or add a filter, click on the set number to edit the individual set. The following page
will be shown. Each filter set contains up to 7 rules. Click on the rule number button to edit
each rule. Check Active to enable the rule.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Filter Rule
Click a button numbered (1 ~ 7) to edit the filter rule. Click
the button will open Edit Filter Rule web page. For the
detailed information, refer to the following page.
Active
Enable or disable the filter rule.
Comment
Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is
23–character long.
Direction
Display the direction of packet.
Src IP / Dst IP
Display the IP address of source /destination.
Service Type
Display the type and port number of the packet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
405
Action
Display the packets to be passed /blocked.
CSM
Display the content security managed
Move Up/Down
Use Up or Down link to move the order of the filter rules.
Next Filter Set
Set the link to the next filter set to be executed after the
current filter run. Do not make a loop with many filter sets.
Wizard Mode
Allow to configure frequently used settings for filter rule via
several setting pages.
Advance Mode
Allow to configure detailed settings of filter rule.
To use Wizard Mode, simple do the following steps:
1. Click the Wizard Mode radio button.
2. Click Index 1. The setting page will appear as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
406
Item
Description
Comments
Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is
14- character long.
Direction
Set the direction of packet flow. It is for Data Filter only.
For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call
Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.
Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other
LAN.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Source IP /
Destination IP
To set the IP address manually, please choose Any
Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as
the Address Type and type them in this dialog.
Protocol
Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to.
Source Port /
Destination Port
(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
one port; when the first and last values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this service
type.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it
indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when
the first and last values are different, it indicates that all
the ports except the range defined here are available for
this service type.
(>) – the port number greater than this value is available.
(<) – the port number less than this value is available for
this profile.
3. Click Next to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Pass Immediately
Packets matching the rule will be passed immediately.
APP Enforcement - Select an APP Enforcement profile for
global IM/P2P application blocking. If there is no profile for
you to select, please choose [Create New] from the drop
down list in this page to create a new profile. All the hosts
in LAN must follow the standard configured in the APP
Enforcement profile selected here. For detailed
information, refer to the section of APP Enforcement
profile setup. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
record information for IM/P2P by checking the Log box. It
will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section
Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
407
URL Content Filter - Select one of the URL Content Filter
profile settings (created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for
applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for
choosing in CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. Or
choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page
to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can
specify to record information for URL Content Filter by
checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please
refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed
information.
Web Content Filter - Select one of the Web Content Filter
profile settings (created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for
applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for
anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or
choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page
to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can
specify to record information for Web Content Filter by
checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please
refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed
information.
DNS Filter - Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router.
Please set at least one profile in CSM>> Web Content
Filter web page first. Or click the DNS Filter link from the
drop down list in this page to create a new profile.
Block Immediately
Packets matching the rule will be dropped immediately.
4. After choosing the mechanism, click Next to get the summary page for reference.
5. If there is no error, click Finish to complete wizard setting.
408
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
To use Advance Mode, do the following steps:
1. Click the Advance Mode radio button.
2. Click Index 1 to access into the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Check to enable the
Filter Rule
Check this box to enable the filter rule.
Comments
Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is
14- character long.
Index(1-15)
Set PCs on LAN to work at certain time interval only. You
may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules
pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The
default setting of this field is blank and the function will
always work.
Clear sessions when
schedule ON
Check this box to clear the sessions when the above
schedule profiles are applied.
Direction
Set the direction of packet flow. It is for Data Filter only.
For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call
Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
409
Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other
LAN.
Source IP/ Country
and
Destination IP /
Country
Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose the
IP object or country object as source IP or destination IP.
To set the IP address manually, please choose Any
Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as
the Address Type and type them in this dialog. In addition,
if you want to use the IP range from defined groups or
objects or any IP in a country, please choose Group and
Objects or Country Object as the Address Type.
From the IP Group drop down list, choose the one that you
want to apply. Or use the IP Object drop down list to
choose the object that you want.
Service Type
410
Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose a
suitable service type.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
To set the service type manually, please choose User
defined as the Service Type and type them in this dialog. In
addition, if you want to use the service type from defined
groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the
Service Type.
Protocol - Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will
apply to.
Source/Destination Port –
(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
one port; when the first and last values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this service
type.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it
indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when
the first and last values are different, it indicates that all
the ports except the range defined here are available for
this service type.
(>) – the port number greater than this value is available.
(<) – the port number less than this value is available for
this profile.
Service Group/Object - Use the drop down list to choose
the one that you want.
Fragments
Specify the action for fragmented packets. And it is used
for Data Filter only.
Don’t care -No action will be taken towards fragmented
packets.
Unfragmented -Apply the rule to unfragmented packets.
Fragmented - Apply the rule to fragmented packets.
Too Short - Apply the rule only to packets that are too short
to contain a complete header.
Filter
Specifies the action to be taken when packets match the
rule.
Block Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be
dropped immediately.
Pass Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be
passed immediately.
Block If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule,
and that does not match further rules, will be dropped.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
411
Pass If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and
that does not match further rules, will be passed through.
Branch to other Filter
Set
If the packet matches the filter rule, the next filter rule
will branch to the specified filter set. Select next filter rule
to branch from the drop-down menu. Be aware that the
router will apply the specified filter rule for ever and will
not return to previous filter rule any more.
Sessions Control
The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets
that do not match the filter rule configured in this page.
The default setting is 60000.
MAC Bind IP
Strict –Make the MAC address and IP address settings
configured in IP Object for Source IP and Destination IP
are bound for applying such filter rule.
No-Strict - no limitation.
Quality of Service
Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule.
For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the
related section later.
User Management
Such item is available only when Rule-Based is selected in
User Management>>General Setup. The general firewall
rule will be applied to the user/user group/all users
specified here.
Note: When there is no user profile or group profile
existed, Create New User or Create New Group item will
appear for you to click to create a new one.
412
APP Enforcement
Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P
application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select,
please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this
page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must
follow the standard configured in the APP Enforcement
profile selected here. For detailed information, refer to
the section of APP Enforcement profile setup. For
troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record
information for IM/P2P by checking the Log box. It will be
sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail
Alert for more detailed information.
URL Content Filter
Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with
this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in
CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose
[Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create
a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
record information for URL Content Filter by checking the
Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to
section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
Web Content Filter
Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with
this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in
CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose
[Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create
a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
record information for Web Content Filter by checking the
Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to
section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
DNS Filter
Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings (created in
CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at
least one profile in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page
first. Or click the DNS Filter link from the drop down list in
this page to create a new profile.
Advance Setting
Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is
strongly recommended to use the default settings here.
Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters
among different languages. Choose correct codepage can
help the system obtaining correct ASCII after decoding data
from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content
Filter. The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I.
If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL
will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose
a codepage.
If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage,
please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup
dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on
the dialog box.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
413
Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol
(0~65535). The more the value is, the better the
performance will be. However, if the network is not stable,
small value will be proper.
Session timeout–Setting timeout for sessions can make the
best utilization of network resources. However, Queue
timeout is configured for TCP protocol only; session
timeout is configured for the data flow which matched with
the firewall rule.
DrayTek Banner – Please uncheck this box and the
following screen will not be shown for the unreachable web
page. The default setting is Enabled.
Strict Security Checking - All the packets, while
transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by
firewall settings configured by Vigor router. When the
resource is inadequate, the packets will be blocked if Strict
Security Checking is enabled. If Strict Security Checking is
not enabled, then the packets will pass through the router.
3. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
414
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VI-1-3 Defense Setup
As a sub-functionality of IP Filter/Firewall, there are 15 types of detect/ defense function in
the DoS Defense setup. The DoS Defense functionality is disabled for default.
VI-1-3-1 DoS Defense
Click Firewall and click DoS Defense to open the setup page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable Dos Defense
Check the box to activate the DoS Defense Functionality.
Select All - Click this button to select all the items listed
below.
White/Black List Option – Set white/black list of IPv4/IPv6
address.
Enable SYN flood defense
Check the box to activate the SYN flood defense function.
Once detecting the Threshold of the TCP SYN packets from
the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor
router will start to randomly discard the subsequent TCP
SYN packets for a period defined in Timeout. The goal for
this is prevent the TCP SYN packets’ attempt to exhaust the
limited-resource of Vigor router.
By default, the threshold and timeout values are set to
2000 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That
means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will
be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be
paused for 10 seconds.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
415
416
Enable UDP flood defense
Check the box to activate the UDP flood defense function.
Once detecting the Threshold of the UDP packets from the
Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router
will start to randomly discard the subsequent UDP packets
for a period defined in Timeout.
The default setting for threshold and timeout are 2000
packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That
means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will
be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be
paused for 10 seconds.
Enable ICMP flood defense
Check the box to activate the ICMP flood defense function.
Similar to the UDP flood defense function, once if the
Threshold of ICMP packets from Internet has exceeded the
defined value, the router will discard the ICMP echo
requests coming from the Internet.
The default setting for threshold and timeout are 250
packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That
means, when 250 packets per second received, they will be
regarded as “attack event” and the session will be paused
for 10 seconds.
Enable Port Scan
detection
Port Scan attacks the Vigor router by sending lots of packets
to many ports in an attempt to find ignorant services would
respond. Check the box to activate the Port Scan
detection. Whenever detecting this malicious exploration
behavior by monitoring the port-scanning Threshold rate,
the Vigor router will send out a warning.
By default, the Vigor router sets the threshold as 2000
packets per second. That means, when 2000 packets per
second received, they will be regarded as “attack event”.
Block IP options
Check the box to activate the Block IP options function.
The Vigor router will ignore any IP packets with IP option
field in the datagram header. The reason for limitation is IP
option appears to be a vulnerability of the security for the
LAN because it will carry significant information, such as
security, TCC (closed user group) parameters, a series of
Internet addresses, routing messages...etc. An
eavesdropper outside might learn the details of your
private networks.
Block Land
Check the box to enforce the Vigor router to defense the
Land attacks. The Land attack combines the SYN attack
technology with IP spoofing. A Land attack occurs when an
attacker sends spoofed SYN packets with the identical
source and destination addresses, as well as the port
number to victims.
Block Smurf
Check the box to activate the Block Smurf function. The
Vigor router will ignore any broadcasting ICMP echo
request.
Block trace route
Check the box to enforce the Vigor router not to forward
any trace route packets.
Block SYN fragment
Check the box to activate the Block SYN fragment function.
The Vigor router will drop any packets having SYN flag and
more fragment bit set.
Block Fraggle Attack
Check the box to activate the Block fraggle Attack function.
Any broadcast UDP packets received from the Internet is
blocked.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Activating the DoS/DDoS defense functionality might block
some legal packets. For example, when you activate the
fraggle attack defense, all broadcast UDP packets coming
from the Internet are blocked. Therefore, the RIP packets
from the Internet might be dropped.
Block TCP flag scan
Check the box to activate the Block TCP flag scan function.
Any TCP packet with anomaly flag setting is dropped. Those
scanning activities include no flag scan, FIN without ACK
scan, SYN FINscan, Xmas scan and full Xmas scan.
Block Tear Drop
Check the box to activate the Block Tear Drop function.
Many machines may crash when receiving ICMP datagrams
(packets) that exceed the maximum length. To avoid this
type of attack, the Vigor router is designed to be capable of
discarding any fragmented ICMP packets with a length
greater than 1024 octets.
Block Ping of Death
Check the box to activate the Block Ping of Death function.
This attack involves the perpetrator sending overlapping
packets to the target hosts so that those target hosts will
hang once they re-construct the packets. The Vigor routers
will block any packets realizing this attacking activity.
Block ICMP Fragment
Check the box to activate the Block ICMP fragment
function. Any ICMP packets with more fragment bit set are
dropped.
Block Unassigned Numbers
Check the box to activate the Block Unknown Protocol
function. Individual IP packet has a protocol field in the
datagram header to indicate the protocol type running over
the upper layer. However, the protocol types greater than
100 are reserved and undefined at this time. Therefore, the
router should have ability to detect and reject this kind of
packets.
Warning Messages
We provide Syslog function for user to retrieve message
from Vigor router. The user, as a Syslog Server, shall receive
the report sending from Vigor router which is a Syslog
Client.
All the warning messages related to DoS Defense will be
sent to user and user can review it through Syslog daemon.
Look for the keyword DoS in the message, followed by a
name to indicate what kind of attacks is detected.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
417
VI-1-3-2 Spoofing Defense
Click the Spoofing Defense tab to open the setup page.
VI-1-4 Diagnose
The purpose of this function is to test when the router receiving incoming packet, which
firewall rule will be applied to that packet. The test result, including firewall rule profile, IP
address translation in packet transmission, state of the firewall fuctions and etc., also will be
shown on this page.
Info
418
The result obtained by using Diagnose is offered for RD debug. It will be
different according to actual state such as netework connection, LAN/WAN
settings and so on.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Mode
To have a firewall rule test, specify the service type (ICMP,
UDP, TCP) of the packet and type of the IP address
(IPv4/IPv6).
Direction
Set the way (from WAN or from LAN) that Vigor router
receives the first packet for test. Different way means the
firewall will process the connection initiated from LAN or
from WAN.
Test View
This is a dynamic display page.
According to the direction specified, test view will display
the figure to guide you typing IP address, port number, and
MAC address.
Later, after clicking the Analyze button, the information for
the firewall rule profile and address translation will be
shown on this page.
Src IP
Enter the IPv4/IPv6 address of the packet’s source.
Src Port
Enter the port number of the packet’s source.
Src MAC
Enter the MAC address of the packet’s source.
Dst IP
Enter the IPv4/IPv6 address of the packet’s destination.
Dst Port
Enter the port number of the packet’s destination.
Packet & Payload
In firewall diagnose, two packets belong to one connection.
In general, two packets are enough for Vigor router to
perform this test.
Enable – Check the box to send out the test packet.
Direction – The first packet of the firewall test will follow
the direction specified above. However, the direction for
the second packet might be different. Simply choose the
direction (from Computer A to B or from the B to A) for the
second packet.
Protocol – It displays the mode selected above and the
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
419
sate. If required, click the mode link to configure advanced
setting. The common service type (Customize, Ping, Trace
Route / Customize, DNS, Trace Route / Customize,
Http(GET) related to that mode (ICMP / UDP / TCP) will be
shown on the following dialog box.
Analyze

Type – Choose Customize, Ping, Trace Route /
Customize, DNS, Trace Route / Customize, Http
(GET).

Payload – It is available when Customzie is selected.
Simply type 16 HEX characters which represent
certain packet (e.g., DNS packet) if you want to set
the data transfered with protocol (ICMP/UDP/TCP)
which is different to Type setting.
Execute the test and analyze the result.
The following figure shows the test result after clicking Analyze. Processing state for the
fuctions (MAC Filter, QoS, User management, etc.,) related to the firewall will be displayed
by green or red LED.
420
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Application Notes
A-1 How to Configure Certain Computers Accessing to Internet
We can specify certain computers (e.g., 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20) accessing to Internet
through Vigor router. Others (e.g., 192.168.1.31 and 192.168.1.32) outside the range can get
the source from LAN only.
The way we can use is to set two rules under Firewall. For Rule 1 of Set 2 under
Firewall>>Filter Setup is used as the default setting, we have to create a new rule starting
from Filter Rule 2 of Set 2.
1.
Access into the web user interface of Vigor router.
2.
Open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link, choose Advance Mode and choose the
Filter Rule 2 button.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
421
3.
Info
422
Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Enter the comments (e.g., block_all).
Choose Block If No Further Match for the Filter setting. Then, click OK.
In default, the router will check the packets starting with Set 2, Filter Rule
2 to Filter Rule 7. If Block If No Further Match for is selected for Filter, the
firewall of the router would check the packets with the rules starting from
Rule 3 to Rule 7. The packets not matching with the rules will be processed
according to Rule 2.
4.
Next, set another rule. Just open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link and
choose the Filter Rule 3 button.
5.
Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Enter the comments (e.g., open_ip).
Click the Edit button for Source IP.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
6.
A dialog box will be popped up. Choose Range Address as Address Type by using the
drop down list. Type 192.168.1.10 in the field of Start IP, and type 192.168.1.20 in the
field of End IP. Then, click OK to save the settings. The computers within the range can
access into the Internet.
7.
Now, check the content of Source IP is correct or not. The action for Filter shall be set
with Pass Immediately. Then, click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
423
8.
Both filter rules have been created. Click OK.
Now, all the settings are configured well. Only the computers with the IP addresses within
192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20 can access to Internet.
424
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VI-2 Central Security Management (CSM)
CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management which is used to control IM/P2P
usage, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management.
APP Enforcement Filter
As the popularity of all kinds of instant messenger application arises, communication cannot
become much easier. Nevertheless, while some industry may leverage this as a great tool to
connect with their customers, some industry may take reserved attitude in order to reduce
employee misusage during office hour or prevent unknown security leak. It is similar situation
for corporation towards peer-to-peer applications since file-sharing can be convenient but
insecure at the same time. To address these needs, we provide CSM functionality.
URL Content Filter
To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter
not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web
feature where malicious code may conceal.
Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking
facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the
website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who
won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a
job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL
Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks
the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy
firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.
On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious
codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable
objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once
downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system.
For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If
malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.
Web Content Filter
We all know that the content on the Internet just like other types of media may be
inappropriate sometimes. As a responsible parent or employer, you should protect those in
your trust against the hazards. With Web filtering service of the Vigor router, you can protect
your business from common primary threats, such as productivity, legal liability, network and
security threats. For parents, you can protect your children from viewing adult websites or
chat rooms.
Once you have activated your Web Filtering service in Vigor router and chosen the categories
of website you wish to restrict, each URL address requested (e.g.www.bbc.co.uk) will be
checked against our server database. This database is updated as frequent as daily by a global
team of Internet researchers. The server will look up the URL and return a category to your
router. Your Vigor router will then decide whether to allow access to this site according to the
categories you have selected. Please note that this action will not introduce any delay in your
Web surfing because each of multiple load balanced database servers can handle millions of
requests for categorization.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
The priority of URL Content Filter is higher than Web Content Filter.
425
Web User Interface
VI-2-1 APP Enforcement Profile
You can define policy profiles for IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer)/Protocol/Misc
application. This page allows you to set 32 profiles for different requirements. The APP
Enforcement Profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.
Available settings are explained as follows:
426
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Profile
Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to
set different policy.
Name
Display the name of the APP Enforcement Profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Profile Name
Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 15 characters.
Select All
Click it to choose all of the items in this page.
Clear All
Uncheck all the selected boxes.
Enable
Check the box to select the APP to be blocked by Vigor
router.
The profiles configured here can be applied in the Firewall>>General Setup and
Firewall>>Filter Setup pages as the standard for the host(s) to follow.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
427
VI-2-2 APPE Signature Upgrade
The APPE Enforcement Profile adopted by Vigor router will be treated as the APPE signature.
DrayTek will periodically upgrade versions for all of the APPs supported by Vigor router.
However, it might be inconvenient for users to upgrade the APP version one by one. This
feature is specially designed to offer a quick method to execute APP version upgrade. Users
can perform the APPE signature upgrade manually or configure the settings on this page to
make Vigor router performing the APPE signature automatically.
Available settings are explained as follows:
428
Item
Description
Upgrade Setting
APPE Module Version – Display current version status of
APPE signature.
New version from the Internet – Download button is
available only when Vigor router detects new APPE version.
After clicking it, a dialog will appear with information added
to such new version. Click OK to exit the dialog and start the
signature upgrade.
Upgrade via interface – Choose one of the WAN interfaces as
a channel for APPE signature upgrade.
Setup Download Server
Specify the download server by typing the URL of the server
located. Or you can click Find more link to search the one
you want.
Signature authentication/download message – Display the
status of APPE Signature Upgrade.
Upgrade Manually
Import – Click this button to open the following page. Press
Choose File to locate the signature file which downloaded
from MyVigor portal or FTP server previously. Then, click
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Upgrade and wait for the system completing the process.
Upgrade Automatically
Scheduled Update - Check the box to make Vigor router
upgrading the APPE signature based on the schedule
configured here.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
429
VI-2-3 URL Content Filter Profile
To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter
not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web
feature where malicious code may conceal.
Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking
facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the
website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who
won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a
job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL
Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks
the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy
firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.
On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious
codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable
objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once
downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system.
For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If
malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.
For example, if you add key words such as “sex”, Vigor router will limit web access to web
sites or web pages such as “www.sex.com”, ”www.backdoor.net/images/sex/p_386.html”.
Or you may simply specify the full or partial URL such as “www.sex.com” or “sex.com”.
Also the Vigor router will discard any request that tries to retrieve the malicious code.
Click CSM and click URL Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page.
Each item is explained as follows:
430
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Profile
Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to
set different policy.
Name
Display the name of the URL Content Filter Profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Administration Message
You can type the message manually for your necessity.
Default Message - You can type the message manually for your
necessity or click this button to get the default message which
will be displayed on the field of Administration Message.
You can set eight profiles as URL content filter. Simply click the index number under Profile
to open the following web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Profile Name
Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 15 characters.
Priority
It determines the action that this router will apply.
Both: Pass – The router will let all the packages that match
with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web
Feature below passing through. When you choose this
setting, both configuration set in this page for URL Access
Control and Web Feature will be inactive.
Both:Block –The router will block all the packages that
match with the conditions specified in URL Access Control
and Web Feature below. When you choose this setting, both
configuration set in this page for URL Access Control and Web
Feature will be inactive.
Either: URL Access Control First – When all the packages
matching with the conditions specified in URL Access Control
and Web Feature below, such function can determine the
priority for the actions executed. For this one, the router
will process the packages with the conditions set below for
URL first, then Web feature second.
Either: Web Feature First –When all the packages matching
with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web
Feature below, such function can determine the priority for
the actions executed. For this one, the router will process
the packages with the conditions set below for web feature
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
431
first, then URL second.
Log
Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.
Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.
All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in
Syslog.
URL Access Control
Enable URL Access Control - Check the box to activate URL
Access Control. Note that the priority for URL Access
Control is higher than Restrict Web Feature. If the web
content match the setting set in URL Access Control, the
router will execute the action specified in this field and
ignore the action specified under Restrict Web Feature.
Prevent web access from IP address - Check the box to deny
any web surfing activity using IP address, such as
http://202.6.3.2. The reason for this is to prevent someone
dodges the URL Access Control. You must clear your browser
cache first so that the URL content filtering facility operates
properly on a web page that you visited before.
Action – This setting is available only when Either : URL
Access Control First or Either : Web Feature First is
selected.

Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the keywords listed on the box below.

Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding
webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.
If the web pages do not match with the keyword set
here, it will be processed with reverse action.
Exception List – Specify the object profile(s) as the
exception list which will be processed in an opposite manner
to the action selected above.
Group/Object Selections – The Vigor router provides several
frames for users to define keywords and each frame supports
multiple keywords. The keyword could be a noun, a partial
noun, or a complete URL string. Multiple keywords within a
frame are separated by space, comma, or semicolon. In
addition, the maximal length of each frame is 32-character
long. After specifying keywords, the Vigor router will decline
the connection request to the website whose URL string
matched to any user-defined keyword. It should be noticed
that the more simplified the blocking keyword list is, the
more efficiently the Vigor router performs.
432
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web Feature
Enable Web Feature Restriction - Check this box to make
the keyword being blocked or passed.
Action - This setting is available only when Either: URL
Access Control First or Either: Web Feature First is
selected.
Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with
the keywords listed on the box below.
Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the keywords listed on the box below.
If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set
here, it will be processed with reverse action.
File Extension Profile – Choose one of the profiles that you
configured in Object Setting>> File Extension Objects
previously for passing or blocking the file downloading.
Cookie - Check the box to filter out the cookie transmission
from inside to outside world to protect the local user's
privacy.
Proxy - Check the box to reject any proxy transmission. To
control efficiently the limited-bandwidth usage, it will be of
great value to provide the blocking mechanism that filters
out the multimedia files downloading from web pages.
Upload – Check the box to block the file upload by way of
web page.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
433
VI-2-4 Web Content Filter Profile
There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by
means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.
Service Activation Wizard allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing
into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
However, if you use the Web Content Filter Profile page to activate WCF feature, it is
necessary for you to access into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Therefore, you need to register an account on http://myvigor.draytek.com for using
corresponding service. Please refer to section of creating MyVigor account.
WCF adopts the mechanism developed and offered by certain service provider (e.g., DrayTek).
No matter activating WCF feature or getting a new license for web content filter, you have to
click Activate to satisfy your request. Be aware that service provider matching with Vigor
router currently offers a period of time for trial version for users to experiment. If you want
to purchase a formal edition, simply contact with the channel partner or your dealer.
Click CSM and click Web Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page. The default
setting for Setup Query Server /Setup Test Server is auto-selected. You can choose another
server for your necessity by clicking Find more to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for
searching another qualified and suitable one.
434
Info 1
Web Content Filter (WCF) is not a built-in service of Vigor router but a
service powered by Commtouch. If you want to use such service (trial or
formal edition), you have to perform the procedure of activation first. For
the service of formal edition, please contact with your dealer/distributor
for detailed information.
Info 2
Commtouch is merged by Cyren, and GlobalView services will be continued
to deliver powerful cloud-based information security solutions! Refer to:
http://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/commtouch-is-now-cyren-239
025151.html
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Activate
Click it to access into MyVigor for activating WCF service.
Setup Query Server
It is recommended for you to use the default setting,
auto-selected. You need to specify a server for categorize
searching when you type URL in browser based on the web
content filter profile.
Setup Test Server
It is recommended for you to use the default setting,
auto-selected.
Find more
Click it to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for searching
another qualified and suitable server.
Look up category by URL,
or report inappropriate
categorization
Click this link to do the verification.
Cache
None – the router will check the URL that the user wants to
access via WCF precisely, however, the processing rate is
normal. Such item can provide the most accurate URL
matching.
L1 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to
access via WCF. If the URL has been accessed previously, it
will be stored in the router to be accessed quickly if
required. Such item can provide accurate URL matching with
faster rate.
L2 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
435
access via WCF. If the data has been accessed previously, the
IP addresses of source and destination IDs will be memorized
for a short time (about 1 second) in the router. When the
user tries to access the same destination ID, the router will
check it by comparing the record stored. If it matches, the
page will be retrieved quickly. Such item can provide URL
matching with the fastest rate.
L1+L2 Cache – the router will check the URL with fast
processing rate combining the feature of L1 and L2.
Set to Factory Default
Click this link to retrieve the factory settings.
Administration Message
You can type the message manually for your necessity or
click Default Message button to get the default text
displayed on the field of Administration Message.
Eight profiles are provided here as Web content filters. Simply click the index number under
Profile to open the following web page. The items listed in Categories will be changed
according to the different service providers. If you have and activate another web content
filter license, the items will be changed simultaneously. All of the configuration made for web
content filter will be deleted automatically. Therefore, please backup your data before you
change the web content filter license.
Available settings are explained as follows:
436
Item
Description
Profile Name
Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 15 characters.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Black/White List
Enable – Activate white/black list function for such profile.
Group/Object Selections – Click Edit to choose the group or
object profile as the content of white/black list.
Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with
the characters listed on Group/Object Selections. If the web
pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they
will be processed with the categories listed on the box
below.
Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections.
If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set
here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the
box below.
Action
Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with
the categories listed on the box below.
Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the categories listed on the box below.
If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set
here, it will be processed with reverse action.
Log
None – There is no log file will be recorded for this profile.
Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.
Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.
All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in
Syslog.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
437
VI-2-5 DNS Filter Profile
The DNS Filter monitors DNS queries on UDP port 53 and will pass the DNS query information
to the WCF to help with categorizing HTTPS URL's.
DNS can be specified in LAN>>General Setup by using the server (e.g., 168.95.1.1) on router
or external DNS server (e.g., 8.8.8.8). If the router server is used, DNS Filter General Setting
will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN. However, if the external DNS server is used,
DNS Filter Profile will be applied to DNS query coming from clients on LAN.
Info
438
For DNS filter must use the WCF service profile to filter the packets,
therefore WCF license must be activated first. Otherwise, DNS filter does
not have any effect on packets.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
DNS Filter Profile Table
It displays a list of different DNS filter profiles (with
specified WCF and UCF).
Click the profile link to open the following page. Then, type
the name of the profile and specify WCF/UCF based on your
requirement.
DNS Filter Local Setting
DNS Filter Local Setting will be applied to DNS query from
clients on LAN when router’s DNS server is used.
DNS Filter - Check Enable to enable such feature.
Syslog - The filtering result can be recorded according to the
setting selected for Syslog.
 None – There is no log file will be recorded for this
profile.
 Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.
 Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in
Syslog.
 All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in
Syslog.
WCF- Set the filtering conditions.
UCF - Set the filtering conditions.
Black/White List – Specify IP address, subnet mask, IP
object, or IP group as a black list or white list for DNS
packets passing through or blocked by Vigor router.
Administration Message
Enter the words or sentences which will be displayed when a
web page is blocked by Vigor router. You can type the
message manually for your necessity or click Default
Message button to get the default text displayed on the field
of Administration Message.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
439
Application Notes
A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor
The website of MyVigor (a server located on http://myvigor.draytek.com) provides several
useful services (such as Anti-Spam, Web Content Filter, Anti-Intrusion, and etc.) to filtering
the web pages for the sake of protecting your system.
To access into MyVigor for getting more information, please create an account for MyVigor.
Create an Account via Vigor Router
1. Click CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile. The following page will appear.
Or
Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page.
440
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2. Click the Activate link. A login page for MyVigor web site will pop up automatically.
3. Click the link of Create an account now.
4. The system will ask if you are 16 years old or over.

If yes, click I am 16 or over.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
441

If not, click I am under 16 years old to get the following page. Then, click I and my
legal guardian agree.
5. After reading the terms of service/privacy policy, click Agree.
6. In the following page, enter your personal information in this page and then click
Continue.
442
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
7. Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue.
8. Now you have created an account successfully.
9. Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation Letter
from myvigor.draytek.com.
10. Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following
screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
443
11. When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just
created) in the fields of UserName and Password.
12. Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to
activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want.
444
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
A-2 How to Block Facebook Service Accessed by the Users via Web Content
Filter / URL Content Filter
There are two ways to block the facebook service, Web Content Filter and URL Content Filter.
Web Content Filter,
Benefits: Easily and quickly implement the category/website that you want to block.
Note: License is required.
URL Content Filter,
Benefits: Free, flexible for customize webpage.
Note: Manual setting (e.g., one keyword for one website.)
I. Via Web Content Filter
1.
Make sure the Web Content Filter (powered by Commtouch) license is valid.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
445
446
2.
Open CSM >> Web Content Filter Profile to create a WCF profile. Check Social
Networking with Action, Block.
3.
Enable this profile in Firewall>>General Setup>>Default Rule.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
4.
Next time when someone accesses facebook via this router, the web page would be
blocked and the following message would be displayed instead.
II. Via URL Content Filter
A. Block the web page containing the word of “Facebook”
1.
Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
2.
In the field of Contents, please type facebook. Configure the settings as the following
figure.
3.
Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
4.
Configure the settings as the following figure.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
447
5.
When you finished the above steps, click OK. Then, open Firewall>>General Setup.
6.
Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in
the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word
“facebook” inside.
B. Disallow users to play games on Facebook
448
1.
Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
2.
In the field of Contents, please type apps.facebook. Configure the settings as the
following figure.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3.
Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
4.
Configure the settings as the following figure.
5.
When you finished the above steps, please open Firewall>>General Setup.
6.
Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in
the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word
“facebook” inside.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
449
450
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part VII Management
There are several items offered for the Vigor router
system setup: System Status, TR-069, Administrator
Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting,
Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and
Date, Management, Reboot System, Firmware Upgrade
and Activation.
It is used to control the bandwith of data transmission
through configuration of Sessions Limit, Bandwidth
Limit, and Quality of Servie (QoS).
It is a security feature which disallows any IP traffic
(except DHCP-related packets) from a particular host
until that host has correctly supplied a valid username
and password.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
451
VII-1 System Maintenance
For the system setup, there are several items that you have to know the way of configuration:
System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting,
Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, Management, Reboot System,
Firmware Upgrade and Activation.
452
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
Below shows the menu items for System Maintenance.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
453
VII-1-1 System Status
The System Status provides basic network settings of Vigor router. It includes LAN and WAN
interface information. Also, you could get the current running firmware version or firmware
related information from this presentation.
Available settings are explained as follows:
454
Item
Description
Model Name
Display the model name of the router.
Firmware Version
Display the firmware version of the router.
Build Date/Time
Display the date and time of the current firmware build.
LAN
MAC Address
- Display the MAC address of the LAN Interface.
IP Address
- Display the IP address of the LAN interface.
Subnet Mask
- Display the subnet mask address of the LAN interface.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
DHCP Server
- Display the current status of DHCP server of the LAN
interface
DNS
- Display the assigned IP address of the primary DNS.
WAN
Link Status
- Display current connection status.
MAC Address
- Display the MAC address of the WAN Interface.
Connection
- Display the connection type.
IP Address
- Display the IP address of the WAN interface.
Default Gateway
- Display the assigned IP address of the default gateway.
IPv6
Address - Display the IPv6 address for LAN.
Scope - Display the scope of IPv6 address. For example, IPv6
Link Local could only be used for direct IPv6 link. It can't be
used for IPv6 internet.
Internet Access Mode – Display the connection mode chosen
for accessing into Internet.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
455
VII-1-2 TR-069
This device supports TR-069 standard. It is very convenient for an administrator to manage a
TR-069 device through an Auto Configuration Server, e.g., VigorACS.
VII-1-2-1 ACS and CPE Settings
Available settings are explained as follows:
456
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Item
Description
Tr069
Click Enable to activate the settings on this page.
ACS Server On
Choose the interface for the router connecting to ACS server.
ACS Server
URL – Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto
Configuration Server) you want to link.

Wizard – Click it to enter the IP address of VigorACS
server, port number and the handler.

Acquire URL form DHCP option 43 – Check the box to
get the URL from DHCP option 43.
Username/Password – Such data must be typed according to
the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link.

Test With Inform – Click it to send a message based on
the event code selection to test if such CPE is able to
communicate with VigorACS SI server.

Event Code – Use the drop down menu to specify an
event to perform the test.
Last Inform Response Time – Display the time that VigorACS
server made a response while receiving Inform message from
CPE last time.
CPE Client
Such information is useful for Auto Configuration Server.
Port – Sometimes, port conflict might be occurred. To solve
such problem, you might change port number for CPE.
Username and Password – Enter the username and password
that VigorACS can use to access into such CPE.
Periodic Inform Settings
Enable – It is the default setting.

Time Interval - Please set interval time or schedule
time for the router to send notification to CPE.
Disable - Click it to close the mechanism of notification.
STUN Settings
Disable - The default is Disable.
Enable - Please type the relational settings listed below:

Server Address – Enter the IP address of the STUN
server.

Server Port – Enter the port number of the STUN
server.

Minimum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the
CPE must send binding request to the server for the
purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway.
Please type a number as the minimum period. The
default setting is “60 seconds”.

Maximum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the
CPE must send binding request to the server for the
purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway.
Please type a number as the maximum period. A value
of “-1” indicates that no maximum period is specified.
Apply Settings to APs
This feature is able to apply TR-069 settings (including STUN
and ACS server settings) to all of APs managed by Vigor2862
at the same time.
Disable – Related settings will not be applied to VigorAP.
Enable – Above STUN settings will be applied to VigorAP after
clicking OK. If such feature is enabled, you have to type the
password for accessing VigorAP.

AP Password – Enter the password of the VigorAP that
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
457
you want to apply Vigor2862’s TR-069 settings.
Specify STUN Settings to APs – If you want to apply specific
STUN settings (not the STUN Settings configured for
Vigor2862) to VigorAPs to meet specific requirements, simply
check this box. Then, enter the server IP address, server
port, minimum keep alive period and maxmum keep alive
period respectively.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
VII-1-2-2 Reporting Configuration
VigorACS server can get the health status of Vigor router with the settings configured in this
page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
458
Item
Description
Health Parameters
Vigor router will send the information related to the health
parameters (e.g., CPU usage, DDoS status, session usage and
etc..) to VigorACS server periodically for reference by the
system administrator.
Simply check the items that you want to inform VigorACS
server.
Threshold for VoIP R-Factor - Set values for Warning and
Critical as the thresholds. Vigor router will inform VigorACS
server when the VoIP quality reaches the threshold.
CPE Notification Settings
CPE Notification Settings - Check the Enable box to
configure the following settings.
Web Login / Web Changed / High Availability - After
checking the box, Vigor device will inform VigorACS server
when the action of web login, the web changed and high
availability performed.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Bandwidth Utilisation - Check the box to enable this
function. To administrator, this feature is useful to monitor
the bandwidth utilization of CPE(s). When the bandwidth
used is over the threshold level (percentage defined in
medium and high fields), a notification will be sent to
VigorACS. After a long time observation, the administrator
can determine if it is necessary to increase the bandwidth
setting for that CPE or not. The default is disabled.

Time Period – Choose the time interval (15 mins, 30
mins, 1hour, 3 hours, or 6 hours) for CPE to send a
notification of bandwidth utilization to VigorACS.

WAN – Choose the WAN interface for applying the
bandwidth utilization notification mechanism.

Threshold Level – Set the percentage of bandwidth in
transmission and receiving data as threshold values for
CPE to detect bandwidth utilization.

Line Speed – Set the transmission rate and receiving
rate for specified WAN interface.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
VII-1-2-3 Export Parameters
The user can export the TR-069 parameters of this device as a file with the extension of XML.
Click Export to save the file.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
459
VII-1-3 Administrator Password
This page allows you to set new password.
Available settings are explained as follows:
460
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Item
Description
Administrator Password
The administrator can login web user interface of Vigor
router to modify all of the settings to fit the requirements.
Old Password - Type in the old password. The factory default
setting for password is “admin”.
New Password – Define the basic password. The length of
the password is limited to 23 characters.
Confirm Password – Enter the basic password again for
confirmation.
Enable ‘admin’ account login to Web UI from the Internet –
It is configurable only when Administrator Local User is
enabled. The default setting is enabled. It can ensure that
any user is able to successfully accesses into web user
interface of Vigor router through Internet by
username/password of “admin/admin”. However, if you
want to prevent the admin account from password attacks by
hackers, disable this function and let local user account
access into the WUI instead.
Use only advanced authentication method for Admin
“WAN” login – Advanced authentication method can offer a
more secure network connection. In general, the above
basic password setting will be used for authentication if such
option is disabled. Simply check the box to enable the
following settings.

Mobile one-Time Password (mOTP) – Click it to use
mOTP as the advanced authentication method. Enter
the PIN code and secret settings for one-time usage.

2-Step Auth code via SMS Profile and/or Mail Profile –
Click it to use authentication code as the advanced
authentication method. The authentication code will
be sent out based on the selected SMS profile and Mail
profile.
Administrator Local User
Usually, the system administrator has the highest privilege to
modify the settings on the web user interface of the Vigor
router. However, in some cases, it might be necessary to
have other users in LAN to access into the web user interface
of Vigor router.
This feature is used to define other users in LAN who can
access into the web user interface with the same privilege as
the administrator.
Enable Local User – Check the box to enable Administrator
Local User setting and define the local user account and
password.

Use only advanced authentication method for Admin
“WAN” login – Advanced authentication method can
offer a more secure network connection. In general,
the above basic password setting will be used for
authentication if such option is disabled. Simply check
the box to enable the following settings.
Local User List – Display the username, authentication
method of the local user.
Specific User – Create the new user account as the local
user. Then specify the authentication method (dividing into
Basic and Advanced) for the user account.
User Name – Enter a user name.

Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Authentication method (Basic) – Vigor router will
461
authenticate the specific user via the local password.
Local Password – Enter the password for the local user.

Administrator LDAP
Setting
Authentication method (Advanced) - Vigor router will
authenticate the specific user via the mOTP or 2-Step
Auth code.
Mobile one-Time Password (mOTP) – Click it to use
mOTP as the advanced authentication method. Enter
the PIN code and secret settings for one-time usage.
2-Step Authentication via SMS Profile and/or Mail
Profile – Click it to use authentication code as the
advanced authentication method. The authentication
code will be sent out based on the selected SMS profile
and Mail profile.
Add – After typing the user name and password above,
simply click it to create a new local user. The new one
will be shown on the Local User List immediately.
Edit – If the username listed on the box above is not
satisfied, simply click the username and modify it on
the field of User Name. Later, click Edit to update the
information.
Delete – If the local user listed on the box above is not
satisfied, simply click the username and click Delete to
remove it.
Enable LDAP/AD login for admin users – If it is enabled, any
user can access into the web user interface of Vigor router
through the LDAP server authentication.
Available profiles will be displayed here under the link of
LDAP Profile Setup. To create a new profile, simply click the
link of LDAP Profiles Setup.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. After logging
out the webuser interface, please use the new password to access into the web user interface
again.
462
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-1-4 User Password
This page allows you to set new password for user operation.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable User Mode for
simple web configuration
After checking this box, you can access into the web user
interface with the password typed here for simple web
configuration.
The settings on simple web user interface will be different
with full web user interface accessed by using the
administrator password.
Password
Type in new password in this field. The length of the
password is limited to 31 characters.
Confirm Password
Type in the new password again.
Password Strength
Display the security strength of the password specified
above.
Set to Factory Default
Click to return to the factory default setting.
When you click OK, the login window will appear. Please use the new password to access into
the web user interface again. Below shows an example for accessing into User Operation with
User Password.
1. Open System Maintenance>>User Password.
2. Check the box of Enable User Mode for simple web configuration to enable user mode
operation. Type a new password in the field of New Password and click OK.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
463
3. The following screen will appear. Simply click OK.
4. Log out Vigor router web user interface by clicking the Logout button.
5. The following window will be open to ask for username and password. Enter the new user
password in the filed of Password and click Login.
464
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
6. The main screen with User Mode will be shown as follows.
Settings to be configured in User Mode will be less than settings in Admin Mode. Only basic
configuration settings will be available in User Mode.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Setting in User Mode can be configured as same as in Admin Mode.
465
VII-1-5 Login Page Greeting
When you want to access into the web user interface of Vigor router, the system will ask you
to offer username and password first. At that moment, the background of the web page is
blank and no heading will be displayed on the Login window. This page allows you to specify
login URL and the heading on the Login window if you have such requirement.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check this box to enable the login customization function.
Login Page Title
Type a brief description (e.g., Welcome to DrayTek) which
will be shown on the heading of the login dialog.
Welcome Message and
Bulletin
Type words or sentences here. It will be displayed for
bulletin message. In addition, it can be displayed on the
login dialog at the bottom.
Note that do not type URL redirect link here.
Preview
Click it to display the preview of the login window based on
the settings on this web page.
Set to Factory Default
Click to return to the factory default setting.
Below shows an example of login customization with the information typed in Login
Description and Bulletin.
466
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
467
VII-1-6 Configuration Backup
Such function can be used to apply the router settings configured by Vigor2925 to Vigor2926.
Backup the Configuration
Follow the steps below to backup your configuration.
1.
Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following page will be
popped-up, as shown below.
Available settings are explained as follows:
468
Item
Description
Restore
Restore settings from a configuration file – Click the Select
File button to specify a file to be restored or click USB
Storage (if a USB storage disk connected) to choose the
configuration file.
Restore configuration except the login password – Check
the box to restore the configuration file except the login
password.
Restore - Click Restore to restore the configuration. If the
file is encrypted, the system will ask you to type the
password to decrypt the configuration file.
Backup
Click it to perform the configuration backup of this router.
Protect with password- For the sake of security, the
configuration file for the router can be encrypted.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide


Password – Type several characters as the password for
encrypting the configuration file.
Confirm Password – Enter the password again for
confirmation.
Auto Backup to USB
storage
The configuration can be stored to a USB connecting to Vigor
router as a backup.
Backup folder – Set the path for downloading.
Periodicity backup – Set the circle duration for backup.
Backup after change configuration – Backup will be
executed whenever the configuration is changed.
Support Model List
Web configuration file from other Vigor router can be
applied to Vigor2926 series. At present, only the
configuration file of Vigor2925 is accepted for Vigor2926.
This field displays model name(s) and firmware which web
configuration file saved can be used by such router.
2.
Click Backup button to get into the following dialog. Click Save button to open another
dialog for saving configuration as a file.
3.
In Save As dialog, the default filename is config.cfg. You could give it another name by
yourself.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
469
4.
Click Save button, the configuration will download automatically to your computer as a
file named config.cfg.
The above example is using Windows platform for demonstrating examples. The Mac or Linux
platform will appear different windows, but the backup function is still available.
Info
Backup for Certification must be done independently. The Configuration
Backup does not include information of Certificate.
Restore Configuration
1.
470
Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following windows will be
popped-up, as shown below.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2.
Click Choose File button to choose the correct configuration file for uploading to the
router.
3.
Click Restore button and wait for few seconds.
VII-1-7 Syslog/Mail Alert
SysLog function is provided for users to monitor router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
SysLog Access Setup
Enable - Check Enable to activate function of syslog.
Syslog Save to – Check Syslog Server to save the log to Syslog
server.
Check USB Disk to save the log to the attached USB storage
disk.
Router Name
Display the name for such router configured in System
Maintenance>>Management.
If there is no name here, simply lick the link to access into
System Maintenance>>Management to set the router name.
Server IP Address / Hostname -The IP address of the Syslog
server.
Destination Port - Assign a port for the Syslog protocol.
Mail Syslog – Check the box to recode the mail event on
Syslog.
Enable syslog message - Check the box listed on this web
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
471
page to send the corresponding message of firewall, VPN,
User Access, Call, WAN, Router/DSL information to Syslog.
Mail Alert Setup
Check Enable to activate function of mail alert.
Send a test e-mail - Make a simple test for the e-mail
address specified in this page. Please assign the mail address
first and click this button to execute a test for verify the mail
address is available or not.
SMTP Server/SMTP Port - The IP address/Port number of the
SMTP server.
Mail To - Assign a mail address for sending mails out.
Return-Path - Assign a path for receiving the mail from
outside.
Use SSL - Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for
some e-mail server uses https as the transmission method.
Authentication - Check this box to activate this function
while using e-mail application.

User Name - Enter the user name for authentication.

Password - Enter the password for authentication.
Enable E-mail Alert - Check the box to send alert message to
the e-mail box while the router detecting the item(s) you
specify here.
Click OK to save these settings.
For viewing the Syslog, please do the following:
472
1.
Just set your monitor PC’s IP address in the field of Server IP Address
2.
Install the Router Tools in the Utility within provided CD. After installation, click on the
Router Tools>>Syslog from program menu.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3.
From the Syslog screen, select the router you want to monitor. Be reminded that in
Network Information, select the network adapter used to connect to the router.
Otherwise, you won’t succeed in retrieving information from the router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
473
VII-1-8 Time and Date
It allows you to specify where the time of the router should be inquired from.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Current System Time
Click Inquire Time to get the current time.
Use Browser Time
Select this option to use the browser time from the remote
administrator PC host as router’s system time.
Use Internet Time
Select to inquire time information from Time Server on the
Internet using assigned protocol.
Time Server
Enter the web site of the time server.
Priority
Choose Auto or IPv6 First as the priority.
Time Zone
Select the time zone where the router is located.
Enable Daylight Saving
Check the box to enable the daylight saving. Such feature is
available for certain area.
Advanced – Click it to open a pop up dialog.
Use the default time setting or set user defined time for your
requirement.
Automatically Update
Interval
474
Select a time interval for updating from the NTP server.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Send NTP Request
Through
Specify a WAN interface to send NTP request for time
synchronization.
Click OK to save these settings.
VII-1-9 SNMP
This page allows you to configure settings for SNMP and SNMPV3 services.
The SNMPv3 is more secure than SNMP through the encryption method (support AES and DES)
and authentication method (support MD5 and SHA) for the management needs.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable SNMP Agent
Check it to enable this function. Then, enable SNMPV1
agent/SNMPV2C agent.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
475
Get Community
Set the name for getting community by typing a proper
character. The default setting is public.
The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.
Set Community
Set community by typing a proper name. The default setting
is private.
The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.
Manager Host IP (IPv4)
Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function.
Please type in IPv4 address to specify certain host.
Manager Host IP (IPv6)
Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function.
Please type in IPv6 address to specify certain host.
Trap Community
Set trap community by typing a proper name. The default
setting is public.
The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.
Notification Host IP (IPv4)
Set the IPv4 address of the host that will receive the trap
community.
Notification Host IP (IPv6)
Set the IPv6 address of the host that will receive the trap
community.
Trap Timeout
The default setting is 10 seconds.
Enable SNMPV3 Agent
Check it to enable this function.
USM User
USM means user-based security mode.
Type a username which will be used for authentication. The
maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.
Auth Algorithm
Choose one of the encryption methods listed below as the
authentication algorithm.
Auth Password
Type a password for authentication. The maximum length of
the text is limited to 23 characters.
Privacy Algorithm
Choose one of the methods listed below as the privacy
algorithm.
Privacy Password
Type a password for privacy. The maximum length of the
text is limited to 23 characters.
Click OK to save these settings.
476
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-1-10 Management
This page allows you to manage the settings for Internet/LAN Access Control, Access List from
Internet, Management Port Setup, TLS/SSL Encryption Setup, CVM Access Control and Device
Management.
The management pages for IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are different.
VII-1-10-1 IPv4 Management Setup
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Router Name
Type in the router name provided by ISP.
Default: Disable
If it is enabled, the function of auto-logout for web user
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
477
Auto-Logout
interface will be disabled.
The web user interface will be open until you click the
Logout icon manually.
478
Enable Validation Code in
Internet/LAN Access
If it is enabled, the mechanism of validation code will be
offered by Vigor router. That is, the client must type
validation code while accessing into Internet or web user
interface of Vigor router.
Internet Access Control
Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox
to allow system administrators to login from the Internet.
There are several servers provided by the system to allow
you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to
specify.
Disable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to
reject all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue,
this function is enabled by default.
Access List from the
Internet
You could specify that the system administrator can only
login from a specific host or network defined in the list. A
maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.
List index in IP Object- Enter the index number of the IP
object profile. Related IP with Subnet Mask will appear
automatically.
Management Port Setup
User Define Ports - Check to specify user-defined port
numbers for the Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, TR-069 and SSH
servers.
Default Ports - Check to use standard port numbers for the
Telnet and HTTP servers.
Brute Force Protection
Any client trying to access into Internet via Vigor router will
be asked for passing through user authentication. Such
feature can prevent Vigor router from attacks when a hacker
tries every possible combination of letters, numbers and
symbols until find out the correct combination of password.
Enable brute force login protection – Enable the protection
mechanism.
Maximum login failure – Specify the maximum number of
wrong password that client can try for logging to Vigor
router.
Penalty period – Set a period of time to block the IP address
which is used (by user or hacker) for passing through the user
authentication again and again but failed always. When the
time is up, Vigor system will unblock that IP and allow it to
access into Vigor router again.
Blocked IP List – Open another web page which displays
current blocked IPs.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
TLS/SSL Encryption Setup
Enable SSL 3.0 and / or TLS 1.0/1.1/1.2 – Check the box to
enable the function of SSL 3.0 and / or TLS 1.0/1.1/1.2 if
required.
Due to security consideration, the built-in HTTPS and SSL
VPN server of the router had upgraded to TLS1.x protocol. If
you are using old browser(eg. IE6.0) or old SmartVPN Client,
you may still need to enable SSL 3.0 to make sure you can
connect, however, it's not recommended.
CVM Access Control
CVM Port – Check the box to enable such port setting.
CVM SSL Port – Check the box to enable such port setting.
AP Management
Enable AP Management – Check it to enable the function of
Central Management>>AP. If unchecked, menu items
related to Central Management>>AP will be hidden.
Device Management
Check the box to enable the device management function for
Vigor2926.
Respond to external device – If it is enabled, Vigor2926 will
be regarded as slave device. When the external device
(master device) sends request packet to Vigor2926,
Vigor2926 would send back information to respond the
request coming from the external device which is able to
manage Vigor2926.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
VII-1-10-2 IPv6 Management Setup
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
479
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Management Access
Control
Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox
to allow system administrators to login from the Internet.
There are several servers provided by the system to allow
you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to
specify.
Disable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to
disable all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue,
this function is enabled by default.
Access List
You could specify that the system administrator can only
login from a specific host or network defined in the list. A
maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.
Index in IPv6 Object- Enter the index number of the IP
object profile. Related IP address will appear automatically.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
VII-1-10-3 LAN Management Setup
Available settings are explained as follows:
480
Item
Description
Allow management from
LAN
Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login
from LAN interface. There are several servers provided by
the system which allow you to manage the router from LAN
interface. Check the box(es) to specify.
Apply To Subnet
Check the LAN interface for the administrator to use for
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
accessing into web user interface of Vigor router.
Index in IP Object- Enter the index number of the IP object
profile. Related IP address will appear automatically.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
VII-1-11 Panel Control
The behavior of the LEDs, buttons, USB ports and LAN ports on the front panel of the Vigor
router can be customized as desired.
VII-1-11-1 LED
By default, the LEDs are enabled, and will illuminate or blink continuously to show the status
of the various functions in the router. However, they can be configured to remain off at all
times, or remain off until a button is pressed to wake them up.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Refresh
Click to refresh the page to display the latest information.
Enable LED
Select to enable front panel LEDs.

Enable Sleep Mode/Turn off LED after _ minutes –
Available when Enable LED is selected. Select this
option to turn off the LEDs after the specified number
of minutes.

When sleep mode is enabled, LEDs can be woken up by
pressing either the Wireless LAN ON/OFF/WPS button
or the Factory Reset button on the front panel, or by
clicking the Wake up LED button on this page. When
LEDs are lit, they can be put to sleep by briefly pressing
the Factory Reset button, or by clicking the LED sleep
immediately button on this page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
481
Status
Shows the status of the LEDs:
– LEDs are in sleep
mode. To wake them up, do one of the following:



press the Wake up LED button on this page
press the Wireless On/Off/WPS button on the front
panel
press the Factory Reset button on the front panel.
– LEDs are awake. To put them to sleep immediately


press the LED sleep immediately button on this page
press the Factory Reset button on the front panel for 1
second.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
VII-1-11-2 Button
The Factory Reset and Wireless ON/OFF/WPS buttons on the front panel are enabled by
default and can be enabled or disabled if required. Disabling the Factory Reset button will
prevent tampering by unauthorized parties, or to avoid accidental triggering of a router reset
when being used wake up LEDs. Disabling the wireless button will prevent changing the
wireless setting when LED Sleep Mode is enabled, and the buttons are primarily used to turn
the LEDs on and off.
Click the Button tab to get the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
482
Item
Description
Refresh
Click to refresh the page to display the latest information.
Enable Factory Reset
Button
The default value is Enabled.
Deselect to disable the reset function of the factory reset
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
button.
Disabling the Factory Reset button only prevents it from
being used to reboot Vigor router with default settings. It
can still be used to wake up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is
enabled.
Enable Wireless Button
The default value is Enabled.
Deselect to disable the ability of the Wireless button to
control WLAN and WPS functions.
Disabling the wireless button only prevents it from being
used to control WLAN functions. It can still be used to wake
up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is enabled.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
VII-1-11-3 USB
The USB ports can be individually enabled or disabled. When a USB port is disabled, attached
devices will not be recognized by the router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Refresh
Click to refresh the page to display the latest information.
Port
The number corresponds to the USB port number shown on
the front panel.
Enable
Deselect to disable the USB port. The default value is
enabled.
Status
Shows the status of the USB port.
No device – no USB device is connected to the port.
Connected – a USB device is connected to the port.
--- – the USB port is disabled.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
VII-1-11-4 LAN Port
The 4 LAN ports can be individually enabled or disabled. When a LAN port is disabled,
attached devices will not be recognized by the router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
483
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Refresh
Click to refresh the page to display the latest information.
Port
The number corresponds to the LAN port number shown on
the front panel.
Enable
Deselect to disable the LAN port. The default value is
enabled.
Status
Shows the status of the LAN port.
Link Up – An active Ethernet device is connected to the port.
Link Down – No active Ethernet device is detected.
--- – The LAN port is disabled.
Speed
Shows the negotiated speed of the LAN port.
1000Mbps – Negotiated speed of the LAN port is 1000 Mbps.
100Mbps – Negotiated speed of the LAN port is 100 Mbps.
10Mpbs – Negotiated speed of the LAN port is 10 Mbps.
--- – The LAN port is disabled or there is no active device
connected.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
VII-1-12 Self-Signed Certificate
A self-signed certificate is a unique identification for the device (e.g., Vigor router) which
generates the certificate by itself to ensure the router security. Such self-signed certificate is
signed with its own private key.
The self-signed certificate will be applied in SSL VPN, HTTPS, and so on. In addition, it can be
created for free by using a wide variety of tools.
484
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Click Regeneration to open Regenerate Self-Signed Certificate window. Type in all the
information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different
certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then
click GENERATE.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
485
VII-1-13 Reboot System
The Web user interface may be used to restart your router. Click Reboot System from System
Maintenance to open the following page.
Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule for performing system reboot.
All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use
the number that you have set in that web page.
If you want to reboot the router using the current configuration, check Using current
configuration and click Reboot Now. To reset the router settings to default values, check
Using factory default configuration and click Reboot Now. The router will take 5 seconds to
reboot the system.
Info
486
When the system pops up Reboot System web page after you configure web
settings, please click Reboot Now to reboot your router for ensuring normal
operation and preventing unexpected errors of the router in the future.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-1-14 Firmware Upgrade
Click System Maintenance>> Firmware Upgrade to proceed to firmware upgrade.
Click the button of Check The Latest Firmware to open a pop up window displaying the
newest firmware version released for such Vigor router.
Choose the one you need and click Download. After that, click Select to specify the one you
just download. Then, click Upgrade. The system will upgrade the firmware of the router
automatically.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
487
VII-1-15 Firmware Backup
The firware for Vigor router can be saved on the host as a backup firmware. After that, if the
router crashes due to the firmware error, the backup firmware will be applied to make the
router run normally.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Automatic Firmware
Recovery
Enable automatic firmware recovery - Vigor router will be
recovered with the backup firmware automatically once
failed to reboot for three times.
Backup Setting
Backup after reboot - Current firmware will be backup after
rebooting Vigor router.
Backup after system running - Perform the firmware backup
after a period of time.
Backup manually - Click this option and click OK, firmware
backup will be performed immediately.
Firmware Version - Display recent firmware backup version.
Last backup - Display the time of recent firmware backup.
Simply specify the condition to run the firmware backup and click OK to save the settings.
488
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
V II- 1 - 1 6 A c tiv a tio n
There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by
means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.
After you have finished the setting profiles for WCF (refer to Web Content Filter Profile), it is
the time to activate the mechanism for your computer.
Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page for accessing
http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Activate via Interface
Choose WAN interface used by such device for activating
Web Content Filter.
Activate
The Activate link brings you accessing into
www.vigorpro.com to finish the activation of the account
and the router.
Authentication Message
As for authentication information of web filter, the process
of authenticating will be displayed on this field for your
reference.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
489
Below shows the successful activation of Web Content Filter:
490
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-1-17 Internal Service User List
User profiles (clients) defined and enabled in User Management>>User Profile will be
displayed in this page.
Such page allows you to turn on or turn off security authentication service (offered by inernal
RADIUS and/or Local 802.1X) for each user profile without accessing into the User
Management configuration page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
User Name
Display the name of the existed user profile. To modify the
detailed settings, simply click the user name link to access
into the web page for modification.
Radius
Check the box to turn on the security authentication service
offered by internal RADIUS server for the user profile.
Uncheck the box to turn off ecurity authentication service
offered by internal RADIUS server for the user profile.
If you check the box next to such item, all of the user profiles
listed in this page will be enabled with RADIUS service
enabled vice versa.
Local 802.1X
Check the box to turn on the security authentication service
offered by Local 802.1X server for the user profile.
Uncheck the box to turn off ecurity authentication service
offered by Local 802.1X server for the user profile.
If you check the box next to such item, all of the user profiles
listed in this page will be enabled with Local 802.1X service
enabled; vice versa.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
For the detailed setting (such as IP address, port number) configuration of
internal RADIUS, refer to Applications>>RADIUS/TACACS+.
For the detailed setting (such as IP address, port number) configuration of
Local 802.1X, refer to LAN>>Wired 802.1X and Wireless LAN>>Security.
491
VII-1-18 Dashboard Control
There are nine groups of setting information which can be displayed on Dashboard as a
reference for administrator/user. Except for Front Panel and System Information, the settings
information regarding to the groups listed on this page can be hidden if required.
492
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-2 Bandwidth Management
Sessions Limit
A PC with private IP address can access to the Internet via NAT router. The router will
generate the records of NAT sessions for such connection. The P2P (Peer to Peer) applications
(e.g., BitTorrent) always need many sessions for procession and also they will occupy over
resources which might result in important accesses impacted. To solve the problem, you can
use limit session to limit the session procession for specified Hosts.
Bandwidth Limit
The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of
bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Limit Bandwidth to
make the bandwidth usage more efficient.
Quality of Service (QoS)
Deploying QoS (Quality of Service) management to guarantee that all applications receive the
service levels required and sufficient bandwidth to meet performance expectations is indeed
one important aspect of modern enterprise network.
One reason for QoS is that numerous TCP-based applications tend to continually increase their
transmission rate and consume all available bandwidth, which is called TCP slow start. If
other applications are not protected by QoS, it will detract much from their performance in
the overcrowded network. This is especially essential to those are low tolerant of loss, delay
or jitter (delay variation).
Another reason is due to congestions at network intersections where speeds of
interconnected circuits mismatch or traffic aggregates, packets will queue up and traffic can
be throttled back to a lower speed. If there’s no defined priority to specify which packets
should be discarded (or in another term “dropped”) from an overflowing queue, packets of
sensitive applications mentioned above might be the ones to drop off. How this will affect
application performance?
There are two components within Primary configuration of QoS deployment:

Classification: Identifying low-latency or crucial applications and marking them for
high-priority service level enforcement throughout the network.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
493

Scheduling: Based on classification of service level to assign packets to queues and
associated service types
The basic QoS implementation in Vigor routers is to classify and schedule packets based on
the service type information in the IP header. For instance, to ensure the connection with the
headquarter, a teleworker may enforce an index of QoS Control to reserve bandwidth for
HTTPS connection while using lots of application at the same time.
One more larger-scale implementation of QoS network is to apply DSCP (Differentiated
Service Code Point) and IP Precedence disciplines at Layer 3. Compared with legacy IP
Precedence that uses Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP header to define 8 service classes,
DSCP is a successor creating 64 classes possible with backward IP Precedence compatibility. In
a QoS-enabled network, or Differentiated Service (DiffServ or DS) framework, a DS domain
owner should sign a Service License Agreement (SLA) with other DS domain owners to define
the service level provided toward traffic from different domains. Then each DS node in these
domains will perform the priority treatment. This is called per-hop-behavior (PHB). The
definition of PHB includes Expedited Forwarding (EF), Assured Forwarding (AF), and Best
Effort (BE). AF defines the four classes of delivery (or forwarding) classes and three levels of
drop precedence in each class.
Vigor routers as edge routers of DS domain shall check the marked DSCP value in the IP header
of bypassing traffic, to allocate certain amount of resource execute appropriate policing,
classification or scheduling. The core routers in the backbone will do the same checking
before executing treatments in order to ensure service-level consistency throughout the
whole QoS-enabled network.
However, each node may take different attitude toward packets with high priority marking
since it may bind with the business deal of SLA among different DS domain owners. It’s not
easy to achieve deterministic and consistent high-priority QoS traffic throughout the whole
network with merely Vigor router’s effort.
494
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
Below shows the menu items for Bandwidth Management.
VII-2-1 Sessions Limit
In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Sessions Limit to open the web page.
To activate the function of limit session, simply click Enable and set the default session limit.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Session Limit
Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit
session.
Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit
session.
Default session limit - Defines the default session number
used for each computer in LAN.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
495
Limitation List
Displays a list of specific limitations that you set on this web
page.
Specific Limitation
Start IP- Defines the start IP address for limit session.
End IP - Defines the end IP address for limit session.
Maximum Sessions - Defines the available session number
for each host in the specific range of IP addresses. If you do
not set the session number in this field, the system will use
the default session limit for the specific limitation you set for
each index.
Add - Adds the specific session limitation onto the list above.
Edit - Allows you to edit the settings for the selected
limitation.
Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the
limitation list.
Administration Message
Enter the words which will be displayed when reaches the
maximum number of Internet sessions permitted.
Default Message - Click this button to apply the default
message offered by the router.
Time Schedule
Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule
for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in
Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the
number that you have set in that web page.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
496
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-2-2 Bandwidth Limit
In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Bandwidth Limit to open the web page.
To activate the function of limit bandwidth, simply click Enable and set the default upstream
and downstream limit.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Click this button to activate the function of limit bandwidth.
IP Routed Subnet – Check this box to apply the bandwidth
limit to the second subnet specified in LAN>>General Setup.
It is available for IPv4 settings only.
Default limit (Per User)

TX LImit - Define the default speed of the upstream for
each computer in LAN.

RX limit - Define the default speed of the downstream
for each computer in LAN.
Disable
Click this button to close the function of limit bandwidth.
Limitation List
Display a list of specific limitations that you set on this web
page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
497
Add Entry By
IP Range - All the IPs within the range defined will be
restricted by bandwidth limit defined by TX Limit and RX
Limit below.

Start IP - Define the start IP address for limit
bandwidth.

End IP - Define the end IP address for limit bandwidth.
IP Object - All the IPs specified by the selected IP object or
IP group will be restricted by bandwith limit defined by TX
Limit and RX Limit below.
IP Group – Specify an IP group by using the drop down
list.

IP Object - Specify an IP object by using the drop down
list.
Each / Shared - Select Each to make each IP within the range
of Start IP and End IP having the same speed defined in TX
limit and RX limit fields; select Shared to make all the IPs
within the range of Start IP and End IP share the speed
defined in TX limit and RX limit fields.

TX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the
system will use the default speed for the specific
limitation you set for each index.

RX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the
system will use the default speed for the specific
limitation you set for each index.
Add - Add the specific speed limitation onto the list above.
Edit - Allow you to edit the settings for the selected
limitation.
Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the
limitation list.

498
Auto-Adjustment
Allow user to use more bandwidth …- Check this box to
make the best utilization of available bandwidth.
Smart Bandwidth Limit
Apply the below limit to ... - Check this box to have the
bandwidth limit determined by the system automatically.

TX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the
system will use the default speed for the specific
limitation you set for each index.

RX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the
system will use the default speed for the specific
limitation you set for each index.
Time Schedule
Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule
for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in
Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the
number that you have set in that web page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-2-3 Quality of Service
In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Quality of Service to open the web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
General Setup
Index – Display the WAN/LTE interface number link that you
can edit.
Enable – Check the box to enable the QoS function for
WAN/LTE interface. If it is enabled, you can configure general
QoS setting for each WAN/LTE interface.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide

Direction –Define which traffic the QoS Control settings
will apply to.

IN- apply to incoming traffic only.

OUT-apply to outgoing traffic only.

BOTH- apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.

Inbound/Outbound Bandwidth –Set the connecting
rate of data input/output for other WAN. For example, if
your ADSL supports 1M of downstream and 256K
upstream, please set 1000kbps for this box. The default
value is 10000kbps.

Class 1 ~ 3 / Others –Define the ratio of bandwidth to
upstream speed and bandwidth to downstream speed.
There are four queues allowed for QoS control. The first
three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for
your necessity. In which, the “Others” field is used for
499
Item
Description
the packets which are not suitable for the three class
rules.
Status – Display the online statistics of WAN interface.
Class Rule
Set detailed settings for the selected Class.
Index – Display the class number that you can edit.
Enable - Display the status of this class rule.
QoS Class - Display the QoS class level.
Local Address - Display the local IP address for the rule.
Remote Address - Display the remote IP address for the rule.
DSCP - Display the levels of the data for processing with QoS
control.
Service Type – Display detailed settings for the service type.
Add - Click it to create a class rule for QoS.
VoIP Prioritization
Enable the First Priority for VoIP SIP/RTP - When this feature
is enabled, the VoIP SIP/UDP packets will be sent with highest
priority.
SIP UDP Port – Set a port number used for SIP.
Tag Outbound Traffic
Add DSCP or Precedence Value for Class 1 to Class 3 - Check
the box to add DSCP or Precedence value to Class 1 to Class 3.
This page displays the QoS settings result of the WAN interface. Click the Setup link to access
into next page for the general setup of WAN interface. As to class rule, simply click the Edit
link to access into next for configuration.
You can configure general setup for the WAN interface, edit the Class Rule, and edit the
Service Type for the Class Rule for your request.
Online Statistics
Click the Status link to display an online statistics for quality of service for your reference.
This feature is available only when the Quality of Service for WAN interface is enabled.
500
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
General Setup for WAN Interface
Click WAN/LTE interface number link to configure the limited bandwidth ratio for QoS of the
WAN interface.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable UDP Bandwidth
Control
Set the limited bandwidth ratio. This is a protection of TCP
application traffic since UDP application traffic such as
streaming video will exhaust lots of bandwidth.
Limited_bandwidth Ratio - The ratio typed here is reserved
for limited bandwidth of UDP application.
Outbound TCP ACK
Prioritize
The difference in bandwidth between download and upload
are great in ADSL2+ environment. For the download speed
might be impacted by the uploading TCP ACK, you can check
this box to push ACK of upload faster to speed the network
traffic.
Info
The rate of outbound/inbound must be smaller than the real bandwidth to
ensure correct calculation of QoS. It is suggested to set the bandwidth value
for inbound/outbound as 80% - 85% of physical network speed provided by
ISP to maximize the QoS performance.
Edit the Class Rule for QoS
1.
The first three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for your necessity. To add,
edit or delete the class rule, please click the Add button / Edit button of that one.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
501
2.
For adding a new rule, click Add to open the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
502
Item
Description
Enable
Check this box to invoke these settings.
Ethernet Type
Please specify which protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) will be used for
this rule.
IP Version
Please specify which protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) will be used for
this rule.
Local IP Address
Click the Edit button to set the local IP address (on LAN) for
the rule.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Remote IP Address
Click the Edit button to set the remote IP address (on
LAN/WAN) for the rule.
Address Type – Determine the address type for the source
address.
For Single Address, you have to fill in Start IP address.
For Range Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and
End IP address.
For Subnet Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and
Subnet Mask.
3.
DiffServ CodePoint
All the packets of data will be divided with different levels
and will be processed according to the level type by the
system. Please assign one of the levels of the data for
processing with QoS control.
Service Type
It determines the service type of the data for processing with
QoS control. It can also be edited. You can choose the
predefined service type from the Service Type drop down
list. Those types are predefined in factory. Simply choose the
one that you want for using by current QoS.
QoS Class
Specify the QoS class (1, 2 or 3) for this rule.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
503
You can set up to 20 rules for one Class. If you want to edit an existed rule, please select the
radio button of that one and click Edit to open the rule edit page for modification.
Retag the Packets for Identification
Packets coming from LAN IP can be retagged through QoS setting. When the packets sent out
through WAN interface, all of them will be tagged with certain header and that will be easily
to be identified by server on ISP.
For example, in the following illustration, the VoIP packets in LAN go into Vigor router
without any header. However, when they go forward to the Server on ISP through Vigor router,
all of the packets are tagged with AF (configured in Bandwidth >>QoS>>Class) automatically.
504
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-2-4 APP QoS
The QoS function is used to do bandwidth management for the services with certain IP or port
number. However, there is no effect of bandwidth management on the service such as VNC or
PPTV without fixed IP or port number.
APP QoS employs the function of APP Enforcement to detect the types of software in
application layer. By combining the function of QoS (adjustment on Inbound/Outbond
bandwidth and bandwidth ratio), Vigor router can perform the bandwidth management for
the protocols, streaming, remote control, web HD and so on.
Click Bandwidth Management>>APP QoS to open the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable/Disable
Click Enable to activate APP QoS function.
Click Disable to deactivate APP QoS function.
Traceable
The protocol listed below is traceable by Vigor router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
505
Each tab offers different types of protocols to fit your
request.
Untraceable
The protocol listed below is not easy to be traced by Vigor
router.
Each tab offers different types of protocols to fit your
request.
Select All
Click it to select all of the protocols.
Clear All
Click it to de-select all of the protocols.
Apply to all
Choose one of the actions from the drop down list. It is
prepared for applying to all protocols.
Apply – Click it to make the selected action be applied all of
the selected protocols immediately.
Action
506
There are many protocols which can be specified with
different QoS Class.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-3 User Management
User Management is a security feature which disallows any IP traffic (except DHCP-related
packets) from a particular host until that host has correctly supplied a valid username and
password. Instead of managing with IP address/MAC address, User Management function
manages hosts with user account. Network administrator can give different firewall policies
or rules for different hosts with different User Management accounts. This is more flexible
and convenient for network management. Not only offering the basic checking for Internet
access, User Management also provides additional firewall rules, e.g. CSM checking for
protecting hosts.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Filter rules configured under Firewall usually are applied to the host (the
one that the router installed) only. With user management, the rules can be
applied to every user connected to the router with customized profiles.
507
Web User Interface
VII-3-1 General Setup
General Setup can determine the standard (rule-based or user-based) for the users controlled
by User Management. The mode (standard) selected here will influence the contents of the
filter rule(s) applied to every user.
Available settings are explained as follows:
508
Item
Description
Mode
There are two modes offered here for you to choose. Each
mode will bring different filtering effect to the users
involved.
User-Based - If you choose such mode, the router will apply
the filter rules configured in User Management>>User
Profile to the users.
Rule-Based –If you choose such mode, the router will apply
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
the filter rules configured in Firewall>>General Setup and
Filter Rule to the users.
Authentication page
Web Authentication - Choose the protocol for web
authentication.
Login Page Logo – A logo which can be used as an
identification of enterprise can be uploaded and displayed
on the login page. You can use the default one, blank page or
upload other image files (the size no mare than 524 × 352
pixel) to have an image of enterprise or have the effect of
advertisement.
Login Page Greeting - Such link allows you to access into the
setting page for login greeting. For detailed information,
refer to System Maintenance>>Login Page Greeting.
Display IP Address on … – Check the box to display the IP
address of the client on the tracking window.
Landing Page
Enter the information to be displayed on the first web page
when the LAN user accessing into Internet via such router.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
509
VII-3-2 User Profile
This page allows you to set customized profiles (up to 200) which will be applied for users
controlled under User Management. Simply open User Management>>User Profile.
To set the user profile, please click any index number link to open the following page. Notice
that profile 1 (admin) and profile 2 (Dial-In User) are factory default settings. Profile 2 is
reserved for future use.
510
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Common Settings
Enable this account
Check this box to enable such user profile.
Username
Type a name for such user profile (e.g., LAN_User_Group_1,
WLAN_User_Group_A, WLAN_User_Group_B, etc). When a
user tries to access Internet through this router, an
authentication step must be performed first. The user has to
type the User Name specified here to pass the
authentication. When the user passes the authentication,
he/she can access Internet via this router. However the
accessing operation will be restricted with the conditions
configured in this user profile.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 24
characters.
Password
Type a password for such profile (e.g., lug123,
wug123,wug456, etc). When a user tries to access Internet
through this router, an authentication step must be
performed first. The user has to type the password specified
here to pass the authentication. When the user passes the
authentication, he/she can access Internet via this router
with the limitation configured in this user profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
511
The maximum length of the password you can set is 24
characters.
Confirm Password
Enter the password again for confirmation.
Idle Timeout
If the user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the
network connection will be stopped for such user. By
default, the Idle Timeout is set to 10 minutes.
Max User Login
Such profile can be used by many users. You can set the
limitation for the number of users accessing Internet with
the conditions of such profile. The default setting is 0 which
means no limitation in the number of users.
Policy
It is available only when User-Based mode selected in User
Management>>General Setup.
Default – If you choose such item, the filter rules
pre-configured in Firewall can be adopted for such user
profile.
Create New Policy – If you choose such item, the following
page will be popped up for you to define another filter rule
as a new policy.
For the detailed configuration, simply refer to
Firewall>>Filter Rule. The firewall filter rules that are not
selected in Firewall>>General>>Default rule can be
available for use in User Management>>User Profile.
External Service
Authentication
The router will authenticate the dial-in user by itself or by
external service such as LDAP server or Radius server or
TACACS+ server. If LDAP, Radius or TACACS+ is selected
here, it is not necessary to configure the password setting
above.
Login Settings
Allow Authentication via
512
Any user (from LAN side or WLAN side) tries to connect to
Internet via Vigor router must be authenticated by the router
first. There are three ways offered by the router for the user
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
to choose for authentication.
Web – If it is selected, the user can Enter the URL of the
router from any browser. Then, a login window will be
popped up and ask the user to Enter the user name and
password for authentication. If succeed, a Welcome
Message (configured in User Management >> General
Setup) will be displayed. After authentication, the
destination URL (if requested by the user) will be guided
automatically by the router.
Alert Tool – If it is selected, the user can open Alert Tool and
Enter the user name and password for authentication. A
window with remaining time of connection for such user will
be displayed. Next, the user can access Internet through any
browser on Windows. Note that Alert Tool can be
downloaded from DrayTek web site.
Telnet – If it is selected, the user can use Telnet command to
perform the authentication job.
Show Landing Page After
Login
When a user tries to access into the web user interface of
Vigor router series with the user name and password
specified in this profile, he/she will be lead into the web
page configured in Landing Page field in User
Management>>General Setup.
Check this box to enable such function.
Idle Timeout
If the user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the
network connection will be stopped for such user. By
default, the Idle Timeout is set to 10 minutes.
Auto Logout After
Such account will be forced to logout after a certain time set
here.
Pop up Time-Tracking
Window
If such function is enabled, a pop up window will be
displayed on the screen with time remaining for connection
if Idle Timeout is set. However, the system will update the
time periodically to keep the connection always on. Thus,
Idle Timeout will not interrupt the network connection.
Login Permission Schedule
You can Enter four sets of time schedule for your request. All
the schedules can be set previously in Applications >>
Schedule web page and you can use the number that you
have set in that web page.
Policy
Max. Login Devices
Such profile can be used by many users. You can set the
limitation for the number of users accessing Internet with
the conditions of such profile. The default setting is 0 which
means no limitation in the number of users.
Enable Time Quota
Time quota means the total connection time allowed by the
router for the user with such profile. Check the box to enable
the function of time quota. The first box displays the
remaining time of the network connection. The second box
allows to Enter the number of time (unit is minute) which is
available for the user (using such profile) to access Internet.
– Click this box to set and increase the time quota for
such profile.
– Click this box to decrease the time quota for such
profile.
Note: A dialog will be popped up to notify how many
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
513
time remained when a user accesses into Internet
through Vigor router successfully.
When the time is up, all the connection jobs including
network, IM, social media, facebook, and etc. will be
terminated.
Enable Data Quota
Data Quota means the total amount for data transmission
allowed for the user. The unit is MB/GB.
– Click this box to set and increase the data quota for
such profile.
– Click this box to decrease the data quota for such
profile.
Reset Quota Automatically
To
Check the box to set default time quota and data quota for
such profile. Vigor router will reset the quota automatically
according to the factory quota settings.
Time Limit – Enter the value for the time manually.
Data Limit – Enter the value for the data manually.
Login Permission Schedule Ends - When the scheduling time
is up, the router will reset the quota with user-defined
time/data values automatically.
Schedule – The router will reset the quota with user-defined
time/data values at the starting time configured in the
selected schedule profile.
Other Services
Log
Time of login/log out, block/unblock for the user(s) can be
sent to and displayed in Syslog. Please choose any one of the
log items to take down relational records for the user(s).
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
514
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-3-3 User Group
This page allows you to bind several user profiles into one group. These groups will be used in
Firewall>>General Setup as part of filter rules.
Please click any index number link to open the following page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for this user group.
Available User Objects
You can gather user profiles (objects) from User Profile page
within one user group. All the available user objects that you
have created will be shown in this box. Notice that user
object, Admin and Dial-In User are factory settings. User
defined profiles will be numbered with 3, 4, 5 and so on.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
515
Selected Keyword Objects
Click
box.
button to add the selected user objects in this
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
VII-3-4 User Online Status
This page displays the user(s) connected to the router and refreshes the connection status in
an interval of several seconds.
Available settings are explained as follows:
516
Item
Description
Refresh Seconds
Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of
refreshing data flow that will be done by the system
automatically.
Refresh
Click this link to refresh this page manually.
Index
Display the number of the data flow.
User
Display the users which connect to Vigor router currently.
You can click the link under the username to open the user
profile setting page for that user.
IP Address
Display the IP address of the device.
Profile
Display the authority of the account.
Last Login Time
Display the login time that such user connects to the router
last time.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Expired Time
Display the expired time of the network connection for the
user.
Data Quota
Display the quota for data transmission.
Idle Time
Display the idle timeout setting for such profile.
Action
Block - can avoid specified user accessing into Internet.
Unblock – allow the user to access into Internet.
Logout – the user will be logged out forcefully.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
517
Application Notes
A-1 How to authenticate clients via User Management
Before using the function of User Management, please make sure User-Based has been
selected as the Mode in the User Management>>General Setup page.
With User Management authentication function, before a valid username and password have
been correctly supplied, a particular client will not be allowed to access Internet through the
router. There are three ways for authentication: Web, Telnet and Alert Tool.
Authentication via Web

If a LAN client who hasn’t passed the authentication opens an external web site in his
browser, he will be redirected to the router’s Web authentication interface first. Then,
the client is trying to access http://www.draytek.com and but brought to the Vigor
router. Since this is an SSL connection, some web browsers will display warning
messages.

518
With Microsoft Internet Explorer, you may get the following warning message.
Please press Continue to this website (not recommended).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide

Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
With Mozilla Firefox, you may get the following warning message. Select I
Understand the Risks.
519

With Chrome browser, you may get the following warning. Click Proceed
anyway.
After that, the web authentication window will appear. Input the user name and the
password for your account (defined in User Management) and click Login.
If the authentication is successful, the client will be redirected to the original web site
that he tried to access. In this example, it is http://www.draytek.com . Furthermore, you
will get a popped up window as the following. Then you can access the Internet.
520
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Note, if you block the web browser to pop up any window, you will not see such window.
If the authentication is failed, you will get the error message, The username or password
you entered is incorrect. Please login again.

In above description, you access an external web site to trigger the authentication. You
may also directly access the router’s Web UI for authentication. Both HTTP and HTTPS
are supported, for example http://192.168.1.1 or https://192.168.1.1 . Replace
192.168.1.1 with your router’s real IP address, and add the port number if the default
management port has been modified.
If the authentication is successful, you will get the Welcome Message that is set in the
User Management >> General Setup page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
521
With the default setup <body stats=1><script language='javascript'>
window.location='http://www.draytek.com'</script></body>, you will be redirected to
http://www.draytek.com . You may change it if you want. For example, you will get the
following welcome message if you enter Login Successful in the Welcome Message table.
Also you will get a Tracking Window if you don’t block the pop-up window.

522
Don’t setup a user profile in User Management and a VPN Remote Dial-in user profile
with the same Username. Otherwise, you may get unexpected result. It is because the
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VPN Remote Dial-in User profiles can be extended to the User profiles in User
Management for authentication.
There are two different behaviors when a User Management account and a VPN profile
share the same Username:

If SSL Tunnel or SSL Web Proxy is enabled in the VPN profile, the user profile in
User Management will always be invalid for Web authentication. For example, if
you create a user profile in User Management with chaochen/test as
username/password, while a VPN Remote Dial-in user profile with the same
username “chaochen” but a different password “1234”, you will always get error
message The username or password you entered is incorrect when you use
chaochen/test via Web to do authentication.

If SSL Tunnel or SSL Web Proxy is disabled in the VPN profile, a User
Management account and a remote dial-in VPN profile can use the same
Username, even with different passwords. However, we recommend you to use
different usernames for different user profiles in User Management and VPN
profiles.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
523
Authentication via Telnet
The LAN clients can also authenticate their accounts via telnet.
1.
Telnet to the router’s LAN IP address and input the account name for the
authentication:
2.
Enter the password for authentication and press Enter. The message User login
successful will be displayed with the expired time (if configured).
Info
3.
524
Here expired time is “Unlimited” means the Time Quota function is not
enabled for this account. After login, this account will not be expired
until it is logout.
In the Web interface of router, the configuration page of Time Quota is shown as below.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
4.
If the Time Quota is set with “0” minute, you will get the following message which
means this account has no time quota.
If the Time Quota is enabled and time is not 0 minute,
You will get the following message. The expired time is shown after you login.
After you run out the available time, you can’t use this account any more until the
administrator manually adds additional time for you.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
525
Authentication via VigorPro Alert Notice Tool
Authentication via Web or Telnet is convenient for users; however, it has some limitations.
The most advantage with VigorPro Alert Notice Tool to operate the authentication is the
ability to do auto login. If the timeout value set on the router for the user account has been
reached, the router will stop the client computer from accessing the Internet until it does an
authentication again. Authentication via VigorPro Alert Notice Tool allows user to setup the
re-authentication interval so that the utility will send authentication requests periodically.
This will keep the client hosts from having to manually authenticate again and again.
The configuration of the VigorPro Alert Notice Tool is as follows:
526
1.
Click Authenticate Now!! to start the authentication immediately.
2.
You may get the VigorPro Alert Notice Tool from the following link:
http://www.draytek.com/user/SupportDLUtility.php
Info 1
Any modification to the Firewall policy will break down the
connections of all current users. They all have to authenticate again
for Internet access.
Info 2
The administrator may check the current users from User Online
Status page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
A-2 How to use Landing Page Feature
Landing Page is a special feature configured under User Management. It can specify the
message, content to be seen or specify which website to be accessed into when users try to
access into the Internet by passing the authentication. Here, we take Vigor2926 series router
as an example.
Example 1:Users can see the message for landing page after logging into Internet
successfully
1.
Open the web user interface of Vigor2926.
2.
Open User Management -> General Setup to get the following page. In the field of
Landing Page, please type the words of “Login Success”. Please note that the
maximum number of characters to be typed here is 255.
3.
Now you can enable the Landing Page function. Open User Management -> User Profile
and click one of the index number (e.g., index number 3) links.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
527
528
4.
In the following page, check the box of Landing page and click OK to save the settings.
5.
Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and
asks for username and password. Please type the correct username and password.
6.
Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will see the message of Login Success from
the browser you use.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Example 2:The system will connect to http://www.draytek.com automatically after
logging into Internet successfully
1.
In the field of Landing Page, please type the words as below:
“ <body stats=1><script language='javascript'>
window.location='http://www.draytek.com'</script></body>”
2.
Next, enable the Landing Page function. Open User Management -> User Profile and
click one of the index number (e.g., index number 3) links.
3.
In the following page, check the box of Landing page and click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
529
4.
530
Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and
asks for username and password. Please type the correct username and password.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
5.
Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will be directed into the website of
www.draytek.com.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
531
VII-4 Hotspot Web Portal
The Hotspot Web Portal feature allows you to set up profiles so that LAN users could either be
redirected to specific URLs, or be shown messages when they first connect to the Internet
through the router. Users could be required to read and agree to terms and conditions, or
authenticate themselves, prior to gaining access to the Internet. Other potential uses include
the serving of advertisements and promotional materials, and broadcast of public service
announcements.
Web User Interface
VII-4-1 Profile Setup
Select Profile Setup to create or modify Portal profiles. Up to 4 profiles can be created to
meet different requirements according to LAN subnets, WLAN SSIDs, origin and destination IP
addresses, etc.
Available settings are explained as follows:
532
Item
Description
Index
Click the index number link to view or update the profile
settings.
Enable
Check the box to enable the profile.
Comments
Shows the description of the profile.
Login Mode
Shows the login mode used by the profile. See the section
Login Mode for details.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Applied Interface
Shows the interfaces to which this profile applies.
Preview
Click this button to preview the Hotspot Web Portal page that
will be displayed to users.
VII-4-1-1 Login Method
There are four login methods to choose from for authenticating network clients: Skip Login,
Click Through, Social Login, PIN Login, and Social or PIN Login. Each login mode will present
a different web page to users when they connect to the network.
(A) Skip Login, landing page only
This mode does not perform any authentication. The user will be redirected to the landing
page. The user can then leave the landing page to visit other websites.
(B) Click-through
The following page will be shown to the users when they first attempt to access the Internet
through the router. After clicking Accept on the page, users will be directed to the landing
page (defined in Captive Portal URL) and be granted access to the Internet.
(C) Various Hotspot Login
An authentication page will appear when users attempt to access the Internet for the first
time via the router. After authenticating themselves using a Facebook account, Google
account, PIN code, password for RADIUS sever, they will be directed to the landing page and
be granted access to the Internet.
(D) External Portal Server
External RADIUS server will authenticate the users when they attempt to access the Internet
for the first time via the router.
VII-4-1-2 Steps for Configuring a Web Portal Profile
Login Method
Click the index link (e.g., #1) of the selected profile to display the following page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
533
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable this profile
Check to enable this profile.
Comments
Enter a brief description to identify this profile.
Portal Server
Portal Method
There are four methods to be selected as for portal server.
When Skip Loging, landing page only or Click through is selected as Portal Method
Captive Portal URL
Enter the captive portal URL.
When Various Hotspot Login is selected as Portal Method
534
Captive Portal URL
Enter the captive portal URL.
Login Methods
This setting is available when Various Hotspot Login is selected as
the portal method.
Choose Login Method - Select one or more desired login methods.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide





Login with Facebook
Login with Google
Receive PIN via SMS
PIN with Voucher
Login with RADIUS
Facebook
(Login with
Facebook)
This setting is available when Login with Facebook is selected as
the login method.
Facebook APP ID - Enter a valid Facebook developer app ID.
If you do not already have an app ID, refer to section A-1 How to
create a Facebook App ID for Web Portal Authentication for
instructions on obtaining an APP ID.
Facebook APP Secret - Enter the secret configured for the APP ID
entered above.
Refer to section A-1 How to create a Facebook App ID for Web
Portal Authentication for details.
Google
(Login with Google)
This setting is available when Login with Google is selected as the
login method.
Google App ID - Enter a valid Google app ID.
If you do not already have an app ID, refer to section A-2 How to
create a Google App ID for Web Portal Authentication for
instructions on obtaining an APP ID.
Google App Secret - Enter the secret configured for the APP ID
entered above.
Refer to section A-2 How to create a Google APP ID for Web Portal
Authentication for details.
SMS Provider
(Receive PIN via SMS)
This setting is available when Receive PIN via SMS is selected as
the login method.
Receiving PIN via SMS Provider - Select the SMS Provider used to
send PIN notifications SMS providers are configured in Objects
Setting >> SMS / Mail Service Object.
Radius Server
(Login with RADIUS)
This setting is available when Login with RADIUS is selected as the
login method.
Authentication Method – Click link to configure the external
RADIUS server for authenticating web portal clients.
RADIUS MAC Authentication – Check Enable to activate user
authentication by MAC address.
MAC Address Format – Select the MAC address format that is used
by the RADIUS server.
When External Portal Server is selected as Portal Method
Redirection URL
Enter the URL to which the client will be redirected.
RADIUS Server
Authentication Method - To configure the RADIUS server, click the
External RADIUS Server link and you will be presented with the
configuration page.
RADIUS MAC Authentication - If the RADIUS server supports
authentication by MAC address, enable RADIUS MAC
Authentication and select the MAC address format that is used by
the RADIUS server.
MAC Address Format - Select the MAC address format.
Save and Next
Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the
next page.
Cancel
Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
535
next page.
If you have chosen Skip Login, landing page only or External Portal Server as the portal
method, skip to step 4 Whitelisting below.
Otherwise, proceed to configure the login page by following steps 2 and 3.
536
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Background
If you have selected a Login Mode that requires authentication, select a background for the
login page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
537
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Choose Login
Background
Select either Color Background or Image Background as the login
page background scheme.
Browser Tab Title
Enter the text to be shown as the webpage title in the browser.
Logo Image
The DrayTek Logo will be displayed by default. However, you can
enter HTML text or upload an image to replace the default logo.
Logo Background
Color
Select the background color of the logo image.
Login Method
Background Color
Select the background color of the login panel from the predefined
color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value.
Click Preview to preview the selected color.
Opacity (10 ~ 100)
Available when Image Background is selected. Set the opacity of
the background image.
Background Image
Available when Image Background is selected. Click Browse… to
select an image file (.JPG or .PNG format), then click Upload to
upload it to the router.
Save and Next
Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the
next page.
Cancel
Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile
summary page.
If you have selected Skip Login, landing page only or External Portal Server as the portal
method, proceed to Step 4 Whitelist Setting; otherwise, continue to Step 3 Login Page Setup.
538
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Login Page Setup
In this step you can configure settings for the login page.
Click Through
This section describes the Login Page setup if you have selected Click Through as the Login
Method.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Welcome Message
Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message.
Terms and
Enter the text to be displayed as the Terms and Conditions
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
539
540
Conditions
Description
hyperlink text.
Terms and
Conditions Content
Enter the text to be displayed in the Terms and Conditions pop-up
window.
Accept Button
Description
Enter the text to be displayed on the accept button
Accept Button Color
Select the color of the accept button from the predefined color
list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click
Preview to preview the selected color.
Save and Next
Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the
next page.
Cancel
Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile
summary page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Various Hotspot Login
This section describes the Login Page setup step if you have selected Various Hotspot Login
the login method. You will see only settings that are relevant to the selected login method(s).
Settings that are common to Facebook, Google, PIN, and RADIUS authentication are:
Item
Description
Welcome Message
Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message.
Terms and
Conditions
Description
Enter the text to be displayed as the Terms and Conditions
hyperlink text.
Terms and
Conditions Content
Enter the text to be displayed in the Terms and Conditions pop-up
window.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
541
If you have selected Facebook login, the setting will appear:
Item
Description
Facebook Login
Description
Enter the text to be displayed on the Facebook login button.
If you have selected Google login, the setting will appear:
542
Item
Description
Google Login
Description
Enter the text to be displayed on the Google login button.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
If you have selected PIN login, these settings will appear:
Item
Description
Hint Message for PIN
Enter the text used to suggest users to choose SMS authentication.
Receiving PIN via
SMS Description
Enter the text to be displayed on the button that the user clicks to
receive an SMS PIN.
Receiving PIN via
SMS Content
Enter the message to be sent by SMS to inform the user of the PIN.
The PIN variable is specified by <PIN> within the message.
Enter PIN
Description
Enter message to be displayed in the PIN textbox to prompt the
user to enter the PIN.
Submit Button
Description
Enter the text to be displayed on the submit PIN button
Submit Button Color
Select the color of the submit button from the predefined color
list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click
Preview to preview the selected color.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
543
If you have selected RADIUS account login, these settings will appear:
Item
Description
Hint Message for
RADIUS
Enter the text used to prompt the user to login.
RADIUS Account
Description
Enter the text to prompt the user to enter the username.
RADIUS Password
Description
Enter the text to prompt the user to enter the password.
Login Button
Description
Enter the text to be displayed on the login button.
Login Button Color
Select the color of the login button from the predefined color list,
or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview
to preview the selected color.
And finally, the save and cancel buttons are always displayed.
544
Item
Description
Save and Next
Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the
next page.
Cancel
Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile
summary page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2nd-stage Page for PIN Login
If you have selected PIN Login as the login method, you will also need to configure the page
that is displayed to users when they request a PIN.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Back Button
Description
Enter text for the label of the hyperlink to return to the previous
page.
PIN Code Message
Enter text to be displayed as the body text on the page.
Default Country
Select the default country code to be displayed using the dropdown
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
545
546
Code
menu.
Enter Mobile
Number Description
Enter message to be displayed in the mobile number textbox to
prompt the user to enter the mobile number.
Send Button
Description
Enter the label text of the send button.
Send Button Color
Select the color of the send button from the predefined color list,
or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview
to preview the selected color.
Send Succeeded
Message
Enter text to be displayed to notify the user after the PIN has been
sent.
Save and Next
Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the
next page.
Cancel
Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile
summary page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Whitelist Setting
In this step you can configure the whitelist settings. Users are allowed to send and receive
traffic that satisfies whitelist settings.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
NAT Rules
To prevent web portal settings from conflicting with NAT rules
resulting in unexpected behavior, select the NAT rules that are
allowed to bypass the web portal. Hosts listed in selected NAT
rules can always access the Internet without being intercepted by
the web portal.
Dest Domain
Enter up to 30 destination domains that are allowed to be
accessed.
Dest IP
Enter up to 30 destination IP addresses that are allowed to be
accessed.
Dest Port
Enter up to 30 destination protocols and ports that are allowed
through the router.
Source IP
Enter up to 30 source IP addresses that are allowed through the
router.
Save and Next
Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the
next page.
Cancel
Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile
summary page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
547
More Options
In this step you can configure advanced options for the Hotspot Web Portal.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
548
Description
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Quota Management
Expired Time After
Activation
Enter the time duration that users are allowed to have Internet
access after logging in.
Quota Policy Profile
Choose a policy profile to apply to web portal clients.
Web Portal Options
HTTPS Redirection
If this option is selected, unauthenticated clients accessing HTTPS
websites will be redirected to the login page, but the browser may
alert the user of certificate errors. If this option is not selected,
attempts to access to HTTPS website will time out without
redirection.
Captive Portal
Detection
If this option is selected, the web portal page is triggered
automatically when an unauthenticated client tries to access the
Internet. This function is not available when the Login Mode is
Social Login, as the web portal page may not be shown correctly
due to the limitations of the operating system’s built-in Captive
Portal Detection.
Landing Page After Authentication
Fixed URL
Specifies the webpage that will be displayed after the user has
successfully authenticated.
The user will be redirected to the specified URL. This could be used
for displaying advertisements to users, such as guests requesting
wireless Internet access in a hotel.
User Requested URL
The user will be redirected to the URL they initially requested.
Bulletin Message
The message configured here will be briefly shown for a few
seconds to the user.
Default Message – This button is enabled when Bulletin Message is
selected. Click to load the default text into the bulletin message
textbox.
Applied Interfaces
Subnet
The current Hotspot Web Portal profile will be in effect for the
selected subnets.
WLAN
The current Hotspot Web Portal profile will be in effect for the
selected WLAN SSIDs.
Finish
Click to complete the configuration.
Cancel
Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile
summary page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
549
VII-4-2 User Information
This page displays information of users accessing the Internet through the web portal.
Clicking on a user link will open a new window that shows detailed information about that
user.
VII-4-2-1 User Info
You may choose to limit the displayed user information by adding profile or login method
filters.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Select Columns to
Filter Users
Select the profiles and the login methods to filter the displayed
users. This is useful when there are a lot of users and you want to
manage only a subset of users based on their profiles and/or login
methods.
User Table
Details of users accessing the Internet via Hotspot Web Portal will
be displayed in this section.
Click the MAC address (or pincode, facebook/google name, RADIUS account) link for a
particular user and detailed information on the selected device will be shown in the following
page.
550
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Information about the user is shown under the Login Info section.
Devices used by the user are shown under the Devices section. To forcibly log out a device,
select the checkbox in front of the device and click the Log Out Device button.
The Login History section shows the 10 most recent login sessions of the user.
VII-4-2-2 Database Setup
This page allows the user to configure settings for database on USB disk.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
551
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable database
Check the box to record user information on router’s database.
Before checking this box, insert a USB disk with adequate storage
space, first.
Enable automatic
database recovery
Check the box to enable the functionality of the database recovery
on the USB disk.
Backup database every... - Set the interval to backup the
database.
Enable sending user
information to
syslog
Check the box to send user information to syslog.
File Path
If a USB disk has been inserted into the USB port of Vigor router,
the file path will be shown in this area.
Database Usage
Display the usage and remaining space on the database.
Clear User Info – The user information will be displayed on the
page of User Info. You can delete the information by clicking this
button.
Notification and Action when Storage Exceeded
Notification
Don’t send notification – Vigor router system will not send any
notification to any receipient.
Send notification - Vigor router system will not send a notification
e-mail to specified receipient(s) that selected from Email
Notification Object and SMS Notification Object.
Action
Stop recording user information – Vigor router system will stop to
record the user information onto USB disk.
Backup and clean up all user info, and start a new record – Vigor
router system will backup all existed information on the USB disk
onto the host and clean up the information from USB disk. Later, it
will start a new record.
Advanced options
Database Encryption
552
Select to have the router create a new encrypted database. Once
this is done, you will not be able to revert to an unencrypted
database.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-4-3 Quota Management
The system administrator can specify bandwidth and sessions quota which is only applicable
to the web portal clients.
Settings configured in Quota Management will override the policies set in Bandwidth
Management>>Bandwidth Limit and Bandwidth Management>>Limit.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Check the box to override the policy configured in Bandwidth
Management>>Bandwidth Limit.
Session Limit
Check the box to override the policy configured in Bandwidth
Management>>Session Limit.
Quota Policy Profile
Add - Create up to 20 policy profiles in such page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
553
To create a new quotal policy profile, click Add to open the followining page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
554
Item
Description
Profile Name
Enter a name for a new profile.
Account Validity
Set the duration for which the login is valid.
Expired Time After the First Login – Sets the days, hours, and
minutes. After the login has expired, Vigor router will block the
client from accessing the network/Internet.
Idle Timeout – When this option is selected, Vigor router will
terminate the network connection if the is no activity from the
user after the specified idle time has passed.
Device Control
Set the maximum number of devices that can be connected for
each account, and the time restriction for the client accessing
Internet via the web portal.
Devices Allowed per account – Use the drop-down list to select
the maximum number of devices that can be connected to the
network using the same account.
Reconnection Time Restriction – Blocks the account from being
used to connect devices to the network in one of two ways:

At …. Everyday – After the login expires, the account cannot
be used to connect devices to the network until the set time
of day.

Hours.. min – After the login expires, the account cannot be
used to connect devices to the network for a set period of
time.
Bandwidth and
Bandwidth Limit – Check the box to configure bandwidth limit for
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Session Limit
web portal client.

Download/Upload Limits – Set the maximum upload and
download speeds.
Session Limit- Check the box to configure a maximum session limit
for web portal clients.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
555
VII-4-4 PIN Generator
The system administrator can generate multiple PIN codes for various usage. Before
generating PIN codes, please make sure a USB has been inserted onto your Vigor device.
VII-4-4-1 PIN Status
This page displays the PIN codes generated by PIN Generator.
Available settings are explained as follows:
556
Item
Description
Profile
Use the drop down menu to choose an index number (1 to 4) for PIN
generator profile.
Batch Name
Use the drop down menu to choose an existed PIN profile or choose
ALL to display the PIN status.
Status
Unused - After checking the box, only the unused PIN codes will be
shown on this page.
Used - After checking the box, only the used PIN codes will be
shown on this page.
Quota Policy
Use the drop down menu to choose a quota management policy to
display related PIN codes.
PIN
Enter the PIN code to display related information on this page.
Expiry Time
Expired - After checking the box, only the expired PIN codes will
be shown on this page.
Unexpired - After checking the box, only the unexpired PIN codes
will be shown on this page.
OK
Click it to display the PIN code according to the above filtering
condition.
Export to CSV File
Click it to export the configuration of PIN code as a CSV file.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-4-4-2 PIN Generator
The system administrator can generate multiple PIN codes in response to the user's (e.g.,
enterprise) demand.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Profile
Use the drop down menu to specify an index number (from 1 to 4).
Batch Name
Enter a string as a batch name.
PIN code length
Specify the length of PIN code.
PIN Validity
Set the period of time.
Quantity
Set the quantity of the PIN code.
Quota Management
Policy
Use the drop down list to choose policy profile.
Generate
Click it to generate a PIN code as a voucher.
The system will ask you to set up Database before executing the
generation.
Later, available PIN code will be shown on PIN Status.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
557
VII-4-4-3 PIN Voucher
This page allows to print out the PIN code list.
Available settings are explained as follows:
558
Item
Description
Profile
Use the drop down menu to specify an index number (from 1 to 4).
Batch
Use the drop down menu to specify an unused batch profile.
Voucher Title
Enter a string as a title which will be shown on a print out paper.
Show Quota Policy
Choose the item(s) to be shown on the print-out PIN code list.
Message
Enter a brief description that the client should know.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Show Valid Date
Check the box to display the valid date and time on the printed out
list.
Preview and Print
Click it to display the PIN code list. This list can be printed out if
required.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
559
Application Notes
A-1 How to allow users login to Vigor’s Hotspot with their social media accounts
(e.g., Facebook & Google)
Vigor Router supports Hotspot Web Portal function. The network administrator can set Vigor
Router as a Hotspot provider with web authentication and allow users to log in with their
social media accounts, such as Facebook and Google. We demonstrate how to set up the
hotspot web portal with Facebook login in the following paragraphs.
Vigor Router Setup
560
1.
Make sure the router is connected to the Internet.
2.
Go to Hotspot Web Portal >> Profile Setup, click on an available index.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3.
Enter the values as the following figure.
(a)
Click Enable this profile.
(b)
Enter the comments.
(c)
Select Various Hotspot Login for Portal Method.
(d)
Choose Login with Facebook or Login with Google as Login Method.
If Login with Facebook is selected, the protocol of the Captive Portal URL need
to be changed to HTTPS instead of HTTP because Facebook force to use HTTPS
URL in their policy.
(e)
Enter the APP ID and secret.
(f)
Click Save and Next.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
561
4.
Choose the Color Background, customize the information a logo color, and click Save
and Next.
You can click the Step Icon on the top of the page to go to the step you want. The router
will save your setting automatically.
562
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Or choose the Image Background, customize the information and background image,
and click Save and Next.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
563
564
5.
Customize the descriptions on the login page, then click Save and Next.
6.
You can set the Whitelist for the profile here to allow specific clients to access the
internet or certain websites can be visited without login.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
7.
Set up the Expired Time After Activation and Landing Page After Activation that
Hotspot clients will see after they login successfully. Finally, select the interfaces to
which you would like this hotspot profile apply to, then click Finish to save the setting.
8.
Then the Hotspot setup is finished. You may click Preview to check the login page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
565
Hotspot Clients Login
9.
Now, when clients connect to the selected router interface, and try to access internet,
they will be redirected to "portal.draytek.com".

Due to security concerns, the browser might warns that it cannot verify server
identity, the clients would need to tap "Continue" before they can proceed to
portal.draytek.com.

The client might not be able to access "portal.draytek.com" if this domain name
is resolved by a DNS server on LAN. If so, set up LAN DNS to make sure the domain
name will be resolved to the router's LAN IP.
10. Tap on a login method, and it will open the social media login page. Enter the social
media accounts and password to log in.
566
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
11. If the credentials are correct, the client will be redirected to the landing page and be
able to access the Internet afterward.
User Information
Network administrator can plug the USB disk to router, to record the basic information of the
users who connect to the Wi-Fi and login with their social media accounts. The users' basic
information will be listed on Hotspot Web Portal >> Users Information page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
567
A-2 How to allow hotspot clients to get login PIN code via SMS?
Since 3.8.4.3 version firmware, Vigor Router can act as a hotspot gateway and provide
internet access only to the authenticated clients. Network Administrator may set up the
router to allow hotspot client to get the login PIN code from an SMS message. This note is
going to demonstrate how to set up Vigor Router as a hotspot gateway and be able to send the
PIN code to clients by SMS messages.
Vigor Router Setup
1. Make sure the router is connected to the Internet.
2. Create an SMS Object to send SMS messages. Go to Objects Setting >> SMS Service
Object, and click on an available profile.
568
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3. Enter the Service Provider details, and click OK to apply.
4. Go to Hotspot Web Portal >> Profile Setup, click on an available profile.
5. Enable the profile, give a comment, and choose “PIN Code Login”. Then click Next.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
569
6. Choose a login page design, customize the details, and click Next.
7. Edit the message on the login page, and click Next.
8. Edit the details for SMS settings, then click Next.
570
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
9. Edit the landing page, choose the interfaces to which the SMS login should apply, and then
click Finish.
10. Now, the hotspot settings are applied to the selected interfaces. You may click Preview
to check how the login page looks.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
571
Hotspot Client Login
11. If the client connected to the selected interface of the router and try to open a webpage,
they will be redirected to hotspot login page. If they do not have a password yet, they can
click on the button to get a password.
572
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Info

Due to security concerns, the browser might warns that it cannot
verify server identity, the clients would need to tap "continue" before
they can proceed to portal.draytek.com.

The client might not be able to access "portal.draytek.com" if this
domain name is resolved by a DNS server on LAN. If so, set up LAN DNS
to make sure the domain name will be resolved to the router's LAN IP.
12. Enter the mobile phone number to receive the SMS message.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
573
13. The number will get a message about the password.
14. Enter the password on the login page, and click Login.
15. If the password is correct, the client will be redirected to the landing page, and after that,
they will be able to surf the Internet.
574
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-5 Central Management (VPN)
Vigor2926 can build virtual private network (VPN) between itself and any other TR-069 CPE by
the function of central VPN management. In addition, it can be treated as a server (called
CVM server) which can manage TR-069 CPE for periodical firmware upgrade, configuration
backup and restoring configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
575
Web User Interface
Central VPN Management menu can manage the CPE connected through WAN only.
VII-5-1 General Setup
This page is used to configure settings which will be used by the clients to register to such
Vigor router. Click General Settings and IPsec VPN Settings to configure the basic settings for
CVM mechanism.
VII-5-1-1 General Settings
To enable the CVM feature, the first thing you have to do is enabling CVM port or CVM SSL
Port.
Available settings are explained as follows:
576
Item
Description
CVM SSL Port
Check the box to enable the port setting.
Enter the port number in the box.
CVM Port
Check the box to enable the port setting.
Enter the port number in the box.
WAN IP for Remote
Connection
For Vigor router can manage only the client from WAN
interface, therefore you have to specify which interface will
be used for such function. If you choose MANUALLY, you have
to specify WAN IP address.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Username
Type a username which will be used by any CPE trying to
connect to Vigor router.
Password
Enter the password for the user.
Polling Interval
Enter the time value (unit is second). The range is from 60 ~
86400.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
VII-5-1-2 IPsec VPN Settings
Central VPN management is operated through IPsec VPN connection.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
IPsec Mode
Choose Aggressive or Main as the IPsec Mode.
Security Method
Choose one of the following methods (AH or ESP) for the
security of data transmission. For example, choose AH to
specify the IPsec protocol for the Authentication Header
protocol. The data will be authenticated but not be
encrypted.
Encryption Type
Choose one of the selections as the encryption type.
Local Subnet
Enter the IP address and subnet mask of local host.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
577
VII-5-2 CPE Management
All the CPEs managed by Vigor2926 series can be seen with icons from this page.
Before using such feature, make sure the CVM port has been enabled and configured properly.
VII-5-2-1 Managed Device List
This page allows you to manage the CPEs connected to Vigor2926 series.
Page without CPE connected
578
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Page with CPE connected
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Managed Devices List
This area displays device icons (up to 8) for the CPE managed
by Vigor2926 series.
Edit – To modify the name and location of specific CPE, click
the one you want and click the Edit button. A pop up window
will appear. Simply change the name and/or location
manually.
Delete – To disconnect the management of any CPE, click the
CPE icon you want and click the Delete button.
Double-clicking the CPE icon also can pop up the Managed
Device Detail window. However, you cannot modify any data
on the window.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
579
580
Unmanaged Devices List
Any device (CPE) which follows the standard of TR-069 can be
configured and can be detected by Vigor2926 series
automatically.
Only eight remote devices can be managed by Vigor2926 at
one time. Therefore, other remote devices detected by
Vigor2926 series might not be displayed in such field.
Add – Move the selected device from Unmanaged Devices List
to Managed Devices List.
IP Address – Display the IP address of the remote device.
Mac Address – Display the MAC address of the remote device.
Device Model – Display the model name of the remote device.
Description Name – Define the name or type the additional
description of CPE for identification in VPN management and
CPE management.
Location – Enter the location (address) of the CPE to be
displayed by Google Map.
Refresh
Click it to refresh current web page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-5-2-2 CPE Maintenance
This area displays all the profiles which are created for applying to the managed device. This
page can help the administrator to do maintenance jobs like firmware upgrade, configuration
backup, configuration restoration and etc.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Refresh
Click it to refresh current page.
USB Disk
Vigor2926.
Vigor2926.
Disk Usage
- It means a USB disk connecting to
- It means no USB disk connecting to
- When a USB disk connects
to Vigor2926, the disk usage and the disk capacity will be
displayed in such field.
- When there is no
USB disk connecting to Vigor2926, such message will be
displayed in this field.
Click the icon to see the content inside the USB disk.
Set to Factory Default
Click to clear all indexes.
Index
Display the number of the profile that you can edit.
Profile Name
Display the name of the maintenance profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
581
Device Name
Display the name of the managed CPE that the maintenance
profile will apply to.
Action
Display the action that managed CPE shall accept.
Schedule
Display the schedule profiles selected for such profile.
Now
The action will be performed for the selected CPE
immediately.
How to add a new Maintenance Profile
Follow the steps below to create a new maintenance profile.
1.
Click any index number link, e.g., Index 1.
2.
The Maintenance dialog appears.
Info
When restoring configuration to a CPE, make sure the configuration
file you selected was backup from this CPE before. Because restoring
from another device's configuration file may cause serious problem
(e.g., Both devices have different ISP username/ password. Restoring
configuration from one CPE to the other will cause Internet
connection not being online).
Available parameters are listed as follows:
582
Item
Description
Profile Name
Enter the name of the maintenance profile.
Enable
Check it to enable such profile.
Only Run Once
Check it to activate such profile running for once.
Device Name
The drop down list will display all the CPE devices detected by
Vigor2926 series. Choose the one which will be applied with
such new created profile.
Router Name /
Router Model
It displays the name and model of Vigor router.
Action Type
There are three actions for you to choose for such profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide


Config Backup – It means such profile will be used for
configuration backup of the selected CPE.
Config Restore – It means such profile will be used for
restoring the configuration of the selected CPE.
Info

When restoring configuration to a CPE,
make sure the configuration file you
selected was backup from this CPE before.
Because restoring from another device's
configuration file may cause serious
problem (e.g., Both devices have different
ISP username/ password. Restoring
configuration from one CPE to the other will
cause Internet connection not being
online).
Firmware Upgrade – It means such profile will be used
for firmware upgrade.
File/Path
Click Select to locate the file you want to save, restore or
upgrade for CPE.
Index in Schedule
Vigor2926 series will perform the specified action to the
selected CPE based on the schedule configured here.
Specify one or two schedule profiles (represented by number)
here.
3.
Enter all the settings and click OK.
4.
A new maintenance profile has been created.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
583
VII-5-2-3 Google Map
To display the location of the managed CPE with a bird’s eye view, open Central VPN
Management>>CPE Management and click the tab of Google Map.
584
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-5-3 VPN Management
An easy and quick method is offered to configure VPN settings for building VPN connection
automatically between Vigor2926 series (treated as VPN server) and other Vigor router
(treated as CPE device, i.e., VPN client).
Available parameters are listed as follows:
Item
Description
CPE VPN Connection List
VPN
Display the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile.
It is generated automatically when you click the
PPTP/IPsec/Advanced button to build the VPN connection
between Vigor2926 and remote CPE.
Type
Display the dial-in type and the authentication method.
Remote IP
Display the IP address of the remote CPE and the interface.
Virtual Network
Display the IP address and subnet mask of Vigor2926 series.
Tx Pkts
Display the number of the transmitted packets.
Tx Rate(Bps)
Display the number of the transmitted rate.
Rx Pkts
Display the number of the received packets.
Rx Rate(Bps)
Display the number of the received rate.
Up Time
Display the connection time of such VPN.
Once the device is managed (controlled) by Vigor2926 series, it will be displayed on such
screen automatically. If not, refer to sections “How to manage the CPE (router) through
Vigor2926?” for more detailed information.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
585
VII-5-4 Log & Alert
This page offers brief information to identify the CPE connected to Vigor2926 series.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Display Mode
Choose the mode you want to display the related information
on the following table.

Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of CVM log is
full, the system will stop recording.

Always record the new event – only the newest events
will be recorded by the system.
Device Name
Display the name of the managed CPE.
Description Name
Display the brief explanation for the managed CPE.
Time & date
Display the time and date that the managed CPE scanned by
Vigor2926 series.
Action Type
Display the action that Vigor2926 series will perform for the
managed CPE.
Message
Display the information for each event.
The Alert page offers brief information to identify the CPE connected to Vigor2926 series.
586
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Application Notes
A-1 CVM Application - How to manage the CPE (router) through Vigor2926
series?
To manage CPEs through Vigor2926 series, you have to set URL on CPE first and set username
and password for Vigor2926 series. For this section, we use Vigor2850 series as the example.
All the CPE configuration will be done through Vigor2850 series.
Configure CVM Settings on Vigor2926 series
1.
Access into the web user interface of Vigor2926 series.
2.
Open Central Management>> VPN >>General Setup.
3.
In the following page, check the boxes for CVM Port and CVM SSL Port to enable the port
setting. Enter the values for CVM Port, CVM SSL Port, Username, and Password
respectively. Remember the values configured in this page.
4.
Click OK to save the settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
587
Configure Settings on CPE
588
1.
In the end of the CPE, access into the web user interface of the CPE (e.g., Vigor2850
series). Open a web browser (for example, IE, Mozilla Firefox or Netscape) and type
http://192.168.1.1.
2.
Open System Maintenance >> TR-069.
3.
In the field of ACS Server, type the URL (IP address with port number) of Vigor2926
series and type the same Username and Password defined on the page of Central
Management>> VPN >>General Setup in Vigor2926 series. Then, click Enable for CPE
Client and then click OK to save the settings.
4.
Open System Maintenance>>Management Setup.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
5.
Check Allow management from the Internet to set management access control and
click OK.
6.
Open WAN>>Internet Access. Use the drop down list of Access Mode on WAN1 to select
MPoA (RFC1483/2684). Then, click Details Page.
7.
Click Specify an IP address. Type correct WAN IP address, subnet mask and gateway IP
address for your CPE. Then click OK.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
589
Info
Reboot the CPE device and re-log into Vigor2926 series. CPE which has
registered to Vigor2926 series will be captured and displayed on the page of
Central Management>>VPN>>CPE Management.
Check CPE Maintenance Page
590
1.
Return to the web user interface of Vigor2926 series.
2.
Open Central Management>>VPN>>VPN Management. Now there is one CPE displayed
on the field of Unmanaged Devices List.
3.
Choose the one (Vigor2850) from Unmanaged Devices List and click Add. The following
dialog will be popped up. Enter the name and the location of the router respectively.
Click OK to save the configuration.
4.
The selected CPE will be moved and displayed on Managed Devices List which means it is
controlled / managed by Vigor2926 series from now on.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
A-2 CVM Application - How to build the VPN between remote devices and
Vigor2926 series?
When a remote device is managed by Vigor2926 series, it is easy to build VPN between these
two devices.
1.
Access into the web user interface of Vigor2926 series.
2.
Open Central Management>> VPN >>CPE Management.
3.
Click the device icon (marked with
4.
Wait for a moment. If VPN is built successfully, related information will be displayed on
CPE VPN Connection List.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
) and click the PPTP/IPsec button.
591
5.
A LAN to LAN profile for such VPN will be generated automatically. You can access into
VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN of the remote device for viewing the detailed
information.
Note: The profile name is created automatically by the system. Do not modify any value in
such page to avoid VPN error.
592
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
A-3 CVM Application - How to upgrade CPE firmware through Vigor2926 series?
Download the newest firmware from your Draytek website to USB Storage Disk for the device
(e.g., Vigor2850) managed by Vigor2926 series.
Vigor2850, as an example, is chosen for Vigor2926 to perform the CPE firmware upgrade
remotely in this case.
1.
Plug in USB storage disk onto Vigor2926 series via USB interface. Make sure the USB disk
has been installed correctly, otherwise, the firmware upgrade will not be successful.
2.
Access into web user interface of Vigor2926 series. Open Central
Management>>VPN>>CPE Management and click the CPE Maintenance tab.
3.
Click any index number link, e.g., Index 1.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
593
4.
The Maintenance profile dialog appears.
In the field of Profile Name, type a name for such maintenance profile; check Enable;
and choose the one you want to perform firmware upgrade from Device Name drop down
list. From the Action Type, choose Firmware Upgrade. Enter the file/path of the newest
firmware or click Select to locate it. Specify the Schedule profile. At last, click OK.
594
5.
Now, a new maintenance profile has been created.
6.
Click Now to perform the firmware upgrade immediately for Vigor2850.
7.
Wait for several minutes for firmware upgrade.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
8.
Then check the device information for the managed device if the firmware upgrade is
successful or not. Click Managed Devices List.
Click the icon of Vigor2850 and click Edit and view the software version. Another way to
check if the firmware upgrade is completed or not, simply open Central
Management>>VPN>>Log & Alert.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
595
VII-6 Central Management (AP)
Vigor2926 can manage the access points supporting AP management via Central AP
Management.
AP Map
AP Map is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a room
is required to be uploaded first. By dragging and dropping available VigorAP icon from the list
to the floor plan, the placement with the best wireless coverage will be clearly indicated
through simulated signal strength
AP Maintenance
Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade
and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the
administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the
access point.
Load Balance for AP
The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the
access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain
access points.
596
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
VII-6-1 Dashboard
This page shows VigorAP’s information about Status, Event Log, Total Traffic or Station
Number by displaying VigorAP icon, text and histogram. Just move and click your mouse
cursor on Status, Event Log, Total Traffic or Station Number. Corresponding web pages will
be open immediately.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
597
To access into the web user interface of VigorAP, simply move your mouse cursor on the
VigorAP icon and click it. The system will guide you to access into the web user interface of
VigorAP.
VII-6-2 Status
This page displays current status (online, offline or SSID hidden, IP address, encryption,
channel, version, password and etc.) of the access points managed by Vigor router. Please
open Central Management>>AP>>Function Support List to check what AP Models are
supported.
Available settings are explained as follows:
598
Item
Description
Index
Click the index number link for viewing the settings summary
of the access point.
Device Name
The name of the AP managed by Vigor router will be displayed
here.
IP Address
Display the true IP address of the access point.
SSID
Display the SSID configured for the access point(s) connected
to Vigor2926.
Ch.
Display the channel used by the access point.
STA List
Display the number of wireless clients (stations) connecting to
the access point.
In which, 0/64 means that up to 64 clients are allowed to
connect to the access point. But, now no one connects to the
access point.
The number displayed on the left side means 2.4GHz; and the
number displayed on the right side means 5GHz.
AP List
Display the number of the AP around the device.
Uptime
Display the duration of the AP powered up.
Version
Display the firmware version used by the access point.
Password
Vigor2926 can get related information of the access point by
accessing into the web user interface of the access point.
This button is used to modify the logging password of the
connected access point.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-6-3 WLAN Profile
WLAN profile is used to apply to a selected access point. It is very convenient for the
administrator to configure the setting for access point without opening the web user interface
of the access point.
Click the number link of the selected profile to modify the content of the profile. Available
settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Profile
Display the link of the profile.
Name
Display the name of the profile.
The default profile cannot be renamed.
Main SSID
Display the SSID configured by such wireless profile.
Security
Display the security mode selected by such wireless profile.
Multi-SSID
Enable means multiple SSIDs (more than one) are active.
Disable means only SSID1 is active.
WLAN ACL
Display the name of the access control list.
Rate Ctrl
Display the upload and/or download transmission rate.
Clone
It can copy settings from an existing WLAN profile to another
WLAN profile.
First, you have to check the box of the existing profile as the
original profile. Second, click Clone. The following dialog will
appear.
Third, choose the profile index to accept the settings from the
original profile. Forth, type a new name in the field of
Renamed as. Last, click Apply to save the settings on this
dialog.
The new profile has been created with the settings coming
from the original profile.
To AP
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Click it to apply the selected wireless profile to the specified
Access Point.
599
Simply choose the device you want from Existing Device field.
Click >> to move the device to Selected Device field. Then,
click OK.
The selected WLAN profile will be applied to the selected
access point immediately. Later the access point will reboot.
To Local
600
WLAN Profile configured in this page is specified for VigorAP
connected to Vigor router.
If required, these settings also can be applied to Vigor router.
Select and check one of wireless profiles and click this button
to apply the settings onto the WI-Fi wireless settings
configured for such Vigor router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
How to edit the wireless LAN profile?
1. Check the box on the left side of the selected profile.
2. Click the Edit button to display the following page.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
The function of Auto Provision is available for the default WLAN profile.
601
3. After finished the general settings configuration, click Next to open the following page
for 2.4G wireless security settings.
602
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
4. After finished the above web page configuration, click Next to open the following page
for 5G wireless security settings.
5. When you finished the above web page configuration, click Finish to exit and return to
the first page. The modified WLAN profile will be shown on the web page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
603
VII-6-4 AP Maintenance
Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade
and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the
administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the
access point.
Info
Config Backup can be performed to one AP at one time. Others functions
(e.g., Config Restore, Firmware Upgrade, Remote Reboot can be performed
to more than one AP at one time by using Vigor2926.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Action
There are four actions provided by Vigor router to manage the
access points.
Vigor router can backup the configuration of the selected AP,
restore the configuration for the selected AP, perform the
firmware upgrade of the selected AP, reboot the selected AP
remotely and perform the factory reset for the selected AP.
604
File/Path
Specify the file and the path which will be used to perform
Config Restore or Firmware Upgrade.
Select Device
Display all the available access points managed by Vigor
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
router. Simply click << or >> to move the device(s) between
Select Device and Selected Device areas.
Selected Device
Display the access points that will be applied by such function
after clicking OK.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to perform the action.
VII-6-5 AP Map
This function is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a
room is required to be uploaded first. By dragging and dropping available VigorAP icon from
the list to the floor plan, the placement with the best wireless coverage will be clearly
indicated through simulated signal strength.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Click the link to clear current page configuration.
Profile
Click the link to to view or edit the AP Map.
Location
Display a brief description (e.g., ground, roof) of the AP Map.
Online APs
Display the number of VigorAP configured and powered up.
Total APs
Display the total number of VigorAP configured.
Clients
Display the number of clients accessing Internet through the
VigorAP.
Dimension(m)
Display the width and length of the AP map.
View
Click it to review the layout for the selected AP map.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
605
Creating /Editing the AP Map Profile
1.
Select a number index and click Edit to open the following web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
2.
606
Item
Description
Location (Profile Name)
Type a name (e.g., groudfloor) for the AP map profile.
Upload Map
Click the Select button to choose an image file (only JPG
and PNG are supported) for floor plan.
Cancel
Click it to cancel the configuration.
Next
Click it to go to the next configuration page.
Click Next. In the web page of Dimension, set dimension for the map.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3.
Follow the instruction listed on the web page to draw a red line for length / width. Then,
type the value on the pop up dialog to determine the real distance.
The values for length and width will be displayed on the web page.
4.
Click Next to open the web page of Planning. Available APs detected by Vigor router will
be displayed on the upper end.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
607
5.
608
Select the AP you need; drag and drop an AP icon from upper end to the map on the
bottom.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
6.
Check the box of Show AP Coverage and choose 2.4GHz or 5GHz of wireless signal for the
AP located on the floor plan.
7.
Adjust the AP on the map to find out which place can have the best wireless coverage. At
last, click Save.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
609
VII-6-6 Traffic Graph
Click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose one of the managed Access Points, LAN-A
or LAN-B, daily or weekly for viewing data transmission chart. Click Refresh to renew the
graph at any time.
The horizontal axis represents time; the vertical axis represents the transmission rate (in
kbps).
Info
610
Enabling/Disabling such function will also enable/disable the External
Devices function.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-6-7 Rogue AP Detection
It displays the access point scanned by Vigor router. In which, the APs will be classified with
friendly APs, rogue APs and unknown APs in different colors.
Below shows the detected APs by clicking OK.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Neighbor AP Detection – The access point(s) registered to
Vigor2926 will be used to detect other access points and send
the scanned results to Vigor2926. Later, the scanned result
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
611
will be displayed on this page.
Local WLAN Detection – The router will detect all the access
points through wireless LAN connection.
Specify the access points which are classified under each type.
Refresh Min(s)
Use the drop down list to specify the time to refresh the web
page.
Refresh
Click such link to refresh the web page immediately.
Ch
Display the channel used by the detected access point.
SSID
Display the SSID specified for the detected access point.
Mode
Display the mode (AP or Ad Hoc) used by the detected access
point.
BSSID
Display the MAC address of the detected access point.
Security
Display the encryption mode used by the access point.
Signal (%)
Display the signal strength (represented by percentage) sent
by the access point.
Beacon Period
Display the period (time) of the beacon. The beacon signal will
be sent out periodically.
Last Detected
Display the date and time that such access point was detected
by Vigor router.
All the APs detected by Vigor router will be treated as unknown APs. You have to specify
which AP is friendly and which one is Rogue respectively. Follow the steps below to perform
the classification of access points.
1. Click the radio button on one of the access points. In this case, DrayTek-LAN-A is
selected.
2. Later, some options will appear on the bottom of the page.
612
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
AP’s MAC Address
The MAC address of the selected AP will be displayed here
automatically.
AP’s SSID
The SSID of the selected AP will be displayed here
automatically.
Add to
Friendly APs - If the selected AP shall be treated as Friendly
AP, simply click Add to change its classification from unknown
to Friendly.
Rogue APs - If the selected AP shall be treated as rogue AP,
simply click Add to change its classification from unknown to
Rogue.
Delete From
Rogue APs - If you want to change the classification of the
rogue AP, simply choose the one and click Delete. Later, the
page will refresh and the one will be classified as Unknown.
Friendly APs - If you want to change the classification of the
friendly AP, simply choose the one and click Delete. Later, the
page will refresh and the one will be classified as Unknown.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
The following figure shows the APs classified and displayed in different colors.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
613
VII-6-8 Event Log
Time and event log for all of the APs managed by Vigor router will be shown on this page. It is
userful for troubleshooting if required.
VII-6-9 Total Traffic
Such page will display the total traffic of data receiving and data transmitting for VigorAPs
managed by Vigor router.
614
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-6-10 Station Number
The total number of the wireless clients will be shown on this page, no matter what mode of
wireless connection (2.4G WLAN or 5G WLAN) used by wireless clients to access into Internet
through VigorAP.
VII-6-11 Load Balance
The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the
access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain
access points.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
AP Load Balance
It is used to determine the operation mode when the system
detects overload between access points.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
615
Disable – Disable the function of AP load balance.
By Station Number –The operation of load balance will be
executed based on the station number configured in this page.
It is used to limit the allowed number for the station
connecting to the access point. The purpose is to prevent lots
of stations connecting to access point at the same time and
causing traffic unbalanced. Please define the required station
number for WLAN (2.4GHz) and WLAN (5GHz) separately.
By Traffic – The operation of load balance will executed
according to the traffic configuration in this page.
By Station Number or Traffic - The operation of load balance
will be executed based on the station number or the traffic
configuration.
Station Number
Threshold
Set the number of stations as a threshold to activate AP load
balance.
Traffic Threshold
Upload Limit –Use the drop down list to specify the traffic
limit for uploading.
Download Limit – Use the drop down list to specify the traffic
limit for downloading.
Action When Threshold
Exceeded
Stop accepting new connections – When the number of
stations or the traffic reaches the threshold defined in this
web page, Vigor router will stop any new connection asked by
other access point.
Dissociate existing station by longest idel time - When the
access point is overload (e.g., reaching the limit of station
number or limit of network traffic), it will terminate the
network connection of the client’s station which is idle for a
longest time.
Dissociate existing station by worst signal strength if it is
less than - When the access point is overload (e.g., reaching
the limit of station number or limit of network traffic), it will
terminate the network connection of the client’s station with
the weakest signal.
Choose to Apply
Determine which AP shall be applied with the load balance.
All APs – All APs shall be applied with the load balance.
Specific APs – The function of load balance will be applied to
the AP specified in this field.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
616
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Application Notes
A-1 How to use AP Management function (in Vigor2926) to check AP status and
deploy WLAN profile
The administrator can manage the access points linked to Vigor2926.
1.
Open External Devices>>Access Point Devices. Vigor2926 will detect the AP
connecting to the router automatically and display as below:
In this case, a device named with AP800_00507F6EE4980 has been detected by Vigor
router.
2.
Click the WLAN Profile tab to get the following page. Check the box of the default
profile to make the Edit button be available. Then, click the Edit button.
3.
When the following configuration page appears, make the changes you want and check
Apply to All APs. Then, click Next to access into the next page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
617
Info
4.
618
Apply to All APs can automatically apply the settings on Default
profile to all of the access points registered to Vigor2926 later.
Hence, it is not necessary for you to manually apply wireless profiles
for APs respectively. Such feature will be convenient for people who
want to quickly deploy multiple Vigor APs in a large exhibition to
reach the goal of “plug and play” and “zero-configuration”.
The following page allows you to modify related settings for 2.4G SSID of managed AP.
Make the changes you want for 2.4G SSID. Click Next for next page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
5.
The following page is offered for you to modify related settings for 5G SSID of managed
AP. Continue to make any changes you want. After finished all of the changes, simply
click Finish.
6.
Now, the AP (represented with AP800_00507F6EE4980) detected by Vigor router will be
applied with the settings modified by Vigor router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
619
VII-7 Central Management (Switch)
Vigor router can manage lots of VigorSwitch devices connected to it. Through profile and
group settings, the administrator can execute configuration backup, restore for VigorSwitch
device, reboot the device or return to factory default settings of VigorSwitch at one time.
620
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
VII-7-1 Status
VII-7-1-1 Switch Status
Such page displays information, including Group, Switch name, IP address, model, System Up
Time, Port in Use, Clients, and Firmware Version of VigorSwitch connected to Vigor2926
series.
Before checking the switch status, go to Central Management>>External Device to enable
External Device Auto Discovery. Wait for the system to display available device(s).
Later, open Central Management>>Switch>>Status. Available VigorSwitch to be managed by
such router will be listed under the New Switch List.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
621
VigorSwitch listed below Status means the switch is managed by Viogr router; VigorSwitch
listed below New Switch List means it is not managed by Vigor router yet.
Available settings are explained as follows:
622
Item
Description
Group
Display the name link of the group.
You can click the link to modify the group settings if
required.
Switch Name
Display the name link of VigorSwitch.
You can click the name link to access into the switch profile.
IP Address
Display the IP address of VigorSwitch.
Model
Display the model name of VigorSwitch.
System Up Time
Display the time accumulated since this Vigorwitch is
powered up.
Port in Use
Display how many devices connected to VigorSwitch.
Clients
Display the number of LAN ports used in VigorSwitch.
Firmware Version
Display the firmware version that VigorSwitch current used.
Add New
Such button will appear only when there is more than one
switch connected to Vigor2926.
The one under New Switch List is allowed to be managed
under current used group. Simply click Add New.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
It will be better to group VigorSwitch devices with the same
model.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
623
VII-7-1-2 Switch Hierarchy
Such page displays the hierarchy of VigorSwitch(es) managed under Vigor2926.
Please note that, Shutdown Port is available for LAN port of VigorSwitch connects to a LAN
device. When it is checked, after clicking OK, the network connection between that device
and VigorSwitch will be terminated.
624
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-7-1-3 Detailed Info
Such page displays the general information (e.g., name, IP address, model name and MAC
address) for VigorSwitch(es) managed under Vigor2926.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
625
VII-7-2 Profile
This page will show general information, such as name, group, IP address, MAC address,
model and password of VigorSwitch only when it connects to Vigor2926 series. By clicking the
index number link, a profile setting page for that switch will be shown. Note that each profile
represents one VigorSwitch.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Index
Click the number link to access into the switch profile.
Note: Each connected VigorSwitch will have one setting
profile. If there are many switches connected to Vigor2926,
different index number will be used to represent different
VigorSwitch.
Name
Display the user defined name of VigorSwitch.
Group
Display the group name of VigorSwitch(es).
IP Address
Display the IP address of VigorSwitch.
MAC Address
Display the MAC address of VigorSwitch.
Model
Display the model name of VigorSwitch.
Password
Click it to display the account information including
username and password.
Delete Profile
Click the mark of “X” to delete the switch profile.
To edit profile for the selected switch:
1.
626
Click index number link (e.g. #1) to open the following page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
2.
Item
Description
Switch Name
Type a name for the Switch. The purpose of name is used for
identification.
It is useful when there are many VigorSwitch (same modes)
devices connecting to Vigor2926 seres.
Comment
Enter the text in such field if additional explanation for the
switch is required.
Trap Community
Name
Define the community name of SNMP trap between Vigor
router and VigorSwitch.
Copy configuration
from
Check the box to copy configuration from other device. Use
the drop down list to choose the one you need.
Note, if there is only one VigorSwitch connected and
managed by Vigor2926 series, then such field is unavailable.
Login Password
Display the original login password for the VigorSwitch.
However, if Group Password (in Central Management
>>Switch>>Group) is configured with other string, then such
field is not allowed to type any other password. And only the
group password will be shown, instead.
IP Address
Display the dynamic IP address (of the connected switch)
assigned by Vigor2926.
Save
Click it to save the settings.
Cancel
Click it to return to previous web page without saving the
setting changes.
Send to Device
Click it to transfer the configuration change (e.g, login
password, switch name, etc.) to the VigorSwitch
immediately.
After finished the settings, click VLAN tab to open following page.
Blank page due to LAN>>VLAN not configured previously:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
627
Setting page with LAN>>VLAN configured previously:
3.
628
Click Save to save VLAN configuration. Then, click Port tab to access the following page:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Description
If required, type a brief description to explain the device
connected to VigorSwitch via the LAN port.
Port Control
Vigor router can enable, disable or activate LAN port by
schedule.
Schedule
It is available when By Schedule is selected as Port Control.
Two sechule profiles can be specified here to force
Vigor3220 executing specific action to VigorSwitch.
Rate Limit
Set the rate limit of TX/RX packets for VigorSwitch to follow.
Ingress – Check the box to set rate limitation for RX packets.

Rate (Kbps) – Enter a value.
Egress – Check the box to set rate limitation for TX packets.

Rate (Kbps) - Enter a value.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
629
4.
Click OK to save the changes and then click Send to Device. Settings will be sent to
VigorSwitch immediately.
VII-7-3 Group
Different switches can be classified into different group(s). Specifc password for a group can
be defined and applied to every switch uder that group.
Through the common password setting, it is not necessary for the system administrator to
remember various login passwords to access into different VigorSwitch devices.
Click any index number link to create a new switch group.
630
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Group Name
Type a name as the group name. Different switches can be
classified within a group.
Group Password
Type a password that administrator can use to access into
the managed VigorSwitch connecting to Vigor2926 series. All
of the switches under the same group can be accessed into
via such group password.
Existing Switch
Display all of the VigorSwitch devices connecting to
Vigor2926.
Member Switch
Choose the switches you want to group and click the button
“>>” to move the selected devices onto the field of Member
Switch. Devices under Member Switch will be grouped under
such group profile.
OK
Click it to save the configuration.
Cancel
Click it to exit the setting page without saving any change.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
631
VII-7-4 Maintenance
Such feature can execute configuration backup, restore of selected VigorSwitch device(s) or
reboot the VigorSwitch devices remotely or reset the VigorSwitch devices with factory default
settings, without accessing into the web user interface of VigorSwitch respectively. It is
convenient for system administrator to manage VigorSwitch devices.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Selection Action
Action Type – Four actions including configuration backup,
configuration restore, remote reboot and factory reset are
offered by Vigor2926 to perform on VigorSwitch.
File/Path – Click the button to find out the required file.
632
Select Device
Existing Device –Display all of the VigorSwitch devices
connecting to Vigor2926.
Selected Device - Choose the switches you want to group
and click the button “>>” to move the existing devices onto
the field of Selected Device. Devices under Selected Device
will be applied with the action
OK
Click it to immediately perform the action (configuration
backup, configuration restore, remote reboot and factory
reset) on the device(s) listed in Selected Device.
Cancel
Click it to cancel the setting changes.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-7-5 Alert and Log
Alert and Log is helpful for the user to understand the abnormal situation occurred in
VigorSwitch quickly. When the system detects an error, information of abnormal condition
will be recorded to the database; or the system will send an alert to the specified device (via
e-mail or SMS) to warn the user.
VII-7-5-1 Alert Setup
This page is used to define the name of alert, level of alert (in color), and determine to
record the data in the database, or send a notification message to the user based on the
level.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Description
633
Alert and Log
Check it to enable this feature.
Alert Levels and Action
Level Name – Define names for representing the severity of
alert event. The default names for index 1 to index 4 will be
shown on each setting box. Index 5 to index 8 are reserved
for user-defined.
Color – Define the color for each level of alert. However, the
color of index 1 is No color and unable to be changed.
Create Log – Check the box to create log of alert. Such log
will be seen on Alert Logs page. Note that No Log for index 1;
and log for index 2 is enabled in default.
Send Notification – If it is checked, Vigor router’s system will
send notification to specified phone number via SMS.
SMS/Email Service Object – Choose the SMS object which
will get the SMS from Vigor router. Up to 4 objects can be
selected at one time.
VII-7-5-2 Switch and Port Setup
This page defines enabling switch alert and/or port alert for each switch.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Switch Alert
Enable – Check it to enable alert mechanism for VigorSwitch.
Port Alert
Enable - Check it to enable alert mechanism for each port of
VigorSwitch.
Click the Switch Name link (e.g., G2280 in this case) to get detailed settings.
634
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Switch Alert
When VigorSwitch encounters the following alert events,
alert mechanism will perform corresponding actions based
on the servity level of the incident encountererd.
Incident – At present, Cold Start, Warm Start, Disconnect
and Reconnect will be treated as alert events.
Level – Specify the severity level for each incident. To
defined more severity level for choosing in this page, simply
open Central Management>>Switch>>Alert and Log and
click Alert Setup.
Port Alert
Port – Available Ethernet ports for the selected VigorSwitch
(e.g., G2280 in this case) will be shown on this page. Each
port can be confgiured with different alert level for diffent
alert event.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
635
VII-7-5-3 Alert Logs
The user can get the information by filtering the collective information based on the
conditions specified in this page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
636
Item
Description
Select Columns to Filter
Logs
Level – The alert can be divided into four levels, No Alert,
Minor Alert, Moderate Alert and Major Alert. Check the
one(s) you want to check in Alert Logs list.
Type – Check the type (switch / port) of the log to be
displayed in Alert Logs list.
Switch – Switch(es) connecting to Vigor router will be shown
in this area. Click the one you need.
OK – Click it to save the configuration.
Log related to the items selected above will be shown in
Alert Logs list.
Alert Logs
This area displays logs (level name, time, type, switch, port,
and incident) related to VigorSwitch managed by Vigor
router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-7-6 Database Setup
The database of switch can be used to record alert logs and traffic history. This page is used
to determine if it is necessary for the user information to be recorded in the database of
switch.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable Database to Record
alert logs and traffic
history
Check the box to make the database (in USB disk) to record
the alert logs and traffic history.
Notification and Action when Storage Exceeded
Notification
Don’t send notification – No notification will be sent out
when there is no capacity for storage in USB.
Send notification – A notification will be sent out when there
is no capacity for storage in USB.
Action
Stop recording user information – When the capacity of log
is full, the system will stop recording.
Backup and clean up all user infor, and start a new record
- Only the newest events will be recorded by the system.
After finished the settings, click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
637
VII-7-7 Support List
This page lists all models of VigorSwitch which can be managed by Vigor2926 via Central
Management>>Switch.
638
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VII-8 Central Management (External Devices)
Vigor router can be used to connect with many types of external devices. In order to control
or manage the external devices conveniently, open External Devices to make detailed
configuration.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
External Device Syslog
Check this box to display information of the detected device
on Syslog.
External Device Auto
Discovery
Check this box to detect the external device automatically
and display on this page.
From this web page, check the box of External Device Auto Discovery. Later, all the
available devices will be displayed in this page with icons and corresponding information. You
can change the device name if required or remove the information for off-line device
whenever you want.
When you finished the configuration, click OK to save it.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
639
Info
640
Only DrayTek products can be detected by this function.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part VIII Others
Define objects such as IP address, service type,
keyword, file extension and others. These
pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.
USB device connected on Vigor router can be
regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of
Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and
read data stored in USB storage disk with
different applications.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
641
VIII-1 Objects Settings
Define objects such as IP address, service type, keyword, file extension and others. These
pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.
642
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
VIII-1-1 IP Object
For IPs in a range and service ports in a limited range usually will be applied in configuring
router’s settings, therefore we can define them with objects and bind them with groups for
using conveniently. Later, we can select that object/group that can apply it. For example, all
the IPs in the same department can be defined with an IP object (a range of IP address).
You can set up to 192 sets of IP Objects with different conditions.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
643
Available settings are explained as follows:
644
Item
Description
View
Use the drop down list to choose a type (Single Address,
Range Address, Subnet Address, Mac Address or all) that IP
object with the selected type will be shown on this page.
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Search
Type a string of the IP object that you want to search.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name
Display the name of the object profile.
Address
Display the IP address configured for the object profile.
Export IP Object
Usually, the IP objects can be created one by one through
the web page of Objects>>IP Object. However, to a user
who wants to save more time in bulk creating IP objects, a
quick method is offered by Vigor router to modify the IP
objects with a single file, a CSV file.
All of the IP objects (or the template) can be exported as a
file by clicking Download. Then the user can open the CSV
file through Microsoft Excel and modify all the IP objects at
the same time.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Backup the current IP Objects with a CSV file – Click it to
backup current IP objecsts as a CSV file. Such file can be
restored for future use.
Download the default CSV template to edit – After clicking
it, press Download to store the default CSM template (a table
without any input data) to your hard disk.
Download – Download the CSV file from Vigor router and
store in your hard disk.
Restore IP Object
Select – Click it to specify a predefined CSV file.
Restore – Import the selected CSV file onto Vigor router.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Interface
Choose a proper interface.
For example, the Direction setting in Edit Filter Rule will
ask you specify IP or IP range for WAN or LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN
or any IP address. If you choose LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN as the
Interface here, and choose LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN as the
direction setting in Edit Filter Rule, then all the IP addresses
specified with LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN interface will be opened
for you to choose in Edit Filter Rule page.
Address Type
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Determine the address type for the IP address.
Select Single Address if this object contains one IP address
only.
Select Range Address if this object contains several IPs
within a range.
Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for
645
IP address.
Select Any Address if this object contains any IP address.
Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.
4.
646
MAC Address
Enter the MAC address of the network card which will be
controlled.
Start IP Address
Enter the start IP address for Single Address type.
End IP Address
Enter the end IP address if the Range Address type is
selected.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask if the Subnet Address type is selected.
Invert Selection
If it is checked, all the IP addresses except the ones listed
above will be applied later while it is chosen.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. Below is
an example of IP objects settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VIII-1-2 IP Group
This page allows you to bind several IP objects into one IP group.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name
Display the name of the group profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
647
Available settings are explained as follows:
3.
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Interface
Choose WAN, LAN or Any to display all the available IP
objects with the specified interface.
Available IP Objects
All the available IP objects with the specified interface
chosen above will be shown in this box.
Selected IP Objects
Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
VIII-1-3 IPv6 Object
You can set up to 64 sets of IPv6 Objects with different conditions.
Available settings are explained as follows:
648
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name
Display the name of the object profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
3.
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Address Type
Determine the address type for the IPv6 address.
Select Single Address if this object contains one IPv6 address
only.
Select Range Address if this object contains several IPv6s
within a range.
Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for
IPv6 address.
Select Any Address if this object contains any IPv6 address.
Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.
Mac Address
Enter the MAC address of the network card which will be
controlled.
Start IP Address
Enter the start IP address for Single Address type. Or, click
Select to specify an IP address.
End IP Address
Enter the end IP address if the Range Address type is
selected. Or, click Select to specify an IP address.
Prefix Length
Enter the number (e.g., 64) for the prefix length of IPv6
address.
Invert Selection
If it is checked, all the IPv6 addresses except the ones listed
above will be applied later while it is chosen.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
649
VIII-1-4 IPv6 Group
This page allows you to bind several IPv6 objects into one IPv6 group.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name
Display the name of the group profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
650
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
3.
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Available IPv6
Objects
All the available IPv6 objects with the specified interface
chosen above will be shown in this box.
Selected IPv6 Objects
Click >> button to add the selected IPv6 objects in this box.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
VIII-1-5 Service Type Object
You can set up to 96 sets of Service Type Objects with different conditions.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name
Display the name of the object profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
651
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
652
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Protocol
Specify the protocol(s) which this profile will apply to.
Source/Destination
Port
Source Port and the Destination Port columns are available
for TCP/UDP protocol. It can be ignored for other protocols.
The filter rule will filter out any port number.
(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
one port; when the first and last values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this profile.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
all the ports except the port defined here; when the first and
last values are different, it indicates that all the ports
except the range defined here are available for this service
type.
(>) – the port number greater than this value is available.
(<) – the port number less than this value is available for this
profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
3.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
VIII-1-6 Service Type Group
This page allows you to bind several service types into one group.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name
Display the name of the group profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
653
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Group column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
3.
654
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Available Service
Type Objects
All the available service objects that you have added on
Objects Setting>>Service Type Object will be shown in this
box.
Selected Service Type
Objects
Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VIII-1-7 Keyword Object
You can set 200 keyword object profiles for choosing as black /white list in CSM >>URL Web
Content Filter Profile.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name
Display the name of the object profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
655
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
3.
656
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for this profile, e.g., game. Maximum 15
characters are allowed.
Contents
Enter the content for such profile. For example, type
gambling as Contents. When you browse the webpage, the
page with gambling information will be watched out and be
passed/blocked based on the configuration on Firewall
settings.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VIII-1-8 Keyword Group
This page allows you to bind several keyword objects into one group. The keyword groups set
here will be chosen as black /white list in CSM >>URL /Web Content Filter Profile.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name
Display the name of the group profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
657
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for this group. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Available Keyword
Objects
You can gather keyword objects from Keyword Object page
within one keyword group. All the available Keyword
objects that you have created will be shown in this box.
Selected Keyword
Objects
3.
Click
this box.
button to add the selected Keyword objects in
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
VIII-1-9 File Extension Object
This page allows you to set eight profiles which will be applied in CSM>>URL Content Filter.
All the files with the extension names specified in these profiles will be processed according to
the chosen action.
Available settings are explained as follows:
658
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all profiles.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name
Display the name of the object profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Profile column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
3.
Item
Description
Profile Name
Type a name for this profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 7 characters.
Type a name for such profile and check all the items of file extension that will be
processed in the router. Finally, click OK to save this profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
659
VIII-1-10 SMS/Mail Service Object
SMS Service Object
This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert
Service.
Each item is explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all of the settings and return to factory default
settings.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Profile
Display the name for such SMS profile.
SMS Provider
Display the service provider which offers SMS service.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the SMS Provider tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for
configuration in details.
660
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Profile Name
Type a name for such SMS profile. The maximum length of
the name you can set is 31 characters.
Service Provider
Use the drop down list to specify the service provider which
offers SMS service.
Username
Type a user name that the sender can use to register to
selected SMS provider.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 31
characters.
Password
Type a password that the sender can use to register to
selected SMS provider.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 31
characters.
Quota
Enter the number of the credit that you purchase from the
service provider chosen above.
Note that one credit equals to one SMS text message on the
standard route.
Sending Interval
To avoid quota being exhausted soon, type time interval for
sending the SMS.
3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
661
Customized SMS Service
Vigor router offers several SMS service provider to offer the SMS service. However, if your
service provider cannot be found from the service provider list, simply use Index 9 and Index
10 to make customized SMS service. The profile name for Index 9 and Index 10 are fixed.
You can click the number (e.g., #9) under Index column for configuration in details.
Available settings are explained as follows:
662
Item
Description
Profile Name
Display the name of this profile. It cannot be modified.
Service Provider
Enter the website of the service provider.
Enter the URL string in the box under the filed of Service
Provider. You have to contact your SMS provider to obtain
the exact URL string.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Username
Type a user name that the sender can use to register to
selected SMS provider.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 31
characters.
Password
Type a password that the sender can use to register to
selected SMS provider.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 31
characters.
Quota
Enter the total number of the messages that the router will
send out.
Sending Interval
Enter the shortest time interval for the system to send SMS.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Mail Service Object
This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert
Service.
Each item is explained as follows:
Item
Description
Set to Factory Default
Clear all of the settings and return to factory default
settings.
Index
Display the profile number that you can configure.
Profile
Display the name for such mail server profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
663
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Click the Mail Server tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for
configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
664
Item
Description
Profile Name
Type a name for such mail service profile. The maximum
length of the name you can set is 31 characters.
SMTP Server
Enter the IP address of the mail server.
SMTP Port
Enter the port number for SMTP server.
Sender Address
Enter the e-mail address of the sender.
Use SSL
Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for some
e-mail server uses https as the transmission method.
Authentication
The mail server must be authenticated with the correct
username and password to have the right of sending message
out. Check the box to enable the function.
Username – Type a name for authentication. The maximum
length of the name you can set is 31 characters.
Password – Type a password for authentication. The
maximum length of the password you can set is 31
characters.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Sending Interval
Define the interval for the system to send the SMS out.
3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
VIII-1-11 Notification Object
This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert
Service.
You can set an object with different monitoring situation.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Open Object Setting>>Notification Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index
column for configuration in details.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
665
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Profile Name
Type a name for such notification profile. The maximum
length of the name you can set is 15 characters.
Category
Display the types that will be monitored.
Status
Display the status for the category. You can check the box to
be monitored.
For example, the check box of CPE firmware upgrade fail
under the category of Central VPN Management is checked.
Once such profile is enabled, Vigor router system will send
out notification to the recipient via SMS.
3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
666
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VIII-1-12 String Object
This page allows you to set string profiles which will be applied in route policy (domain name
selection for destination), hotspot web portal and etc.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Index no.
Click it to open the following page for adding a new string
object.
Set to Factory Default
Click it to clear all of the settings in this page.
Index
Display the number link of the string profile.
String
Display the string defined.
Clear
Choose the string that you want to remove. Then click this
check box to delete the selected string.
Below shows an example to apply string object (in Route Policy):
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
667
VIII-1-13 Country Object
The country object profile can determine which country/countries shall be blocked by the
Vigor router’s Firewall.
The country object, by grouping IP addresses for multiple countries, can be applied by other
functions such as router policy destination (refer to the following figure for example).
668
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:
1. Open Object Setting>>Country Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index
column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Name
Type a name for such profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 15 characters.
Available Country /
Selected Country
Select any country from Available Country. Click >> to move
the selected country and place on Selected Country.
Note that one country profile can contain 1 up to 16
countries.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
669
3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
670
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Application Notes
A-1 How to Send a Notification to Specified Phone Number via SMS Service in
WAN Disconnection
Follow the steps listed below:
1.
Log into the web user interface of Vigor router.
2.
Configure relational objects first. Open Object Settings>>SMS/Mail Server Object to
get the following page.
Index 1 to Index 8 allows you to choose the built-in SMS service provider. If the SMS
service provider is not on the list, you can configure Index 9 and Index 10 to add the new
service provider to Vigor router.
3.
Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure the SMS Provider
setting. In the following page, type the username and password and set the quota that
the router can send the message out.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
671
672
4.
After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. Now you have finished
the configuration of the SMS Provider profile setting.
5.
Open Object Settings>>Notification Object to configure the event conditions of the
notification.
6.
Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure conditions for sending
the SMS. In the following page, type the name of the profile and check the Disconnected
and Reconnected boxes for WAN to work in concert with the topic of this paper.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
7.
After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. You have finished the
configuration of the notification object profile setting.
8.
Now, open Application >> SMS / Mail Alert Service. Use the drop down list to choose
SMS Provider and the Notify Profile (specify the time of sending SMS). Then, type the
phone number in the field of Recipient (the one who will receive the SMS).
9.
Click OK to save the settings. Later, if one of the WAN connections fails in your router,
the system will send out SMS to the phone number specified. If the router has only one
WAN interface, the system will send out SMS to the phone number while reconnecting
the WAN interface successfully.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
673
Remark: How the customize the SMS Provider
Choose one of the Index numbers (9 or 10) allowing you to customize the SMS Provider. In the
web page, type the URL string of the SMS provider and type the username and password. After
clicking OK, the new added SMS provider will be added and will be available for you to specify
for sending SMS out.
674
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VIII-2 USB Application
USB device connected on Vigor router can be regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of
Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB storage disk with
different applications. After setting the configuration in USB Application, you can type the IP
address of the Vigor router and username/password created in USB Application>>USB User
Management on the client software. Then, the client can use the FTP site (USB storage disk)
or share the SMB service through Vigor router.
Info
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
USB ports on Vigor router are allowed to connect to USB modem. Models of
the modems supported by Vigor router can be seen from USB
Application>>Modem Support List. For network connection via USB
modem, refer to WAN>>Internet Access and WAN>>General Setup for
detailed information.
675
Web User Interface
VIII-2-1 USB General Settings
This page will determine the number of concurrent FTP connection, default charset for FTP
server and enable SMB service. At present, the Vigor router can support USB storage disk with
formats of FAT16 and FAT32 only. Therefore, before connecting the USB storage disk into the
Vigor router, please make sure the memory format for the USB storage disk is FAT16 or FAT32.
It is recommended for you to use FAT32 for viewing the filename completely (FAT16 cannot
support long filename).
Available settings are explained as follows:
676
Item
Description
General Settings
Simultaneous FTP Connections - This field is used to specify
the quantity of the FTP sessions. The router allows up to 6
FTP sessions connecting to USB storage disk at one time.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Default Charset - At present, Vigor router supports four
types of character sets. Default Charset is for English based
file name.
SMB File Sharing Service
Click Enable to invoke SMB service (file sharing) via the
router.
Access Mode
LAN Only – Users coming from internet cannot connect to the
SMB server of the router.
LAN And WAN - Both LAN and WAN users can access SMB
server of the router.
NetBios Name Service
For the NetBios service of USB storage disk, you have to
specify a workgroup name and a host name. A workgroup
name must not be the same as the host name. The workgroup
name can have as many as 15 characters and the host name
can have as many as 23 characters. Both them cannot
contain any of the following--- ; : " < > * + = \ | ?.
Workgroup Name – Type a name for the workgroup.
Host Name – Enter the host name for the router.
Printer Server
Enable – Click it to make Vigor router act as a printer server
(with USB printer attached).
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
VIII-2-2 USB User Management
This page allows you to set profiles for FTP/SMB users. Any user who wants to access into the
USB storage disk must type the same username and password configured in this page. Before
adding or modifying settings in this page, please insert a USB storage disk first. Otherwise, an
error message will appear to warn you.
Click index number to access into configuration page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
677
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check it to activate this profile (account) for FTP service or
SMB file sharing service. Later, the user can use the
username specified in this page to login into FTP server.
Username
Enter the username for FTP/SMB users for accessing into FTP
server (USB storage disk). Be aware that users cannot access
into USB storage disk in anonymity. Later, you can open FTP
client software and type the username specified here for
accessing into USB storage disk. The length of the name is
limited to 11 characters.
Note: “Admin” could not be typed here as username, for the
word is specified for accessing into web pages of Vigor router
only. Also, it is reserved for FTP firmware upgrade usage.
Note: FTP Passive mode is not supported by Vigor Router.
Please disable the mode on the FTP client.
Password
Enter the password for FTP/SMB users for accessing FTP
server. Later, you can open FTP client software and type the
password specified here for accessing into USB storage disk.
The length of the password is limited to 11 characters.
Confirm Password
Enter the password again to make confirmation.
Home Folder
It determines the folder for the client to access into.
The user can enter a directory name in this field. Then, after
clicking OK, the router will create the specific/new folder in
the USB storage disk. In addition, if the user types “/” here,
he/she can access into all of the disk folders and files in USB
storage disk.
Note: When write protect status for the USB storage disk is
ON, you cannot type any new folder name in this field. Only
“/” can be used in such case.
to open the following dialog to add any
You can click
new folder which can be specified as the Home Folder.
678
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Access Rule
It determines the authority for such profile. Any user, who
uses such profile for accessing into USB storage disk, must
follow the rule specified here.
File – Check the items (Read, Write and Delete) for such
profile.
Directory –Check the items (List, Create and Remove) for
such profile.
Before you click OK, you have to insert a USB storage disk into the USB interface of the Vigor
router. Otherwise, you cannot save the configuration.
VIII-2-3 File Explorer
File Explorer offers an easy way for users to view and manage the content of USB storage disk
connected on Vigor router.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Refresh
Back
Create
Current Path
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Click this icon to refresh files list.
Click this icon to return to the upper directory.
Click this icon to add a new folder.
Display current folder.
679
Upload
Click this button to upload the selected file to the USB
storage disk. The uploaded file in the USB diskette can be
shared for other user through FTP.
VIII-2-4 USB Device Status
This page is to monitor the status for USB device connecting to Vigor router. . In addition, the
status of the USB modem or USB printer or USB sensor connecting to Vigor router can be
checked from such page. If you want to remove the storage disk from USB port in router,
please click Disconnect USB Disk first. And then, remove the USB device later.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Connection Status
If there is no USB device connected to Vigor router, “No Disk
Connected” will be shown here.
Disk Capacity
It displays the total capacity of the USB storage disk.
Free Capacity
It displays the free space of the USB storage disk. Click
Refresh at any time to get new status for free capacity.
Index
It displays the number of the client which connects to FTP
server.
IP Address
It displays the IP address of the user’s host which connects to
the FTP server.
Username
It displays the username that user uses to login to the FTP
server.
When you insert USB device into the Vigor router, the system will start to find out such device
within several seconds.
680
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VIII-2-5 Temperature Sensor
A USB Thermometer is now available. It complements your installed DrayTek router
installations which will help you monitor the server or data communications room
environment and notify you if the server room or data communications room is overheating.
During summer in particular, it is important to ensure that your server or data
communications equipment are not overheating due to cooling system failures.
The inclusion of a USB thermometer in compatible Vigor routers will continuously monitor the
temperature of its environment. When a pre-determined threshold is reached you will be
alerted by either an email or SMS so you can undertake appropriate action.
Temperature Sensor Settings
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
681
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Display Settings
Temperature Calibration - Type a value used for
correcting the temperature error.
Temperature Unit - Choose the display unit of the
temperature. There are two types for you to choose.
Alarm Settings
Enable Syslog Alarm - The temperature log will be
recorded on Syslog if it is enabled.
Upper temperature limit/Lower temperature limit Enter the upper limit and lower limit for the system to send
out temperature alert.
Temperature Chart
Below shows an example of temperature graph:
682
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
VIII-2-6 Modem Support List
Such page provides the information about the brand name and model name of the USB
modems which are supported by Vigor router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
683
VIII-2-7 SMB Client Support List
SMB Client Support List provides the test status information for applications with file sharing
operated under different platforms.
684
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Application Notes
A-1 How can I get the files from USB storage device connecting to Vigor router?
Files on USB storage device can be reviewed by opening USB Applicaiton>>File Explorer. If it
is necessary for you to delete, copy files on the device or write, paste files to the devcie, it
must be done through SMB server or FTP server.
SMB service is based on the original USB FTP service. You will need to setup USB FTP first. We
would like to give brief instructions on USB FTP setup here.
1.
Plug the USB device to the USB port on the router. Make sure Disk Connected appears on
the Connection Status as the figure shown below:
2.
Then, please open USB Application >> USB General Settings to enable SMB service.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
685
686
3.
Setup a user account for the FTP service by using USB Application >>USB User
Management. Click Enable to enable FTP/SMB User account. Here we add a new
account "user1" and assign authorities “Read”, “Write” and “List” to it.
4.
Click OK to save the configuration.
5.
Make sure the FTP service is running properly. Please open a browser and type
ftp://192.168.1.1. Use the account "user1" to login.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
6.
When the following screen appears, it means the FTP service is running properly.
7.
Return to USB Application >> USB Disk Status. The information for FTP server will be
shown as below.
Now, users in LAN of Vigor2926 can access into the USB storage device by typing
ftp://192.168.1.1 on any browser. They can add or remove files / directories,
depending on the Access Rule for FTP account settings in USB Application >>USB User
Management.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
687
This page is left blank.
688
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part IX Troubleshooting
This part will guide you to solve abnormal situations if
you cannot access into the Internet after installing the
router and finishing the web configuration.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
689
IX-1 Diagnostics
This section will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet
after installing the router and finishing the web configuration. Please follow sections below to
check your basic installation status stage by stage.

Checking if the hardware status is OK or not.

Checking if the network connection settings on your computer are OK or not.

Pinging the router from your computer.

Checking if the ISP settings are OK or not.

Backing to factory default setting if necessary.
If all above stages are done and the router still cannot run normally, it is the time for you to
contact your dealer or DrayTek technical support for advanced help.
690
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Web User Interface
Fisrt, take a look at the menu items under Diagnostics. Diagnostic Tools provide a useful way
to view or diagnose the status of your Vigor router.
IX-1-1 Dial-out Triggering
Click Diagnostics and click Dial-out Triggering to open the web page. The internet
connection (e.g., PPPoE) is triggered by a package sending from the source IP address.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Decoded Format
It shows the source IP address (local), destination IP
(remote) address, the protocol and length of the package.
Refresh
Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
691
IX-1-2 Routing Table
Click Diagnostics and click Routing Table to open the web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
692
Item
Description
Refresh
Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IX-1-3 ARP Cache Table
Click Diagnostics and click ARP Cache Table to view the content of the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) cache held in the router. The table shows a mapping between an
Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IP address.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Show
Specify LAN and VLAN to display related information.
In default, this page will display all of the information
about LAN and VLAN.
Refresh
Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
693
IX-1-4 IPv6 Neighbour Table
The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IPv6
address. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address
conflicts, etc.
Click Diagnostics and click IPv6 Neighbour Table to open the web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
694
Item
Description
Refresh
Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IX-1-5 DHCP Table
The facility provides information on IP address assignments. This information is helpful in
diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc.
Click Diagnostics and click DHCP Table to open the web page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Index
It displays the connection item number.
IP Address
It displays the IP address assigned by this router for specified
PC.
MAC Address
It displays the MAC address for the specified PC that DHCP
assigned IP address for it.
Leased Time
It displays the leased time of the specified PC.
HOST ID
It displays the host ID name of the specified PC.
Refresh
Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
695
IX-1-6 NAT Sessions Table
Click Diagnostics and click NAT Sessions Table to open the list page.
Available settings are explained as follows:
696
Item
Description
Private IP:Port
It indicates the source IP address and port of local PC.
#Pseudo Port
It indicates the temporary port of the router used for NAT.
Peer IP:Port
It indicates the destination IP address and port of remote
host.
Interface
It displays the representing number for different interface.
Refresh
Click it to reload the page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IX-1-7 DNS Cache Table
Click Diagnostics and click DNS Cache Table to open the web page.
The record of domain Name and the mapping IP address for answering the DNS query from
LAN will be stored on Vigor router’s Cache temporarily and displayed on Diagnostics >> DNS
Cache Table.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Clear
Click this link to remove the result on the window.
Refresh
Click it to reload the page.
When an entry’s TTL is
larger than….
Check the box the type the value of TTL (time to live) for
each entry. Click OK to enable such function.
It means when the TTL value of each DNS query reaches the
threshold of the value specified here, the corresponding
record will be deleted from router’s Cache automatically.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
697
IX-1-8 Ping Diagnosis
Click Diagnostics and click Ping Diagnosis to open the web page.
or
Available settings are explained as follows:
698
Item
Description
IPV4 /IPV6
Choose the interface for such function.
Ping through
Use the drop down list to choose the WAN/LTE interface that
you want to ping through or choose Auto to be determined
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
by the router automatically.
Ping to
Use the drop down list to choose the destination that you
want to ping.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the Host/IP that you want to ping.
Ping IPv6 Address
Enter the IPv6 address that you want to ping.
Run
Click this button to start the ping work. The result will be
displayed on the screen.
Clear
Click this link to remove the result on the window.
IX-1-9 Data Flow Monitor
This page displays the running procedure for the IP address monitored and refreshes the data
in an interval of several seconds. The IP address listed here is configured in Bandwidth
Management. You have to enable IP bandwidth limit and IP session limit before invoking Data
Flow Monitor. If not, a notification dialog box will appear to remind you enabling it.
Click Diagnostics and click Data Flow Monitor to open the web page. You can click IP Address,
TX rate, RX rate or Session link for arranging the data display.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
699
Available settings are explained as follows:
700
Item
Description
Enable Data Flow Monitor
Check this box to enable this function.
Refresh Seconds
Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of
refreshing data flow that will be done by the system
automatically.
Refresh
Click this link to refresh this page manually.
Index
Display the number of the data flow.
IP Address
Display the IP address of the monitored device.
TX rate (kbps)
Display the transmission speed of the monitored device.
RX rate (kbps)
Display the receiving speed of the monitored device.
Sessions
Display the session number that you specified in Limit
Session web page.
Action
Block - can prevent specified PC accessing into Internet
within 5 minutes.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Unblock –The device with the IP address will be blocked for
five minutes. The remaining time will be shown on the
session column. Click it to cancel the IP address blocking.
APP QoS
Use the drop down list to change the priority in data
transmission for the specified IP address (host).
Current /Peak/Speed
Current means current transmission rate and receiving rate
for WAN interface.
Peak means the highest peak value detected by the router in
data transmission.
Speed means line speed specified in WAN>>General Setup.
If you do not specify any rate at that page, here will display
Auto for instead.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
701
IX-1-10 Traffic Graph
Click Diagnostics and click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 Bandwidth, Sessions, Ping Detect, daily or weekly for viewing
different traffic graph. Click Reset to zero the accumulated RX/TX (received and transmitted)
data of WAN. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time.
The horizontal axis represents time. Yet the vertical axis has different meanings. For
WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/LTE/WAN4 Bandwidth chart, the numbers displayed on vertical axis
represent the numbers of the transmitted and received packets in the past.
For Sessions chart, the numbers displayed on vertical axis represent the numbers of the NAT
sessions during the past.
702
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IX-1-11 VPN Graph
Click Diagnostics and click VPN Graph to open the web page.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
703
IX-1-12 Trace Route
Click Diagnostics and click Trace Route to open the web page. This page allows you to trace
the routes from router to the host. Simply type the IP address of the host in the box and click
Run. The result of route trace will be shown on the screen.
or
Available settings are explained as follows:
704
Item
Description
IPv4 / IPv6
Click one of them to display corresponding information for it.
Trace through
Use the drop down list to choose the interface that you want
to ping through.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Protocol
Use the drop down list to choose the protocol that you want
to ping through.
Host/IP Address
It indicates the IP address of the host.
Trace Host/IP Address
It indicates the IPv6 address of the host.
Run
Click this button to start route tracing work.
Clear
Click this link to remove the result on the window.
IX-1-13 Syslog Explorer
Such page provides real-time syslog and displays the information on the screen.
For Web Syslog
This page displays the time and message for User/Firewall/call/WAN/VPN settings. You can
check Enable Web Syslog, specify the type of Syslog and choose the display mode you want.
Later, the event of Syslog with specified type will be shown for your reference.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable Web Syslog
Check this box to enable the function of Web Syslog.
Syslog Type
Use the drop down list to specify a type of Syslog to be
displayed.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
705
Export
Click this link to save the data as a file.
Refresh
Click this link to refresh this page manually.
Clear
Click this link to clear information on this page.
Display Mode
There are two modes for you to choose.
Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of syslog is full,
the system will stop recording.
Always record the new event – only the newest events will
be recorded by the system.
Time
Display the time of the event occurred.
Message
Display the information for each event.
For USB Syslog
This page displays the syslog recorded on the USB storage disk.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Time
Display the time of the event occurred.
Log Type
Display the type of the record.
Message
Display the information for each event.
IX-1-14 IPv6 TSPC Status
IPv6 TSPC status web page could help you to diagnose the connection status of TSPC.
If TSPC has configured properly, the router will display the following page when the user
connects to tunnel broker successfully.
706
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Refresh
Click this link to refresh this page manually.
IX-1-15 High Availability Status
All of the routers under the same DARP (DrayTek Address resolution Protocol) group can be
viewed in such page. However, only partial information of the router status will be displayed.
Vigor routers with the following condtions will be treated as the same DARP group:

HA enabled

the same Redundancy method

the same Group ID

the same Authentication Key

the same Management Interface
Open Diagnostics>>High Availablity Status.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Details/Back
Details – Click it to display detailed status about HA
configuration for the selected router.
Back – Return to previous page.
HA Setup
Click it to open Applications>>High Availability for modifying
the configuration.
Renew
Click it to get the newest status of other router (except the
primary router).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
707
Refresh
Click it to get the newest status of the primary router.
Status
“!” means an error has occurred. Refer to Detailed
information and modify HA settings if required.
Router Name
Display the name of the device.
IPv4
Display the IPv4 address of such router.
State
“Down” means the function of HA is disabled.
“Primary” means such router stands for the primary router in
HA.
“Secondary” means such router stands for the secondary
router in HA.
Stable
“No” means the primary router has not been determined yet.
DARP is negotiating.
“YES” means the primary router is determined.
WAN
“At Least One UP” means that at least one WAN interface
connects to Internet.
“All WANs Down” means that no WAN interface connects to
Internet.
Config Sync Status
“Not Ready” means configuration synchronization is unable to
execute, or configuration synchronization is disabled, or
synchronization initialization executes but fails.
“Ready” means configuration synchronization is ready to
execute.
“Progressing” means configuration synchronization is
operating.
“Fail” means configuration synchronization executed and
failed; or wrong model name.
“Equal” means the corresponding settings are equal to the
primary router.
Cached Time
Display the time period since the last time to get the newest
status of other router (except the primary router).
Cick the link of Status, Router Name, IPv4 or Details, the following page will be displayed on
the screen.
708
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IX-1-16 Authentication Information
Authentication User List
Such page displays authentication jobs made by Internal RADIUS or Local 802.1X.
When the mouse cursor moves to the name link under User Name, the connection message
(including authentication failed information) about internal RADIUS or local 802.1X service
will be shown by a popped up dialog box.
Authentication Information Log
This page will display the complete authentication log information.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Enable
Check the box to enable such function.
Refresh
Click it to update current page.
Clear
Click it to remove all of the records.
Syslog Type
Specify RADIUS, 802.1X or All to display related authentication
information log.
Display Mode
Choose the mode you want to display the related information
on the following table.

Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of CVM log is
full, the system will stop recording.

Always record the new event – only the newest events
will be recorded by the system.
Time
Display the time the user authenticated by Vigor2926 series.
Message
Display authentication information done by Vigor2926 series.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
709
IX-1-17 DoS Flood Table
This page can display content of IP connection detected by DoS Flooding Defense mechanism.
It is useful and convenient for network engineers (e.g., MIS engineer) to inspect the network
environment to find out if there is any abnormal connection.
Information of IP traced and destination port used for SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood
attacks will be detected and shown respectively on different pages.
Moreover, IP address detected and suspected to attack the network system can be blocked
shortly by clicking the Block button shown on pages of SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood.
Info
710
- means there is something wrong (e.g., attacking the
The icon system) with that IP address.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IX-1-18 Route Policy Diagnosis
With the analysis done by such page, possible path (static route, routing table or policy route)
of the packets sent out of the router can be traced.
or
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item
Description
Mode
Analyze a single packet – Choose such mode to make Vigor
router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route
policy.
Analyze multiple packets… - Choose such mode to make Vigor
router analyze how multiple packets in a specified file will be
sent by a route policy.
Packet Information
Specify the nature of the packets to be analyzed by Vigor
router.
ICMP/UDP/TCP/ANY- Specify a protocol for diagnosis.
Src IP – Type an IP address as the source IP.
Dst IP – Type an IP address as the destination IP.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
711
Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination
port.
Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The
analyzed result will be shown on the page..
Input File
It is available when Analyze multiple packets.. is selected as
Mode.
Select – Click the download link to get a blank example file.
Then, click such button to select that blank “.csv” file for
saving the result of analysis.
Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The
analyzed result will be shown on the page. If required, click
export analysis to export the result as a file.
Note that the analysis was based on the current
"load-balance/route policy" settings, we do not guarantee it
will be 100% the same as the real case.
712
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IX-2 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not
Follow the steps below to verify the hardware status.
1.
Check the power line and WLAN/LAN cable connections.
Refer to “I-2 Hardware Installation” for details.
2.
Turn on the router. Make sure the ACT LED blink once per second and the correspondent
LAN LED is bright.
3.
If not, it means that there is something wrong with the hardware status. Simply back to
“I-2 Hardware Installation” to execute the hardware installation again. And then, try
again.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
713
IX-3 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your
Computer Is OK or Not
Sometimes the link failure occurs due to the wrong network connection settings. After trying
the above section, if the link is stilled failed, please do the steps listed below to make sure
the network connection settings is OK.
For Windows
Info
714
The example is based on Windows 7. As to the examples for other operation
systems, please refer to the similar steps or find support notes in
www.DrayTek.com.
1.
Open All Programs>>Getting Started>>Control Panel. Click Network and Sharing
Center.
2.
In the following window, click Change adapter settings.
3.
Icons of network connection will be shown on the window. Right-click on Local Area
Connection and click on Properties.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
4.
Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) and then click Properties.
5.
Select Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address
automatically. Finally, click OK.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
715
For Mac OS
716
1.
Double click on the current used Mac OS on the desktop.
2.
Open the Application folder and get into Network.
3.
On the Network screen, select Using DHCP from the drop down list of Configure IPv4.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IX-4 Pinging the Router from Your Computer
The default gateway IP address of the router is 192.168.1.1. For some reason, you might need
to use “ping” command to check the link status of the router. The most important thing is
that the computer will receive a reply from 192.168.1.1. If not, please check the IP
address of your computer. We suggest you setting the network connection as get IP
automatically. (Please refer to the previous section IX-3) Please follow the steps below to
ping the router correctly.
For Windows
1.
Open the Command Prompt window (from Start menu> Run).
2.
Type command (for Windows 95/98/ME) or cmd (for Windows NT/ 2000/XP/Vista/7).
The DOS command dialog will appear.
3.
Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “Reply from
192.168.1.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255” will appear.
4.
If the line does not appear, please check the IP address setting of your computer.
For Mac OS (Terminal)
1.
Double click on the current used MacOs on the desktop.
2.
Open the Application folder and get into Utilities.
3.
Double click Terminal. The Terminal window will appear.
4.
Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “64 bytes from
192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=xxxx ms” will appear.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
717
IX-5 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not
If WAN connection cannot be up, check if the LEDs (according to the LED explanations listed
on section 1.2) are correct or not. If the LEDs are off, please:
 Change the Physical Type from Auto negotiation to other values (e.g., 100M full duplex).
 Next, change the physical type of modem (e.g., DSL/FTTX(GPON)/Cable modem) offered
by ISP with the same value configured in Vigor router. Check if the LEDs on Vigor router
are on or not.
 If not, please install an additional switch for connecting both Vigor router and the modem
offered by ISP. Then, check if the LEDs on Vigor router are on or not.
 If the problem of LEDs cannot be solved by the above measures, please contact with the
nearest reseller, or send an e-mail to DrayTek FAE for technical support.
 Check if the settings offered by ISP are configured well or not.
When the LEDs are on and correct, yet the WAN connection still cannot be up, please:
 Open WAN >> Internet Access page and then check whether the ISP settings are set
correctly. Click Details Page of WAN1~WAN4 to review the settings that you configured
previously.
718
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IX-6 Problems for 3G/4G Network Connection
When you have trouble in using 3G/4G network transmission, please check the following:
Check if USB LED lights on or off
You have to wait about 15 seconds after inserting 3G/4G USB Modem into your Vigor2926.
Later, the USB LED will light on which means the installation of USB Modem is successful. If
the USB LED does not light on, please remove and reinsert the modem again. If it still fails,
restart Vigor2926.
USB LED lights on but the network connection does not work
Check the PIN Code of SIM card is disabled or not. Please use the utility of 3G/4G USB Modem
to disable PIN code and try again. If it still fails, it might be the compliance problem of system.
Please open DrayTek Syslog Tool to capture the connection information (WAN Log) and send
the page (similar to the following graphic) to the service center of DrayTek.
Transmission Rate is not fast enough
Please connect your Notebook with 3G/4G USB Modem to test the connection speed to verify
if the problem is caused by Vigor2926. In addition, please refer to the manual of 3G/4G USB
Modem for LED Status to make sure if the modem connects to Internet via HSDPA mode. If you
want to use the modem indoors, please put it on the place near the window to obtain better
signal receiving.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
719
IX-7 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary
Sometimes, a wrong connection can be improved by returning to the default settings. Try to
reset the router by software or hardware. Such function is available in Admin Mode only.
Info
After pressing factory default setting, you will loose all settings you did
before. Make sure you have recorded all useful settings before you pressing.
The password of factory default is null.
Software Reset
You can reset the router to factory default via Web page. Such function is available in Admin
Mode only.
Go to System Maintenance and choose Reboot System on the web page. The following screen
will appear. Choose Using factory default configuration and click Reboot Now. After few
seconds, the router will return all the settings to the factory settings.
Hardware Reset
While the router is running (ACT LED blinking), press the Factory Reset button and hold for
more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED blinks rapidly, please release the button.
Then, the router will restart with the default configuration.
After restore the factory default setting, you can configure the settings for the router again
to fit your personal request.
720
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Part X Telnet Commands
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
721
Accessing Telnet of Vigor2926
This chapter also gives you a general description for accessing telnet and describes the
firmware versions for the routers explained in this manual.
Info
For Windows 7 user, please make sure the Windows Features of Telnet
Client has been turned on under Control Panel>>Programs.
Type cmd and press Enter. The Telnet terminal will be open later.
In the following window, type Telnet 192.168.1.1 as below and press Enter. Note that the IP
address in the example is the default address of the router. If you have changed the default,
enter the current IP address of the router.
Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password. Then, type ?. You will see a list of
valid/common commands depending on the router that your use.
722
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
For users using previous Windows system (e.g., 2000/XP), simply click Start >> Run and type
Telnet 192.168.1.1 in the Open box as below. Next, type admin/admin for
Account/Password. And, type ? to get a list of valid/common commands.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
723
724
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: bpa
This command allows to configure a network setting specified for Australia’s ISP.
Syntax
bpa m [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
m
Available settings are 1 and 2.
-a <enable>
1/0 to enable/disable this entry
-n <UserName>
contact UserName(max. 24 characters)
-p <PassWord>
contact PassWord (max. 24 characters)
-s <select>
It means to specify an IP address for Server.
0 : no selection.
1 : NSW(61.9.192.13)
2 : QLD(61.9.208.13),
3 : VIC(61.9.128.13)
4 : SA(61.9.224.13),
5 : WA(61.9.240.13)
-l <List>
List all settings configured.
Example
> bpa 1 -a 1 -n testUser -p testPassword -s 4
> bpa -l
-------index: 1 active-----UserName[1]: testUser
PassWord[1]: testPassword
ServerIP[1]:4
-------index: 2 inactive-----UserName[2]:
PassWord[2]:
ServerIP[2]:0
>
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
725
Telnet Command: csm appe prof
Commands under CSM allow you to set CSM profile to define policy profiles for different policy
of IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer) application.
“csm appe prof “ is used to configure the APP Enforcement Profile name. Such profile will be
applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.
Syntax
csm appe prof -i INDEX [-v | -n NAME|setdefault]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
INDEX
It means to specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 32.
-v
It means to view the configuration of the CSM profile.
-n
It means to set a name for the CSM profile.
NAME
It means to specify a name for the CSM profile, less then 15
characters.
setdefault
Reset to default settings.
Example
> csm appe prof -i 1 -n games
The name of APPE Profile 1 was setted.
Telnet Command: csm appe set
It is used to configure group settings for IM/P2P/Protocol and Others in APP Enforcement
Profile.
csm appe set -i INDEX [-v GROUP| -e AP_IDX | -d AP_IDX]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
INDEX
Specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 32.
-v
View the IM/P2P/Protocol and Others configuration of the CSM
profile.
-e
Enable to block specific application.
-d
Disable to block specific application.
GROUP
Specify the category of the application. Available options are: IM,
P2P, Protocol and Others.
AP_IDX
Each application has independent index number for identification in
CLI command.
Specify the index number of the application here. If you have no
idea of the inex number, do the following (Take IM as an example):
Type “csm appe set –I 1 –v IM”, the system will list all of the index
numbers of the applications categorized under IM.
Example
> Vigor> csm appe set -i 1 -e 1
Profile 1 - : AIM is enabled.
726
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: csm appe show
It is used to display group (IM/P2P/Protocol and Others) information APP Enforcement Profile.
csm appe show [-a|-i|-p|-t|-m]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-a
View the configuration status for All groups.
-i
View the configuration status of IM group.
-p
View the configuration status of P2P group.
-t
View the configuration status of protocol group.
-m
View the configuration status of Others group.
Example
>csm appe show -t
Type
Index
Name
Version
Advance
Advanced Option: (M)essage, (F)ile Transfer, (G)ame, (C)onference, and (O)ther
Activities
------------------------------------------------------------PROTOCOL
52
DB2
PROTOCOL
53
DNS
PROTOCOL
54
FTP
PROTOCOL
55
HTTP
1.1
PROTOCOL
56
IMAP
4.1
PROTOCOL
57
IMAP STARTTLS
4.1
PROTOCOL
58
IRC
2.4.0
…………
Telnet Command: csm appe config
It is used to display the configuration status (enabled or disabled) for IM/P2P/Protocol/Other
applications.
csm appe config -v INDEX [-i|-p|-t|-m]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
INDEX
Specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 32.
-i
View the configuration status of IM group.
-p
View the configuration status of P2P group.
-t
View the configuration status of protocol group.
-m
View the configuration status of Others group.
Example
> csm appe config -v 1 -m
Group
Type
Index
Name
Enable
A
vance Enable
Advance abbreviation: Message, File Transfer, Game, Conference, and Other
Advance abbreviation: : M, F, G, C, and O
------------------------------------------------------------------OTHERS
TUNNEL
75
DNSCrypt
Disable
OTHERS
TUNNEL
76
DynaPass
Disable
OTHERS
TUNNEL
77
FreeU
Disable
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
727
OTHERS
OTHERS
OTHERS
OTHERS
OTHERS
OTHERS
OTHERS
TUNNEL
TUNNEL
TUNNEL
TUNNEL
TUNNEL
TUNNEL
TUNNEL
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
HTTP Proxy
HTTP Tunnel
Hamachi
Hotspot Shield
MS Teredo
PGPNet
Ping Tunnel
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
.
.
.
-----------------------------------------------------------------Total 66 APPs
>
Telnet Command: csm appe interface
It is used to configure APPE signature download interface.
csm appe interface [AUTO/WAN#]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
AUTO
Vigor router specifies WAN interface automatically.
WAN
Specify the WAN interface for signature downloading.
Example
> csm appe interface wan1
Download interface is set as "WAN1" now.
> csm appe interface auto
Download interface is set as "auto-selected" now.
728
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: csm appe email
It is used to set notification e-mail for APPE signature based on the settings configured in
System Maintenance>>SysLog/Mail Alert Setup (in which, the box of APPE Signature is
checkd under Enable E-Mail Alert).
csm appe email [-e|-d|-s]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-e
Enable notification e-mail mechanism.
-d
Disable notification e-mail mechanism.
-s
Send an example e-mail.
Example
> csm appe email -e
Enable APPE email.
Telnet Command: csm ucf
It is used to configure settings for URL control filter profile.
Syntax
csm ucf show
csm ucf setdefault
csm ucf msg MSG
csm ucf obj INDEX [-n PROFILE_NAME | -l [P|B|A|N] | uac | wf ]
csm ucf obj INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME
csm ucf obj INDEX -p VALUE
csm ucf obj INDEX -l P|B|A|N
csm ucf obj INDEX uac
csm ucf obj INDEX wf
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
show
It means to display all of the profiles.
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all of the profile.
msg MSG
It means de set the administration message.
MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the message
itself.
obj
It means to specify the object for the profile.
INDEX
It means to specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 8.
-n
It means to set the profile name.
PROFILE_NAME
It means to specify the name of the profile (less than 16 characters)
-p
Set the priority (defined by the number specified in VALUE) for the
profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
729
VALUE
Number 0 to 3 represent different conditions.
0: It means Bundle: Pass.
1: It means Bundle: Block.
2: It means Either: URL Access Control First.
3: It means Either: Web Feature First.
-l
It means the log type of the profile. They are:
P: Pass,
B: Block,
A: All,
N: None
MSG
It means to specify the Administration Message, less then 255
characters
uac
It means to set URL Access Control part.
wf
It means to set Web Feature part.
Example
> csm ucf obj 1 -n game -l B
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[game]
Log:[none]
Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass]
[ ]Enable URL Access Control
Action:[pass]
[ ]Prevent web access from IP address.
No Obj NO.
Object Name
--- -------- --------------------------------No Grp NO.
Group Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
Telnet Command: csm ucf obj INDEX uac
It means to configure the settings regarding to URL Access Control (uac).
Syntax
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -v
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -e
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -d
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -a P|B
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -i E|D
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -o KEY_WORD_Object_Index
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -g KEY_WORD_Group_Index
Syntax Description
730
Parameter
Description
INDEX
It means to specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 8.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
-v
It means to view the protocol configuration of the CSM profile.
-e
It means to enable the function of URL Access Control.
-d
It means to disable the function of URL Access Control.
-a
Set the action of specific application, P or B.
B: Block. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be
blocked.
P: Pass. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be passed.
-i
Prevent the web access from any IP address.
E: Enable the function. The Internet access from any IP address will
be blocked.
D: Disable the function.
-o
Set the keyword object.
KEY_WORD_Object_Index
Specify the index number of the object profile.
-g
Set the keyword group.
KEY_WORD_Group_Index
Specify the index number of the group profile.
Example
> csm ucf obj 1 uac -i E
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[game]
Log:[none]
Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass]
[ ]Enable URL Access Control
Action:[pass]
[v]Prevent web access from IP address.
No Obj NO.
Object Name
--- -------- --------------------------------No Grp NO.
Group Name
--- -------- --------------------------------> csm ucf obj 1 uac -a B
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[game]
Log:[none]
Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass]
[ ]Enable URL Access Control
Action:[block]
[v]Prevent web access from IP address.
No Obj NO.
Object Name
--- -------- --------------------------------No Grp NO.
Group Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
731
Telnet Command: csm ucf obj INDEX wf
It means to configure the settings regarding to Web Feature (wf).
Syntax
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -v
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -e
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -d
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -a P|B
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -s WEB_FEATURE
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -u WEB_FEATURE
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -f File_Extension_Object_index
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
INDEX
It means to specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 8.
-v
It means to view the protocol configuration of the CSM profile.
-e
It means to enable the restriction of web feature.
-d
It means to disable the restriction of web feature.
-a
Set the action of web feature, P or B.
B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be blocked.
P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be passed.
-s
It means to enable the the Web Feature configuration.
Features available for configuration are:
c: Cookie
p: Proxy
u: Upload
-u
It means to cancel the web feature configuration.
-f
It means to set the file extension object index number.
File_Extension_Object_inde
x
Enter the index number (1 to 8) for the file extension object.
Example
> csm ucf obj 1 wf -s c
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[game]
Log:[none]
Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass]
[ ]Enable URL Access Control
Action:[block]
[v] Prevent web access from IP address.
No Obj NO.
Object Name
--- -------- --------------------------------No Grp NO.
Group Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
732
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
[ ]Enable Restrict Web Feature
Action:[pass]
File Extension Object Index : [0]
[V] Cookie [ ] Proxy [ ] Upload
Profile Name : []
Telnet Command: csm wcf
It means to configure the settings regarding to web control filter (wcf).
Syntax
csm wcf show
csm wcf look
csm wcf cache
csm wcf server WCF_SERVER
csm wcf msg MSG
csm wcf setdefault
csm wcf obj INDEX -v
csm wcf obj INDEX -a P|B
csm wcf obj INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME
csm wcf obj INDEX -l N|P|B|A
csm wcf obj INDEX -o KEY_WORD Object Index
csm wcf obj INDEX -g KEY_WORD Group Index
csm wcf obj INDEX -w E|D|P|B
csm wcf obj INDEX -s CATEGORY|WEB_GROUP
csm wcf obj INDEX -u CATEGORY|WEB_GROUP
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
show
It means to display the web content filter profiles.
Look
It means to display the license information of WCF.
Cache
It means to set the cache level for the profile.
Server WCF_SERVER
It means to set web content filter server.
Msg MSG
It means de set the administration message.
MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the message
itself.
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all of the profile.
obj
It means to specify the object profile.
INDEX
It means to specify the index number of web content filter profile,
from 1 to 8.
-v
It means to view the web content filter profile.
-a
Set the action of web content filter profile, P or B.
B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be blocked.
P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be passed.
-n
It means to set the profile name.
PROFILE_NAME
It means to specify the name of the profile (less than 16 characters)
-l
It means the log type of the profile. They are:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
733
P: Pass,
B: Block,
A: All,
N: None
734
-o
Set the keyword object.
KEY_WORD_Object_Index
Specify the index number of the object profile.
-g
Set the keyword group.
KEY_WORD_Group_Index
Specify the index number of the group profile.
-w
It means to set the action for the black and white list.
E:Enable,
D:Disable,
P:Pass,
B:Block
-s
It means to choose the items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.
-u
It means to discard items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.
WEB_GROUP
Child_Protection, Leisure, Business, Chating, Computer Internet,
Other
CATEGORY
Includes:
Alcohol & Tobacco, Criminal Activity, Gambling, Hate & Intoleranc,
Illegal Drug, Nudity, Pornography/Sexually Explicit, Weapons,
Violence, School Cheating,Sex Education, Tasteless, Child Abuse
Imges, Entertainment, Games, Sports, Travel, Leisure & Recreation,
Fashin & Beauty, Business, Job Search, Web-based Emai, Chat,
Instant Messaging, Anonymizers, Forums & Newsgroups, Computers
& Technology, Download Sites, Streaming Media & Downloads,
Phishing & Fraud, Search Engines & Portals, Social Networking,
Spam Sites,Malware, Botnets, Hacking, Illegal Software,
Information Security,Peer-to-eer, Advertisements & Pop-Ups, Arts,
Transportation, Compromised, Dating & Personals, , Education,
Finance, Government,Health & Medcine, News, Non-profits &
NGOs, Personal Sites,Politics, Real Estate, Rligion, Restaurants &
Dining,Shopping, Translators, General, Cults,Greetig cards, Image
Sharing, Network Errors, Parked Domains, Private IP Addresses)
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Example
> csm wcf obj 1 -n test_wcf
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[test_wcf]
[]White/Black list
Action:[block]
No Obj NO.
Object Name
--- -------- --------------------------------No Grp NO.
Group Name
--- -------- --------------------------------Action:[block]
Log:[block]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------child Protection Group:
[v]Alcohol & Tobacco
[v]Criminal & Activity
[v]Hate & Intolerance
[v]Illegal Drug
[v]Gambling
[v]Nudity
[v]Pornography & Sexually explicit [v]Violence
[v]Weapons
[v]School Cheating
[v]Sex Education
[v]Tasteless
[v]Child Abuse Images
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------leisure Group:
[ ]Entertainment
[ ]Games
[ ]Sports
[ ]Travel
[ ]Leisure & Recreation [ ]Fashion & Beauty
.
.
>
Telnet Command: csm dnsf
It means to configure the settings regarding to DNS filter.
csm dnsf enable ON|OFF
csm dnsf syslog N|P|B|A
csm dnsf service WCF_PROFILE
csm dnsf service_ucf UCF_PROFILE
csm dnsf time CACHE_TIME
csm dnsf blockpage show/on/off
csm dnsf profile_show
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -l N|P|B|A
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -w WCF_PROFILE
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -u UCF_PROFILE
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
735
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -c CACHE_TIME
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
enable
Enable or disable DNS Filter.
ON: enable.
OFF: disable.
syslog
Determine the content of records transmitting to Syslog.
P: Pass. Records for the packets passing through DNS filter will be
sent to Syslog.
B: Block. Records for the packets blocked by DNS filter will be
sent to Syslog.
A: All. Records for the packets passing through or blocked by DNS
filter will be sent to Syslog.
N: None. No record will be sent to Syslog.
service WCF_PROFILE
WCF_PROFILE: Specify a WCF profile as the base of DNS filtering.
Type a number to indicate the index number of WCF profile (1 is
first profile, 2 is second profile, and so on ...).
time CACHE_TIME
CACHE_TIME: It means to set the time for cache to live (available
values are 1 to 24; 1 is one hour, 2 is two hours, and so on ...) for
DNS filter.
blockpage
DNS sends block page for redirect port. When a web page is
blocked by DNS filter, the router system will send a message page
to describe that the page is not allowed to be visisted.
ON: Enable the function of displaying message page.
OFF: Disable the function of displaying message page.
SHOW: Display the function of displaying message page is ON or
OFF.
profile_show
Display the table of the DNS filter profile.
profile_edit
Modify the content of the DNS filter profile.
-n PROFILE_NAME
PROFILE_NAME: Enter the name of the DNS filter profile that you
want to modify.
-l N|P|B|A
Specify the log type of the profile.
P: Pass.
B: Block.
A: All.
N: None.
-w WCF_PROFILE
WCF_PROFILE: Enter the index number of the WCF profile.
-u UCF_PROFILE
UCF_PROFILE: Enter the index number of the UCF profile.
-c CACHE_TIME
-c means to set the cache time for DNS filter.
CACHE_TIME: It means to set the time for cache to live (available
values are 1 to 24; 1 is one hour, 2 is two hours, and so on ...) for
DNS filter.
Example
> csm dnsf service 2
dns service set up!!!
>csm dnsf service 3
wcf profile 3 is empty.....
>csm dnsf cachetime 1
dns cache time set up!!!
736
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ddns enable
This command allows users to enable or disable the DDNS service.
Syntax
ddns enable [0/1]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
0/1
0 – Disable the DDNS service.
1 – Enable the DDNS service.
Example
> ddns enable 1
Enable Dynamic DNS Setup
>
Telnet Command: ddns set
This command allows users to set Dynamica DNS account.
Syntax
ddns set [option]
ddns set -i [account index] -S [service provider] -T [service type] -D [hostname] -L [username]
-P [password]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-i [value]
It means index number of Dynamic DNS Account.
value: 1-6
-E [value]
It means to enable /disable Dynamic DNS Account.
value: 0: Disable, 1:Enable
-W [value]
It means to specify WAN Interface.
[value]: Must be between 1-8
1: WAN1 First
2: WAN1 Only
3: WAN2 First
4: WAN2 Only
example: To set WAN Interface: WAN1 First
-L [value]
It means to type Login Name.
[value]: limit up to 64 characters
-P [value]
It means to type Password.
[value]: limit up to 24 characters
-C [value]
It means to enable /disable Wildcards.
[value]: 0: Disable, 1:Enable
-B [value]
It means to enable / disable Backup MX.
[value]: 0: Disable, 1:Enable
-M [value]
It means to type Mail Extender.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
737
[value]: limit up to 60 characters
-R [value]
It means to type Determine Real WAN IP.
[value]: 0: WAN IP, 1: Internet IP
-S [value]
It means to specify Servive Provider.
If user want to set User-Defined page, value must select 1.
[value]: value must be between 1-19.
1 >> User-Defined
2 >> 3322 DDNS (www.3322.org)
3 >> ChangeIP.com (www.changeip.com)
4 >> ddns.com.cn (www.ddns.com.cn)
5 >> DtDNS (www.dtdns.com)
6 >> dyn.com (www.dyn.com)
7 >> DynAccess (www.dynaccess.com)
8 >> dynami.co.za (www.dynami.co.za)
9 >> freedns.afraid.org (freedns.afraid.org)
10 >> NO-IP.COM Free (www.no-ip.com)
11 >> opendns.com (www.opendns.com)
12 >> OVH (www.ovh.com)
13 >> Strato (www.strato.eu)
14 >> TwoDNS (www.twodns.de)
15 >> TZO (www.tzo.com)
16 >> ubddns.org (ubddns.org)
17 >> Viettel DDNS (vddns.vn)
18 >> vigorddns.com (www.vigorddns.com)
19 >> ZoneEdit DDNS (dynamic.zoneedit.com)
T [value]
It means to type Servive Type.
[value]: value must be between 1-3.
1: Dynamic 2: Custom 3: Static
-D <Host Name> <sub Domain
Name>
It means to type Domain Name.
i.e: Account index 1 setting Domain Name for Dynamic Service
Type
>> ddns set -i 1 -T 1 -D "host ddns.com.cn"
i.e: Account index 2 setting Domain Name for Custom Service Type
>> ddns set -i 2 -T 2 -D "domain name"
i.e: Account index 3 setting Domain Name for Static Service Type
>> ddns set -i 3 -T 3 -D "domain name"
-H [value]
It means to type User-Defined Provider Host.
[value]: limit up to 64 characters
-A [value]
It means to type User-Defined Service API.
[value]: limit up to 256 characters
-a [value]
It means to type User-Defined Auth Type.
[value]: 0: basic 1: URL
-N [value]
It means to type User-Defined Connection Type.
[value]: 0: Http 1: Https
-O [value]
It means to type User-Defined Server Response.
[value]: limit up to 32 characters
Example
> ddns set -i 1 -S 6 -T 1 -D "hostname dnsalias.net" -L user1 -P pwd1
> Save OK
738
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ddns log
Displays the DDNS log.
Example
> ddns log
> ddns log2017-09-04 04:43:46.5 >>>>> DDNS is updating.
<<<<<2017-09-04
04:43:05.6 >>>>> DDNS is updating. <<<<<
Telnet Command: ddns time
Sets and displays the DDNS time.
Syntax
ddns time [update in minutes]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Update in minutes
Enter the value as DDNS time. The range is from 1 to 14400.
Example
> ddns time
ddns time <update in minutes>
Valid: 1 ~ 1440
%Now: 1440
> ddns time 1000
ddns time <update in minutes>
Valid: 1 ~ 1440
%Now: 1000
Telnet Command: ddns forceupdate
This command will update DDNS automatically.
Example
> ddns forceupdate
Now updating DDNS ...
Please check result by using command "ddns log"
Telnet Command: ddns setdefault
This command will return DDS with factory default settings.
Example
>ddns setdefault
>Set to Factory Default.
Telnet Command: ddns show
This command allows users to check the content of selected DDNS account.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
739
Syntax
ddns show -i [value]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-I [value]
Display the content of selected DDNS account.
[value]: value must be between 1-6
Example
> ddns show -i 1
-------------------------------------------------Index: 1
[ ] Enable Dynamic DNS Account
WAN Interface: WAN1 First
Service Provider: dyn.com (www.dyn.com)
Service Type: Dynamic
Domain Name: [].[]
Login Name:
[ ] Wildcards
[ ] Backup MX
Mail Extender:
Determine Real WAN IP: WAN IP
DrayTek>
Telnet Command: dos
This command allows users to configure the settings for DoS defense system.
Syntax
dos [-V | D | A]
dos [-s ATTACK_F [THRESHOLD][ TIMEOUT]]
dos [-a | e [ATTACK_F][ATTACK_0] | d [ATTACK_F][ATTACK_0]]
Syntax Description
740
Parameter
Description
-V
It means to view the configuration of DoS defense system.
-D
It means to deactivate the DoS defense system.
-A
It means to activate the DoS defense system.
-s
It means to enable the defense function for a specific attack and set
its parameter(s).
ATTACK_F
It means to specify the name of flooding attack(s) or portscan, e.g.,
synflood, udpflood, icmpflood, or postscan.
THRESHOLD
It means the packet rate (packet/second) that a flooding attack will
be detected. Set a value larger than 20.
TIMEOUT
It means the time (seconds) that a flooding attack will be blocked.
Set a value larger than 5.
-a
It means to enable the defense function for all attacks listed in
ATTACK_0.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
-e
It means to enable defense function for a specific attack(s).
ATTACK_0
It means to specify a name of the following attacks: ip_option,
tcp_flag, land, teardrop, smurf, pingofdeath, traceroute,
icmp_frag, syn_frag, unknow_proto, fraggle.
-d
It means to disable the defense function for a specific attack(s).
Example
>dos –A
The Dos Defense system is Activated
>dos –s synflood 50 10
Synflood is enabled! Threshold=50 <pke/sec> timeout=10 <pke/sec>
Telnet Command: exit
Type this command will leave telnet window.
Telnet Command: Internet
This command allows you to configure detailed settings for WAN connection.
Syntax
internet -W n -M n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-W n
W means to select WAN interface.
n: 1: WAN1 ,2: WAN2, ... x: WANx. Default is WAN1.
-M n
M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n means
different modes (represented by 0 – 7, A, B)
n=0: Offline
n=1: PPPoE
n=2: Dynamic IP
n=3: Static IP
n=4: PPTP with Dynamic IP,
n=5: PPTP with Static IP,
n=6: L2TP with Dynamic IP
n=7: L2TP with Static IP
n=A: 3G/4G USB Modem(PPP mode)
n=B: 3G/4G USB Modem(DHCP mode)
<command><parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-S <isp name>
It means to set ISP Name (max. 23 characters).
-P <on/off>
It means to enable PPPoE Service.
-u <username>
It means to set username (max. 49 characters) for Internet
accessing.
-p <password>
It means to set password (max. 49 characters) for Internet
accessing.
-a n
It means to set PPP Authentication Type and n means different
types (represented by 0-1).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
741
n=0: PAP/CHAP (this is default setting)
n=1: PAP Only
742
-t n
It means to set connection duration and n means different
conditions.
n=-1: Always-on
n=1 ~ 999: Idle time for offline (default 180 seconds)
-i <ip address>
It means that PPPoE server will assign an IP address specified here
for CPE (PPPoE client).
If you type 0.0.0.0 as the <ip address>, ISP will assign suitable IP
address for you. However, if you type an IP address here, the router
will use that one as a fixed IP.
-w <ip address>
It means to assign WAN IP address for such connection. Please type
an IP address here for WAN port.
-n <netmask>
It means to assign netmask for WAN connection. You have to type
255.255.255.xxx (x is changeable) as the netmask for WAN port.
-g <gateway>
It means to assign gateway IP for such WAN connection.
-s <server ip>
It means to set PPTP/L2TP Server IP.
<server ip>= ppp.qqq.rrr.sss: PPTP/L2TP server IP
-A <idx>
Set to Always On mode, and <idx> as backup WAN#.
-B <mode>
Set to Backup mode.
<mode> 0: When any WAN disconnect; 1: When all WAN disconnect.
-V
It means to view Internet Access profile.
-C <sim pin code>
Set (PPP mode) SIM PIN code (max. 15 characters) for 3G/4G USB
Modem.
-O <init string>
Set (PPP mode) Modem Initial String (max. 47 characters) for 3G/4G
USB Modem.
-T <init string2>
Set (PPP mode) Modem Initial String2 (max. 47 characters) for
3G/4G USB Modem.
-D <dial string>
Set (PPP mode) Modem Dial String (max. 31 characters) for 3G/4G
USB Modem.
-v <service name>
Set (PPP mode) Service Name (max. 23 characters) for 3G/4G USB
Modem.
-m <ppp username>
Set (PPP mode) PPP Username (max. 63 characters) for 3G/4G USB
Modem.
-o <ppp password>
Set (PPP mode) PPP Password (max. 62 characters) for 3G/4G USB
Modem.
-e n
Set (PPP mode) PPP Authentication Type for 3G/4G USB Modem.
n= 0: PAP/CHAP (default),
1: PAP Only
-q n
(PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-One
-x n
(PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Two
-y n
(PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Three
-z n
(PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Four
-Q <mode>
Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection Mode.
<mode>
0: ARP Detect;
1: Ping Detect
-I <ping ip>
Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection Ping IP.
<ping ip>= ppp.qqq.rrr.sss: WAN Connection Detection Ping IP
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
-L n
Set (PPP mode) WAN Connection Detection TTL (1-255) value.
-E <sim pin code>
Set (DHCP mode) SIM PIN code (max. 19 characters).
-G <mode>
Set (DHCP mode) Network Mode.
<mode>
0: 4G/3G/2G;
1: 4G Only;
2: 3G Only;
3: 2G Only
-N <apn name>
Set (DHCP mode) APN Name (max. 47 characters)
-U n
(DHCP mode) MTU(1000-1440)
Example
>internet -M 1 -S tcom -u username -p password -a 0 -t -1 -i 0.0.0.0
WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA
WAN1 ISP Name set to tcom
WAN1 Username set to username
WAN1 Password set successful
WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP
WAN1 Idle timeout set to always-on
WAN1 Gateway IP set to 0.0.0.0
> internet -V
WAN1 Internet Mode:PPPoE
ISP Name: tcom
Username: username
Authentication: PAP/CHAP
Idle Timeout: -1
WAN IP: Dynamic IP
> internet -M 1 -u link1 -p link1 -a 0
WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA
WAN1 Username set to link1
WAN1 Password set successful
WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP
Telnet Command: ip pubsubnet
This command allows users to enable or disable the public subnet for your router.
Syntax
ip pubsubnet <Enable/Disable>
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Enable
Enable the function.
Disable
Disable the function.
Example
> ip pubsubnet enable
public subnet enabled!
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
743
Telnet Command: ip pubaddr
This command allows to set the IP routed subnet for the router.
Syntax
ip pubaddr ?
ip pubaddr <public subnet IP address>
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
?
Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet IP
address.
public subnet IP address
Specify an IP address. The system will set the one that you specified
as the public subnet IP address.
Example
> ip pubaddr ?
% ip addr <public subnet IP address>
% Now: 192.168.0.1
> ip pubaddr 192.168.2.5
% Set public subnet IP address done !!!
Telnet Command: ip pubmask
This command allows users to set the mask for IP routed subnet of your router.
Syntax
ip pubmask ?
ip pubmask <public subnet mask>
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
?
Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet
mask.
public subnet IP address
Specify a subnet mask. The system will set the one that you
specified as the public subnet mask.
Example
> ip pubmask ?
% ip pubmask <public subnet mask>
% Now: 255.255.255.0
> ip pubmask 255.255.0.0
% Set public subnet mask done !!!
Telnet Command: ip aux
This command is used for configuring WAN IP Alias.
Syntax
744
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
ip aux add [IP] [Join to NAT Pool][wanX]
ip aux remove [index]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
add
It means to create a new WAN IP address.
remove
It means to delete an existed WAN IP address.
IP
It means the auxiliary WAN IP address.
Join to NAT Pool
0 (disable) or 1 (enable).
wanX
Add or remove an address for WAN interface.
index
Enter the index number of the table displayed on your screen.
Example
> ip aux add 192.168.1.65 1
% 192.168.1.65 has added in index 2.
> ip aux ?%% ip aux add [IP] [Join to NAT Pool]
%% ip aux remove [Index]
%%
%%
%%
Where IP = Auxiliary WAN IP Address.
Join to NAT Pool = 0 or 1.
Index = The Index number of table.
Now auxiliary WAN1 IP Address table:
Index no.
Status IP address
NAT IP pool
---------------------------------------------------1
Disable 0.0.0.0 Yes
2
Enable 192.168.1.65
Yes
When you type ip aux?, the current auxiliary WAN IP Address table will be shown as the
following:
Index no.
Status IP address
IP pool
---------------------------------------------1
Enable 172.16.3.229
Yes
2
Enable 172.16.3.56
No
3
Enable 172.16.3.113
No
Telnet Command: ip addr
This command allows users to set/add a specified LAN IP your router.
Syntax
ip addr [IP address]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IP address
It means the LAN IP address.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
745
Example
>ip addr 192.168.50.1
% Set IP address OK !!!
Info
When the LAN IP address is changed, the start IP address of DHCP server are
still the same. To make the IP assignment of the DHCP server being
consistent with this new IP address (they should be in the same network
segment), the IP address of the PC must be fixed with the same LAN IP
address (network segment) set by this command for accessing into the web
user interface of the router. Later, modify the start addresses for the DHCP
server.
Telnet Command: ip nmask
This command allows users to set/add a specified netmask for your router.
Syntax
ip nmask [IP netmask]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IP netmask
It means the netmask of LAN IP.
Example
> ip nmask 255.255.0.0
% Set IP netmask OK !!!
Telnet Command: ip arp
ARP displays the matching condition for IP and MAC address.
Syntax
ip arp add [IP address] [MAC address] [LAN or WAN]
ip arp del [IP address] [LAN or WAN]
ip arp flush
ip arp status
ip arp accept [0/1/2/3/4/5/status]
ip arp setCacheLife [time]
In which, arp add allows users to add a new IP address into the ARP table; arp del allows users
to remove an IP address; arp flush allows users to clear arp cache; arp status allows users to
review current status for the arp table; arp accept allows to accept or reject the source
/destination MAC address; arp setCacheLife allows users to configure the duration in which
ARP caches can be stored on the system. If ip arp setCacheLife is set with “60”, it means you
have an ARP cache at 0 second. Sixty seconds later without any ARP messages received, the
system will think such ARP cache is expired. The system will issue a few ARP request to see if
this cache is still valid.
Syntax Description
746
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Parameter
Description
IP address
It means the LAN IP address.
MAC address
It means the MAC address of your router.
LAN or WAN
It indicates the direction for the arp function.
0/1/2/3/4/5
0: disable to accept illegal source mac address
1: enable to accept illegal source mac address
2: disable to accept illegal dest mac address
3: enable to accept illegal dest mac address
4: Decline VRRP mac into arp table
5: Accept VRRP mac into arp table
status: display the setting status.
Time
Available settings will be 10, 20, 30,....2550 seconds.
Example
> ip arp accept status
Accept illegal source mac arp: disable
Accept illegal dest mac arp: disable
Accept VRRP mac into arp table: disable
> ip arp status
[ARP Table]
Index IP Address
MAC Address
1 192.168.1.113
00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE
Netbios Name
A1000351
Telnet Command: ip dhcpc
This command is available for WAN DHCP.
Syntax
ip dhcpc option
ip dhcpc option -h|l
ip dhcpc option -d [idx]
ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -v [option value]
ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -x "[option value]"
ip dhcpc option -u [idx unmber]
ip dhcpc release [wan number]
ip dhcpc renew [wan number]
ip dhcpc status
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
option
It is an optional setting for DHCP server.
-h: display usage
-l: list all custom set DHCP options
-d: delete custom dhcp client option by index number
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
747
-e: enable/disable option feature, 1:enable, 0:disable
-w: set WAN number (e.g., 1=WAN1)
-c: set option number: 0~255
-v: set option value by string
-x: set option value by raw byte (hex)
-u: update by index number
release
It means to release current WAN IP address.
renew
It means to renew the WAN IP address and obtain another new one.
status
It displays current status of DHCP client.
Example
>ip dhcpc status
I/F#3 DHCP Client Status:
DHCP Server IP
WAN Ipm
WAN Netmask
WAN Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Leased Time
Leased Time T1
Leased Time T2
Leased Elapsed
Leased Elapsed T1
Leased Elapsed T2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
172.16.3.7
172.16.3.40
255.255.255.0
172.16.3.1
168.95.192.1
0.0.0.0
259200
129600
226800
259194
129594
226794
Telnet Command: ip ping
This command allows users to ping IP address of WAN1/WAN2/PVC3/PVC4/PVC5 for verifying
if the WAN connection is OK or not.
Syntax
ip ping [IP address] [WAN1 /PVC3/PVC4/PVC5]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IP address
It means the WAN IP address.
WAN1/PVC3/PVC4/PVC5
It means the WAN port /PVC that the above IP address passes
through.
Example
>ip ping 172.16.3.229 WAN1
Pinging 172.16.3.229 with 64 bytes of Data:
Receive reply from 172.16.3.229, time=0ms
Receive reply from 172.16.3.229, time=0ms
Receive reply from 172.16.3.229, time=0ms
Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 <0% loss>
748
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ip tracert
This command allows users to trace the routes from the router to the host.
Syntax
ip tracert [Host/IP address] [WAN1/WAN2] [Udp/Icmp]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IP address
It means the target IP address.
WAN1/WAN2
It means the WAN port that the above IP address passes through.
Udp/Icmp
It means the UDP or ICMP.
Example
>ip tracert 22.128.2.62 WAN1
Traceroute to 22.128.2.62, 30 hops max
1
172.16.3.7 10ms
2
172.16.1.2 10ms
3
Request Time out.
4
168.95.90.66
50ms
5
211.22.38.134
50ms
6
220.128.2.62
50ms
Trace complete
Telnet Command: ip telnet
This command allows users to access specified device by telnet.
Syntax
ip telnet [IP address][Port]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IP address
Enter the WAN or LAN IP address of the remote device.
Port
Type a port number (e.g., 23).
Available settings: 0 ~65535.
Example
> ip telnet 172.17.3.252 23
>
Telnet Command: ip rip
This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of IP.
Syntax
ip rip [0/1/2]
Syntax Description
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
749
Parameter
Description
0/1/2
0 means disable; 1 means first subnet and 2 means second
subnet.
Example
> ip rip 1
%% Set RIP 1st subnet.
750
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ip wanrip
This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of WAN IP.
Syntax
ip wanrip [ifno] -e [0/1]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ifno
It means the connection interface.
1: WAN1,2: WAN2, 3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5
Note: PVC3 ~PVC5 are virtual WANs.
-e
It means to disable or enable RIP setting for specified WAN
interface.
1: Enable the function of setting RIP of WAN IP.
0: Disable the function.
Example
> ip wanrip ?
Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1>
<ifno> 1: WAN1,2: WAN2
3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5
-e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable
Now status:
WAN[1] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[2] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[3] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[4] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[5] Rip Protocol disable
> ip wanrip 5 -e 1
> ip wanrip ?
Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1>
<ifno> 1: WAN1,2: WAN2
3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5
-e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable
Now status:
WAN[1] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[2] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[3] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[4] Rip Protocol disable
WAN[5] Rip Protocol enable
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
751
Telnet Command: ip route
This command allows users to set static route.
Syntax
ip route add [dst] [netmask][gateway][ifno][rtype]
ip route del [dst] [netmask][rtype]
ip route status
ip route cnc
ip route default [wan1/wan2/off/?]
ip route clean [1/0]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
add
It means to add an IP address as static route.
del
It means to delete specified IP address.
status
It means current status of static route.
dst
It means the IP address of the destination.
netmask
It means the netmask of the specified IP address.
gateway
It means the gateway of the connected router.
ifno
It means the connection interface.
3=WAN1 5=WAN3,6=WAN4,7=WAN5
However,
WAN3, WAN4, WAN5 are router-borne WANs
rtype
It means the type of the route.
default : default route;
static: static route.
cnc
It means current IP range for CNC Network.
default
Set WAN1/WAN2/off as current default route.
clean
Clean all of the route settings.
1: Enable the function.
0: Disable the function.
Example
> ip route add 172.16.2.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.2.4 3 static
> ip route status
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, * - default, ~ - private
C~
192.168.1.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, LAN1
S
172.16.2.0/ 255.255.255.0 via 172.16.2.4, WAN1
752
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ip igmp_proxy
This command allows users to enable/disable igmp proxy server.
Syntax
ip igmp_proxy set
ip igmp_proxy reset
ip igmp_proxy wan
ip igmp_proxy t_home[on/off/show/help]
ip igmp_proxy query
ip igmp_proxy ppp [0/1]
ip igmp_proxy status
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
set
It means to enable proxy server.
reset
It means to disable proxy server.
wan
It means to specify WAN interface for IGMP service.
t_home
It means to specify t_home proxy server for using.
On/off/show/help
It means to turn on/off/display or get more information of the
T_home service.
query
It means to set IGMP general query interval.
The default value is 125000 ms.
ppp
0 – No need to set IGMP with PPP header.
1 – Set IGMP with PPP header.
status
It means to display current status for proxy server.
Example
> ip igmp t_home on
%T-Home Setting:
%T-Home Service is turned on.
%WAN1 : Enabled, connection type: PPPoE, without tag for ADSL
%WAN5 : Enabled, connection type: DHCP, tag: 8
%: PVC4(WAN5) is bound to PVC0(WAN1), protocol=MPoA 1483 Bridge
%IGMP Proxy Interface: WAN5(PVC)
%WAN5 for Router-borne Application/ IPTV on/off: ON
> ip igmp_proxy query 130000
This command is for setting IGMP General Query Interval
The default value is 125000 ms
Current Setting is:130000 ms
>
Telnet Command: ip igmp_snoop
This command allows users to enable or disable IGMP snoop function.
Syntax
ip igmp_snoop enable
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
753
ip igmp_snoop disable
ip igmp_snoop status
ip igmp_snoop table
ip igmp_snoop txquery
ip igmp_snoop mode
ip igmp_snoop chkleave
ip igmp_snoop separate
ip igmp_snoop portchk
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
enable
It means to enable igmp snoop function
disable
It means to disable igmp snoop function.
status
It means to display current igmp configuration.
table
It means to display current configuration of igmp.
txquery
It means to send out IGMP QUERY to LAN periodically.
mode
It means to set software or hardware mode for snooping working on.
chkleave
It means to check the leave status.
On: enable the IGMP snoop leave checking function.
Off: it will drop LEAVE if still clients on the same group.
separate
It means to set IGMP packets being separated by NAT/Bridge.
On: The packets will be separated.
Off: The packets will not be separated by NAT/Bridge.
portchk
It means to perform LAN port checking for IGMP packets.
On: Perform the LAN port checking.
Off: No perform the LAN port checking.
Example
> ip igmp_snoop enable
%% ip igmp snooping [enable|disable|status], IGMP Snooping is Enabled.
> ip igmp_snoop disable
%% ip igmp snooping [enable|disable|status], IGMP Snooping is Disabled.
> ip igmp_snoop mode hw
igmp snooping works on SW mode now.
> ip igmp_snoop mode ?
% ip igmp mode [hw/sw]
igmp snooping works on HW mode now.
> ip igmp_snoop separate ?
% ip igmp separate [on/off]
igmp snoop seprate is ON now.
igmp packets will be separated by NAT/Bridge.
754
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ip igmp_fl
This command allows users to activate IGMP fast leave and display current status for IGMP
fast leave.
Syntax
ip igmp_fl enable
ip igmp_fl disable
ip igmp_fl status
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
enable / disable
It means to enable / disable the function of IGMP fast leave.
status
It menas to show current status of IGMP fast leave.
Example
> ip igmp_snoop enable
%% ip igmp snooping [enable|disable|status], IGMP Snooping is Enabled.
> ip igmp_fl enable
%% ip igmp_fl [enable|disable|status], IGMP Fast Leave is Enabled.
> ip igmp_fl status
%% ip igmp_fl [enable|disable|status], IGMP Fast Leave is Disabled.
Telnet Command: ip dmz
Specify MAC address of certain device as the DMZ host.
Syntax
ip dmz [mac]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
mac
It means the MAC address of the device that you want to specify
Example
>ip dmz ?
% ip dmz <mac>, now : 00-00-00-00-00-00
> ip dmz 11-22-33-44-55-66
> ip dmz ?
% ip dmz <mac>, now : 11-22-33-44-55-66
>
Telnet Command: ip dmzswitch
This command allows users to set DMZ mode.
ip dmzswitch off
ip dmzswitch private
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
755
ip dmzswitch trueip
ip dmzswitch active_trueip
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
off
It means to turn off DMZ function.
private
It means to set DMZ with private IP.
trueip
It means to set DMZ with true IP.
active_trueip
It means to set the DMZ with active true IP.
Example
>ip ip dmzswitch off
>
Telnet Command: ip session
This command allows users to set maximum session limit number for the specified IP; set
message for exceeding session limit and set how many seconds the IP session block works.
Syntax
ip session on
ip session off
ip session default [num]
ip session defaultp2p [num]
ip session status
ip session show
ip session timer [num]
ip session [block/unblock][IP]
ip session [add/del][IP1-IP2][num][p2pnum]
Syntax Description
756
Parameter
Description
on
It means to turn on session limit for each IP.
off
It means to turn off session limit for each IP.
default [num]
It means to set the default number of session num limit.
Defautlp2p [num]
It means to set the default number of session num limit for p2p.
status
It means to display the current settings.
show
It means to display all session limit settings in the IP range.
timer [num]
It means to set when the IP session block works.
The unit is second.
[block/unblock][IP]
It means to block/unblock the specified IP address.
Block: The IP cannot access Internet through the router.
Unblock: The specified IP can access Internet through the router.
add
It means to add the session limits in an IP range.
del
It means to delete the session limits in an IP range.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IP1-IP2
It means the range of IP address specified for this command.
num
It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 100.
p2pnum
It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 50 for P2P.
Example
>ip session default 100
> ip session add 192.168.1.5-192.168.1.100 100 50
> ip session on
> ip session status
IP range:
192.168.1.5 - 192.168.1.100 : 100
Current ip session limit is turn on
Current default session number is 100
Telnet Command: ip bandwidth
This command allows users to set maximum bandwidth limit number for the specified IP.
Syntax
ip bandwidth on
ip bandwidth off
ip bandwidth default [tx_rate][rx_rate]
ip bandwidth status
ip bandwidth show
ip bandwidth [add/del] [IP1-IP2][tx][rx][shared]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on
It means to turn on the IP bandwidth limit.
off
It means to turn off the IP bandwidth limit.
default [tx_rate][rx_rate]
It means to set default tx and rx rate of bandwidth limit. The
range is from 0 – 65535 Kpbs.
status
It means to display the current settings.
show
It means to display all the bandwidth limits settings within the IP
range.
add
It means to add the bandwidth within the IP range.
del
It means to delete the bandwidth within the IP range.
IP1-IP2
It means the range of IP address specified for this command.
tx
It means to set transmission rate for bandwidth limit.
rx
It means to set receiving rate for bandwidth limit.
shared
It means that the bandwidth will be shared for the IP range.
Example
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
757
> ip bandwidth default 200 800
> ip bandwidth add 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.100 10 60
> ip bandwidth status
IP range:
192.168.1.50 - 192.168.1.100 : Tx:10K Rx:60K
Current ip Bandwidth limit is turn off
Auto adjustment is off
Telnet Command: ip bindmac
This command allows users to set IP-MAC binding for LAN host.
Syntax
ip bindmac on
ip bindmac off
ip bindmac strict_on
ip bindmac show
ip bindmac add [IP][MAC][Comment]
ip bindmac del [IP]/all
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on
It means to turn on IP bandmac policy. Even the IP is not in the
policy table, it can still access into network.
off
It means to turn off all the bindmac policy.
strict_on
It means that only those IP address in IP bindmac policy table can
access into network.
show
It means to display the IP address and MAC address of the pair of
binded one.
add
It means to add one ip bindmac.
del
It means to delete one ip bindmac.
IP
It means to type the IP address for binding with specified MAC
address.
MAC
It means to type the MAC address for binding with the IP address
specified.
Comment
It means to type words as a brief description.
All
It means to delete all the IP bindmac settings.
Example
> ip bindmac add 192.168.1.46 00:50:7f:22:33:55 just for test
> ip bindmac show
ip bind mac function is turned ON
IP : 192.168.1.46 bind MAC : 00-50-7f-22-33-55 Comment : just
758
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ip bgp
This command allows users to configure settings for BGP.
Syntax
ip bgp mode [0/1]
ip bgp as [value]
ip bgp hold [value]
ip bgp retry [value]
ip bgp id [value]
ip bgp show
ip bgp neighbor [idx] mode [0/1]
ip bgp neighbor [idx] name [max len: 20]
ip bgp neighbor [idx] ip [x.x.x.x]
ip bgp neighbor [idx] as [1~4294967295]
ip bgp neighbor [idx] show
ip bgp neighbor show all
ip bgp static [sidx][ip][<netmask]
ip bgp static [sidx] delete
ip bgp static show
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
mode <0/1>
It means to enable / disable BGP mode.
0: disable
1: enable
as <value>
It means to set the AS number for local router.
<value>: Available number is between 0 and 4294967295.
hold <value>
It means to set the time interval to determine the peer is dead
when the router is unable to receive any keepalive message from
the peer within the time.
<value>: Available number is between 10 and 65535 (unit: second).
The default is 180 (seconds).
retry <value>
It means to set a period of time to reconnect if the router fails to
connect to the neighboring router.
<value>: Available number is between 3 and 255 (unit: second). The
default is 120 (seconds).
id <value>
It means to specify the LAN subnet <1~16> as router ID.
<value>: Available number is between 1 and 16.
show
It means to display information related to BGP settings.
neighbor <idx> mode <0/1>
It means to enable / disable the basic BGP function for neighboring
router.
<idx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 8.
<0/1>: 0- disable; 1- enable
neighbor <idx> name <max
len: 20>
It means to define a profile name for neighboring router.
<idx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 8.
<max len>: The maximum name length shall not be over 20
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
759
characters.
neighbor <idx> ip <x.x.x.x>
It means to set the IP address specified for the neighboring router.
<idx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 8.
<x.x.x.x>: Enter the IP address, e.g., 100.100.100.100.
neighbor <idx> as
<1~4294967295>
It means to set the AS number for the neightboring router.
<idx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 8.
<value>: Available number is between 1 and 4294967295.
neighbor <idx> show
It means to display information for the specified profile.
<idx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 8.
neighbor show all
It means to display information for all neighboring routers.
static <sidx> <ip> <netmask>
It means to configure the neighboring router(s) for exchanging the
routing information with the local router.
<sidx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 6.
<ip>: Enter the IP address, e.g., 100.100.100.200.
<netmask>: Enter the subnet mask for the neighboring router, e.g.,
255.255.255.0.
static <sidx> delete
It means to delete static network settings for neighboring router.
<sidx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 6.
static show
It means to display setting information for exchanging the routing
information with the local router.
Example
> ip bgp static 1 192.168.2.56 255.255.255.0
Set static network index: 1
IP addr: 192.168.2.56
Net mask: 255.255.255.0
> ip bgp static show
BGP static networks:
Index: 1, IP addr: 192.168.2.56, mask: 255.255.255.0
760
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ip maxnatuser
This command is used to set the maximum number of NAT users.
Syntax
ip maxnatuser user no
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
User no
A number specified here means the total NAT users that Vigor router
supports.
0 – It means no limitation.
Example
> ip maxnatuser 100
% Max NAT user = 100
Telnet Command: ip policy_rt
This command is used to set the IP policy route profile.
Syntax
ip policy_rt [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
<command><parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
General Setup for Policy Route
-i [value]
Specify an index number for setting policy route profile.
Value: 1 to 60. “-1” means to get a free policy index automatically.
-e [0/1]
0: Disable the selected policy route profile.
1: Enable the selected policy route profile.
-o [value]
Determine the operation of the policy route.
Value:
add – Create a new policy rotue profile.
del – Remove an existed policy route profile.
edit – Modify an existed policy route profile.
flush – Reset policy route to default setting.
-1 [any/range]
Specify the source IP mode.
Range: Indicate a range of IP addresses.
Any: It means any IP address will be treated as source IP address.
-2
[any/ip_range/ip_subnet/do
main]
Specify the destination IP mode.
Any: No need to specify an IP address for any IP address will be
treated as destination IP address.
ip_range: Indicates a range of IP addresses.
ip_subnet: Indicates the IP subnet.
domain: Indicates the domain name.
-3 [any/range]
Specify the destination port mode.
Range: Indicate a range of port number.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
761
Any: It means any port number can be used as destination port.
-G [default/specific]
Specify the gateway mode.
-L [default/specific]
Specify the failover gateway mode.
-s [value]
Indicate the source IP start.
Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.1.0)
-S [value]
Indicate the source IP end.
Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g,
192.168.1.100)
-d [value]
Indicate the destination IP start.
Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.2.0)
-D [value]
Indicate the destination IP end.
Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g,
192.168.2.100)
-p [value]
Indicate the destination port start.
Value: Type a number (1 ~ 65535) as the port start (e.g., 1000).
-P [value]
Indicate the destination port end.
Value: Type a number (1 ~ 65535) as the port end (e.g., 2000).
-y [value]
Indicate the priority of the policy route profile.
Value: Type a number (0 ~ 250). The default value is “150”.
Indicate the interface specified for the policy route profile.
Value: Available interfaces include,
LAN1 ~ LAN8, IP_Routed_Subnet,
DMZ_Subnet,
WAN1 ~ WAN5,
VPN_PROFILE_1 ~ VPN_PROFILE_100,
WAN_1_IP_ALIAS_1 ~ WAN_4_IP_ALIAS_8
Indicate the gateway IP address.
Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.3.1)
Indicate the failover IP address.
Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.4.1)
-I [value]
-g [value]
-l [value]
762
-t [value]
It means “protocol”.
Value: Available settings include “TCP”, “UDP”, “TCP/UDP”, “ICMP”
and “Any”.
-n [0/1]
Indicates the function of “Force NAT”.
0: Disable the function.
1: Enable the function.
-a [0/1]
Indicates to enable the function of failover.
0: Disable the function.
1: Enable the function.
-f [value]
It means to specify the interface for failover.
Value: Avaialbe interfaces include,
NO_FAILOVER,
Default_WAN,
Policy1 ~ Policy60
LAN1 ~ LAN8
IP_Routed_Subnet,
DMZ_Subnet,
WAN1 ~ WAN5,
VPN_PROFILE_1 ~ VPN_PROFILE_100,
WAN_1_IP_ALIAS_1 ~ WAN_4_IP_ALIAS_8
-b [value]
It means “failback”.
Value: Available settings include,
0: Disable the function of “failback”.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
1: Enable the function of “failback”.
-v: View current failback setting.
Diagnose for Policy Route
-s [value]
It means “source IP”.
Value: Available settings include:
Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as source IP address.
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: The type format (e.g, 192.168.1.0).
-d [value]
It means “destination IP”.
Value : Available settings include:
Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as destination IP address.
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: Specify an IP address.
-p [value]
It means “destination port”.
Value: Specify a number or type Any (indicating any number).
-t [value]
It means “protocol”.
Value: Available settings include “ICMP”, “TCP”, “UDP” and “Any”.
Example
> ip policy_rt diagnose -s 192.168.1.100 -d any -p any -t ICMP
------------------------------------------------Matched Route (Priority)
------------------------------------------------* No_Match
------------------------------------------------Matched Policy (Priority)
------------------------------------------------* Policy_1 (200)
* Conclusion:The packet was dropped because the send-to interface
of the mat
ched policy "policy 1" was inactive and there was no failover setting
> ip policy_rt -i -1 -o add -1 range -s 192.168.1.10 -S 192.168.1.20 -2
ip_range –d 202.211.100.10 -D 202.211.100.20 -g 202.211.100.1 -I WAN2
Telnet Command: ip lanDNSRes
This command is used to set LAN DNS profiles. With such feature, the user can configure some
services (such as ftp, www or database) with domain name which is easy to be accessed.
Syntax
ip lanDNSRes [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Parameter
Description
-a <IP Address>
It is used to configure IP address mapping (IPv4/IPv6 Address or
multiple subnet addresses).
IP Address: type the IP address (e.g., 192.168.1.56).
-d <address mapping index
number>
It means to delete index number with address mapping configured.
address mapping index number : type the index number which
represents the address mapping profile.
-e <0/1>
It means to enable or disable the function of LAN DNS or DNS
Forwarding Profile.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
763
0: disable
1: enable
-i <profile setting index
number>
It means to create LAN DNS profile with specified domain name.
profile setting index number : type the index number which
represents the profile with domain name configured.
-l
It means to list detailed information of profile configuration.
> ip lanDNSRes -l
%
% Idx: 7
% State: Enable
% Profile: DrayTekFTP
% Domain Name: ftp.draytek.com
% -------- Address Mapping Table -------% Idx ReplyOnlySameSubnet IP Address
% 1 Yes
172.16.2.10
% 2 Yes
172.16.3.10
% 3 Yes
172.16.4.10
-n<domain name>
It means to specify a domain name to be accessed.
-p<profile name>
It means to set name of the LAN DNS profile.
-r
It means to clear specified domain name profile and the address
mapping setting.
-s<0/1>
It means to determine all subnet packets or only the packets with
the same subnet will be replied for address mapping profile.
0: reply all subnet packets.
1: reply only same subnet packet.
-z
It means to update LAN DNS configuration to DNS cache.
Example
> ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -n ftp.drayTek.com
% Configure Set1's DomainName:ftp.drayTek.com
> ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -n ftp.drayTek.com
> ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -a 172.16.2.10 -s 1
> ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -a 172.16.3.10 -s 1
> ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -a 172.16.4.10 -s 1
> ip lanDNSRes -l
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Idx: 7
State: Enable
Profile: DrayTekFTP
Domain Name: ftp.draytek.com
-------- Address Mapping Table -------Idx ReplyOnlySameSubnet IP Address
1
Yes
172.16.2.10
2
Yes
172.16.3.10
3
Yes
172.16.4.10
Telnet Command: ip dnsforward
This command is used to set LAN DNS profile for conditional DNS forwarding.
ip dnsforward [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
764
Parameter
Description
[<command>
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
<parameter>|…]
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-a <IP Address>
Set forwarded DNS server IP Address.
-d <DNS server mapping
index number>
Delete the selected LAN DNS profile.
-e <0/1>
0: disable such function.
1: enable such function.
-i <profile setting index
number>
Enter the index number of the profile.
-l
List the content of LAN DNS profile (including domain name, IP
address and message).
-n <domain name>
Set domain name.
-p <profile name>
Set profile name for LAN DNS.
-r
Reset the settings for selected profile.
Example
>
%
>
%
>
%
%
%
%
%
>
ip dnsforward -i 1 -n ftp.drayTek.com
Configure Set1's DomainName:ftp.drayTek.com
ip dnsforward -i 1 -a 172.16.1.1
Configure Set1's IP:172.16.1.1
ip dnsforward -i 1 -l
Idx: 1
State: Disable
Profile: test
Domain Name: ftp.drayTek.com
DNS Server IP: 172.16.1.1
Telnet Command: ip6 addr
This command allows users to set the IPv6 address for your router.
Syntax
ip6 addr -s [prefix] [prefix-length] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]
ip6 addr -d [prefix] [prefix-length] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]
ip6 addr -a [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-s
It means to add a static ipv6 address.
-d
It means to delete an ipv6 address.
-a
It means to show current address(es) status.
-u
It means to show only unicast addresses.
prefix
It means to type the prefix number of IPv6 address.
prefix-length
It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix.
LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#
It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
765
Example
> ip6 addr -a
LAN
Unicast Address:
FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/64 (Link)
Multicast Address:
FF02::2
FF02::1:FF00:0
FF02::1
Telnet Command: ip6 dhcp req_opt
This command is used to configure option-request settings for DHCPv6 client.
Syntax
ip6 dhcp req_opt [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
req_opt
It means option-request.
LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#
It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-a
It means to show current DHCPv6 status.
-s
It means to ask the SIP.
-S
It means to ask the SIP name.
-d
It means to ask the DNS setting.
-D
It means to ask the DNS name.
-n
It means to ask NTP.
-i
It means to ask NIS.
-I
It means to ask NIS name.
-p
It means to ask NISP.
-P
It means to ask NISP name.
-b
It means to ask BCMCS.
-B
It means to ask BCMCS name.
-r
It means to ask refresh time.
Parameter
1: the parameter related to the request will be displayed.
0: the parameter related to the request will not be displayed.
Example
>
>
>
%
%
766
ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2
ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2
ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2
Interface WAN2 is set
sip name
-S 1
-r 1
-a
to request following DHCPv6 options:
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
>
Telnet Command: ip6 dhcp client
This command allows you to use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.
Syntax
ip6 dhcp client [WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
client
It means the dhcp client settings.
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-a
It means to show current DHCPv6 status.
-p [IAID]
It means to request identity association ID for Prefix Delegation.
-n [IAID]
It means to request identity association ID for Non-temporary
Address.
-c [parameter]
It means to send rapid commit to server.
-i [parameter]
It means to send information request to server.
-e[parameter]
It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client.
1: Enable
0: Disable
Example
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –p 2008::1
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a
Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6
DHCPv6 client enabled
request IA_PD whose IAID equals
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –n 1023456
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a
Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6
DHCPv6 client enabled
request IA_NA whose IAID equals
> system reboot
client settings:
to 2008
client settings:
to 2008
Telnet Command: ip6 dhcp server
This command allows you to configure DHCPv6 server.
Syntax
ip6 dhcp server [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
server
It means the dhcp server settings.
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
767
-a
It means to show current DHCPv6 status.
-i<pool_min_addr>
It means to set the start IPv6 address of the address pool.
-x<pool_max_addr>
It means to set the end IPv6 address of the address pool.
-d<addr>
It means to set the first DNS IPv6 address.
-D<addr>
It means to set the second DNS IPv6 address.
-c<parameter>
It means to send rapid commit to server.
1: Enable
0: Disable
-e<parameter>
It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 server.
1: Enable
0: Disable
Example
>
>
>
>
%
%
%
%
%
ip6 dhcp server -d FF02::1
ip6 dhcp server -i ff02::1
ip6 dhcp server -x ff02::3
ip6 dhcp server -a
Interface LAN has following DHCPv6 server settings:
DHCPv6 server disabled
maximum address of the pool: FF02::3
minimum address of the pool: FF02::1
1st DNS IPv6 Addr: FF02::1
Telnet Command: ip6 internet
This command allows you to configure settings for accessing Internet.
Syntax
ip6 internet -W n -M n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-W n
W means to set WAN interface and n means different selections.
Default is WAN1.
n=1: WAN1
n=2: WAN2
n=3: WAN3
.
.
n=X: WANx
-M n
768
M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n means
different modes (represented by 0 – 5)
n= 0: Offline,
n=1: PPP,
n=2: TSPC,
n=3: AICCU,
n=4: DHCPv6,
n=5: Static
n=6:6in4-Static
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
n=7:6rd
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-m n
It means to set IPv6 MTU.
N = any value (0 means “unspecified”).
-u <username>
It means to set Username.
<username>= type a name as the username (maximum 63
characters).
-p <password>
It means to set Password.
<password> = type a password (maximum 63 characters).
-s <server>
It means to set Tunnel Server IP.
<server>= IPv4 address or URL (maximum 63 characters).
-d <server>
It means to set the primary DNS Server IP.
<server>= type an IPv6 address for first DNS server.
-D <server>
It means to set the secondary DNS Server IP.
<server>= type an IPv6 address for second DNS server.
-t <dhcp/ra/none>
It means to set IPv6 PPP WAN test mode for DHCP or RADVD.
<dhcp/ra/none>= type IPv6 address.
-V
It means to view IPv6 Internet Access Profile.
-o
It means to set AICCU always on.
1=On,
0=Off
Example
> ip6 internet -W 2 -M 2 -u 88886666 -p draytek123456 –s
amsterdam.freenet6.net
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> system reboot
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
769
Telnet Command: ip6 neigh
This command allows you to display IPv6 neighbour table.
Syntax
ip6 neigh -s[ inet6_addr] [eth_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
ip6 neigh -d [inet6_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
ip6 neigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-s
It means to add a neighbour.
-d
It means to delete a neighbour.
-a
It means to show neighbour status.
inet6_addr
Type an IPv6 address
eth_addr
Type submask address.
LAN|WAN1|WAN2
Specify an interface for the neighbor.
Example
> ip6 neigh -s 2001:2222:3333::1111 00:50:7F:11:ac:22:WAN2
Neighbour 2001:2222:3333::1111 successfully added!
> ip6 neigh -a
I/F ADDR
MAC
STATE
------------------------------------------------------------------------LAN FF02::1
33-33-00-00-00-01
CONNECTED
WAN2 2001:5C0:1400:B::10B8
00-00-00-00-00-00
CONNECTED
WAN2 2001:2222:3333::1111
00-00-00-00-00-00
CONNECTED
WAN2 2001:2222:6666::1111
00-00-00-00-00-00
CONNECTED
WAN2 ::
00-00-00-00-00-00
CONNECTED
LAN ::
NONE
>
770
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ip6 pneigh
This command allows you to add a proxy neighbour.
Syntax
ip6 pneigh -s inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
ip6 pneigh -d inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
ip6 pneigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-s
It means to add a proxy neighbour.
-d
It means to delete a proxy neighbour.
-a
It means to show proxy neighbour status.
inet6_addr
Type an IPv6 address
LAN|WAN1|WAN2
Specify an interface for the proxy neighbor.
Example
> ip6 neigh -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 LAN
%
Neighbour FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 successfully added!
Telnet Command: ip6 route
This command allows you to
Syntax
ip6 route -s [prefix] [prefix-length] [gateway] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#> [-D]
ip6 route -d [prefix] [prefix-length]
ip6 route -a [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-s
It means to add a route.
-d
It means to delete a route.
-a
It means to show the route status.
-D
It means that such route will be treated as the default route.
prefix
It means to type the prefix number of IPv6 address.
prefix-length
It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix.
gateway
It means the gateway of the router.
LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#
It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.
Example
> ip6 route -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500 16 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100 LAN
%
Route FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500/16 successfully added!
> ip6 route -a LAN
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
771
PREFIX/PREFIX-LEN _EXPIRES_ _NEXT-HOP_
I/F METRIC
STATE
FLAGS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------FE80::/128
0
0
UNICAST
U
LAN
0
UNICAST
U
LAN
256
UNICAST
U
LAN
1024
UNICAST
UGA
0
UNICAST
UC
LAN
256
UNICAST
U
LAN
-1
::
FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/128
0
LAN
::
FE80::/64
0
FE80::/16
0
FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100
FF02::1/128
LAN
0
FF02::1
FF00::/8
0
::/0
UNREACHABLE !
0
Telnet Command: ip6 ping
This command allows you to pin an IPv6 address or a host.
Syntax
ip6 ping [IPV6 address/Host] [LAN/WAN1/WAN2]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IPV6 address/Host
It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.
LAN/WAN1/WAN2
It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.
Example
> ip6 ping 2001:4860:4860::8888 WAN2
Pinging 2001:4860:4860::8888 with 64 bytes of Data:
Receive
Receive
Receive
Receive
Receive
reply
reply
reply
reply
reply
from
from
from
from
from
2001:4860:4860::8888,
2001:4860:4860::8888,
2001:4860:4860::8888,
2001:4860:4860::8888,
2001:4860:4860::8888,
time=330ms
time=330ms
time=330ms
time=330ms
time=330ms
Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 <% loss>
>
772
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: ip6 tracert
This command allows you to trace the routes from the router to the host.
Syntax
ip6 tracert [IPV6 address/Host]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IPV6 address/Host
It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.
Example
> ip6 tracert 2001:4860:4860::8888
traceroute to 2001:4860:4860::8888, 30 hops max through protocol ICMP
1 2001:5C0:1400:B::10B8
340 ms
2 2001:4DE0:1000:A22::1
330 ms
3 2001:4DE0:A::1
330 ms
4 2001:4DE0:1000:34::1
340 ms
5 2001:7F8:1: :A501:5169:1 330 ms
6 2001:4860::1:0:4B3
350 ms
7 2001:4860::8:0:2DAF
330 ms
E
8 2001:4860::2:0:66
340 ms
9 Request timed out.
*
10 2001:4860:4860::8888
350 ms
Trace complete.
>
Telnet Command: ip6 tspc
This command allows you to display TSPC status.
Syntax
ip6 tspc [ifno]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ifno
It means the connection interface.
Ifno=1 (means WAN1)
Info=2 (means WAN2)
Example
> ip6 tspc 2
Local Endpoint v4 Address : 111.243.177.223
Local Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b9
Router DNS name : 8886666.broker.freenet6.net
Remote Endpoint v4 Address :81.171.72.11
Remote Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b8
Tspc Prefixlen : 56
Tunnel Broker: Amsterdam.freenet.net
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
773
Status: Connected
>
Telnet Command: ip6 radvd
This command allows you to enable or disable RADVD server.
Syntax
Ip6 radvd –s [1|0] [lifetime]
ip6 radvd –V
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-s
It means to enable or disable the default lifetime of the RADVD
server.
1: Enable the RADVD server.
0: Disable the RADVD server.
Lifetime
It means to set the lifetime.
The lifetime associated with the default router in units of seconds.
It’s used to control the lifetime of the prefix. The maximum value
corresponds to 18.2 hours. A lifetime of 0 indicates that the router
is not a default router and should not appear on the default router
list.
Enter the number (unit: second) you want.
-V
It means to show the RADVD configuration.
-r
It means RA default test.
-r [num]
It means RA test for item [num].
Example
> ip6 radvd -s 1 1800
> ip6 radvd -V
% IPv6 Radvd Config:
Radvd : Enable, Default Lifetime : 1800 seconds
Telnet Command: ip6 mngt
This command allows you to manage the settings for access list.
Syntax
ip6 mngt list
ip6 mngt list [add<index> <prefix> <prefix-length>|remove <index>|flush]
ip6 mngt status
ip6 mngt [http|telnet|ping|https|ssh] [on|off]
Syntax Description
774
Parameter
Description
list
It means to show the setting information of the access list.
status
It means to show the status of IPv6 management.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
add
It means to add an IPv6 address which can be used to execute
management through Internet.
index
It means the number (1, 2 and 3) allowed to be configured for IPv6
management.
prefix
It means to type the IPv6 address which will be used for accessing
Internet.
prefix-length
It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix.
remove
It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with IPv6
settings.
flush
It means to clear the IPv6 access table.
http|telnet|ping|https|ssh
These protocols are used for accessing Internet.
on|off
It means to enable (on) or disable (off) the Internet accessing
through http/telnet/ping.
Example
> ip6 mngt list add 1 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1010 128
> ip6 mngt list add 2 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1020 128
> ip6 mngt list add 3 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:2080 128
> ip6 mngt list
% IPv6 Access List :
Index IPv6 Prefix
Prefix Length
========================================
1
FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1010
128
2
FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1020
128
3
FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:2080
128
> ip6 mngt status
% IPv6 Remote Management :
telnet : off, http : off,
ping : off
Telnet Command: ip6 online
This command allows you to check the online status of IPv6 LAN /WAN.
Syntax
ip6 online [ifno]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ifno
It means the connection interface.
0=LAN1
1=WAN1
2=WAN2
Example
> ip6 online 0
% LAN 1 online status :
% Interface : UP
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
775
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static
% Tx packets = 408, Tx bytes = 32160, Rx packets = 428, Rx bytes =
33636
> ip6 online 1
% WAN 1 online status :
% IPv6 WAN1 Disabled
% Default Gateway : ::
% UpTime : 0:00:00
% Interface : DOWN
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static
% Tx packets = 0, Tx bytes = 0, Rx packets = 0, Rx bytes = 0
Telnet Command: ip6 aiccu
This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for WAN interface with connection type of
AICCU.
Syntax
ip6 aiccu [ifno]
ip6 aiccu subnet [add <ifno> <prefix> <prefix-length>|remove <ifno>|show <info>]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ifno
It means the connection interface.
1=WAN1
2=WAN2
add
It means to add an IPv6 address which can be used to execute
management through Internet.
prefix
It means to type the IPv6 address which will be used for accessing
Internet.
prefix-length
It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix.
remove
It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with IPv6
settings.
show
It means to display the AICCU status.
Example
> ip6 aiccu subnet add 2 2001:1111:0000::1111 64
> ip6 aiccu 2
Status: Connecting
>ip6 aiccu subnet show 2
IPv6 WAN2 AICCU Subnet Prefix Config:
2001:1111::1111/64
>
Telnet Command: ip6 ntp
This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for NTP (Network Time Protocols) server.
776
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Syntax
ip6 ntp –h
ip6 ntp –v
ip6 ntp –p [0/1]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
–h
It is used to display the usage of such command.
-v
It is used to show the NTP state.
-p <0/1>
It is used to specify NTP server for IPv6.
0 – Auto
1 – First Query IPv6 NTP Server.
Example
> ip6 ntp -p 1
% Set NTP Priority: IPv6 First
Telnet Command: ip6 lan
This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for LAN interface.
Syntax
ip6 lan -l n [-<l:w:d:D:m:o:s> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
–h
It is used to display the usage of such command.
-l n
It means to selete LAN interface to be set.
n= 1: LAN1
n= 2: LAN2, ... x: LANx. Default is LAN1
-w n
It means to selete WAN interface to be primary interface.
n= 0: None,
n=1: WAN1 ,
n=2: WAN2, ... x: WANx.
-d <server>
It means to set 1st DNS Server IP.
<server>= IPv6 Address
-D <server>
It means to set 2nd DNS Server IP.
<server>= IPv6 Address
-m n
It means to set ipv6 LAN management.
n=0:OFF
n=1:SLAAC. Default is SLAAC
n=2:DHCPv6
-o n
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
It means to enable Other option(O-bit) flag. (O-bit is redundant
777
when management is DHCPv6)
n=0: Disable
n=1: Enable.
-e n
It means to add an extension WAN.
n: 1: WAN1, 2: WAN2, ... x: WANx.
-E n
It means to delete an extension WAN.
n: 1: WAN1 ,2: WAN2, ... x: WANx.
-b map
It means to set bit map(decimal) for extension WAN.
map:
bit 0: WAN1
bit 1: WAN2, ... bit n: WAN(n+1).
-f n
It means to disable IPv6.
n= 1: Disable IPv6,
n=0: Enable IPv6.
-R n
It means to enable /disable RIPng.
n=1: Enable RIPng,
n=0: Disable RIPng.
-s n
It means to show IPv6 LAN setting.
n=0:show all. Default is show all.
n=1: LAN1
n=2: LAN2, ... 4: LAN4,
n=5: DMZ.
Example
> ip6 lan -l 1 -w 1 -d 2001:4860:4860::8888 -o 1 -f 0 -s 2
%
Set primary WAN1!
% Set 1st DNS server 2001:4860:4860::8888
%
Set Other Option Enable!
%
[LAN1] support ipv6!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
778
[LAN2] setting:
Primary WAN
: WAN1
Management
: SLAAC
Other Option
: Disable
WAN Exten
: None
Subnet ID
: 2
Static IP(0)
: ::/0
[ifno: 0, enable: 0]
Static IP(1)
: ::/0
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Static IP(2)
Static IP(3)
DNS1
DNS2
ULA Type
RIPng
[ifno: 0, enable: 0]
: ::/0
[ifno: 0, enable: 0]
: ::/0
[ifno: 0, enable: 0]
: 2001:4860:4860::8888
: 2001:4860:4860::8844
: OFF
: Enable
Telnet Command: ip6 session
This command allows you to set sessions limit for IPv6 address.
Syntax
ip6 session [on/off/default num/status/show]
ip6 session [add/del] [IP1-IP2] [num]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on
It means to turn on session limit for each IP.
off
It means to turn off session limit for each IP.
default <num>
It means to set the default number of session num limit.
status
It means to display the current settings.
show
It means to display all IP range session limit settings.
add
It means to add the session limit for an IPv6 range.
<IP1-IP2> - Specify a range for IPv6 addresses.
del
It means to delete the session limit for an IPv6 range by first IP (IP1)
or 'del all'.
Example
> ip6 session on
> ip6 session add 2100:ABCD::2-2100:ABCD::10 100
> ip6 session status
IPv6 range:
2100:ABCD::2 - 2100:ABCD::10 : 100
Current ip6 session limit is turn on
Current default session number is 100
Telnet Command: ip6 bandwidth
This command allows you to set IPv6 settings
Syntax
ip6 Bandwidth [on/off/default tx_rate rx_rate/status/show]
ip6 Bandwidth [add/del] [IP1-IP2] [tx][rx][shared]
Syntax Description
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
779
Parameter
Description
on
It means to turn on bandwidth limit for each IP.
off
It means to turn off bandwidth limit for each IP.
default <tx> <rx>
It means to set the default transmission (tx), receiving (rx) rate of
bandwidth limit (0-30000 Kbps/Mbps).
status
It means to display the current settings.
show
It means to display all IP range bandwidth limit settings.
add
It means to add the bandwidth limit for an IPv6 range.
<IP1-IP2> - Specify a range for IPv6 addresses.
del
It means to delete the bandwidth limit for an IPv6 range by first IP
(IP1) or 'del all'.
Example
> ip6 bandwidth on
> ip6 bandwidth add 2001:ABCD::2-2001:ABCD::10 512 5M shared
> ip6 bandwidth status
IPv6 range:
2001:ABCD::2 - 2001:ABCD::10 : Tx:512K Rx:5M shared
Current ip6 Bandwidth limit is turn on
Current default ip6 Bandwidth rate is Tx:2000K Rx:8000K bps
Telnet Command: ipf view
IPF users to view the version of the IP filter, to view/set the log flag, to view the running IP
filter rules.
Syntax
ipf view [-VcdhrtzZ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-V
It means to show the version of this IP filter.
-c
It means to show the running call filter rules.
-d
It means to show the running data filter rules.
-h
It means to show the hit-number of the filter rules.
-r
It means to show the running call and data filter rules.
-t
It means to display all the information at one time.
-z
It means to clear a filter rule’s statistics.
-Z
It means to clear IP filter’s gross statistics.
Example
> ipf view -V -c -d
ipf: IP Filter: v3.3.1 (1824)
780
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Kernel: IP Filter: v3.3.1
Running: yes
Log Flags: 0x80947278 = nonip
Default: pass all, Logging: available
Telnet Command: ipf set
This command is used to set general rule for firewall.
Syntax
ipf set [Options]
ipf set [SET_NO] rule [RULE_NO] [Options]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Options
There are several options provided here, such as -v, -c [SET_NO], -d
[SET_NO],… and etc.
SET_NO
It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 12) of filter set.
RULE_NO
It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 7) of filter rule set.
-v
Type “-v” to view the configuration of general set.
-c [SET_NO]
It means to setup Call Filter, e.g., -c 2. The range for the index
number you can type is “0” to “12” (0 means “disable).
-d [SET_NO]
It means to setup Data Filter, e.g., -d 3. The range for the index
number you can type is “0” to “12” (0 means “disable).
-l [VALUE]
It means to setup Log Flag, e.g., -l 2
Type “0” to disable the log flag.
Type “1” to display the log of passed packet.
Type “2” to display the log of blocked packet.
Type “3” to display the log of non-matching packet.
- p [VALUE]
It means to setup actions for packet not matching any rule, e.g., -p
1
Type “0” to let all the packets pass;
Type “1” to block all the packets.
-M [P2P_NO]
It means to configure IM/P2P for the packets not matching with any
rule, e.g., -M 1
Type “0” to let all the packets pass;
Type “1” to block all the packets.
-U [URL_NO]
It means to configure URL content filter for the packets not
matching with any rule, e.g., -U 1
Type “0” to let all the packets pass;
Type “1” to block all the packets.
-a [AD_SET]
It means to configure the advanced settings.
-f [VALUE]
It means to accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets.
-E [VALUE]
It means to set the maximum count for session limitation.
-F [VALUE]
It means to configure the load-balance policy.
-Q [VALUE]
It means to set the QoS class.
Example
> ipf set -c 1 #set call filter start from set 1
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
781
Setting saved.
> ipf set -d 2 #set data filter start from set 2
Setting saved.
> ipf set -v
Call Filter: Enable (Start Filter Set = 1)
Data Filter: Enable (Start Filter Set = 2)
Log Flag : None
Actions for packet not matching any rule:
Pass or Block
: Pass
CodePage
: ANSI(1252)-Latin I
Max Sessions Limit: 60000
Current Sessions : 0
Mac Bind IP
: Non-Strict
QOS Class
: None
APP Enforcement : None
URL Content Filter: None
Load-Balance policy : Auto-select
-------------------------------------------------------------CodePage
: ANSI(1252)-Latin I
Window size
: 65535
Session timeout
: 1440
DrayTek Banner
: Enable
--------------------------------------------------------------Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets
: Enable
Accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets: Enable
---------------------------------------------------------------Strict Security Checking
[ ]APP Enforcement
>
Telnet Command: ipf rule
This command is used to set filter rule for firewall.
Syntax
ipf rule s r [-<command> <parameter> | ...
ipf rule s r -v
Syntax Description
782
Parameter
Description
s
Such word means Filter Set, range form 1~12.
r
Such word means Filter Rule, range from 1~7.
<Command><parameter>
The following lists all of the available commands with parameters.
-e
It means to enable or disable the rule setting.
0- disable
1- enable
-s o:g <obj>
It means to specify source IP object and IP group.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
o - indicates “object”.
g - indicates “group”.
obj - indicates index number of object or index number of group.
Available settings range from 1-192. For example, “-s g 3" means
the third source IP group profile.
–s u <Address Type> <Start IP
Address> <End IP Address> |
<Address Mask>
It means to configure source IP address including address type,
start IP address, end IP address and address mask.
u – It means “user defined”.
Address Type - Enter the number (representing different address
type).
0 - Subnet Address
1 - Single Address
2 - Any Address
3 - Range Address
Example:
Set Subnet Address => -s u 0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0
Set Single Address => -s u 1 192.168.1.10
Set Any Address => -s u 2
Set Range Address => -s u 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.15
–d u <Address Type> <Start IP
Address> <End IP Address> |
<Address Mask>
It means to configure destination IP address including address type,
start IP address, end IP address and address mask.
u – It means “user defined”.
Address Type - Enter the number (representing different address
type).
0 - Subnet Address
1 - Single Address
2 - Any Address
3 - Range Address
Example:
Set Subnet Address => -d u 0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0
Set Single Address => -d u 1 192.168.1.10
Set Any Address => -d u 2
Set Range Address => -d u 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.15
-d o:g <obj>
It means to specify destination IP object and IP group.
o – indicates “object”.
g – indicates “group”
<obj>– indicates index number of object or index number of group.
Available settings range from 1-192. For example, “-d g 1" means
the first destination IP group profile.
-S o:g <obj>
It means to specify Service Type object and IP group.
o – indicates “object”.
g – indicates “group”
<obj> – indicates index number of object or index number of group.
Available settings range from 1-96. For example, “-S 0 1" means the
first service type object profile.
-S u <protocol>
<source_port__value>
<destination_port_vale>
It means to configure advanced settings for Service Type, such as
protocol and port range.
u – it means “user defined”.
<protocol> – It means TCP(6),UDP(17), TCP/UDP(255).
<source_port__value> –
1 – Port OP, range is 0-3. 0:= =, 1:!=, 2:>, 3:<
3 – Port range of the Start Port Number, range is
1-65535.
5 – Port range of the End Port Number, range is 1-65535.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
783
<destination_port_value>:
2 – Port OP, range is 0-3, 0:==, 1:!=, 2:>, 3:<
4 – Port range of the Start Port Number, range is
1-65535.
6 – Port range of the End Port Number, range is 1-65535.
784
-F
It means the Filter action you can specify.
0 –Pass Immediately,
1 – Block Immediately,
2 – Pass if no further match,
3 – Block if no further match.
-q
It means the classification for QoS.
1– Class 1,
2 – Class 2,
3 – Class 3,
4 – Other
-l
It means load balance policy.
Such function is used for “debug” only.
-E
It means to enable APP Enforcement.
-a<index>
It means to specify which APP Enforcement profile will be applied.
<index> – Available settings range from 0 ~ 32. “0” means no profile
will be applied.
-u<index>
It means to specify which URL Content Filter profile will be applied.
<index> – Available settings range from 0 ~ 8. “0” means no profile
will be applied.
-c
It means to set code page. Different number represents different
code page.
0. None
1. ANSI(1250)-Central Europe
2. ANSI(1251)-Cyrillic
3. ANSI(1252)-Latin I
4. ANSI(1253)-Greek
5. ANSI(1254)-Turkish
6. ANSI(1255)-Hebrew
7. ANSI(1256)-Arabic
8. ANSI(1257)-Baltic
9. ANSI(1258)-Viet Nam
10. OEM(437)-United States
11. OEM(850)-Multilingual Latin I
12. OEM(860)-Portuguese
13. OEM(861)-Icelandic
14. OEM(863)-Canadian French
15. OEM(865)-Nordic
16. ANSI/OEM(874)-Thai
17. ANSI/OEM(932)-Japanese Shift-JIS
18. ANSI/OEM(936)-Simplified Chinese GBK
19. ANSI/OEM(949)-Korean
20. ANSI/OEM(950)-Traditional Chinese Big5
-C <Windows Size>
<Session_Timeout>
It means to set Window size and Session timeout (Minute).
<Windows Size> - Available settings range from 1 ~ 65535.
<Session_Timeout> - Make the best utilization of network resources.
-v
It is used to show current filter/rule settings.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Example
> ipf rule 2 1 -e 1 -s "o 1" -d "o 2" -S "o 1" -F 2
> ipf rule 2 1 -v
Filter Set 2 Rule 1:
Status : Enable
Comments: xNetBios -> DNS
Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: <null>, <null>, <null>, <null>
Direction
: LAN -> WAN
Source IP
: Group1,
Destination IP: Group2,
Service Type : TCP/UDPGroup1,
Fragments
: Don't Care
Pass or Block
: Block Immediately
Branch to Other Filter Set: None
Max Sessions Limit
: 32000
Current Sessions
: 0
Mac Bind IP
: Non-Strict
Qos Class
: None
APP Enforcement
: None
URL Content Filter
: None
Load-Balance policy
: Auto-select
Log
: Disable
----------------------------------------------------------------CodePage
: ANSI(1252)-Latin I
Window size
: 65535
Session timeout
: 1440
DrayTek Banner
: Enable
-----------------------------------------------------------------Strict Security Checking
[ ]APP Enforcement
Telnet Command: ipf flowtrack
This command is used to set and view flowtrack sessions.
Syntax
ipf flowtrack set [-re]
ipf flowtrack view [-f]
ipf flowtrack [-i][-p][-t]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-r
It means to refresh the flowtrack.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
785
-e
It means to enable or disable the flowtrack.
-f
It means to show the sessions state of flowtrack. If you do not
specify any IP address, then all the session state of flowtrack will be
displayed.
-b
It means to show all of IP sessions state.
- i [IP address]
It means to specify IP address (e.g,, -i 192.168.2.55).
-p[value]
It means to type a port number (e.g., -p 1024).
Available settings are 0 ~ 65535.
-t [value]
It means to specify a protocol (e.g., -t tcp).
Available settings include:
tcp
udp
icmp
Example
>ipf flowtrack set -r
Refresh the flowstate ok
> ipf flowtrack view -f
Start to show the flowtrack sessions state:
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:59939 ->
8.8.8.8: 53
REPLY >>
8.8.8.8: 53 ->
192.168.1.11:59939
proto=17, age=93023180(3920), flag=203
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:15073 ->
8.8.8.8: 53
REPLY >>
8.8.8.8: 53 ->
192.168.1.11:15073
proto=17, age=93025100(2000), flag=203
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11: 7247 ->
8.8.8.8: 53
REPLY >>
8.8.8.8: 53 ->
192.168.1.11: 7247
proto=17, age=93020100(7000), flag=203
End to show the flowtrack sessions state
> ipf flowtrack set -e
Current flow_enable=0
> ipf flowtrack set -e
Curretn flow_enable=1
,ifno=0
,ifno=3
,ifno=0
,ifno=3
,ifno=0
,ifno=3
Telnet Command: ipf flowtest
This command is used to for RD debug in firewall diagnose.
Syntax
ipf flowtest mode [<command><parameter>|…]
ipf flowtest set [index][option]
ipf flowtest send
ipf flowtest view
ipf flowtest reset
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
mode
786
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one
line.
-m [value]
It means to set ICMP, UDP or TCP as flowtest mode.
Value – 1, 2 or 3. In which,
1: ICMP
2: UDP
3: TCP
-d [value]
It means to set the original direction
Value – 1 or 2. In which,
1: LAN to WAN
2: WAN to LAN
-v [value]
It means to choose IP version.
Value – 4 or 6. In which,
4: IPv4
6: IPv6
-i [value]
It means to specify IPv4 address of LAN device (e.g.,
192.168.1.10).
-j [value]
It means to specify IPv4 address of WAN divice (e.g.,
8.8.8.8).
-l [value]
It means to specify IPv6 address of LAN device (e.g.,
2001:5678:0000:0000:1319:8a2e:0370:7343).
-w [value]
It means to specify IPv6 address of WAN divice (e.g.,
2001:1234:0000:0000:1319:8a2e:0370:7344).
-p [value]
It means to set port number of LAN device (e.g., 65535)
-q [value]
It means to set port number of WAN device (e.g., 53).
-e [value]
It means to set MAC address of LAN device (e.g.,
AA:BB:CC:11:22:33).
set
[index]
Index: 1 to 5.
-e [value]
It means to enable /disable the test packet.
Value – 1 or 0. In which,
1: enable
0: disable
-w [value]
It means to set direction of this packet.
Value – 1 or 2. In which,
1: LAN to WAN
2: WAN to LAN
-y [value]
It means to set the payload type of this packet.
Value – 1 to 7. In which,
1: Customize
2: Echo Request
3: Echo Reply
4: Destination Unreachable
5: Ping Request
6: Pin Reply
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
787
7: Traceroute
8: DNS Query
9: Http Get
-a [value]
It means set payload data depending to payload type.
Value – host name (e.g, www.draytek.com) or hex. stream
(e.g., “6162636465666768696a6b6c6d6e6f70”)
-f [value]
It means to set TCP flag of this packet.
Value – SYN ACK PSH FIN RST URG
send
It means to start a test by sending each packet out.
view
It means to view the test information and the test result.
reset
It means to clear all configuration for flowtest.
Example
> ipf flowtest mode -m 2 -v 4 -d 1 -i 192.168.1.111 -j 8.8.8.8 -p 57005
-q 53 -e 60:E3:27:02:CB:B1
> ipf flowtest set 1 -e 1 -w 1 -y 8 -a www.draytek.com
> ipf flowtest send
Send TEST Packet
>
> ipf flowtest view
Test Info
Mode:UDP Direction:LAN->WAN
LAN>> IP:192.168.1.111 Port:57005 WAN>> IP:8.8.8.8 Port:53
LAN MAC 60:E3:27:02:CB:B1
Test Result
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.111:57005 ->
8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0
nat=49969 td_state=1
REPLY >>
8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.200.104:38445 ,ifno=3
nat=49969 td_state=1
Status:Pass Packet:2 Set:13 Rule:1
all_app_flag:1f7f8 send_out:2 wan_num:3
Packet:1
Status:Pass dir:LAN->WAN is_p:17
flowflag:9 appflag:80 accflag:1e5b8
fr_flags:2 set:13 rule:1
> ipf flowtest reset
Reset TEST
Telnet Command: Log
This command allows users to view log for WAN interface such as call log, IP filter log, flush
log buffer, etc.
Syntax
log [-cfhiptwx?] [-F a| c | f | w]
788
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-c
It means to show the latest call log.
-f
It means to show the IP filter log.
-F
It means to show the flush log buffer.
a: flush all logs
c: flush the call log
f: flush the IP filter log
w: flush the WAN log
-h
It means to show this usage help.
-p
It means to show PPP/MP log.
-t
It means to show all logs saved in the log buffer.
-w
It means to show WAN log.
-x
It means to show packet body hex dump.
Example
> log -w
25:36:25.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4
Client IP
= 0.0.0.0
Your IP
= 0.0.0.0
Next server IP = 0.0.0.0
Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0
25:36:33.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4
Client IP
= 0.0.0.0
Your IP
= 0.0.0.0
Next server IP = 0.0.0.0
Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0
25:36:41.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4
Client IP
= 0.0.0.0
Your IP
= 0.0.0.0
Next server IP = 0.0.0.0
Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0
25:36:49.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4
Client IP
= 0.0.0.0
Your IP
= 0.0.0.0
Next server IP = 0.0.0.0
Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0
25:36:57.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4
Client IP
= 0.0.0.0
Your IP
= 0.0.0.0
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page]
---
Telnet Command: ldap user
This command is used to configure the LDAP profile.
Syntax
ldap user [INDEX][OPTION]
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
789
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
INDEX
Specify the index number (1 to 8) of the LDAP profile.
OPTION
-n VALUE
Setup Profile Name.
-b VALUE
Setup Base Distinguished Name.
-a VALUE
If you have added containers to be published, you may need to
specify additional LDAP filters for each class of objects included in
these containers.
Creating LDAP filters is a fairly complex task that should be
performed by advanced users only. LDAP filters must be
RFC2254-compliant.
For example, to exclude from publication all users who either
belong to the HR department of your company or are members of
the HR Group. For example:
>ldap user 1 -a
"(!(|(department=HR)(memberOf=CN=HRGroup,OU=Groups,
DC=acme,DC=com)))"
Additional Filter has been updated.
-g VALUE
Setup Group Distinguished Name.
-c VALUE
Setup Common Name Identifier.
-v
View detail information of the LDAP profile.
Example
>ldap user 1 -n LD_user_test1
Profile Name has been updated!
> ldap user 1 -v
Profile Index:1
Profile Name:LD_user_test1
Common Name Identifier:
Base Distinguished Name:
Additional Filter:
Group distinguished Name:
>ldap user 1 -b ou=People,dc=example,dc=com
Telnet Command: ldap set
This command is used to set general settings (e.g., IP address, port number) for LDAP server.
Syntax
ldap set [Options][Value]
Syntax Description
790
Parameter
Description
enable [0-1]
Enable or disable LDAP function.
0 – Disable the function.
1 – Enable the function.
type [0-2]
Set the bind type as Simple(0),Anonymous(1), and Regular(2).
ssl [0-1]
Enable or disable LDAP function via SSL tunnel.
0 – Disable the function.
1 – Enable the function.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
IP <VALUE>
Set IP address for LDAP server.
port <VALUE>
Set port number for LDAP server.
dn <VALUE>
Set Regular DN value
PWD <VALUE>
Set Regular password value.
Example
>ldap set enable 1
>ldap enabled.
> ldap set ssl 1
LDAP with SSL has been enabled!
> ldap set IP 192.168.100.155
LDAP Server IP has been setting.
> ldap set port 389
LDAP Server Port has been setting.
> ldap set dn dc=example,dc=com
LDAP Regular DN has been setting.
> ldap set PWD 123456
LDAP Regular Password has been setting.
Telnet Command: ldap view
This command is used to check current status of LDAP settings configuration.
Syntax
ldap view
Example
> ldap view ?
LDAP Enable:Disabled.
LDAP Bind Type:Simple
LDAP with SSL:Disabled
LDAP Regular DN:
LDAP Regular Password:
LDAP Server IP:
LDAP Server Port:389
Telnet Command: tacacsplus set
This command allows users to configure general settings for TACACS+ server
Syntax
tacacspluse set [Options][Value]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
enable [0-1]
Disable (0)/enable(1) the TACACS+ server.
IP <VALUE>
Set the IP address of TACACS+ server.
port <VALUE>
Set the port number of TACACS+ server.
shared_secret <VALUE>
Set the Shared Secret value of TACACS+ Server.
Example
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
791
> tacacsplus set enable 1
TACACS+ enabled!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> tacacsplus set IP 192.168.1.59
TACACS+ Server IP has been setting.
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> tacacsplus view
TACACS+ Enable:Enable.
TACACS+ Server IP:192.168.1.59
TACACS+ Server Port:49
TACACS+ Type:ASCII
TACACS+ Shared Secret:
Telnet Command: tacacsplus view
This command allows users to check the general settings for TACACS+ server
Syntax
tacacspluse view
Example
> tacacsplus view
TACACS+ Enable:Enable.
TACACS+ Server IP:192.168.1.59
TACACS+ Server Port:49
TACACS+ Type:ASCII
TACACS+ Shared Secret:
Telnet Command: mngt ftpport
This command allows users to set FTP port for management.
Syntax
mngt ftpport [FTP port]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
FTP port
It means to type the number for FTP port. The default setting is
21.
Example
> mngt ftpport 21
% Set FTP server port to 21 done.
Telnet Command: mngt httpport
This command allows users to set HTTP port for management.
Syntax
792
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
mngt httpport [Http port]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Http port
It means to enter the number for HTTP port. The default setting is
80.
Example
> mngt httpport 80
% Set web server port to 80 done.
Telnet Command: mngt httpsport
This command allows users to set HTTPS port for management.
Syntax
mngt httpsport [Https port]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Https port
It means to type the number for HTTPS port. The default setting is
443.
Example
> mngt httpsport 443
% Set web server port to 443 done.
Telnet Command: mngt telnetport
This command allows users to set telnet port for management.
Syntax
mngt telnetport [Telnet port]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
Telnet port
It means to type the number for telnet port. The default setting is
23.
Example
> mngt telnetport 23
% Set Telnet server port to 23 done.
Telnet Command: mngt sshport
This command allows users to set SSH port for management.
Syntax
mngt sshport [ssh port]
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
793
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ssh port
It means to type the number for SSH port. The default setting is
22.
Example
> mngt sshport 23
% Set ssh port to 23 done.
Telnet Command: mngt noping
This command is used to pass or block Ping from LAN PC to the internet.
Syntax
mngt noping [on]
mngt noping [off]
mngt noping [viewlog]
mngt noping [clearlog]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on
All PING packets will be forwarded from LAN PC to Internet.
off
All PING packets will be blocked from LAN PC to Internet.
viewlog
It means to display a log of ping action, including source MAC and
source IP.
clearlog
It means to clear the log of ping action.
Example
> mngt noping off
No Ping Packet Out is OFF!!
Telnet Command: mngt defenseworm
This command can block specified port for passing through the router.
Syntax
mngt defenseworm [on]
mngt defenseworm [off]
mngt defenseworm [add port]
mngt defenseworm [del port]
mngt defenseworm [viewlog]
mngt defenseworm [clearlog]
Syntax Description
Parameter
794
Description
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
on
It means to activate the function of defense worm packet out.
off
It means to inactivate the function of defense worm packet out.
add port
It means to add a new TCP port for block.
del port
It means to delete a TCP port for block.
viewlog
It means to display a log of defense worm packet, including source
MAC and source IP.
clearlog
It means to remove the log of defense worm packet.
Example
> mngt defenseworm add 21
Add TCP port 21
Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445, 21
> mngt defenseworm del 21
Delete TCP port 21
Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445
Telnet Command: mngt rmtcfg
This command can allow the system administrators to login from the Internet. By default, it is
not allowed.
Syntax
mngt rmtcfg [status]
mngt rmtcfg [enable]
mngt rmtcfg [disable]
mngt rmtcfg [http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/tr069] [on/off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
status
It means to display current setting for your reference.
enable
It means to allow the system administrators to login from the
Internet.
disable
It means to deny the system administrators to login from the
Internet.
http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/t
r069
It means to specify one of the servers/protocols for enabling or
disabling.
on/off
on – enable the function.
off – disable the function.
Example
> mngt
Enable
Remote
please
rmtcfg ftp on
server fail
configure function has been disabled
enable by enter mngt rmtcfg enable
> mngt rmtcfg enable
%% Remote configure function has been enabled.
> mngt rmtcfg ftp on
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
795
%% FTP server has been enabled.
796
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: mngt lanaccess
This command allows users to manage accessing into Vigor router through LAN port.
Syntax
mngt lanaccess -e [0/1] –s [value] –i [value]
mngt lanaccess –f
mngt lanaccess –d
mngt lanaccess –v
mngt lanaccess –h
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-e[0/1]
It means to enable/disable the function.
0-disable the function.
1-enable the function.
-s[value]
It means to specify service offered.
Available values include:
FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, TELNET, SSH, None, All
-i[value]
It means the interface which is allowed to access.
Available values include:
LAN2~LAN6, DMZ, IP Routed Subnet, None, All
Note: LAN1 is always allowed for accessing into the router.
-f
It means to flush all of the settings.
-d
It means to restore the factory default settings.
-v
It means to view current settings.
-h
It means to get the usage of such command.
Example
> mngt lanaccess -e 1
> mngt lanaccess -s FTP,TELNET
> mngt lanaccess -i LAN3
> > mngt lanaccess -v
Current LAN Access Control Setting:
* Enable:Yes
* Service:
- FTP:Yes
- HTTP:No
- HTTPS:No
- TELNET:Yes
- SSH:No
* Subnet:
- LAN 2: disabled
- LAN 3: enabled
- LAN 4: disabled
- LAN 5: disabled
- LAN 6: disabled
- DMZ: disabled
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
797
- IP Routed Subnet: disabled
Note: the settings do NOT apply to LAN1, LAN1 is always allowed to access
the router
Telnet Command: mngt echoicmp
This command allows users to reject or accept PING packets from the Internet.
Syntax
mngt echoicmp [enable]
mngt echoicmp [disable]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
enable
It means to accept the echo ICMP packet.
disable
It means to drop the echo ICMP packet.
Example
> mngt echoicmp enable
%% Echo ICMP packet enabled.
Telnet Command: mngt accesslist
This command allows you to specify that the system administrator can login from a specific
host or network. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.
Syntax
mngt accesslist list
mngt accesslist add [index][ip addr][mask]
mngt accesslist remove [index]
mngt accesslist flush
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
list
It can display current setting for your reference.
add
It means adding a new entry.
index
It means to specify the number of the entry.
ip addr
It means to specify an IP address.
mask
It means to specify the subnet mask for the IP address.
remove
It means to delete the selected item.
flush
It means to remove all the settings in the access list.
Example
> mngt accesslist add 1 192.168.1.89 255.255.255.0
%% Set OK.
> mngt accesslist list
798
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
%% Access list :
Index IP address
Subnet mask
==========================================
1
192.168.1.89
255.255.255.0
Telnet Command: mngt snmp
This command allows you to configure SNMP for management.
Syntax
mngt snmp [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-e <1/2>
1: Enable the SNMP function.
2: Disable the SNMP function.
-g<Community name>
It means to set the name for getting community by typing a proper
character. (max. 23 characters)
-s <Community name>
It means to set community by typing a proper name. (max. 23
characters)
-m <IP address>
It means to set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function.
Please type in IPv4 address to specify certain host.
-t <Community name>
It means to set trap community by typing a proper name. (max. 23
characters)
-n <IP address>
It means to set the IPv4 address of the host that will receive the
trap community.
-T <seconds>
It means to set the trap timeout <0~999>.
-V
It means to list SNMP setting.
Example
> mngt snmp -e 1 -g draytek -s DK -m 192.168.1.1 -t trapcom -n 10.20.3.40
-T 88
SNMP Agent Turn on!!!
Get Community set to draytek
Set Community set to DK
Manager Host IP set to 192.168.1.1
Trap Community set to trapcom
Notification Host IP set to 10.20.3.40
Trap Timeout set to 88 seconds
Telnet Command: mngt bfp
This command allows you to configure brute force protect (BFP) for system management.
Syntax
mngt bfp [<command><parameter>|…]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Description
799
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-e 0/1
Enable / disable the BFP function.
0 – Disable
1 – Enable
-s [service]
It means to enable different service.
service - Available types are FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, TELNET, TR069, SSH,
None and All.
-l [failure]
It means to set login failure retry times.
failure - Available number is from 1 to 255.
-p [penalty]
It means to set penalty time for BFP. The unit is sec.
-v
It means to view current settings.
Example
> mngt bfp -e 1
> mngt bfp -s FTP
> mngt bfp -l 10
> mngt bfp -v
Current Brute Force Protection Setting:
* Enable: yes
* Service:
- FTP:
yes
- HTTP:
no
- HTTPS:
no
- TELNET:
no
- TR069:
no
- SSH:
no
* Maximum login failures: 10
* Penalty period: 0
Telnet Command: msubnet switch
This command is used to configure multi-subnet.
Syntax
msubnet switch [2/3/4/5][On/Off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
On/Off
On means turning on the subnet for the specified LAN interface.
Off means turning off the subnet.
Example
800
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
> msubnet switch 2 On
% LAN2
Subnet On!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Telnet Command: msubnet addr
This command is used to configure IP address for the specified LAN interface.
Syntax
msubnet addr [2/3/4/5][IP address]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
IP address
Enter the private IP address for the specified LAN interface.
Example
> msubnet addr 2 192.168.5.1
% Set LAN2 subnet IP address done !!!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Telnet Command: msubnet nmask
This command is used to configure net mask address for the specified LAN interface.
Syntax
msubnet nmask [2/3/4/5][IP address]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
IP address
Enter the subnet mask address for the specified LAN interface.
Example
> msubnet nmask 2 255.255.0.0
% Set LAN2 subnet mask done !!!
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
801
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Telnet Command: msubnet status
This command is used to display current status of subnet.
Syntax
msubnet status [2/3/4/5]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
Example
> msubnet status 2
% LAN2
Off: 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0, PPP Start IP: 0.0.0.60
% DHCP server: Off
% Dhcp Gateway: 0.0.0.0, Start IP: 0.0.0.10, Pool Count: 50
Telnet Command: msubnet dhcps
This command allows you to enable or disable DHCP server for the subnet.
Syntax
msubnet dhcps [2/3/4/5][On/Off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
On/Off
On means enabling the DHCP server for the specified LAN interface.
Off means disabling the DHCP server.
Example
> msubnet dhcps 3 off
% LAN3
Subnet DHCP Server disabled!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
802
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: msubnet nat
This command is used to configure the subnet for NAT or Routing usage.
Syntax
msubnet nat [2/3/4/5] [On/Off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
On/Off
On – It means the subnet will be configured for NAT usage.
Off - It means the subnet will be configured for Routing usage.
Example
> > msubnet nat 2 off
% LAN2 Subnet is for Routing usage!
%Note: If you have multiple WAN connections, please be reminded to setup
a Load-Balance policy so that packets from this subnet will be forwarded
to the right WAN interface!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Telnet Command: msubnet gateway
This command is used to configure an IP address as the gateway used for subnet.
Syntax
msubnet gateway [2/3/4/5] [Gateway IP]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
Gateway IP
Specify an IP address as the gateway IP.
Example
> msubnet gateway 2 192.168.1.13
% Set LAN2 Dhcp Gateway IP done !!!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
803
Telnet Command: msubnet ipcnt
This command is used to defined the total number allowed for each LAN interface.
Syntax
msubnet ipcnt [2/3/4/5] [IP counts]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
IP counts
Specify a total number of IP address allowed for each LAN interface.
The available range is from 0 to 220.
Example
> msubnet ipcnt 2 15
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Telnet Command: msubnet talk
This command is used to establish a route between two LAN interfaces.
Syntax
msubnet talk [1/2/3/4/5] [1/2/3/4/5] [On/Off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
1/2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
1=LAN1
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
On/Off
On – It means
Off - It means
Example
> msubnet talk 1 2 on
% Enable routing between LAN1
and LAN2
!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> msubnet talk ?
% msubnet talk <1/2/3/4/5> <1/2/3/4/5> <On/Off>
% where 1:LAN1, 2:LAN2, 3:LAN3, 4:LAN4, 5:LAN5
% Now:
804
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
%
%
%
%
%
%
>
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4
LAN5
LAN1
V
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4
LAN5
V
V
V
V
Telnet Command: msubnet startip
This command is used to configure a starting IP address for DCHP.
Syntax
msubnet startip [2/3/4/5] [Gateway IP]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
Gateway IP
Type an IP address as the starting IP address for a subnet.
Example
> msubnet startip 2 192.168.2.90
%Set LAN2 Dhcp Start IP done !!!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> msubnet startip ?
% msubnet startip <2/3/4/5/6> <Gateway IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.2.90; LAN3 192.168.3.10; LAN4 192.168.4.10; LAN5
192.168.5.1
0; LAN6 192.168.6.10
Telnet Command: msubnet pppip
This command is used to configure a starting IP address for PPP connection.
Syntax
msubnet pppip [2/3/4/5] [Start IP]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
Start IP
Type an IP address as the starting IP address for PPP connection.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
805
Example
> msubnet pppip 2 192.168.2.250
% Set LAN2 PPP(IPCP) Start IP done !!!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> msubnet pppip ?
% msubnet pppip <2/3/4/5/6> <Start IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.2.250; LAN3 192.168.3.200; LAN4 192.168.4.200; LAN5
192.168.5.200; LAN6 192.168.6.200
Telnet Command: msubnet nodetype
This command is used to specify the type for node which is required by DHCP option.
Syntax
msubnet nodetype [2/3/4/5][count]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
count
Choose the following number for specifying different node type.
1= B-node
2= P-node
4= M-node
8= H-node
0= Not specify any type for node.
Example
> msubnet nodetype ?
% msubnet nodetype <2/3/4/5> <count>
% Now: LAN2 0; LAN3 0; LAN4 0; LAN5 0
% count: 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node
> msubnet nodetype 2 1
% Set LAN2 Dhcp Node Type done !!!
> msubnet nodetype ?
% msubnet nodetype <2/3/4/5> <count>
% Now: LAN2 1; LAN3 0; LAN4 0; LAN5 0
% count: 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node
806
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: msubnet primWINS
This command is used to configure primary WINS server.
Syntax
msubnet primWINS [2/3/4/5/6] [WINS IP]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5/6
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6
WINS IP
Enter the IP address as the WINS IP.
Example
> msubnet primWINS 2 192.168.3.5
% Set LAN2 Dhcp Primary WINS IP done !!!
> msubnet primWINS ?
% msubnet primWINS <2/3/4/5/6> <WINS IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.3.5; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0; LAN5 0.0.0.0; LAN6
0.0.0.0
Telnet Command: msubnet secWINS
This command is used to configure secondary WINS server.
Syntax
msubnet secWINS [2/3/4/5/6] [WINS IP]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5/6
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6
WINS IP
Enter the IP address as the WINS IP.
Example
> msubnet secWINS 2 192.168.3.89
% Set LAN2 Dhcp Secondary WINS IP done !!!
> msubnet secWINS ?
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
807
% % msubnet secWINS <2/3/4/5/6> <WINS IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.3.89; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0; LAN5 0.0.0.0;
LAN6 0.0.0.0
Telnet Command: msubnet tftp
This command is used to set TFTP server for multi-subnet.
Syntax
msubnet tftp [2/3/4/5] [TFTP server name]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
2/3/4/5
It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
TFTP server name
Type a name to indicate the TFTP server.
Example
> msubnet tftp ?
% msubnet tftp <2/3/4/5> <TFTP server name>
% Now: LAN2
LAN3
LAN4
LAN5
LAN6
> msubnet tftp 2 publish
% Set LAN2 TFTP Server Name done !!!
> msubnet tftp ?
% msubnet tftp <2/3/4/5> <TFTP server name>
% Now: LAN2 publish
LAN3
LAN4
LAN5
Telnet Command: msubnet mtu
This command allows you to configure MTU value for LAN/DMZ/IP Routed Subnet.
Syntax
msubnet mtu [interface][value]
Syntax Description
808
Parameter
Description
interface
Available settings include LAN1~LAN6, IP_Routed_Subnet, and DMZ.
value
1000 ~ 1508 (Bytes), default: 1500 (Bytes)
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Example
> msubnet mtu ?
Usage:
>msubnet mtu <interface> <value>
<interface>: LAN1~LAN5,IP_Routed_Subnet,DMZ
<value>:
1000 ~ 1496 (Bytes), default: 1500 (Bytes)
e.x: >msubnet mtu LAN1 1492
Current Settings:
LAN1 MTU:
1500 (Bytes)
LAN2 MTU:
1500 (Bytes)
LAN3 MTU:
1500 (Bytes)
LAN4 MTU:
1500 (Bytes)
LAN5 MTU:
1500 (Bytes)
DMZ MTU:
1500 (Bytes)
IP Routed Subnet MTU: 1500 (Bytes)
Telnet Command: msubnet leasetime
This command allows you to set leasetime for DHCP server. It is helpful to manage the IP
address(es) assigned by DHCP server.
Syntax
msubnet leasetime [1/2/3/4/5/6/dmz][Lease Time (sec.)]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[1/2/3/4/5/6/dmz]
1 – 6 represent LAN1 to LAN6.
Lease Time (sec.)
Range from 1 to 259200.
If no value specified here, Vigor router system will use the
maximum value, 259200, as the leasetime.
Example
> msubnet leasetime 1 80800
Set LAN1 lease time: 80800
> msubnet leasetime 1
% Set LAN1 lease time: 259200
Telnet Command: object ip obj
This command is used to create an IP object profile.
Syntax
object ip obj setdefault
object ip obj INDEX -v
object ip obj INDEX -n NAME
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
809
object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT
object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX
It means the index number of the specified object profile.
-v
It means to view the information of the specified object profile.
Example: object ip obj 1 -v
-n NAME
It means to define a name for the IP object.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object ip obj 9 -n bruce
-i INTERFACE
It means to define an interface for the IP object.
INTERFACE=0, means any
INTERFACE=1, means LAN
INTERFACE=3, means WAN
Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0
-s INVERT
It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.
INVERT=0, means disableing the function.
INVERT=1, means enabling the function.
Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1
-a TYPE
It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object profile.
TYPE=0, means Mask
TYPE=1, means Single
TYPE=2, means Any
TYPE=3, means Rang
Example: object ip obj 3 -a 2
[START_IP]
When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type an IP address as a
starting point and another IP address as end point.
Type an IP address.
[END/MASK_IP]
Type an IP address (different with START_IP) as the end IP address.
Example
> object ip obj 1 -n marketing
> object ip obj 1 -a 1 192.168.1.45
> object ip obj 1 -v
IP Object Profile 1
Name :[marketing]
Interface:[Any]
Address type:[single]
Start ip address:[192.168.1.45]
End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0]
Invert Selection:[0]
810
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: object ip grp
This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile.
Syntax
object ip grp setdefault
object ip grp INDEX -v
object ip grp INDEX -n NAME
object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX
It means the index number of the specified group profile.
-v
It means to view the information of the specified group profile.
Example: object ip grp 1 -v
-n NAME
It means to define a name for the IP group.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce
-i INTERFACE
It means to define an interface for the IP group.
INTERFACE=0, means any
INTERFACE=1, means LAN
INTERFACE=2, means WAN
Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0
-a IP_OBJ_INDEX
It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile.
Example: :object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5
The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group
under such profile.
Example
> object ip grp 2 -n First
IP Group Profile 2
Name :[First]
Interface:[Any]
Included ip object index:
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
> object ip grp 2 -i 1
> object ip grp 2 -a 1 2
IP Group Profile 2
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
811
Name :[First]
Interface:[Lan]
Included ip object index:
[0:][1]
[1:][2]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
812
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: object ipv6 obj
This comman is used to create an IP object profile.
Syntax
object ip obj setdefault
object ip obj INDEX -v
object ip obj INDEX -n NAME
object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT
object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX
It means the index number of the specified object profile.
-v
It means to view the information of the specified object profile.
Example: object ip obj 1 -v
-n NAME
It means to define a name for the IP object.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object ip obj 9 -n bruce
-i INTERFACE
It means to define an interface for the IP object.
INTERFACE=0, means any
INTERFACE=1, means LAN
INTERFACE=3, means WAN
Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0
-s INVERT
It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.
INVERT=0, means disableing the function.
INVERT=1, means enabling the function.
Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1
-a TYPE
It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object profile.
TYPE=0, means Mask
TYPE=1, means Single
TYPE=2, means Any
TYPE=3, means Rang
Example: object ip obj 3 -a 2
[START_IP]
When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type an IP address as a
starting point and another IP address as end point.
Type an IP address.
[END/MASK_IP]
Type an IP address (different with START_IP) as the end IP address.
Example
> object ip obj 1 -n marketing
> object ip obj 1 -a 1 192.168.1.45
> object ip obj 1 -v
IP Object Profile 1
Name :[marketing]
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
813
Interface:[Any]
Address type:[single]
Start ip address:[192.168.1.45]
End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0]
Invert Selection:[0]
Telnet Command: object ipv6 grp
This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile.
Syntax
object ip grp setdefault
object ip grp INDEX -v
object ip grp INDEX -n NAME
object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX
It means the index number of the specified group profile.
-v
It means to view the information of the specified group profile.
Example: object ip grp 1 -v
-n NAME
It means to define a name for the IP group.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce
-i INTERFACE
It means to define an interface for the IP group.
INTERFACE=0, means any
INTERFACE=1, means LAN
INTERFACE=2, means WAN
Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0
-a IP_OBJ_INDEX
It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile.
Example: :object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5
The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group
under such profile.
Example
> > object ip grp 2 -n First
IP Group Profile 2
Name :[First]
Interface:[Any]
Included ip object index:
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
814
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
[7:][0]
[8:][0]
[9:][0]
[10:][0]
[11:][0]
Set ok!
Telnet Command: object service obj
This command is used to create service object profile.
Syntax
object service obj setdefault
object service obj INDEX -v
object service obj INDEX -n NAME
object service obj INDEX -p PROTOCOL
object service obj INDEX -s CHK [START_P] [END_P]
object service obj INDEX -d CHK [START_P] [END_P]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX
It means the index number of the specified service object profile.
-v
It means to view the information of the specified service object
profile.
Example: object service obj 1 -v
-n NAME
It means to define a name for the IP object.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object service obj 9 -n bruce
-i PROTOCOL
It means to define a PROTOCOL for the service object profile.
PROTOCOL =0, means any
PROTOCOL =1, means ICMP
PROTOCOL =2, means IGMP
PROTOCOL =6, means TCP
PROTOCOL =17, means UDP
PROTOCOL =255, means TCP/UDP
Other values mean other protocols.
Example: object service obj 8 -i 0
CHK
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
It means the check action for the port setting.
0=equal(=), when the starting port and ending port values are the
same, it indicates one port; when the starting port and ending port
values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available
for this service type.
1=not equal(!=), when the starting port and ending port values are
the same, it indicates all the ports except the port defined here;
when the starting port and ending port values are different, it
indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are
available for this service type.
2=larger(>), the port number greater than this value is available..
3=less(<), the port number less than this value is available for this
815
profile.
-s CHK [START_P] [END_P]
It means to set souce port check and configure port range (1~65565)
for TCP/UDP.
END_P, type a port number to indicate source port.
Example: object service obj 3 -s 0 100 200
-d CHK [START_P] [END_P]
It means to set destination port check and configure port range
(1~65565) for TCP/UDP.
END_P, type a port number to indicate destination port.
Example: object service obj 3 -d 1 100 200
Example
> object service obj 1 -n limit
> object service obj 1 -p 255
> object service obj 1 -s 1 120 240
> object service obj 1 -d 1 200 220
> object service obj 1 -v
Service Object Profile 1
Name :[limit]
Protocol:[255]
Source port check action:[!=]
Source port range:[120~240]
Destination port check action:[!=]
Destination port range:[200~220]
Telnet Command: object service grp
This command is used to integrate several service objects under a service group profile.
Syntax
object service grp setdefault
object service grp INDEX -v
object service grp INDEX -n NAME
object service grp INDEX -a SER_OBJ_INDEX
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX
It means the index number of the specified group profile.
-v
It means to view the information of the specified group profile.
Example: object service grp 1 -v
-n NAME
It means to define a name for the service group.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object service grp 8 -n bruce
-a SER_OBJ_INDEX
It means to specify service object profiles for the group profile.
Example: :object service grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5
The service object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be
group under such profile.
816
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Example
>object service grp 1 -n Grope_1
Service Group Profile 1
Name :[Grope_1]
Included service object index:
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
> object service grp 1 -a 1 2
Service Group Profile 1
Name :[Grope_1]
Included service object index:
[0:][1]
[1:][2]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
Telnet Command: object kw
This command is used to create keyword profile.
Syntax
object kw obj setdefault
object kw obj show PAGE
object kw obj INDEX -v
object kw obj INDEX -n NAME
object kw obj INDEX -a CONTENTS
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
show PAGE
It means to show the contents of the specified profile.
PAGE: type the page number.
show
It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
INDEX
It means the index number of the specified keyword profile.
-v
It means to view the information of the specified keyword profile.
-n NAME
It means to define a name for the keyword profile.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
817
-a CONTENTS
It means to set the contents for the keyword profile.
Example: object kw obj 40 -a test
Example
> object kw obj 1 -n children
Profile 1
Name :[children]
Content:[]
> object kw obj 1 -a gambling
Profile 1
Name :[children]
Content:[gambling]
> object kw obj 1 -v
Profile 1
Name :[children]
Content:[gambling]
Telnet Command: object fe
This command is used to create File Extension Object profile.
Syntax
object fe show
object fe setdefault
object fe obj INDEX -v
object fe obj INDEX -n NAME
object fe obj INDEX -e CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION
object fe obj INDEX -d CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
show
It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
setdefault
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX
It means the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified file
extension object profile.
-v
It means to view the information of the specified file extension
object profile.
-n NAME
It means to define a name for the file extension object profile.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
-e
It means to enable the specific CATEGORY or FILE_EXTENSION.
-d
It means to disable the specific CATEGORY or FILE_EXTENSION
CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION
CATEGORY:
Image, Video, Audio, Java, ActiveX, Compression, Executation
Example: object fe obj 1 -e Image
FILE_EXTENSION:
".bmp", ".dib", ".gif", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpg2", ".jp2", ".pct",
".pcx", ".pic", ".pict", ".png", ".tif", ".tiff", ".asf", ".avi",
818
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
".mov", ".mpe", ".mpeg", ".mpg", ".mp4", ".qt", ".rm", ".wmv",
".3gp", ".3gpp", ".3gpp2", ".3g2", ".aac", ".aiff", ".au", ".mp3",
".m4a", ".m4p", ".ogg", ".ra", ".ram", ".vox", ".wav", ".wma",
".class", ".jad", ".jar", ".jav", ".java", ".jcm", ".js", ".jse",
".jsp", ".jtk", ".alx", ".apb", ".axs", ".ocx", ".olb", ".ole",
".tlb", ".viv", ".vrm", ".ace", ".arj", ".bzip2", ".bz2", ".cab",
".gz", ".gzip", ".rar", ".sit", ".zip", ".bas", ".bat", ".com",
".exe", ".inf", ".pif", ".reg", ".scr"
Example: object fe obj 1 -e .bmp
Example
> object fe obj 1 -n music
> object fe obj 1 -e Audio
> object fe obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[music]
------------------------------------------------------------------------Image category:
[ ].bmp [ ].dib [ ].gif [ ].jpeg [ ].jpg [ ].jpg2 [ ].jp2 [ ].pct
[ ].pcx [ ].pic [ ].pict [ ].png [ ].tif [ ].tiff
------------------------------------------------------------------------Video category:
[ ].asf [ ].avi [ ].mov [ ].mpe [ ].mpeg [ ].mpg [v].mp4 [ ].qt
[ ].rm
[v].wmv [ ].3gp [ ].3gpp [ ].3gpp2 [ ].3g2
------------------------------------------------------------------------Audio category:
[v].aac [v].aiff [v].au
[v].mp3 [v].m4a [v].m4p [v].ogg [v].ra
[v].ram [v].vox [v].wav [v].wma
------------------------------------------------------------------------Java category:
[ ].class [ ].jad [ ].jar [ ].jav [ ].java [ ].jcm [ ].js
[ ].jse
[ ].jsp [ ].jtk
------------------------------------------------------------------------ActiveX category:
[ ].alx [ ].apb [ ].axs [ ].ocx [ ].olb [ ].ole [ ].tlb [ ].viv
[ ].vrm
------------------------------------------------------------------------Compression category:
[ ].ace [ ].arj [ ].bzip2 [ ].bz2 [ ].cab [ ].gz
[ ].gzip [ ].rar
[ ].sit [ ].zip
------------------------------------------------------------------------Executation category:
[ ].bas [ ].bat [ ].com [ ].exe [ ].inf [ ].pif [ ].reg [ ].scr
Telnet Command: object sms
This command is used to create short message object profile.
Syntax
object sms show
object sms setdefault
object sms obj INDEX -v
object sms obj INDEX -n NAME
object sms obj INDEX -s Service Provider
object sms obj INDEX -u Username
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
819
object sms obj INDEX -p Password
object sms obj INDEX -q Quota
object sms obj INDEX -i Interval
object sms obj INDEX -l URL
Syntax Description
Parameter
show
setdefault
[INDEX]
-v
-n [NAME]
-s [Service Provider]
-u [Username]
-p [Password]
-q [Quota]
-I [Interval]
-l [URL]
Description
It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
It means the index number (from 1 to 10) of the specified SMS
object profile.
It means to view the information of the specified SMS object
profile.
It means to define a name for the SMS object profile.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
It means to specify the number of the service provider which offers
the service of SMS. Different numbers represent different service
provider.
0 : kotsms.com.tw (TW)
2 : textmarketer.co.uk (UK)
4 : messagemedia.co.uk (UK)
5 : bulksms.com (INT)
6 : bulksms.co.uk (UK)
7 : bulksms.2way.co.za (ZA)
8 : bulksms.com.es (ES)
9 : usa.bulksms.com (US)
10 : bulksms.de (DE)
11 : www.pswin.com (EU)
12 : www.messagebird.com (EU)
13 : www.lusosms.com (EU)
14 : www.vibeactivemedia.com (UK)
It means to define a user name for the SMS object profile.
Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected
SMS provider.
It means to define a password for the SMS object profile.
Type a password that the sender can use to register to selected SMS
provider.
Enter the number of the credit that you purchase from the service
provider.
Note that one credit equals to one SMS text message on the
standard route.
It means to set the sending interval for the SMS to be delivered.
Enter the shortest time interval for the system to send SMS.
It means to set the URL for Custom 1 and Custom 2 profiles.
The profile name for Custom 1 and Custom 2 are defined in default
and can not be changed.
Example
> object sms obj 1 –n CTC
> object sms obj 1 -n CTC
> object sms obj 1 -s 0
> object sms obj 1 -u carrie
> object sms obj 1 -p 19971125cm
> object sms obj 1 -q 2
> object sms obj 1 -i 50
> object sms obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[CTC]
SMS Provider:[kotsms.com.tw (TW)]
Username:[carrie]
Password:[******]
Quota:[2]
Sending Interval:[50(seconds)]
820
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: object mail
This command is used to create mail object profile.
Syntax
object mail show
object mail setdefault
object mail obj INDEX -v
object mail obj INDEX -n Profile Name
object mail obj INDEX -s SMTP Server
object mail obj INDEX -l Use SSL
object mail obj INDEX -m SMTP Port
object mail obj INDEX -a Sender Address
object mail obj INDEX -t Authentication
object mail obj INDEX -u Username
object mail obj INDEX -p Password
object mail obj INDEX -i Sending Interval
Syntax Description
Parameter
show
setdefault
[INDEX]
-v
-n [Profile Name]
-s [SMTP Server]
-l [Use SSL]
-m [SMTP Port]
-a [Sender Address]
-t Authentication
-u Username
-p Password
-i Sending Interval
Description
It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
It means the index number (from 1 to 10) of the specified mail
object profile.
It means to view the information of the specified mail object
profile.
It means to define a name for the mail object profile.
Profile Name: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
It means to set the IP address of the mail server.
It means to use port 465 for SMTP server for some e-mail server uses
https as the transmission method.
0 – disable
1 – enable to use the port number.
It means to set the port number for SMTP server.
It means to set the e-mail address (e.g., [email protected]) of
the sender.
The mail server must be authenticated with the correct username
and password to have the right of sending message out.
0 – disable
1 – enable to use the port number.
Type a name for authentication. The maximum length of the name
you can set is 31 characters.
Type a password for authentication. The maximum length of the
password you can set is 31 characters.
Define the interval for the system to send the SMS out. The unit is
second.
Example
> object mail obj 1 –n buyer
> object mail obj 1 -n buyer
> object mail obj 1 -s 192.168.1.98
> object mail obj 1 -m 25
> object mail obj 1 -t 1
> object mail obj 1 -u john
> object mail obj 1 -p happy123456
> object mail obj 1 -i 25
> object mail obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[buyer]
SMTP Server:[192.168.1.98]
SMTP Port:[25]
Sender Address:[]
Use SSL:[disable]
Authentication:[enable]
Username:[john]
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
821
Password:[******]
Sending Interval:[25(seconds)]
Telnet Command: object noti
This command is used to create notification object profile.
Syntax
object noti show
object noti setdefault
object noti obj INDEX -v
object noti obj INDEX -n Profile Name
object mail obj INDEX –e Category Status
object mail obj INDEX –d Category Status
Syntax Description
Parameter
show
setdefault
[INDEX]
Description
It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
It means the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
notification object profile.
It means to view the information of the specified notification
object profile.
It means to define a name for the notification object profile.
Profile Name: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
It means to enable the status of specified category.
It means to disable the status of specified category.
Available categories are:
1: WAN; 2: VPN Tunnel; 3: Temperature Alert;
4: WAN Budget; 5: CVM; 6: High Availability
For WAN –
1: Disconnected; 2: Reconnected.
For VPN Tunnel 1: Disconnected; 2: Reconnected.
For Temperature Alert –
1: Out of Range.
For WAN Budget –
1: Limit Reached.
For CVM –
1: CPE Offline; 2: Backup Fail; 3: Restore Fail; 4: FW Update Fail;
5: VPN Profile Setup Fail.
For High Availability –
1: Failover Occurred, Config Sync Fail, and Router Unstable
-v
-n [Profile Name]
–e
-d
[Category]
[status]
Example
> object noti obj 1
> object noti obj 1
> object noti obj 1
> object noti obj 1
> object noti obj 1
> object noti obj 1
> object noti obj 1
> object noti obj 1
> object noti obj 1
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[]
Category
WAN
VPN Tunnel
Temperature Alert
WAN Budget Alert
CVM Alert
822
–n
–e
–e
–e
–v
-e
-e
-e
-v
markbei
1 1
2 1
5 3
1 1
2 1
5 3
Status
[v]Disconnected
[ ]Reconnected
[v]Disconnected
[ ]Reconnected
[ ]Out of Range
[ ]Limit Reached
[ ]CPE Offline
[ ]CPE Config Backup Fail
[v]CPE Config Restore Fail
[ ]CPE Firmware Fpgrade Fail
[ ]CPE VPN Profile Setup Fail
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
High Availability
[ ]Failover Occurred
Config Sync Fail
Router Unstable
Telnet Command: object schedule
This command is used to create schedule object profile.
Syntax
object schedule set INDEX option
object schedule view
object schedule setdefault
Syntax Description
Parameter
set
[INDEX]
Description
It means to set the schedule profile.
It means the index number (from 1 to 15) of the specified object
profile.
Available options for schedule includes:
-e
It means to enable the schedule setup.
0 – disable
1 – enable
It means to set brief description for the specified profile.
The length range of the comment: 1 ~ 32 characters.
It means to set the starting date of the profile.
[year] – Must be between 2000-2049.
[month] - Must be between 1-12.
[day] - Must be between 1-31.
For example: To set Start Date 2015/10/6, type
> object schedule set 1 -D "2015 10 6"
It means to set the starting time of the profile.
[hour] - Must be between 0-23.
[minute] - Must be between 0-59.
For example: To set Start Time 10:20, type
> object schedule set 1 -T "10 20"
It means to set the duration time of the profile.
[hour] - Must be between 0-23.
[minute] - Must be between 0-59.
For example: To set Duration Time 3:30, type
> object schedule set 1 -d "3 30"
It means to set the action used for the profile.
[value] –
0:Force On, 1:Force Down, 2:Enable Dial-On-Demand, 3:Disable
Dial-On-Demand
It means to set idle time.
[value] – Must be between 0-255(minute). The default is 0.
Set how often the schedule will be applied.
[option] –
0: Once, 1: Weekdays
[day] –
Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat
If the [option] set Weekdays, then must select which days of Week.
example: To select Sunday, Monday, Thursday, type
> object schedule set 1 -h “1 Sun Mon Thu”
It means to show the content of the profile.
It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
option
-e [value]
-c [comment]
-D [year][month][day]
-T [hour][minute]
-d [hour][minute]
-a [value]
-I [value]
-h [option] [day]
view [INDEX]
setdefault
Example
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
object
object
object
object
object
object
object
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
schedule
schedule
schedule
schedule
schedule
schedule
schedule
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
–e
–c
–D
–T
–d
–a
–h
1
Working
“2016 11 8”
“8 1”
“2 30”
0
“1 Mon Wed”
823
> object schedule view 1
Index No.1
-------------------------------------------------[v] Enable Schedule Setup
Comment [ Working ]
Start Date (yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2016 ]-[ 11 ]-[ 8 ]
Start Time (hh:mm)
[ 8 ]:[ 1 ]
Duration Time (hh:mm)
[ 2 ]:[ 30 ]
Action
[ Force On ]
Idle Timeout
[ 0 ] minute(s).(max. 255, 0 for
default)
---------------------------------------------------------------How Often
[ ] Once
[v] Weekdays
[ ]Sun [v]Mon [ ]Tue [v]Wed [ ]Thu [ ]Fri [ ]Sat
>
Telnet Command: port
This command allows users to set the speed for specific port of the router.
Syntax
port [1, 2, 3, 4, wan1, wan2, all] [AN, 1000F, 100F, 100H, 10F, 10H, status]
port[enable,disable] [1, 2, 3, 4, all] [
port status
port sniff [on,off,port,txrx,restart,status]
port 802.1x[enable,disable,status,addport,delport]
port jumbo
port wanfc
port spoof [on, off, stat]
port mac_flush
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, wan1, wan2, all
It means the number of LAN port and WAN port.
AN… 10H
It means the physical type for the specific port.
AN: auto-negotiate.
1000F: 1000M Full Duplex.
100F: 100M Full Duplex.
100H: 100M Half Duplex.
10F: 10M Full Duplex.
10H: 10M Half Duplex.
status
It means to view the Ethernet port status.
wanfc
It means to set WAN flow control.
spoof
It means to enable /disable spoofing detection.
Stat – Display current spoofing status (on or off).
Example
> port 1 100F
824
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
%Set Port 1 Force speed 100 Full duplex OK !!!
Telnet Command: portmaptime
This command allows you to set a time of keeping the session connection for specified
protocol.
Syntax
portmaptime [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-t <sec>
It means “TCP” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP session timeout.
-u <sec>
It means “UDP” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the UDP session timeout.
-i <sec>
It means “IGMP” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the IGMP session timeout.
-w <sec>
It means “TCP WWW” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP WWW session timeout.
-s <sec>
It means “TCP SYN” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP SYN session timeout.
-f
It means to flush all portmaps (useful for diagnostics).
-l <List>
List all settings.
Example
> portmaptime -t 86400 -u 300 -i 10
> portmaptime -l
------ Current setting -----TCP Timeout : 86400 sec.
UDP Timeout : 300 sec.
IGMP Timeout : 10 sec.
TCP WWW Timeout: 60 sec.
TCP SYN Timeout: 60 sec.
Telnet Command: ppa
This command allows you to configure PPA mode.
ppa [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
ppa n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-m <mode>
Specify a mode.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
825
1=auto
2=manual(traffic)
3=manual(qos)
4=manual(specific hosts)
0=disable
-p <proto>
Specify a protocol.
proto - 1-TCP; 2-UDP; 3-Both.
-b 1/0
Enable/disable TWO-way hardware acceleration.
-M enable/disable
Enable/disable the multicast hardware acceleration.
-v
Show PPA_WAN_Table and PPA_LAN_Table for reference.
-c
Clean all settings.
ppa n – used in QoS or specific host
-l <rule>
Specify an index number of rule profile for QoS mode.
-h <host>
Type an IP address for Specific Host mode.
-s <start port>
Specify a starting port number for Specific Host mode.
-e <end
Specify an ending port number for Specific Host mode
port>
Example
> ppa -m 1 -p 1 -b 0
Set ok! The PPA mode is Auto
% You need to set the Manual mode first !
%TWO way accleration is disable
> ppa -v
% PPA mode is Auto
%PPA Protocol TCP 1, UDP 0
%PPA two way disable
%PPA time is 10
%PPA range is 192
%PPA LAN entries 0
%PPA WAN entries 0
Telnet Command: prn
This command allows you to view current status (interface and driver) of USB printer.
Syntax
prn status
prn debug
Example
> prn status
Interface: USB bus 2.0
Printer: NotReady
> prn debug
conn[0] :
826
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
none
conn[1] :
none
conn[2] :
none
conn[3] :
none
LPD_data_total=0
usblp_ptr=0
UsbPrintReady=0, UsbIsPrinting=0
Telnet Command: qos setup
This command allows user to set general settings for QoS.
Syntax
qos setup [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-h
Type it to display the usage of this command.
-m <mode>
It means to define which traffic the QoS control settings will apply
to and eable QoS control.
0: disable.
1: in, apply to incoming traffic only.
2: out, apply to outgoing traffic only.
3: both, apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.
Default is enable (for outgoing traffic).
-i <bandwidth>
It means to set inbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN only)
The available setting is from 1 to 100000.
-o <bandwidth>
It means to set outbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN only).
The available setting is from 1 to 100000.
-r <index:ratio>
It means to set ratio for class index, in %.
-u <mode>
It means to enable bandwidth control for UDP.
0: disable
1: enable
Default is disable.
-p <ratio>
It means to enable bandwidth limit ratio for UDP.
-t <mode>
It means to enable/disable Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize.
0: disable
1: enable
-V
Show all the settings.
-D
Set all to factory default (for all WANs).
[…]
It means that you can type in several commands in one line.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
827
Example
> qos setup -m 3 -i 9500 -o 8500 -r 3:20 -u 1 -p 50 -t 1
WAN1 QOS mode is both
Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up
Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up
WAN1 class 3 ratio set to 20
WAN1 udp bandwidth control set to enable
WAN1 udp bandwidth limit ratio set to 50
WAN1 Outbound TCP ACK Prioritizel set to enable
QoS WAN1 set complete; restart QoS
>
Telnet Command: qos class
This command allows user to set QoS class.
Syntax
qos class -c [no] –[a|e|d] [no][-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
828
Parameter
Description
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-h
Type it to display the usage of this command.
-c <no>
Specify the inde number for the class.
Available value for <no> contains 1, 2 and 3. The default setting is
class 1.
-n <name>
It means to type a name for the class.
-a
It means to add rule for specified class.
-e <no>
It means to edit specified rule.
<no>: type the index number for the rule.
-d <no>
It means to delete specified rule.
<no>: type the index number for the rule.
-m <mode>
It means to enable or disable the specified rule.
0: disable,
1: enable
-l <addr>
Set the local address.
Addr1 – It means Single address. Please specify the IP address
directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.
addr1:addr2 – It means Range address. Please specify the IP
addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”
addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address.
Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l
172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0
any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address
for this command.
-r <addr>
Set the remote address.
addr1 – It means Single address. Please specify the IP address
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.
addr1:addr2 – It means Range address. Please specify the IP
addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”
addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address.
Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l
172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0
any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address
for this command.
-p <DSCP id>
Specify the ID.
-s <Service type>
Specify the service type by typing the number. The available types
are listed as below:
1:ANY 2:DNS 3:FTP 4:GRE 5:H.323
6:HTTP 7:HTTPS 8:IKE 9:IPSEC-AH 10:IPSEC-ESP
11:IRC 12:L2TP 13:NEWS 14:NFS 15:NNTP
16:PING 17:POP3 18:PPTP 19:REAL-AUDIO 20:RTSP
21:SFTP 22:SIP 23:SMTP 24:SNMP 25:SNMP-TRAPS
26:SQL-NET 27:SSH 28:SYSLOG 29:TELNET 30:TFTP
-S <d/s>
Show the content for specified DSCP ID/Service type.
-V <1/2/3>
Show the rule in the specified class.
[…]
It means that you can type in several commands in one line.
Example
> qos class -c 2 -n draytek -a -m 1 -l 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80
Following setting will set in the class2
class 2 name set to draytek
Add a rule in class2
Class2 the 1 rule enabled
Set local address type to Range, 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80
Telnet Command: qos type
This command allows user to configure protocol type and port number for QoS.
Syntax
qos type [-a <service name> | -e <no> | -d <no>].
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-a <name>
It means to add rule.
-e <no>
It means to edit user defined service type. “no” means the index
number. Available numbers are 1~40.
-d <no>
It means to delete user defined service type. “no” means the index
number. Available numbers are 1~40.
-n <name>
It means the name of the service.
-t <type>
It means protocol type.
6:
tcp(default)
17:
udp
0:
tcp/udp
<1~254>: other
-p <port>
It means service port. The typing format must be [start:end] (ex.,
510:330).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
829
-l
List user defined types. “no” means the index number. Available
numbers are 1~40.
Example
> qos type -a draytek -t 6 -p 510:1330
service name set
service type set
Port type set to
Service Port set
>
to draytek
to 6:TCP
Range
to 510 ~ 1330
Telnet Command: qos voip
This command allows user to enable or disable the QoS for VoIP and RTP.
Syntax
qos voip [on/off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on/off
On – Enable the QoS for VoIP.
Off – Disable th QoS for VoIP.
Example
> qos voip off
QoS for VoIP: Disable; SIP Port: 5060
Telnet Command: quit
This command can exit the telnet command screen.
Telnet Command: show lan
This command displays current status of LAN IP address settings.
Example
> show lan
The LAN settings:
ip
mask
dhcp star_ip
pool gateway
----------------------------------------------------------------------------[V]LAN1 192.168.1.1
255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.1.10
200
192.168.1.1
[X]LAN2 192.168.2.1
255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.2.10
100
192.168.2.1
[X]LAN3 192.168.3.1
255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.3.10
100
192.168.3.1
[X]LAN4 192.168.4.1
255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.4.10
100
192.168.4.1
[X]LAN5 192.168.5.1
255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.5.10
100
192.168.5.1
[X]LAN6 192.168.6.1
255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.6.10
100
830
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
192.168.6.1
[X]Route 192.168.0.1
255.255.255.0
[V] 0.0.0.0
0 192.168.0.1
Telnet Command: show dmz
This command displays current status of DMZ host.
Example
> show dmz
%
WAN1 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN1 aux IP
Private IP
---------------------------------------------------1
Disable 172.16.3.221
2
Disable 192.168.1.65
Telnet Command: show dns
This command displays current status of DNS setting
Example
> show dns
%%
Domain name server settings:
%
Primary DNS: [Not set]
%
Secondary DNS: [Not set]
Telnet Command: show openport
This command displays current status of open port setting.
Example
> show openport
%%
Openport settings:
Index Status Comment
Local IP Address
********************************************************
No data entry.
Telnet Command: show nat
This command displays current status of NAT.
Example
> show nat
Port Redirection Running Table:
Index Protocol Public Port Private IP
1
0
0 0.0.0.0
2
0
0 0.0.0.0
3
0
0 0.0.0.0
4
0
0 0.0.0.0
5
0
0 0.0.0.0
6
0
0 0.0.0.0
7
0
0 0.0.0.0
8
0
0 0.0.0.0
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Private Port
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
831
9
0
0 0.0.0.0
10
0
0 0.0.0.0
11
0
0 0.0.0.0
12
0
0 0.0.0.0
13
0
0 0.0.0.0
14
0
0 0.0.0.0
15
0
0 0.0.0.0
16
0
0 0.0.0.0
17
0
0 0.0.0.0
18
0
0 0.0.0.0
19
0
0 0.0.0.0
20
0
0 0.0.0.0
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bar': Next Page]
Telnet Command: show portmap
This command displays the table of NAT Active Sessions.
Example
> show portmap
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Private_IP:Port Pseudo_IP:Port Peer_IP:Port [Timeout/Protocol/Flag]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Telnet Command: show pmtime
This command displays the reuse time of NAT session.
Level0: It is the default setting.
Level1: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than 25% of the default setting.
Level2: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than the eighth of the default
setting.
Example
> show pmtime
Level0 TCP=86400001 UDP=300001 ICMP=10001
Level1 TCP=600000 UDP=90000 ICMP=7000
Level2 TCP=60000 UDP=30000 ICMP=5000
Telnet Command: show session
This command displays current status of current session.
Example
>
%
%
%
%
%
832
show session
Maximum Session Number: 10000
Maximum Session Usage: 49
Current Session Usage: 0
Current Session Used(include waiting for free): 0
WAN1 Current Session Usage: 0
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: show status
This command displays current status of LAN and WAN connections.
Example
> show status
System Uptime:71:2:7
LAN Status
Primary DNS:8.8.8.8
IP Address:192.168.1.1
Secondary DNS:8.8.4.4
Tx Rate:61614
Rx Rate:45219
WAN 1 Status: Disconnected
Enable:Yes
Line:Ethernet
Name:
Mode:PPPoE
Up Time:0:00:00
IP:--TX Packets:0
TX Rate:0 RX Packets:0
GW IP:--RX Rate:0
WAN 2 Status: Disconnected
Enable:Yes
Line:Ethernet
Name:
Mode:DHCP Client Up Time:0:00:00
IP:--TX Packets:0
TX Rate:0 RX Packets:0
GW IP:--RX Rate:0
WAN 3 Status: Disconnected
Enable:Yes
Line:USB
Name:
Mode:--Up Time:0:00:00
IP:--TX Packets:0
TX Rate:0 RX Packets:0
GW IP:--RX Rate:0
Telnet Command: show traffic
This comman can display traffic graph for WAN1, WAN2, transmitted bytes, receivied bytes
and sessions.
Syntax
show traffic [wan1/wan2] [tx/rx] [weekly]
show traffic session [weekly]
Example
> show traffic session weekly0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,2 ,1 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,1 ,3 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,2 ,15 ,5 ,4 ,1 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 0 ,0 ,0 ,0
> show traffic wan1 tx weekly0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
833
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
Telnet Command: show clienttraffic
This command displays packet information for specified external device.
Syntax
show clienttraffic [device index] [wan# or lan#] [tx/rx] [weekly]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[device index]
Enter the device index (01 – 30) in double-digit (ex: 01, 02) for
external device.
Use “switch list” to check which VigorSwitch connects to this
router. Then, type the index number of this VigorSwitch in this
field.
[wan# or lan#]
wan# - Specify WAN interface (WAN1 to WAN2) for Vigor router.
lan#- Specify LAN interface (LANA / LANB) for VigorAP.
[tx/rx]
Tx – Inidcate transmitted data.
Rx – Indicate receivied data.
[weekly]
Display the transmitted data or receivied data collected weekly.
Example
> show clienttraffic 01 lana tx weekly
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,
Telnet Command: show temperature
This command displays data for temperature sensor. The data for the sensor will be recorded
per miniute. Up to 24 hours of senser data can be reviewed by using this command.
Syntax
show temperture
Example
> show temperature
show temperature 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
834
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 6682, 6425, 6425, 6168, 5911, 5911, 5911, 5911,
5911, 5911, 5911, 5911, 5911, 5911, 5911
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
835
Telnet Command: show statistic
This command displays statistics for WAN interface.
Syntax
show statistic
show statistic reset [interface]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
reset
It means to reset the transmitted/received bytes to Zero.
interface
It means to specify WAN1 ~WAN5 (including multi-PVC) interface for
displaying related statistics.
Example
> show statistic
WAN1 total TX: 0
WAN2 total TX: 0
WAN3 total TX: 0
WAN4 total TX: 0
WAN5 total TX: 0
>
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
,RX:
,RX:
,RX:
,RX:
,RX:
0
0
0
0
0
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Telnet Command: smb setting
This command is used to configure file sharing settings for SMB server.
Syntax
smb setting [enable/disable]
smb setting show status
smb setting set workgroup [Workgroup name]
smb setting set host [host name]
smb setting set access [LAN or LANWAN]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
enable/disable
Enable or disable the SMB service.
show status
Display current status of SMB service.
Set workgroup [Workgroup
name]
Set a name of workgroup for SMB service.
set host [host name]
Set a name of the host for SMB service.
set access [LAN or LANWAN]
Allow to access into SMB server by LAN or borth LAN and WAN.
Example
> smb setting enable
SMB service is enabled.
> smb setting set access LAN
836
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Allow SMB access from LAN only.
>
Telnet Command: srv dhcp dhcp2
This command is used to enable DCHP2 server.
Syntax
srv dhcp dhcp2 [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-l<enable>
It menas to enable the LAN port to public DHCP.
0: Disenable
1: Enable
-m<enable>
It menas to enable MAC address to public DHCP.
0: Disenable
1: Enable
-e<id>
It menas to turn on the flag of LAN port 1/2/3/4.
-d<id>
It menas to turn off the flag of LAN port 1/2/3/4.
-v
It menas to view current status.
Example
> srv dhcp dhcp2 -l 1 -e 1
> srv dhcp dhcp2 -v
2nd DHCP server flag status -Server works on specified MAC address: ON
Server works on specified LAN port: ON
Port 1 flag: ON
Port 2 flag: ON
Port 3 flag: OFF
Port 4 flag: OFF
Telnet Command: srv dhcp public
This command allows users to configure DHCP server for second subnet.
Syntax
srv dhcp public start [IP address]
srv dhcp public cnt [IP counts]
srv dhcp public status
srv dhcp public add [MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX]
srv dhcp public del [MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX/all/ALL]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
start
It means the starting point of the IP address pool for the DHCP
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
837
server.
IP address
It means to specify an IP address as the starting point in the IP
address pool.
cnt
It means the IP count number.
IP counts
It means to specify the number of IP addresses in the pool. The
maximum is 10.
status
It means the execution result of this command.
add
It means creating a list of hosts to be assigned.
del
It means removing the selected MAC address.
MAC Addr
It means to specify MAC Address of the host.
all/ALL
It means all of the MAC addresses.
Example
Vigor> ip route add 192.168.1.56 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.12 3 default
Vigor> srv dhcp public status
Index MAC Address
838
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: srv dhcp dns1
This command allows users to set Primary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.
Syntax
srv dhcp dns1 [?]
srv dhcp dns1 [DNS IP address]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
?
It means to display current IP address of DNS 1 for the DHCP server.
DNS IP address
It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS1.
Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet
DNS).
Example
> srv dhcp dns1 168.95.1.1
% srv dhcp dns1 <DNS IP address>
% Now: 168.95.1.1
(IP Routed Subnet dns same as NAT Subnet dns)
Telnet Command: srv dhcp dns2
This command allows users to set Secondary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.
Syntax
srv dhcp dns2 [?]
srv dhcp dns2 [DNS IP address]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
?
It means to display current IP address of DNS 2 for the DHCP server.
DNS IP address
It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS2.
Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet
DNS).
Example
> srv dhcp dns2 10.1.1.1
% srv dhcp dns2 <DNS IP address>
% Now: 10.1.1.1
(IP Routed Subnet dns same as NAT Subnet dns)
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
839
Telnet Command: srv dhcp frcdnsmanl
This command can force the router to invoke DNS Server IP address.
Syntax
srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [on]
srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
?
It means to display the current status.
on
It means to use manual setting for DNS setting.
Off
It means to use auto settings acquired from ISP.
Example
> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl on
% Domain name server now is using manual settings!
> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl off
% Domain name server now is using auto settings!
Telnet Command: srv dhcp gateway
This command allows users to specify gateway address for DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp gateway [?]
srv dhcp gateway [Gateway IP]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
?
It means to display current gateway that you can use.
Gateway IP
It means to specify a gateway address used for DHCP server.
Example
> srv dhcp gateway 192.168.2.1
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
840
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: srv dhcp ipcnt
This command allows users to specify IP counts for DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp ipcnt [?]
srv dhcp ipcnt [IP counts]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
?
It means to display current used IP count number.
IP counts
It means the number that you have to specify for the DHCP server.
Example
> srv dhcp ipcnt ?
% srv dhcp ipcnt <IP counts>
% Now: 150
Telnet Command: srv dhcp off
This function allows users to turn off DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys
reboot" command to reboot router.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp on
This function allows users to turn on DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys
reboot" command to reboot router.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp relay
This command allows users to set DHCP relay setting.
Syntax
srv dhcp relay servip [server ip]
srv dhcp relay subnet [index]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
server ip
It means the IP address that you want to used as DHCP server.
Index
It means subnet 1 or 2. Please type 1 or 2. The router will invoke
this function according to the subnet 1 or 2 specified here.
Example
> srv dhcp relay servip 192.168.1.46
> srv dhcp relay subnet 2
> srv dhcp relay servip ?
% srv dhcp relay servip <server ip>
% Now: 192.168.1.46
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
841
Telnet Command: srv dhcp startip
Syntax
srv dhcp startip [?]
srv dhcp startip [IP address]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
?
It means to display current used start IP address.
IP address
It means the IP address that you can specify for the DHCP server as
the starting point.
Example
> srv dhcp startip 192.168.1.53
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp status
This command can display general information for the DHCP server, such as IP address, MAC
address, leased time, host ID and so on.
Example
> srv dhcp status
DHCP server: Relay Agent
Default gateway: 192.168.1.1
Index IP Address
MAC Address
1
192.168.1.113 00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE
Leased Time
17:20:08
HOST ID
A1000351
Telnet Command: srv dhcp leasetime
This command can set the lease time for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp leasetime [?]
srv dhcp leasetime [Lease Time (sec)]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
?
It means to display current leasetime used for the DHCP server.
Lease Time (sec)
It means the lease time that DHCP server can use. The unit is
second.
Example
> srv dhcp leasetime ?
% srv dhcp leasetime <Lease Time (sec.)>
% Now: 86400
>
842
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: srv dhcp nodetype
This command can set the node type for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp nodetype <count>
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
count
It means to specify a type for node.
1. B-node
2. P-node
4. M-node
8. H-node
Example
> srv dhcp nodetype 1
> srv dhcp nodetype ?
%% srv dhcp nodetype <count>
%% 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node
% Now: 1
Telnet Command: srv dhcp primWINS
This command can set the primary IP address for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp primWINS [WINS IP address]
srv dhcp primWINS clear
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
WINS IP address
It means the IP address of primary WINS server.
clear
It means to remove the IP address settings of primary WINS server.
Example
> srv dhcp primWINS 192.168.1.88
> srv dhcp primWINS ?
%% srv dhcp primWINS <WINS IP address>
%% srv dhcp primWINS clear
% Now: 192.168.1.88
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
843
Telnet Command: srv dhcp secWINS
This command can set the secondary IP address for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp secWINS [WINS IP address]
srv dhcp secWINS clear
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
WINS IP address
It means the IP address of secondary WINS server.
clear
It means to remove the IP address settings of second WINS server.
Example
> srv dhcp secWINS 192.168.1.180
> srv dhcp secWINS ?
%% srv dhcp secWINS <WINS IP address>
%% srv dhcp secWINS clear
% Now: 192.168.1.180
Telnet Command: srv dhcp expired_RecycleIP
This command can set the time to check if the IP address can be assigned again by DHCP
server or not.
Syntax
srv dhcp expRecycleIP <sec time>
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
sec time
It means to set the time (5~300 seconds) for checking if the IP can be
assigned again or not.
Example
Vigor> srv dhcp expRecycleIP 250
% DHCP expired_RecycleIP = 250
Telnet Command: srv dhcp tftp
This command can set the TFTP server as the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>
Syntax Description
844
Parameter
Description
TFTP server name
It means to type the name of TFTP server.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Example
> srv dhcp tftp TF123
> srv dhcp tftp ?
%% srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>
% Now: TF123
Telnet Command: srv dhcp tftpdel
This command can remove the name defined for the TFTP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp tftpdel
Example
> srv dhcp tftp TF123
> srv dhcp tftp ?
%% srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>
% Now: TF123
> srv dhcp tftpdel
% The TFTP Server Name had been deleted !!!
Telnet Command: srv dhcp option
This command can set the custom option for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp option -h
srv dhcp option -l
srv dhcp option -d [idx]
srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -v [option value]
srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -a [option value]
srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -x [option value]
srv dhcp option -u [idx unmber]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-h
It means to display usage of this command.
-l
It means to display all the user defined DHCP options.
-d[idx]
It means to delete the option number by specifying its index number.
-e [1 or 0]
It means to enable/disable custom option feature.
1:enable
0:disable
-c
It means to set option number. Available number ranges from 0 to 255.
-v
It means to set option number by typing string.
-a
It means to set the option value by specifying the IP address.
-x
It means to set option number with the format of Hexadecimal characters.
-u
It means to update the option value of the sepecified index.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
845
idx number
It means the index number of the option value.
Example
> srv dhcp option -e 1 -c 18 -v /path
> srv dhcp option -l
% state idx interface
opt type
% enable 1
ALL LAN
18 ASCII
data
/path
Telnet Command: srv nat dmz
This command allows users to set DMZ host. Before using this command, please set WAN IP
Alias first.
Syntax
srv nat dmz n m [-<command> <parameter> | … ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
n
It means to map selected WAN IP to certain host.
1: wan1
2: wan2
m
It means the index number of the DMZ host.
Default setting is “1” (WAN 1). It is only available for Static IP
mode. If you use other mode, you can set 1 ~ 8 in this field. If WAN
IP alias has been configured, then the number of DMZ host can be
added more.
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-e
It means to enable/disable such feature.
1:enable
0:disable
-i
It means to specify the private IP address of the DMZ host.
-r
It means to remove DMZ host setting.
-v
It means to display current status.
Example
> srv nat dmz 1 1 -i 192.168.1.96
> srv nat dmz -v
%
WAN1 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN1 aux IP
Private IP
---------------------------------------------------1
Disable 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.96
846
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: srv nat ipsecpass
This command allows users to enable or disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source
port (500) preservation.
Syntax
srv nat ipsecpass [options]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[options]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
on
It means to enable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port
(500) preservation.
off
It means to disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source
port (500) preservation.
status
It means to display current status for checking.
Example
> srv nat ipsecpass status
%% Status: IPsec ESP pass-thru and IKE src_port:500 preservation is
OFF.
Telnet Command: srv nat openport
This command allows users to set open port settings for NAT server.
Syntax
srv nat openport n m [-<command> <parameter> | … ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
n
It means the index number for the profiles. The range is from 1 to
20.
m
It means to specify the sub-item number for this profile. The range
is from 1 to 10.
[<command>
<parameter>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-a <enable>
It means to enable or disable the open port rule profile.
0: disable
1:enable
-c <comment>
It means to type the description (less than 23 characters) for the
defined network service.
-i <local ip>
It means to set the IP address for local computer.
Local ip: Type an IP address in this field.
-w <idx>
It means to specify the public IP.
1: WAN1 Default,
2: WAN1 Alias 1,
…and so on.
-p <protocol>
Specify the transport layer protocol.
Available values are TCP, UDP and ALL.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
847
-s<start port>
It means to specify the starting port number of the service offered
by the local host. The range is from 0 to 65535.
-e<end port>
It means to specify the ending port number of the service offered by
the local host.
The range is from 0 to 65535.
-v
It means to display current settings.
-r <remove>
It means to delete the specified open port setting.
remove: Enter the index number of the profile.
-f <flush>
It means to return to factory settings for all the open ports profiles.
Example
> srv nat openport 1 1 -a 1 -c games -i 192.168.1.100 -w 1 -p TCP -s
23 -e 83
> srv nat openport -v
%% Status: Enable
%% Comment: games
%% Private IP address: 192.168.1.100
Index Protocal
Start Port
End Port
*****************************************************************
1.
TCP
23
83
%% Status: Disable
%% Comment:
%% Private IP address: 0.0.0.0
Index Protocal
Start Port
End Port
*****************************************************************
%% Status: Disable
%% Comment:
%% Private IP address: 0.0.0.0
Index Protocal
Start Port
End Port
*****************************************************************
>
Telnet Command: srv nat portmap
This command allows users to set port redirection table for NAT server.
Syntax
srv nat portmap add [idx][serv name][proto][pub port][pri ip][pri port][wan1/wan2]
srv nat portmap del [idx]
srv nat portmap disable [idx]
srv nat portmap enable [idx] [proto]
srv nat portmap flush
srv nat portmap table
Syntax Description
848
Parameter
Description
Add[idx]
It means to add a new port redirection table with an index number.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Available index number is from 1 to 10.
serv name
It means to type one name as service name.
proto
It means to specify TCP or UDP as the protocol.
pub port
It means to specify which port can be redirected to the specified
Private IP and Port of the internal host.
pri ip
It means to specify the private IP address of the internal host
providing the service.
pri port
It means to specify the private port number of the service offered
by the internal host.
wan1/wan2
It means to specify WAN interface for the port redirection.
del [idx]
It means to remove the selected port redirection setting.
disable [idx]
It means to inactivate the selected port redirection setting.
enable [idx]
It means to activate the selected port redirection setting.
flush
It means to clear all the port mapping settings.
table
It means to display Port Redirection Configuration Table.
Example
> srv nat portmap add 1 game tcp 80 192.168.1.11 100 wan1
> srv nat portmap table
NAT Port Redirection Configuration Table:
Index Service Name
Port ifno
1
game
-1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
19
0
0
0
-2
20
0
0
0
-2
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Protocol Public Port Private IP
6
80
192.168.1.11
Private
100
849
Protocol: 0 = Disable, 6 = TCP, 17 = UDP
Telnet Command: srv nat status
This command allows users to view NAT Port Redirection Running Table.
Example
> srv nat status
NAT Port Redirection Running Table:
Index Protocol Public Port Private IP
1
6
80 192.168.1.11
2
0
0 0.0.0.0
3
0
0 0.0.0.0
4
0
0 0.0.0.0
5
0
0 0.0.0.0
6
0
0 0.0.0.0
7
0
0 0.0.0.0
8
0
0 0.0.0.0
9
0
0 0.0.0.0
10
0
0 0.0.0.0
11
0
0 0.0.0.0
12
0
0 0.0.0.0
13
0
0 0.0.0.0
14
0
0 0.0.0.0
15
0
0 0.0.0.0
16
0
0 0.0.0.0
17
0
0 0.0.0.0
18
0
0 0.0.0.0
19
0
0 0.0.0.0
20
0
--- MORE -----
0
0.0.0.0
Private Port
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page]
Telnet Command: srv nat showall
This command allows users to view a summary of NAT port redirection setting, open port and
DMZ settings.
Example
> srv nat showall ?
Index Proto WAN IP:Port
Private IP:Port
Act
*************************************************************************
****
R01
TCP
0.0.0.0:80
192.168.1.11:100
Y
O01
TCP
0.0.0.0:23~83
D01
All
0.0.0.0
192.168.1.100:23~83
192.168.1.96
Y
Y
R:Port Redirection, O:Open Ports, D:DMZ
850
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: switch -i
This command is used to obtain the TX (transmitted) or RX (received) data for each connected
switch.
Syntax
switch -i [switch idx_no] [option]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
switch idx_no
It means the index number of the switch profile.
option
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
cmd
acc
traffic [on/off/status/tx/rx]
cmd
It means to send command to the client.
acc
It means to set the client authentication account and password.
traffic
[on/off/status/tx/rx]
It means to turn on/off or display the data transmission from the
client.
Example
> switch -i 1 traffic on
External Device NO. 1 traffic statistic function is enable
Telnet Command: switch status
This command is used to display current status for external devices.
Example
> switch status
External Device auto discovery status : Disable
No Respond to External Device : Enable
Telnet Command: switch not_respond
This command is used to detect the external device automatically and display on this page.
Syntax
switch not_respond 0
switch not_respond 1
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
0
Disable the option of "No Respond to External Device packets".
1
Enable the option of "No Respond to External Device packets".
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
851
Example
> switch not_respond 1
slave not respond!
>
Telnet Command: switch on
This command is used to turn on the auto discovery for external devices.
Example
> switch on
Enable Extrnal Device auto discovery!
Telnet Command: switch off
This command is used to turn off the auto discovery for external devices.
Example
> switch off
Disable External Device auto discovery!
Telnet Command: switch list
This command is used to display the connection status of the switch.
Example
> switch list?
No.
Mac
IP
status Dur Time Model_Name
-------------------------------------------------------------------------[1] 00-50-7f-cd-07-48 192.168.1.3
On-Line 00:01:01
Vigor2920 Series
Telnet Command: switch clear
This command is used to reset the switch table and reboot the router.
Syntax
switch clear [idx]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
idx
It means the index number of each item shown on the table.
The range is from 1 to 8.
-f
It means to clear all of the data.
Example
> switch clear 1
Switch Data clear successful
> switch clear -f
Switch Data clear successful
852
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: switch query
This command is used to enable or disable the switch query.
Example
> switch query on
Extern Device status query is Enable
> switch query off
Extern Device status query is Disable
Telnet Command: sys admin
This command is used for RD engineer to access into test mode of Vigor router.
Telnet Command: sys adminuser
This command is used to create user account and specify LDAP server. The server will
authenticate the local user who wants to access into the web user interface of Vigor router.
Syntax
sys adminuser [option]
sys adminuser edit [index] username password
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
option
Available options includes:
Local [0-1]
LDAP [0-1]
edit [INDEX]
delete [INDEX]
view [INDEX]
Local [0-1]
0 – Disable the local user.
1 – Enable the local user.
LDAP [0-1]
0 – Disable the LDAP.
1 – Enable the LDAP.
edit [INDEX] username
password
Edit an existed user account or create a new local user account.
[INDEX] – 1 ~8. There are eight profiles to be added / edited.
Username – Type a new name for local user.
Password – Type a password for local user.
delete [INDEX]
Delete a local user account.
view [INDEX]
Show the user account/password detail information.
Example
> sys adminuser Local 1
Local User has enabled!
> sys adminuser LDAP 1
LDAP has enabled!
>> sys adminuser edit 1 carrie test123
Updated!
>> sys adminuser view 1
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
853
Index:1
User Name:carrie
User Password:test123
Telnet Command: sys board
This command is used to turn on or turn off the function of physical factory reset button,
WLAN button, LEDs, and / or the USB ports on Vigor router.
Syntax
sys board button def [on/off]
sys board button wlan [on/off]
sys board led control [on/off]
sys board led sleepMode [on/off]
sys board led sleepMode time [minute]
sys board usb p1/p2 [on/off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
button def [on/off]
on – It is the default value (Enabled).
off – Disable the reset function of the factory reset button.
button wlan [on/off]
on – It is the default value (Enabled).
off - Disable the ability of the Wireless button to control WLAN and
WPS functions.
led control [on/off]
on – It is the default value (Enabled). The LEDs on the front panel is
always on.
off – The LEDs on the front panel is always off.
led sleepMode [on/off]
The function of SleepMode will be available only when LED control
is set to “On”.
on – Enable the function of sleep mode.
off – Disable the function of sleep mode.
led sleepMode time [minute]
Set the countdown time for the LEDs to sleep.
[minute] – Enter a value (e.g., 1, 2, 3 and etc.)
usb p1/p2 [on/off]
on – It is the default value (Enabled).
off – Disable the USB port 1 or 2.
Example
> sys board button ?
sys board button [def/wlan [on/off]]
The button will be invalid after turn it off.
- default button is on now.
- wlan
button is on now.
> sys board button def off
default button is off now.
> sys board button def on
default button is on now.
> sys board usb p2 off
USB port2 power is off now.
> sys board led sleepMode ?
854
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Usage:
sys board led sleepMode [on/off]
[time] [minute]
Current Setting:
LEDs Sleep Mode is off now.
Sleep Countdown Time : 1 minute(s)
> sys board led sleepMode on
LEDs Sleep Mode is on now.
> sys board led sleepMode time 3
Sleep Countdown Time set as 3 minute(s).
Telnet Command: sys bonjour
This command is used to disable/enable and configure the Bonjour service.
Syntax
sys bonjour [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-e <enable>
It is used to disable/enable bonjour service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-h <enable>
It is used to disable/enable http (web) service (0: disable, 1:
enable).
-t <enable>
It is used to disable/enable telnet service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-f <enable>
It is used to disable/enable FTP service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-s <enable>
It is used to disable/enable SSH service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-p <enable>
It is used to disable/enable printer service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-6 <enable>
It is used to disable/enable IPv6 (0: disable, 1: enable).
Example
> sys bonjour -s 1
>
Telnet Command: sys cfg
This command reset the router with factory default settings. When a user types this command,
all the configuration will be reset to default setting.
Syntax
sys cfg default
sys cfg status
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
default
It means to reset current settings with default values.
status
It means to display current profile version and status.
Example
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
855
> sys cfg status
Profile version: 3.0.0
> sys cfg default
>
856
Status: 1 (0x491e5e6c)
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: sys cmdlog
This command displays the history of the commands that you have typed.
Example
> sys cmdlog
% Commands Log: (The lowest index is the newest !!!)
[1] sys cmdlog
[2] sys cmdlog ?
[3] sys ?
[4] sys cfg status
[5] sys cfg ?
Telnet Command: sys ftpd
This command displays current status of FTP server.
Syntax
sys ftpd on
sys ftpd off
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on
It means to turn on the FTP server of the system.
off
It means to turn off the FTP server of the system.
Example
> sys ftpd on
% sys ftpd turn on !!!
Telnet Command: sys domainname
This command can set and remove the domain name of the system when DHCP mode is
selected for WAN.
Syntax
sys domainname [wan1/wan2] [Domain Name Suffix]
sys domainname [wan1/wan2] clear
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
wan1/wan2
It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it.
Domain Name Suffix
It means the name for the domain of the system. The maximum
number of characters that you can set is 40.
clear
It means to remove the domain name of the system.
Example
> sys domainname wan1 clever
> sys domainname wan2 intellegent
> sys domainname ?
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
857
% sys domainname <wan1/wan2> <Domain Name Suffix (max. 40 characters)>
% sys domainname <wan1/wan2> clear
% Now: wan1 == clever, wan2 ==intelligent
>
Telnet Command: sys iface
This command displays the current interface connection status (UP or Down) with IP address,
MAC address and Netmask for the router.
Example
> sys iface
Interface 0 Ethernet:
Status: UP
IP Address: 192.168.1.1
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-00
Interface 4 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-02
Interface 5 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-03
Interface 6 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-04
Interface 7 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-05
Interface 8 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-06
Netmask: 0xFFFFFF00 (Private)
Netmask: 0xFFFFFFFF
Netmask: 0x00000000
Netmask: 0x00000000
Netmask: 0x00000000
Netmask: 0x00000000
Netmask: 0x00000000
Interface 9 Ethernet:
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Netmask: 0x00000000
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-07
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page]
-->
858
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: sys name
This command can set and remove the name for the router when DHCP mode is selected for
WAN.
Syntax
sys name [wan1] [ASCII string]
sys name [wan1] clear
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
wan1
It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it.
ASCII string
It means the name for router. The maximum character that you can
set is 20.
Example
>
>
%
%
%
sys name wan1 drayrouter
sys name ?
sys name <wan1/wan2> <ASCII string (max. 20 characters)>
sys name <wan1/wan2> clear
Now: wan1 == drayrouter, wan2 ==
Note: Such name can be used to recognize router’s identification in SysLog dialog.
Telnet Command: sys passwd
This command allows users to set password for the administrator.
sys passwd [ASCII string]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
ASCII string
It means the password for administrator. The maximum character
that you can set is 23.
Example
> sys passwd admin123
>
Telnet Command: sys reboot
This command allows users to restart the router immediately.
Example
> sys reboot
>
Telnet Command: sys autoreboot
This command allows users to restart the router automatically within a certain time.
Syntax
sys autoreboot [on/off/hour(s)]
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
859
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on/off
On – It means to enable the function of auto-reboot.
Off – It means to disable the function of auto-reboot.
hours
It means to set the time schedule for router reboot.
For example, if you type “2” in this field, the router will reboot
with an interval of two hours.
Example
> sys autoreboot on
autoreboot is ON
> sys autoreboot 2
autoreboot is ON
autoreboot time is 2 hour(s)
Telnet Command: sys commit
This command allows users to save current settings to FLASH. Usually, current settings will be
saved in SRAM. Yet, this command will save the file to FLASH.
Example
> sys commit
>
Telnet Command: sys tftpd
This command can turn on TFTP server for upgrading the firmware.
Example
> sys tftpd
% TFTP server enabled !!!
Telnet Command: sys version
This command can display current version for the system.
Example
> sys version
Router Model: Vigor2926Vn+
Version: 3.7.4.1 English
Profile version: 3.0.0
Status: 1 (0x49165e6c)
Router IP: 192.168.1.1
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Firmware Build Date/Time: Mar 20 2014 14:09:50
Router Name: drayrouter
Revision: 40055 2860_374
VDSL2 Firmware Version: 05-04-08-00-00-06
860
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: sys qrybuf
This command can display the system memory status and leakage list.
Example
> sys qrybuf
System Memory Status and Leakage List
Buf sk_buff ( 200B), used#: 1647, cached#: 30
Buf KMC4088 (4088B), used#:
0, cached#:
8
Buf KMC2552 (2552B), used#: 1641, cached#: 42
Buf KMC1016 (1016B), used#:
7, cached#:
1
Buf KMC504 ( 504B), used#:
8, cached#:
8
Buf KMC248 ( 248B), used#: 26, cached#: 22
Buf KMC120 ( 120B), used#: 67, cached#: 61
Buf KMC56
( 56B), used#: 20, cached#: 44
Buf KMC24
( 24B), used#: 58, cached#: 70
Dynamic memory: 13107200B; 4573168B used; 190480B/0B in level 1/2
cache.
FLOWTRACK Memory Status
# of free = 12000
# of maximum = 0
# of flowstate = 12000
# of lost by siganture = 0
# of lost by list = 0
Telnet Command: sys pollbuf
This command can turn on or turn off polling buffer for the router.
Syntax
sys pollbuf [on]
sys pollbuf [off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on
It means to turn on pulling buffer.
off
It means to turn off pulling buffer.
Example
> sys pollbuf on
% Buffer polling is on!
> sys pollbuf off
% Buffer polling is off!
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
861
Telnet Command: sys britask
This command can improve triple play quality.
Syntax
sys britask [on]
sys britask [off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on
It means to turn on the bridge task for improving the triple play
quality.
off
It means to turn off the bridge task.
Example
> sys britask on
% bridge task is ON, now
Telnet Command: sys tr069
This command can set CPE settings for applying in VigorACS.
Syntax
sys tr069 get [parm] [option]
sys tr069 set [parm] [value]
sys tr069 getnoti [parm]
sys tr069 setnoti [parm] [value]
sys tr069 log
sys tr069 debug [on/off]
sys tr069 save
sys tr069 inform [event code]
sys tr069 port [port num]
sys tr069 cert_auth [on/off]
Syntax Description
862
Parameter
Description
get [parm] [option]
It means to get parameters for tr-069.
option=<nextlevel>: only gets nextlevel for GetParameterNames.
set [parm] [value]
It means to set parameters for tr-069.
getnoti [parm]
It means to get parameter notification value.
setnoti [parm] [value]
It means to set parameter notification value.
log
It means to display the TR-069 log.
debug [on/off]
on: turn on the function of sending debug message to syslog.
off: turn off the function of sending debug message to syslog.
save
It means to save the parameters to the flash memory of the router.
Inform [event code]
It means to inform parameters for tr069 with different event codes.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
[event code] includes:
0-"0 BOOTSTRAP",
1-"1 BOOT",
2-"2 PERIODIC",
3-"3 SCHEDULED",
4-"4 VALUE CHANGE",
5-"5 KICKED",
6-"6 CONNECTION REQUEST",
7-"7 TRANSFER COMPLETE",
8-"8 DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETE",
9-"M Reboot"
port [port num]
It means to change tr069 listen port number.
cert_auth [on/off]
on: turn on certificate-based authentication.
off: turn off certificate-based authentication.
Example
> sys tr069 get Int. nextlevel
Total number of parameter is 24
Total content length of parameter is 915
InternetGatewayDevice.LANDeviceNumberOfEntries
InternetGatewayDevice.WANDeviceNumberOfEntries
InternetGatewayDevice.DeviceInfo.
InternetGatewayDevice.ManagementServer.
InternetGatewayDevice.Time.
InternetGatewayDevice.Layer3Forwarding.
InternetGatewayDevice.LANDevice.
InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.
InternetGatewayDevice.Services.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_InternetAcc.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_LAN.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_NAT.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Firewall.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Bandwidth.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Applications.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VPN.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VoIP.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_WirelessLAN.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_System.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Status.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Diagnostics.
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page]
---
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
863
Telnet Command: sys sip_alg
This command can turn on/off SIP ALG (Application Layer Gateway) for traversal.
Syntax
sys sip_alg [1]
sys sip_alg [0]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
1
It means to turn on SIP ALG.
0
It means to turn off SIP ALG.
Example
> sys sip_alg ?
usage: sys sip_alg [value]
0 - disable SIP ALG
1 - enable SIP ALG
current SIP ALG is disabled
Telnet Command: sys rtsp_alg
This command is used to configure settings (e.g., listen port) for ALG with the protocol of
RTSP.
Syntax
sys rtsp_alg [<command> <parameter>]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-e [1/0]
Enable / disable the function of RTSP ALG.
0 – Disable.
1 – Enable.
-p [value]
Set your listening port for RTSP ALG.
-u [1/0]
Enable / disable listen along UDP path.
0 – Disable.
1 – Enable.
-t [1/0]
Enable / disable listen along TCP path.
0 – Disable.
1 – Enable.
-v
Display RTP and RTSP portmap information of RTSP ALG.
Example
> sys rtsp_alg -e 1
Auto enable ALG Master Switch
Enable RTSP ALG
> sys rtsp_alg -p 375
864
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Current listening RTSP Port: 375
> sys rtsp_alg -v
Current Open PortMap Number of RTSP ALG: 0
Telnet Command: sys license
This command can process the system license.
Syntax
sys license licmsg
sys license licauth
sys license regser
sys license licera
sys license licifno
sys license lic_wiz [set/reg/qry]
sys license dev_chg
sys license dev_key
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
licmsg
It means to display license message.
licauth
It means the license authentication time setting.
regser
It means the license register server setting.
licera
It means to erase license setting.
licifno
It means license and signature download interface setting.
lic_wiz [set/reg/qry]
It means the license wizard setting.
qry: query service support status
set [idx] [trial] [service type] [sp_id] [start_date] [License Key]
reg: register service in portal
dev_chg
It means to change the device key.
dev_key
It means to show device key.
Example
> sys license licifno
License and Signature download interface setting:
licifno [AUTO/WAN#]
Ex: licifno wan1
Download interface is "auto-selected" now.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
865
Telnet Command: sys fr_log
This command is used for displaying log information related to web syslog.
Syntax
sys fr_log
Example
> sys fr_log ?
----------------------------------------------------------------Note: This command shows the same log information with
Diagnostics>>Syslog Explo
rer. If you don't see any log information, go to the Web Interface and
make sure Diagnostics>>Syslog Explorer is enabled.
Telnet Command: sys diag_log
This command is used for RD debug.
Syntax
sys diag_log [status| enable| disable| flush| lineno [w] | level [x] | feature [on|off] [y]|
log]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
status
It means to show the status of diagnostic log.
enable
It means to enable the function of diag_log.
disable
It means to disenable the function of diag_log.
flush
It means the flush log buffer.
lineno [w]
It means the total lines for displaying message.
w - Available value ranges from 100 to 50000.
level[x]
It determines the level of data displayed.
x – Available value ranges from 0 to 12. The larger the number is,
the detailed the data is displayed.
feature [on/off][y]
It is used to specify the function of the log. Supported features
include SYS and DSL (Case-Insensitive). Default setting is “on” for
“DSL”.
voip_feature
[on/off][vf_name]
It means VoIP feature. Type on to enable the feature or type off to
disable the feature.
vf_name: available settings include DRVTAPI, DRVVMMC, DRVMPS,
DRVFXO, DRVHAL, PSMPHONE, PSMSUPP, PSM, FXO, PSMISDN,
DTMFPSER, CALLERID (Case-Insensitive).
log
It means the dump log buffer.
Example
> sys diag_log status
Status:
866
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
diag_log is Enabled.
lineno : 10000.
level : 3.
Enabled feature: SYS DSL
> sys diag_log log
0:00:02
[DSL] Current modem firmware: AnnexA_548006_544401
0:00:02
[DSL] Modem firmware feature: 5, ADSL_A, VDSL2
0:00:02
[DSL] xtseCfg=04 00 04 00 0c 01 00 07
0:00:02
[DSL] don't have last showtime mode!! set next mode to VDSL!!
0:00:02
[DSL] Status has changed: Stopped(0) -> FwWait(3)
0:00:02
[DSL] Status has changed: FwWait(3) -> Starting(1)
0:00:02
[DSL] Status has changed: Starting(1) -> Running(2)
0:00:02
[DSL] Status was switched: firmwareReady(3) to Init(5)
0:00:02
[DSL] Status was switched: Init(5) to Restart(10)
0:00:02
[DSL] Status was switched: Restart(10) to
FirmwareRequest(1)
0:00:02
[DSL] Line state has changed: 00000000 -> 000000FF
0:00:02
[DSL] Entering VDSL2 mode
0:00:03
[DSL] modem code: [05-04-08-00-00-06]
0:00:05
[DSL] Status was switched: FirmwareRequest(1) to
firmwareReady(3)
0:00:05
[DSL] Status was switched: firmwareReady(3) to Init(5)
0:00:05
[DSL] >> nXtseA=0d, nXtseB=00, nXtseV=07, nFwFeatures=5
0:00:05
[DSL] >> nHsToneGroupMode=0, nHsToneGroup=106,
nToneSet=43, nCamState
=2
0:00:05
[DSL] Line state has changed: 000000FF -> 00000100
0:00:05
[DSL] Line state has changed: 00000100 -> 00000200
0:00:05
[DSL] Status was switched: Init(5) to Train(6)
Telnet Command: sys arp_AutoReq
This command is used to enable / disable the function that Vigor router sends ARP request to
the connected device(s) periodically.
Syntax
sys arp_AutoReq –d [value]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-d [value]
Disable the function of ARP auto request.
0 – Enable
1 – Disable
Example
> sys arp_AutoReq -d 0
Arp auto-request enable.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
867
Telnet Command: sys daylightsave
This command is used to configure daylight save setting.
Syntax
sys daylightsave [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command><parameter>|…
]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-v
Display the daylight saving settings.
-r
Set to factory default setting.
-e [1/0]
Enable (1) / disable (0) daylight saving.
-t [0/1/2]
Specify the saving type for daylight setting.
0 – Default
1 – Time range
2 - Yearly
-s <year> <month> <day>
<hour>
Set the detailed settings of the starting day for time range type.
year – must be the year after 2013.
month - 1 ~ 12
day – 1 ~ 31
hour – 0 ~ 23
e.g., sys daylightsave -s 2014 3 10 12
-d <year> <month> <day>
<hour>
Set the detailed settings of the ending day for time range type.
year – After 2013.
month - 1 ~ 12
day – 1 ~ 31
hour – 0 ~ 23
e.g., sys daylightsave -d 2014 9 10 12
-y <month> <th weekday>
<day in week> <hour>
Set the detailed settings of the starting day for yearly type.
month - 1 ~ 12
th weekday – 1 ~ 5, 9: last week
day in week - 0:Sun, 1:Mon, 2:Tue, 3:Wed, 4:Thu, 5: Fri, 6:Sat
hour – 0 ~ 23
e.g, sys daylightsave -y 9 1 0 14
-z <month> <th weekday>
<day in week> <hour>
Set the detailed settings of the ending day for yearly type.
month - 1 ~ 12
th weekday – 1 ~ 5, 9: last week
day in week - 0:Sun, 1:Mon, 2:Tue, 3:Wed, 4:Thu, 5: Fri, 6:Sat
hour – 0 ~ 23
e.g, sys daylightsave -z 3 1 6 14
Example
> sys daylightsave -y 9 1 0 14
% Start: Yearly on Sep 1th Sun 14:00
868
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: sys dnsCacheTbl
This command is used to configure TTL settings which will be displayed in DNS Cache table.
Syntax
sys dnsCacheTbl [<command><parameter>|…]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command><parameter>|…
]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-l
Display DNS IPv4 entry in the DNS cache table.
-s
Display DNS IPv6 entry in the DNS cache table.
-v
Display the TTL limit value in the DNS cache table.
-t < 0/n >
Set the TTL limit value in the DNS cache table.
0- No limit
N – Greater than or equal to 5.
-c
Clear the DNS cache table.
Example
> sys dnsCacheTbl -l
%DNS Cache Table List
> sys dnsCacheTbl -t 65
% Set TTL limit: 65 seconds.
% When TTL larger than 65s , delete the DNS entry in the router's DNS cache
tabl
e.
>
Telnet Command: sys syslog
This command is used to configure
Syntax
sys syslog -a <enable> [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command><parameter>|…
]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-a <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) Syslog Access Setup.
-s <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) Syslog Save to Syslog Server.
-i <IP address>
Define the IP address of the Syslog server.
-d <port number>
Define the port number (1 ~ 65535) as the destination port.
-u <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) Syslog Save to USB Disk.
-m <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) Mail Syslog.
-f <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) Filewall Log.
-v <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) VPN Log.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
869
-e <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) User Access Log.
-c <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) Call Log.
-w <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) WAN Log.
-r <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) Router/DSL Information.
-t <1/0>
Enable (1) or disable (0) AlertLog Setup.
-o <port number>
Define the port number (1 ~ 65535) for AlertLog.
Example
> sys syslog -a 1 -s 1 -i 192.168.1.25 -d 514
>
Telnet Command: sys mailalert
This command is used to configure settings for syslog mail alert.
Syntax
sys mailalert [-<command> <parameter>]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command><parameter>]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
-e [0/1]
Enable/disable Mail Alert.
0 – Disable. 1 – Enable.
-i [SMTP Server IP]
Set IP Address for SMTP server.
-o [SMTP Server Port]
Set port number for SMTP server..
-a [Mail Address]
Set E-maiil address for alert mail reciver.
-r [Mail Address]
Set E-mail Address for mail return.
-s [0/1]
Enable/disable the function of Use SSL.
0 – Disable. 1 – Enable.
-h [0/1]
Enable/disable SMTP Authentication.
0 – Disable. 1 – Enable.
-u [Username]
Set username for SMTP Authentication.
-p [Password]
Set password for SMTP Authentication.
-l [type][0/1]
Enable / disable mail alert for different types. Number 0 ~ 6
represent different types.
"0 <0/1>" : Enable/Disable Mail Alert of the DoS Attack.
"1 <0/1>" : Enable/Disable Mail Alert of the APPE.
"2 <0/1>" : nable/Disable Mail Alert of the VPN Log.
"3 <0/1>" : Enable/Disable Mail Alert of the APPE Signature.
"6 <0/1>" : Enable/Disable Mail Alert of the Reboot Debug Log.
In which,
0 – Disable. 1 – Enable.
-f
Reset Mail Alert setting to factory default.
-v
Show current Mail Alert setting.
-R [0/1]
Set Mail Alert Reboot debug log mode.
0: Limited Mode
1: Unlimited Mode.
Example
870
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
> sys mailalert -e 1
Set Enable Mail Alert.
> sys mailalert -v
------ Current setting for Mail Alert -----Mail Alert: Enable
SMTP Server IP Address: 0.0.0.0
SMTP Server Port: 25
Alert Mail Reciver E-maiil Address:
Mail Return E-mail Address:
Use SSL: Disable
SMTP Authentication: Disable
Username for SMTP Authentication:
Password for SMTP Authentication:
Mail Alert for DoS Attack: Enable.
Mail Alert for APPE: Enable.
Mail Alert for VPN Log: Enable.
Mail Alert for APPE Signature: Disable.
Mail Alert for Reboot Debug Log: Disable, Mode: Limited.
---------------------------------------------
Telnet Command: sys time
This command is used to configure system time and date.
Syntax
sys time server [domain]
sys time inquire
sys time show
sys time zone [index]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
domain
Enter the domain name of the time server. The maximum length is
39 characters.
index
Different number means different time zone.
1 - GMT-12:00 Eniwetok, Kwajalein
2 - GMT-11:00 Midway Island, Samoa
3 - GMT-10:00 Hawaii
4 - GMT-09:00 Alaska
5 - GMT-08:00 Pacific Time (US & Canada)
6 - GMT-08:00 Tijuana
7 - GMT-07:00 Mountain Time (US & Canada)
8 - GMT-07:00 Arizona
9 - GMT-06:00 Central Time (US & Canada)
10 - GMT-06:00 Saskatchewan
11 - GMT-06:00 Mexico City, Tegucigalpa
12 - GMT-05:00 Eastern Time (US & Canada)
13 - GMT-05:00 Indiana (East)
14 - GMT-05:00 Bogota, Lima, Quito
15 - GMT-04:00 Atlantic Time (Canada)
16 - GMT-04:00 Caracas, La Paz
17 - GMT-04:00 Santiago
18 - GMT-03:30 Newfoundland
19 - GMT-03:00 Brasilia
20 - GMT-03:00 Buenos Aires, Georgetown
21 - GMT-02:00 Mid-Atlantic
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
871
22 - GMT-01:00 Azores, Cape Verde Is.
23 - GMT
Greenwich Mean Time : Dublin
24 - GMT
Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
25 - GMT
Casablanca, Monrovia
26 - GMT+01:00 Belgrade, Bratislava
27 - GMT+01:00 Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague
28 - GMT+01:00 Sarajevo, Skopje, Sofija
29 - GMT+01:00 Warsaw, Zagreb
30 - GMT+01:00 Brussels, Copenhagen
31 - GMT+01:00 Madrid, Paris, Vilnius
32 - GMT+01:00 Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern
33 - GMT+01:00 Rome, Stockholm, Vienna
34 - GMT+02:00 Bucharest
35 - GMT+02:00 Cairo
36 - GMT+02:00 Helsinki, Riga, Tallinn
37 - GMT+02:00 Athens, Istanbul, Minsk
38 - GMT+02:00 Jerusalem
39 - GMT+02:00 Harare, Pretoria
40 - GMT+03:00 Volgograd
41 - GMT+03:00 Baghdad, Kuwait, Riyadh
42 - GMT+03:00 Nairobi
43 - GMT+03:00 Moscow, St. Petersburg
44 - GMT+03:30 Tehran
45 - GMT+04:00 Abu Dhabi, Muscat
46 - GMT+04:00 Baku, Tbilisi
47 - GMT+04:30 Kabul
48 - GMT+05:00 Ekaterinburg
49 - GMT+05:00 Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent
50 - GMT+05:30 Bombay, Calcutta
51 - GMT+05:30 Madras, New Delhi
52 - GMT+06:00 Astana, Almaty, Dhaka
53 - GMT+06:00 Colombo
54 - GMT+07:00 Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta
55 - GMT+08:00 Beijing, Chongqing
56 - GMT+08:00 Hong Kong, Urumqi
57 - GMT+08:00 Singapore
58 - GMT+08:00 Taipei
59 - GMT+08:00 Perth
60 - GMT+09:00 Seoul
61 - GMT+09:00 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
62 - GMT+09:00 Yakutsk
63 - GMT+09:30 Darwin
64 - GMT+09:30 Adelaide
65 - GMT+10:00 Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney
66 - GMT+10:00 Brisbane
67 - GMT+10:00 Hobart
68 - GMT+10:00 Vladivostok
69 - GMT+10:00 Guam, Port Moresby
70 - GMT+11:00 Magadan, Solomon Is.
71 - GMT+11:00 New Caledonia
72 - GMT+12:00 Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is.
73 - GMT+12:00 Auckland, Wellington
Example
> sys time zone 8
Set Time Zone OK
> sys time show
*************** System Time ***************
Current System Time: [2000 Jan 01 Sat 02:09:29]
Time Server: [pool.ntp.org]
Time Zone Index: [8]. GMT-07:00
*********************************************
872
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: sys eap_tls
This command is used to disable or enable EAP-TLS.
You might have to enable EAP-TLS compatibility to avoid compatibility issues with some
operating systems. But, please note that enabling EAP-TLS compatibility will lower down the
connection security level.
Syntax
sys eap_tls set [0/1]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
0
Disable EAP-TLS compatibility!
1
Enable EAP-TLS compatibility!
Example
> sys eap_tls set 1
Enable EAP_TLS compatibility!
Telnet Command: sys dashboard
This command is used to display / hide items (such as System Information, Interface…) on
dashboard.
Syntax
sys dashboard [-<command> <value> | ... ]
sys dashboard show
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
[<command>
<value>|…]
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several parameters in one line.
<command> “0 ~ 9” and “a” represent different sections to be
displayed on the dashboard.
0 : Front Panel
1 : System Information
2 : IPv4 LAN Information
3 : IPv4 Internet Access
4 : IPv6 Internet Access
5 : Interface
6 : Security
7 : System Resource
8 : LTE Status
9 : Quick Access
a : VoIP
<value>
1 : Enable
0 : Disable
show
Display current status (enabled /disabled) for each item.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
873
Example
> sys dashboard -0 1
Front Panel enabled
> sys dashboard show
Front Panel enabled
System Information enabled
IPv4 LAN Information enabled
IPv4 Internet Access enabled
IPv6 Internet Access enabled
Interface enabled
Security enabled
System Resource enabled
LTE Status enabled
Quick Access enabled
VoIP enabled
Telnet Command: testmail
This command is used to display current settings for sending test mail.
Example
> testmail
Send out test mail
Mail Alert:[Disable]
SMTP_Server:[0.0.0.0]
Mail to:[]
Return-Path:[]
Telnet Command: upnp off
This command can close UPnP function.
Example
>upnp off
UPNP say bye-bye
Telnet Command: upnp on
This command can enable UPnP function.
Example
>upnp on
UPNP start.
Telnet Command: upnp nat
This command can display IGD NAT status.
Example
> upnp nat ?
****************** IGD NAT Status ****************
874
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
((0))
InternalClient >>192.168.1.10<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<<
InternalPort >>21<<, ExternalPort >>21<<
PortMapProtocol >>TCP<<
The tmpvirtual server index >>0<<
PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<<
Ftp Example [MICROSOFT]
((1))
InternalClient >>0.0.0.0<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<<
InternalPort >>0<<, ExternalPort >>0<<
PortMapProtocol >><NULL><<
The tmpvirtual server index >>0<<
PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<<
PortMapProtocol >><NULL><<
The tmpvirtual server index >>0<<
PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<<
0<<
--- MORE ---
['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---
Telnet Command: upnp service
This command can display the information of the UPnP service. UPnP service must be enabled
first.
Example
> upnp on
UPNP start.
> upnp service
>>>>> SERVICE TABLE1 <<<<<
serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1
serviceId urn:microsoft-com:serviceId:OSInfo1
SCPDURL
/upnp/OSInfo.xml
controlURL /OSInfo1
eventURL
/OSInfoEvent1
UDN
uuid:774e9bbe-7386-4128-b627-001daa843464
>>>>> SERVICE TABLE2 <<<<<
serviceType
urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1
serviceId urn:upnp-org:serviceId:WANCommonIFC1
SCPDURL
/upnp/WComIFCX.xml
controlURL /upnp?control=WANCommonIFC1
eventURL
/upnp?event=WANCommonIFC1
UDN
uuid:2608d902-03e2-46a5-9968-4a54ca499148
.
.
.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
875
Telnet Command: upnp subscribe
This command can show all UPnP services subscribed.
Example
> upnp on
UPNP start.
> upnp subscribe
Vigor> upnp subscribe
>>>> (1) serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1
----- Subscribtion1 ------sid = 7a2bbdd0-0047-4fc8-b870-4597b34da7fb
eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1
expireTime =6926
active =1
DeliveryURLs
=<http://192.168.1.113:2869/upnp/eventing/twtnpnsiun>
>>>> (2) serviceType
urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1
----- Subscribtion1 ------sid = d9cd47a5-d9c9-4d3d-8043-d03a82f27983
eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1
.
.
.
Telnet Command: upnp tmpvs
This command can display current status of temp Virtual Server of your router.
Example
Vigor> upnp tmpvs
****************** Temp virtual server status ****************
((0))
real_addr >>192.168.1.10<<, pseudo_addr >>172.16.3.229<<
real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<<
hit_portmap_index >>0<<
The protocol >>TCP<<
time >>0<<
((1))
876
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
real_addr >>0.0.0.0<<, pseudo_addr >>0.0.0.0<<
real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<<
hit_portmap_index >>0<<
The protocol >>0<<
time >>0<<
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page]
---
Telnet Command: upnp wan
This command is used to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP.
Syntax
upnp wan [n]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
n
It means to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP.
n=0, it means to auto-select WAN interface.
n=1, WAN1
n=2, WAN2 ……….
Example
> upnp wan 1
use wan1 now.
Telnet Command: usb list
This command is use to display the information about the brand name and model name of the
USB modems which are supported by Vigor router.
Example
> usb list ?
Brand
Module
Standard
------------------------------Aiko
Aiko 83D
3.5G
BandRich
Bandluxe C170
3.5G
BandRich
Bandluxe C270
3.5G
BandRich
Bandluxe C321
3.5G
BandRich
Bandluxe C330
3.5G
BandRich
Bandluxe C331
3.5G
BandRich
Bandluxe C502
3.5G
Huawei
Huawei E169u
3.5G
Huawei
Huawei E220
3.5G
Huawei
Huawei E303D
3.5G
Huawei
Huawei E392
3.5G
Huawei
Huawei E398
3.5G
Sony Erics Sony Ericsson MD30
3.5G
TP-LINK
TP-LINK MA180
3.5G
TP-LINK
TP-LINK MA260
3.5G
Vodafone
Vodafone K3765-Z
3.5G
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
877
Vodafone
ZTE
ZTE
ZTE
ZTE
Vodafone K4605
ZTE MF626
ZTE MF627 plus
ZTE MF633
ZTE MF636
3.5G
3.5G
3.5G
3.5G
3.5G
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
SpinCom
SpinCom GPRS Modem
3.5G
Y
- MORE - ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] -
Telnet Command: usb user
This command is used to set profiles for FTP/SMB users.
Syntax Description
usb user add [Index] [Username] [Password] [Permission] [Home path]
usb user rm [Index]
usb user enable [Index]
usb user disable [Index]
usb user list
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
add
Add a new user profile.
Rm
Delete an existed user profile.
enable
Enable a user profile.
disable
Disable a user profile.
list
Display all of the user profile.
index
It means the index number of the user profile. There are 16 profiles
allowed to be configured. So the range of such option is 1 ~ 16.
Username
Type a text (maximum 11 characters) as the username for the user
profile.
Password
Type a text (maximum 11 characters) as the password for the user
profile.
Permission
Specify the action (RWDLCR) permitted. If one of the actions is not
allowed, simple type “-” instead.
R – Read File.
W – Write File.
D – Delete File.
L – List directory.
C – Create directory.
R – Remove selected directory.
Home path
Set the path (maximum 159 characters) for the USB user profile.
Example
> usb user add 1 root 1234 R-DLCR /usr
878
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: vigbrg set
This command is to configure specified WAN as bridge mode.
Syntax Description
vigbrg set -v [IP version] -w [WAN_idx] -l [LAN_idx] -e [0/1] -f [0/1]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
-v [IP version]
Indicate the IP version for the IP address.
4 – IPv4.
6 – IPv6.
-w [WAN_idx]
WAN_idx – Indicate the WAN interface.
1 – WAN1
2 – WAN2
3 – WAN3
4 – WAN4
-l [LAN_idx]
LAN_idx – Indicate the LAN interface.
1 – LAN1
2 – LAN2
3 – LAN3
4 – LAN4
e [0/1]
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Vigor Bridge for WAN or/and LAN.
f [0/1]
Enable (1) or disable (0) the firewall functions.
Example
> vigbrg set -v 4 -w 1 -l 1 -e 1
[WAN1] IPv4 bridge is enable. Set subnet[LAN1]
Telnet Command: vigbrg status
This command can show whether the Vigor Bridge Function is enabled or disabled.
Example
> vigbrg status
%Vigor Bridge Function is enable!
%Wan1 management is disable!
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
879
Telnet Command: vigbrg cfgip
This command allows users to transfer a bridge modem into ADSL router by accessing into and
adjusting specified IP address. Users can access into Web UI of the router to manage the
router through the IP address configured here.
Syntax
vigbrg cfgip [IP Address]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
IP Address
It means to type an IP address for users to manage the router.
Example
>
>
%
%
vigbrg cfgip 192.168.1.15
vigbrg cfgip ?
Vigor Bridge Config IP,
Now: 192.168.1.15
Telnet Command: vigbrg wanstatus
This command can display the existed WAN connection status for the modem (change from
ADSL router into bridge modem), including index number, MAC address, Stamp Time, PVC,
VLAN port for Vigor Bridge Function..
Example
> vigbrg wanstatus
Vigor Bridge: Running
WAN mac table:
Index MAC Address
Port
Stamp Time
PVC
VLan
Telnet Command: vigbrg wlanstatus
This command can display the existed WLAN connection status for the modem (change from
router into bridge modem), including index number, MAC address, Stamp Time, PVC, VLAN
port for Vigor Bridge Function.
Example
> vigbrg wlanstatus
Vigor Bridge: Running
WAN mac table:
Index MAC Address
Stamp Time
PVC
VLan
Port
Telnet Command: vlan group
This command allows you to set VLAN group. You can set four VLAN groups. Please run vlan
restart command after you change any settings.
Syntax
vlan group id [set/set_ex] [p1/p2/p3/p4/s1/s2/s3/s4
Syntax Description
880
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Parameter
Description
id
It means the group 0 to 7 for VLAN.
set
It indicates each port can join more than one VLAN group.
set_ex
It indicates each port can join one VLAN group at one time.
p1/p2/p3/p4
It indicates LAN port 1 to LAN port 4. To group LAN1, LAN2, LAN3
and/or LAN4 under one VLAN group, please type the port number(s)
you want.
s1/s2/s3/s4
It is only available for WALN models.
Example
> vlan group 3 set p1 s3 s4
VLAN p1
p2 p3 p4 s1
s2 s3 s4
----------------------------------------------3
V
V
V
>
Telnet Command: vlan off
This command allows you to disable VLAN function.
Syntax
vlan off
Example
> vlan off
VLAN is Disable!
Force subnet LAN2/3/4 to be disabled!!
Telnet Command: vlan on
This command allows you to enable VLAN function.
Syntax
vlan on
Example
> vlan on
VLAN is Enable!
Telnet Command: vlan pri
This command is used to define the priority for each VLAN profile setting.
Syntax
vlan pri n pri_no
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
n
It means VLAN ID number.
n=VLAN ID number (from 0 to 7).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
881
pri_no
It means the priority of VLAN profile.
pri_no=0 ~7 (from none to highest priority).
Example
> vlan pri 1 2
VLAN1: Priority=2
Telnet Command: vlan restart
This command can make VLAN settings restarted with newest configuration.
Syntax
vlan restart
Example
> vlan restart ?
VLAN restarts!!!
Telnet Command: vlan status
This command display current status for VLAN.
Syntax
vlan status
Example
> vlan status
VLAN is Enable :
-----------------------------------------------------VLAN Enable VID Pri p1 p2 p3 p4 s1 s2 s3 s4 subnet
-----------------------------------------------------0
OFF
0 0
1:LAN1
1
OFF
0 2
1:LAN1
2
OFF
0 0
1:LAN1
3
OFF
0 0
V
V V 1:LAN1
4
OFF
0 0
1:LAN1
5
OFF
0 0
1:LAN1
6
OFF
0 0
1:LAN1
7
OFF
0 0
1:LAN1
-----------------------------------------------------Note: they are only untag for s1/s2/s3/s4, but they can join tag vlan
with lan
ports.
Permit untagged device in P1 to access router: ON.
Telnet Command: vlan subnet
This command is used to configure the LAN interface used by the VLAN group.
Syntax
vlan subnet group_id [1/2/3/4/5/6]
Syntax Description
882
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Parameter
Description
[1/2/3/4/5/6]
It means interfaces, LAN1 ~ LAN4.
Example
> vlan subnet group_id 2
% Vlan Group-0 using LAN2
!
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Telnet Command: vlan submode
This command changes the VLAN encapsulation mechanisms in the LAN driver.
Syntax
vlan submode [on|off|status]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
on
It means to enable the promiscuous mode.
off
It means to enable the normal mode.
status
It means to display if submode is normal mode or promiscuous
mode.
Example
>
%
>
%
>
%
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
submode status
subnet mode : normal mode
submode on
subnet mode modified to promiscuous mode.
submode status
subnet mode : promiscuous mode
Telnet Command: vlan tagged
This command is used to enable or disable the incoming of untagged packets.
Syntax
vlan tagged [n] [on/off]
vlan tagged [unlimited] [on/off]
vlan tagged [p1_untag] [on/off]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
n
It means VLAN channel.
The ranage is from 0 to 7.
on/off
It means to enable/disable the tagged VLAN.
[unlimited] [on/off]
unlimited on: It allows the incoming of untagged packets even all
VLAN are tagged.
unlimited off: It does not allows the incoming of untagged packets.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
883
[p1_untag] [on/off]
P1_untag on: It allows the incoming of untagged packets form LAN
port 1.
P1_untag off: It does not allow the incoming of untagged packets
from LAN port 1.
Example
> vlan tagged unlimited on
unlimited mode is ON
Telnet Command: vlan vid
This command is used to configure VID number for each VLAN channel.
Syntax
vlan vid n vid_no
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
n
It means VLAN channel.
The ranage is from 0 to 7.
vid_no
It means the value of VLAN ID. Enter the value as the VLAN ID
number. The range is form 0 to 4095.
Example
> vlan vid 1 4095
VLAN1, vid=4095
Telnet Command: vlan sysvid
This command is used to modify and show the scope (reserved 78) of the VLAN IDs used
internally by the system.
Syntax
vlan sysvid [show | n]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
show
It means to show the scope of VLAN ID used internally.
n
It means the value to be set as VLAN ID.
The range is from 0 to 4018.
Example
> vlan sysvid 100
You have set system VLAN ID to range: 100 ~ 177,
We recommend that you reboot the system now.
> vlan sysvid 200
You have set system VLAN ID to range: 200 ~ 263,
We recommend that you reboot the system now.
> vlan sysvid show
The system VLAN ID is in range: 200 ~ 263
884
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Telnet Command: voip debug
This command can display debug message on the screen.
Syntax
voip debug [flush]
voip debug [showmsg]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
flush
It means to clear current log.
showmsg
It means to show current log.
Example
> voip debug showmsg
-->Send Message to 192.168.1.2:5060 <02:35:16>
INVITE sip:192.168.1.2 SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 192.168.1.1:5060;branch=z9hG4bK-YMa-3630;rport
From: <sip:[email protected]>;tag=WLJ-11782
To: <sip:192.168.1.2>
Call-ID: [email protected]
CSeq: 1 INVITE
Contact: <sip:[email protected]>
Max-Forwards: 70
supported: 100rel, replaces
User-Agent: DrayTek UA-1.2.3 DrayTek Vigor2910
Allow: INVITE, ACK, CANCEL, OPTIONS, BYE, INFO, REFER, NOTIFY, PRACK
Content-Type: application/sdp
Content-Length: 264
v=0
o=change_me 5972727 56415 IN IP4 192.168.1.1
Telnet Command: voip dialplan
This command allows users to set phone book settings.
Syntax
voip dialplan block n [-<command><parameter>]
voip dialplan phonebook n [-<command><parameter>]
voip dialplan region [-<command><parameter>]
voip dialplan local [1/0]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
voip dialplan block
n
It means the index number of the VoIP settings.
n=1 ~ 20
-<command><parameter>
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
-m 0/1
It means to enable or disable the block mode.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
885
0 – Disable
1 - Enable
-p <path>
Determines the block path.
1:in_url,
2:in_number
3:out_url,
4:out_number
5:(in & out)_url,
6:(in & out)_number) )
-n <number>
Determines the block number (maximum 29 characters).
-d <domain>
Block the specified domain.
-i <inf>
Block the specified interface(s) or All interfaces.
-s <Schedule>
Specify schedule profiles by indicating the index number of the
schedule profile. Four schedule profiles can be used at one time.
-w
Delete the selected entry. N=null (clear all)
-v
List current settings.
voip dialplan phonebook
n
It means the index number of the VoIP settings.
n=1 ~ 60
-<command><parameter>
The available commands with parameters are listed below.
-d <number>
Specify the speed dial number.
-c <url>
Contact SIP URL l(max. 59 characters)
-n <name>
Contact name (max. 23 characters)
-a <enable>
Enable/disable the specify entry.
-m <mode>
Specify backup number mode.
0 – none
2 - PSTN
-b <number>
Spedify the backup number.
-o <acc num>
Specify the dial out account.
0 – default
1 - acc1, 2 - acc2... ~ 12:=acc12
-z <enable>
Enable/disable ZRTP/SRTP VoIP security.
1 – enable
0 - disable
-l
Delete the specify entry.
-V
List current VoIP settings.
voip dialplan region
886
-e
Dnable or disable the regional function.
1 – enable
0 - disable
-m <number>
Return the last miss call.
-I <number>
Return the last incoming call.
-o <number>
Return the last outgoing call.
-F <number>
Hotkey to enable call forwarding (all) function.
-f <number>
Hotkey to enable call forwarding (busy) function.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
-C <number>
Hotkey to enable call forwarding (no answer) function.
-c <number>
Hotkey to disable call forwarding function.
-W <number>
Hotkey to enable call waiting function.
-w <number>
Hotkey to disable call waiting function.
-H <number>
Hotkey to enable hide caller ID function.
-h <number>
Hotkey to disable hide caller ID function.
-D <number>
Hotkey to enable DND function.
-d <number>
Hotkey to disable DND function.
-A <number>
Hotkey to enable block anonymous calls function.
-a <number>
Hotkey to disable block anonymous calls function.
-U <number>
Hotkey to enable block unknow domain calls function.
-u <number>
Hotkey to disable block unknow domain calls function.
-P <number>
Hotkey to disable block IP calls function.
-p <number>
Hotkey to disable block IP calls function.
-l <number>
Hotkey to block last incoming call.
-v
List current status for Regional settings.
voip dialplan local
enable/disable
Enable or disable the local calls.
1 – enable
0 - disable
Example
> voip dialplan phonebook 1 -d 1125
> voip dialplan region -l 8
> voip dialplan region -v
Your Setting for Regional
Regional Function is: Enable
Return the Last Miss Call: 20
Return the Last Incoming Call: *12
Return the Last Outgoing Call: 1
Hotkey to enable call forwarding (all) function: 0
Hotkey to enable call forwarding (busy) function: *90
Hotkey to enable call forwarding (no answer) function: *92
Hotkey to disable call forwarding function: 12
Hotkey to Enable Call Waiting Function: *56
Hotkey to Disable Call Waiting Function: *57
Hotkey to Enable Hide Caller ID Function: *67
Hotkey to Disable Hide Caller ID Function: *68
Hotkey to Enable DND Function: *78
Hotkey to Disable DND Function: *79
Hotkey to Enable Block Anonymous Calls Function: *77
Hotkey to Disable Block Anonymous Calls Function: *87
Hotkey to Enable Block Unknow Domain Calls Function: *40
Hotkey to Disable Block Unknow Domain Calls Function: *04
Hotkey to Enable Block IP Calls Function: *50
Hotkey to Disable Block IP Calls Function: *05
Hotkey to Disable Block The Last Incoming Call Function: 8
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
887
Telnet Command: voip dsp
Syntax
voip dsp countrytone [channel] [value]
voip dsp dialtonepwr [channel] [AbsoluteValue]
voip dsp EchoCanceller [type] [w_size] [nlp]
voip dsp cidtype [channel] [value]
voip dsp micgain [channel] [value/(1~10)]
voip dsp spkgain [channel] [value/(1~10)]
voip dsp jitterBuffer [port] [mode] [value]
voip dsp dtmfDetset [nLevel] [nTwist]
voip dsp dtmftonepwr [Level]
voip dsp cwtonepwr [ch] [value]
voip dsp pstnringfxs [1|2] [on|off]
voip dsp relaydbounce [on|off]
voip dsp setRingPat [ring_pattern_index] [patten_num]
voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –l [value]
voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –h [value]
voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –r 0
voip dsp cidplusdigit [1/0] [channel] [value]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
voip dsp countrytone
[channel] [value]
This command allows users to set the region for the tone settings.
Different regions usually need different tone settings.
Channel – 1 or 2.
Value – displayed as follows:
[2] UK, [3] USA, [4] Denmark, [5] Italy, [6] Germany,
[7] Netherlands, [8] Portugal, [9] Sweden, [10] Australia,
[11] Slovenia, [12] Czech, [13] Slovakia, [14] Hungary,
[15] Switzerland , [16] France , [17] Malta
voip dsp dialtonepwr
channel
This setting is used to adjust the loudness of the dial tone. The
smaller the number is, the louder the dial tone is. It is
recommended for you to use the default setting.
Channel - Available channel number: 1 – 2
AbsoluteValue
AbsoluteValue - In -1 dB increments, with 1 corresponding to 6 dBm.
Range - 1 to 30
voip dsp EchoCanceler
type
888
This command is used to set the type of echo reduction.
0 - Disable the LEC processing.
1 - Cancel using the fixed window.
2 - Cancel using the fixed and moving window.
3 - Cancel using fixed window + Echo Suppressor.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
w_size
The Line Echo Canceller (LEC) window size is 4, 6, 8 or 16 (ms).
nlp
Nlp - Non-linear processing (NLP) for more smooth transitions.
1 - disable
0 - enable
voip dsp cidtype
channel
Set the caller ID type for FXS 1 (Channel 1) or FXS 2 (Channel 2).
1 – FXS 1
2 – FXS 2
value
Each number (1 to 6) represents different type.
1 – FSK_ETSI
2 - FSK_ETSI(UK)
3 - FSK_BELLCORE(US/AU)
4 - DTMF
5 - DTMF(Dk)
6 - DTMF(SE,NL,FIN)
For example :
Vigor> voip dsp cidtype 2 6
channel=2, current cidType: 6
That means the caller ID type for FXS2 (Channel2) is DTMF (SE, NL,
FIN).
voip dsp micgain
channel
Adjust the volume of microphone by entering number from 1- 10 for
FXS 1 or FXS 2.
1 – FXS 1
2 – FXS 2
value/(1~10)
The larger the number is, the louder the volume will be.
voip dsp spkgain
channel
Adjust the volume of speaker by entering number from 1- 10 for FXS
1 or FXS 2.
1 – FXS 1
2 – FXS 2
value/(1~10)
The larger the number is, the louder the volume will be.
voip dsp jb
port
Set the size of jitter buffer.
Available settings are 0 (FXS1) and 1 (FXS2).
mode
Available settings are Fixed and Adaptive (default setting).
value
Available settings are 1 ~ 180 (unit: msec).
e.g.,
Vigor> voip dsp jb 1 FIXED 100
voip dsp timer
[Timer]
Set the waiting time for dialing out.
It means to set the timer settings. The unit is mini-second. The
range is from 1 to 255. Value “1” is corresponding to 500ms. That is
to say, Value “6” is corresponding 3000ms (i.e., 3 seconds)
Timer: 1 ~ 20.
Vigor> voip dsp timer 20
Set the timer:20
Voip dsp debugMsg
?
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Avaible settings include:
889
clrev - clear phone hook status.
getev - get phone hook status.
clrfskcid - clear fsk data for caller-ID from PSTN line.
getfskcid - get fsk data for caller-ID from PSTN line.
clrdtmfcid - clear dtmf data for caller-ID from PSTN line.
getdtmfcid - get dtmf data for caller-ID from PSTN line.
voicebuf - get message for available voice buffer pool.
clrint - clear status for interrupt.
getint - get status for interrupt.
Vigor> voip dsp debugMsg getint
the interrupt status for ad0 = 21
the interrupt status for ad1 = 0
the interrupt status for vc = 0
voip dsp dtmfDetset
nLevel
Set minimal signal level in dB, for DTMF detection.
Range – (-96 ~ -1)
nTwist
Maximum allowed signal twist in dB, for DTMF detection.
Range – (0 ~ 12)
voip dsp dtmftonepwr
Level
Set power level for DTMF frequency.
Level – 0 ~ 100. Power level for dtmf frequency in 0.3 dB steps.
0 map to 0dB
1 map to -0.3dB .... 100 map to -30dB
voip dsp cwtonepwr
ch
Set the call waiting tone power level.
1 – FXS 1
2 – FXS 2.
value
1 ~ 30, in -1 dB increments, with 1 corresponding to 8 dBm.
voip dsp pstnringfxs
1|2
Enable or disable PSTN ring on FXS 1/FXS 2.
1 meansFXS1; 2 means FXS2.
on|off
On means enable; off means disable.
voip dsp relaydbounce
on|off
on: Enable relay filter noise. But it maybe ignore the caller-id!!!
off: Disable relay filter noise. But the noise will cause the relay to
switch to PSTN!!!
voip dsp setRingPat
ring_pattern_index
This command can change the ring pattern at Index(2)~Index(6).
ring_pattern_index – Index (1) was locked for your country.
patten_num
It's the ring pattern number (1~12) for a country.
-------------------------------------------patten_num=1 Australia Ring Pattern:
cadenceOneOn=400, cadenceOneOff=200
cadenceTwoOn=400, cadenceTwoOff=2000
patten_num=2 Denmark Ring Pattern:
cadenceOneOn=1000, cadenceOneOff=4000
………………………………
voip dsp setFaxECmode -s
890
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
ch
Set the FAX error correction mode.
ch : range (0 ~ 1)
mode
mode : EC(error correction) ch(x) mode(0) : REDUNDANCY
EC(error correction) ch(x) mode(1) : FEC
voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –l / voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –h [value]
voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –r 0
value
“setDtmfCidLevel” is used to configure the signal strength for
transferring to FXS DTMF caller ID.
value - 0 ~ 64
voip dsp setDtmfCidLevel -l [value]
voip dsp setDtmfCidLevel -h [value]
voip dsp setDtmfCidLevel -r 0/1
r - reset low/high DTNF level to default setting. 0 means Disable; 1
means Enable.
Note: This function is supported only by special mode.
voip dsp setfxoCY
value
It is used to apply FXO country settings.
0: "use system country"
1: "Taiwan"
2: "Germany"
3: "Sweden"
4: "France"
5: "Switzerland"
6: "Holland"
7: "Finland"
8: "Denmark"
9: "UK"
10: "Australia"
12: "Italy"
14: "Red_China"
15: "Singapore"
17: "Spain"
18: "Portugal"
20: "Poland"
21: "Czech"
22: "Hungary"
23: "Slovenia"
25: "Slovakia"
37: "Brasil"
61: "US"
voip dsp setfxoringl
value
It is used to configure detection ring voltage threshold to apply to
FXO.
Available setting include:
0 : use driver default value
1 : Minimum voltage threshold: 25V
2 : Minimum voltage threshold: 35V
3 : Minimum voltage threshold: 45V
Note: This function is supported only by special mode.
voip dsp setfxoCid
value
Set FXO detect caller ID type.
It is available only for the model with FXO port.
voip dsp cidplusdigit
[1/0] [channel] [value]
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Set the substitution (0~9) for '+' digit in caller ID.
1 – enable the substitution.
891
0 – disable the substitution.
channel – 0 (FXS 1) -1 (FXS 2)
value – 0 – 9
voip dsp setRingThres
port
Set the threshold for ring signal.
Port setting is “0” only.
value
Available settings 0-250. Unit is ms.
The time is an approximate value.
voip dsp setCidDetGain
tx|rx gain
Set the gain value of caller ID detected.
Tx gain – Available settings -24 ~ 12. Default is 0.
Rx gain – Available settings -24 ~ 12. Default is -6.
Example
> voip dsp countrytone ?
VoIP has been disable. Please enable VoIP first.
> voip sip misc –D 0
System reboot now!
> voip dsp countrytone ?
> Vigor> voip dsp countrytone?
usage:
voip dsp countrytone [channel][value]
[channel]: 1-2
[value]: ( [2] UK, [3] USA, [4] Denmark, [5] Italy, [6] Germany, [7] Netherland
s, [8] Portugal, [9] Sweden, [10] Australia, [11] Slovenia, [12] Czech, [13]
Slovakia, [14] Hungary, [15] Switzerland , [16] France , [17] Malta)
============ Channel=1 ===================
current country tone: user defined
----------- ( Dial tone ) -------------------Feq1=425, Feq2=0, OneOn=0, Off=0, TwoOn=0, TwoOff=0
----------- ( Ringing tone ) ----------------Feq1=425, Feq2=0, OneOn=1500, OneOff=3000, TwoOn=0, TwoOff=0
----------- ( Busy tone ) -------------------Feq1=425, Feq2=0, OneOn=200, OneOff=200, TwoOn=0, TwoOff=0
============ Channel=2 ===================
current country tone: user defined
> voip dsp dialtonepwr 1 20
Current power level of dialtone:20 (-13 db), channel=1
> voip dsp setCidDetGain tx 1
Current CID Detect Tx Gain [1], Rx Gain [-6]
> voip dsp setCidDetGain rx 3
Current CID Detect Tx Gain [1], Rx Gain [3]
Telnet Command: voip rtp
Syntax
voip rtp codec [sip acc index][type|size|vad|one][value]
voip rtp dtmf [index] [mode|payloadtype][value]
voip rtp port [start|end] [value]
892
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
voip rtp symmetric [value]
voip rtp tos ?
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
voip rtp codec
[sip acc
index][type|size|vad|one][v
alue]
Set the voice coding.
sip acc index –SIP account index number. Available number, 1 ~ 12.
type – Available settings include
0. G.711MU
1. G.711A
2. G.729A/B
3. G.723
4. G.726_32
size - Five options,
0 means 10ms
1 means 20ms
2 means 30ms
3 means 40ms
5 means 60ms
Vad - 0 means to Disable the function of Voice Active Detector
(vad); 1 means to Enable the function of Voice Active Detector
(vad).
One – 0 means to Disable the function of single codec; 1 means to
Enable the function of single codec.
voip rtp dtmf
[index] [mode |
payloadtype][value]
Set the DTMF mode and Payload type for DTMF.
Index – SIP account index number. Available number, 1 ~ 12.
Mode – Four options to be selected.
0. Inband
1. Outband
2. SIP INFO (cisco)
3. SIP INFO (nortel)
Payloadtype – Available settings 96~127.
Value – Type 0~3 or 96~127 based on the mode specified.
For example,
> voip rtp dtmf 1 mode 1
voip rtp port
start|end
Specifies the start/end port for RTP stream.
value
The default value is 10050/15000.
voip rtp symmetric
value
Make the data transmission going through on both ends of local
router and remote router not misleading due to IP lost.
1 – Enable
0 - Disable
voip rtp tos
value
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
Set the type of service (TOS) setting for RTP packets.
For example,
> voip rtp tos 0x899
Set TOS: 0x899
893
Example
> voip rtp codec 1 type 3
> voip rtp dtmf 2 mode 3
> voip rtp port start 10070 end 14400
Set start port: 10070
> voip rtp port end 14400
Set end port: 14400
> voip rtp symmetric 1
Set symmetric rtp to Enable
Telnet Command: voip sip
This command allows users to set SIP account.
Syntax
voip sip acc n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
voip sip calllog
voip sip ep n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
voip sip misc[-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
voip sip nat [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
voip sip acc - Allows users to set SIP account.
894
n
n = 1 to 12
It means the index number of the VoIP settings.
-P [profile]
It means the name of the account profile (maximum 11 characters).
-r [reg mode]
Set registration mode for SIP account.
0 – none
1 – auto
2 - wan1 only
3 - wan2 only
4 - lan/vpn
5 – PVC
6 - wan3 only
7 - wan4 only
8 - wan1 first
9 - wan2 first
10 - wan3 first
11 - wan4 first
-o [port]
Set the port number for sending/receiving SIP message for building
a session. The default value is 5060.
-d [domain]
Set the domain name or IP address of the SIP Registrar server. The
maximum is 63 characters.
-y [proxy]
Set domain name or IP address of SIP proxy server. The maximum is
63 characters.
-b [enable]
Enable / disable outbound proxy by SIP account.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-s [enable]
Enable / disable to locate SIP server (rfc 3263).
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
0 – disable
1 - enable
-N [name]
Set SIP account display name.
Name - max. 23 characters.
-n [number]
Set SIP account number.
Number - max. 63 characters.
-a [id]
Set SIP authentication ID.
Id - max. 63 characters.
-A [enable]
Enable /disable to use SIP authentication ID.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-p [passwd]
Set SIP account password (max. 63 characters).
-e [sec]
Set expiry time (default 3600) for SIP account.
-w [enable]
Enable to make phone call without registering.
-m [mode]
Set NAT traversal mode.
0 – disable
1 – stun
2 – manual
3 - nortel
-F [mode]
Set call forwarding mode.
0 – disable
1 – always
2 – busy
3 - no answer
4 - busy or no answer
-u [url]
Set SIP URL for call forwarding (max. 63 characters).
-t [sec]
Set call forwarding timer. For example,
voip sip acc 1 –t 30
-g [port]
Set the ring port for incoming call. For example,
Port - r1 means FXS1; r2 means FXS2.
-z [pattern]
Set account ring pattern (1 ~ 6).
-i [enable]
Remove all bindings while they are un-registered. 0 means Disable;
and 1 means Enable.
-B <enable>
Enable / disable the function of Broadsoft Call Control.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-S [idx]
Enable and use alias IP to register.
idx - 1 to 31. If 0 is used, such function will be disabled.
-k [num1 num2...]
Set backup wan list (first wan, second wan...).
range: 1 to 4.
-v
View current status for account settings.
Voip sip calllog
Display current status for SIP call log.
voip sip ep
n
The index number of the VoIP settings.
n – 1, 2.
-o [acc]
Available dial out account (1 ~ 12).
-L [url]
Set SIP URL (max. 63 characters) for hot line.
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
895
-l [enable]
Enable / disable the function of hot line.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-W [enable]
Enable / disable the function of warm line.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-w [enable]
Enable / disable the function of call waiting enable.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-E [enable]
Enable / disable the function of call waiting enable but only remind
one time.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-x <enable>
Enable / disable the function of call transfer.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-d [enable]
Enable / disable the function of DND (Do Not Disturb)
0 – disable
1 - enable
-s [id]
Indicate DND schedule.
Id - s1, s2, s3, s4 (max. 4 schedule)
-h [enable]
Enable / disable the function of calling line identification
restriction (CLIR).
0 – disable
1 - enable
-u [mode]
Set CLIR mode.
0 - means “draft-ietf-sip-privacy”
1 – means “rfc 3323/3325)”
-z [enable]
Enable / disable playing dial tone when registered on sip server.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-n [enable]
Enable / disable session timer.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-m [sec]
Set the value for session timer (unit: sec).
-R [min,max]
Set the flash hook time range 100~2000 (unit: ms).
-8 [enable]
Enable or disable T.38 fax relay feature.
0 – disable
1 - enable
-v
View current settings.
voip sip misc - Allows users to set miscellaneous settings for the device.
896
-c [enable]
Enable compact header to shorten the packet (0: disable, 1:
enable).
-s [enable]
Change “#” into digit number.
0 - disable
1 - enable
-e [enable]
Enable Europe style flash hook operation mode.
0 - disable
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
1 - enable
-h [enable]
Enable/disable call hold mode based on protocol RFC2543 (0:
disable, 1:enable).
-i [enable]
Enable CODEC change without Re-INVITE.
0 - disable
1 - enable
-p [enable]
Enable PRACK message.
0 – Not support PRACK.
1 – Support PRACK.
-P [enable]
Enable IP Call.
0 – Disable IP call.
1 – Enable IP call.
-H [enable]
SIP INFO packet will be sent out when encounting hook flash event.
0 - disable
1 - enable
-t [val]
Set the mode of User-Agent (e.g., phone, software, and device) for
SIP packet.
0 - Hide SIP header "User-Agent".
1 - Show SIP header "User-Agent".
2 - Use default "User-Agent" value.
3 - Use user-defined "User-Agent" value.
-u UAValue
For every SIP user agent identifies itself with a string, this command
allows you to set the value (e.g, IP address, phone number, e-mail
address) of User-Agent. The length of the string must be less than
64 characters.
-D [disable]
Disable VoIP Service.
1 – disable VoIP service.
0 – enable VoIP service.
System will automatic reboot to activate voip service
-v
View current status for miscellaneous settings.
voip sip nat - Allows users to set NAT Traversal Setting.
-s [server]
Set the IP address for STUN server.
-t [sec]
Set ping interval for SIP account.
Sec – 6 ~ 600
-i [ip]
Indicate external IP address.
-v
View current settings for SIP NAT.
Example
> voip sip misc -t 1
includes User-Agent header
> voip sip misc -u 91704688carrie
user-defined User-Agent:91704688carrie
> voip sip acc 1 -P carrie_1 -r 1 -d 172.16.3.133
> voip sip acc 1 -t 30
> voip sip misc -h 1
> voip sip acc 1 -v
index
: 1
profile
: carrie_1
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
897
reg mode
: 1 | reg. [No]
alias_ip_idx
: 0
backup list
:
domain
: 172.16.3.133
proxy
: | outbound [No] | DNS-SRV [No]
noreg call : No
disp. Name :
acc number : --auth. ID
: | [disable]
expiry
: 3600
NAT mode
: 0
ring ports : 0
ring pat.
: 1
call fwd mode
: 0
call fwd url
:
call fwd timer : 30
Broadsoft
: disable
Italian ITSP modification: disable
Telnet Command: voip secure
This command allows users to enable or disable secure phone feature, and SAS voice prompt.
Syntax
voip secure general [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
voip secure general -e
Enable / disable secure phone feature.
0 - disable
1 - enable
voip secure general -p
Enable /disable SAS voice prompt.
0 - disable
1 - enable
voip secure general -v
view only secure phone general settings
Example
> voip secure general -v
secure phone feature is disabled
SAS voice prompt is enabled
> voip secure general -p 0
SAS voice prompt is disabled
Telnet Command: vpn l2lset
This command allows users to set advanced parameters for LAN to LAN function.
Syntax
vpn l2lset [list index] peerid [peerid]
898
Vigor2926 Series User’s Guide
vpn l2lset [list index] localid [localid]
vpn l2lset [list index]main [auto/proposal index]
vpn l2lset [list index] aggressive [g1/g2]
vpn l2lset [list index]pfs [on/off]
vpn l2lset [list index] phase1[lifetime]
vpn l2lset [list index] phase2[lifetime]
Syntax Description
Parameter
Description
list index
It means the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
peerid
It means the peer identity for aggressive mode.
locali